JP7475729B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can execute a display effect using a display device when a gaming ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In these types of gaming machines, it is possible to create display effects using character images, patterns, etc.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there was still room for improvement in terms of technology to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the entertainment value of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least some of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference symbols and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described below in order to aid in understanding the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way.

[Application Example 1]
A gaming machine having a display control means capable of displaying a reserved icon image indicating a reserved number on a display screen,
The display control means
A specific display is made within a specific area having a contour similar to that of the hold icon image,
The specific area can cover a fluctuation icon showing a current fluctuation , and the display color of the specific display can suggest the expectation of a win, and further, the specific area can be moved without changing the size of the specific area in accordance with the specific display.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The present invention can increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. FIG. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. 1 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in gaming machines. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining judgment tables T1 to T4. An explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 during non-time-saving mode. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 during time-saving mode. This is an explanatory diagram of the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. 13 is a flowchart of a main control process. 13 is a flowchart of a main-side timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 2 pre-judgment processing. This is a flowchart of the special diagram 1 pre-judgment processing. 13 is a flowchart of a normal operation process. 13 is a flowchart of a special action process. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. 13 is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. This is a first flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern change. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status management process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status reset process. 13 is a flowchart of special electric device processing. 13 is a flowchart of a V-type opening/closing member operation process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. 13 is a flowchart of a V-area sensor detection process. This is a flowchart for processing the number of reserved balls. 13 is a flowchart showing a sub-control main process. 13 is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart of a pre-reading performance determination process. 10 is a diagram for explaining a configuration of a pre-determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a pre-reading performance pattern determination table T51. 13 is a flowchart of the variable performance start processing. An explanatory diagram of the core performance pattern determination table T52. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. This is a flowchart of processing during variable performance. 13 is a flowchart of a display control process. An explanatory diagram illustrating the movement pattern of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the second movable part 15. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the frame movable part 69. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the display presentation of a sub-display screen 64. FIG. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern horizontal arrangement performance A. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern horizontal arrangement performance B. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern horizontal arrangement performance C. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern reverse movement performance A. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern reverse movement performance B. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern reverse movement performance C. A diagram to explain decorative pattern warp performance A. A diagram to explain decorative pattern warp performance B. A diagram to explain decorative pattern warp performance C. A diagram to explain decorative pattern moving performance A. A diagram to explain decorative pattern moving performance B. A diagram to explain decorative pattern moving performance C. A diagram to explain the aspect change variation presentation A. A diagram to explain the aspect change variation presentation B. A diagram to explain the aspect change variation presentation C. A diagram to explain decorative pattern change performances A and B. A diagram to explain decorative pattern change performances C and D. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern change performance E. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining character pop-out effect 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining character pop-out effect 2. 13 is a diagram for explaining the number pattern change presentation. FIG. A diagram to explain pending icon blocking effects A and B. A diagram to explain the pending icon blocking effect C. A diagram to explain the pending icon blocking effects D and E. A diagram for explaining icon image display effect A. 13 is a diagram for explaining icon image display effect B. FIG. A diagram for explaining icon image display effect C. 13 is a diagram for explaining icon shape area effect A. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining icon shape area effect B. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining icon shape area presentation C. A diagram to explain the pending icon continuous change presentation A. A diagram to explain the pending icon continuous change presentation B. A diagram to explain the pending icon continuous change presentation C. A diagram to explain the pattern change update performance A. A diagram to explain the pattern change update performance B. A diagram to explain the pattern change update performance C. This is a diagram to explain the winning probability indication effect 1. This is a diagram to explain the winning probability indication effect 2. This is a diagram to explain the winning probability indication effect 3. A diagram to explain the pending icon change presentation A. A diagram to explain the pending icon change presentation B. A diagram to explain the pending icon change presentation C. A diagram to explain performance button operation performance A. A diagram to explain performance button operation performance B. A figure to explain the effect button operation effect C. 13 is a diagram for explaining a battle character selection presentation A. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a battle character selection presentation B. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a battle character selection presentation C. This is the first figure explaining the display of information related to the expected number of balls to be acquired. This is the second figure explaining the display of information related to the expected number of balls to be acquired. This is the third figure explaining the display of information related to the expected number of balls to be acquired. A diagram to explain expectation level increasing item presentation 1. A diagram to explain expectation level increasing item presentation 2. A diagram to explain expectation level increasing item presentation 3. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining numerical sum presentation 1. A diagram to explain numerical sum performances 2, 3, and 4. A diagram to explain numerical sum presentation 5. A diagram to explain reserved reading ahead performance 1. A diagram to explain the reserved reading ahead performance 2. A diagram to explain reserved reading ahead performance 3. An outline diagram of the decorative part located in the lower right corner of the center decorative part. 1 is a schematic diagram of the first movable part 14. 1 is a schematic diagram of a fixed winning device 19. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a goal suggestion effect 1. This is a diagram to explain the goal suggestion effects 2, 3, and 4. A diagram to explain the goal suggestion effects 5, 6, and 7.

First Embodiment
1. Structure of the gaming machine Fig. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as coinciding with the left-right direction as seen by a player facing the gaming machine 1. The front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that shoots gaming balls based on the player's shooting operation, and when a gaming ball wins a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of gaming balls to the player based on the winning. The gaming machine 1 comprises a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to a front frame (front frame portion) 53, the gaming machine frame 50 comprises an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer hull of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit located on the front side of the outer frame and inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62, a performance button 63, a sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U), a sword member 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, a select button 68, a frame movable body 69, a sound button 55, and a brightness button 56. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the play area 3 of the play board 2 can be seen through the opening.

The handle 60 is located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a launch strength according to the rotation angle. On the right and left sides of the handle 60, a movable frame movable body 69 (also called a frame movable gadget 69), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The frame movable body 69 is configured so that two members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60 can move left and right in the left and right directions. Each of the two members is formed of a flexible flat plate-like member, and is configured so that the main surface approaches and moves away from the handle 60. The frame movable body 69 is normally stationary at a retreat position (FIG. 1) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and can move (advance) from the retreat position toward the handle 60 so as to approach each other and stop at a position where it touches the handle 60. When in the advance position, the frame movable body 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60.

The ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is located below the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61. The performance button 63 is an operation unit located near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances that are performed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is located inside the performance button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate up, down, left, and right depending on the performance. The sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword and can be pushed downward by the player during performances that are performed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub-display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged in a pair via the game board 2. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub-display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, and is arranged above the front frame 53 to perform light-emitting effects during play. The right frame lamp is a diagonal light-emitting part arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is a diagonal light-emitting part arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged in the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform sound effects during play. The select button 68 is arranged near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and to the left of the effect button 63, and is an operation part consisting of an up button, a right button, a down button, and a left button, and is operated (pressed) by the player when changing the effect mode or when changing various parameters related to the effect. The volume button 55 is arranged near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 between the select button 68 and the effect button 63, and is an operation part consisting of a volume down button and a volume up button, and is operated (pressed) by the player when increasing or decreasing the volume level. The brightness button 56 is located between the select button 68 and the effect button 63, in front of the volume button 55, and is an operation unit consisting of a brightness down button and a brightness up button, and is operated (pressed) by the player to raise or lower the brightness level.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, a fixed winning device (center) 19, a normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first large winning device (first attacker) 31, a second large winning device (second attacker) 36, a large winning opening start port 17, a normal winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), an outlet 16, and displays 40.

The game area 3 is an area where game balls launched by operating the handle 60 flow down, and has multiple game nails protruding therein to guide the game balls. The rail member 4 is disposed at the left end of the game area 3, and guides the game balls launched by operating the handle 60 toward the top of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is disposed on the rear side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the rear side of the game area 3. Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and are configured to have a continuous shape and light emission.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the play area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a performance pattern display area in which performance patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also called variable display), a reserved image display area in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a reserved digestion image display area (respective reserved display area) in which a reserved digestion image 9C is displayed. The reserved images 9A and 9B are images that represent a reserved play, and are also called reserved icons 9A and 9B. The reserved digestion image 9C is an image that represents the reserved play, and is also called the reserved image 9C, the reserved icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, or the variable icon 9C. The reserved icon 9C may also be simply called a reserved icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas, "left", "center", and "right". The left symbol display area displays a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L. The center symbol display area displays a center effect symbol (center decorative symbol) 8C. The right symbol display area displays a right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers, for example, from "1" to "9". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 can display the results of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, (the result of the big win lottery) in an easy-to-understand manner to the player, by the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, center, and right symbol display areas.

For example, if a jackpot is won, the display will stop with a repeat number such as "777". If a loss occurs, the display will stop with a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result from the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, as well as the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. In addition, the variable display of the variable symbols may be a vertical scroll or may be other than that. The combination of the variable symbols to be displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. Hereinafter, the display of the variable symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be referred to as "variable symbol display", "variable decorative symbol display", or simply "variable display" or "variable display". In addition, this decorative pattern change performance counts the performance during the period from when the special pattern starts changing to when it stops (also called the special pattern change period) as one change performance (one cycle of change performance). Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts changing to when it stops, the temporary stop performance is included in the decorative pattern change performance.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a not only the performance symbol changing performance, but also a jackpot performance performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo performance for waiting for customers, and the like. In the performance symbol changing performance, in addition to the performance symbol, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed. Furthermore, the image display device 7 may display on the display screen 7a, in addition to the performance symbol, an identification display (fourth symbol, not shown) that can suggest that a special symbol is changing or the result of a lottery for a special symbol. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light-emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area includes a first reserved display area that displays reserved images 9A according to the number of reserved first special symbols, which will be described later, and a second reserved display area that displays reserved images 9B according to the number of reserved second special symbols, which will be described later. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the reserved first special symbol display 43a, which will be described later, and the number of reserved second special symbols displayed on the reserved second special symbol display 43b, which will be described later, can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The reserved consumption image display area includes a reserved consumption display area that displays reserved consumption image 9C. The reserved consumption image 9C corresponds to the currently changing performance pattern (performance pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and by displaying the reserved consumption image 9C, it can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player that the reserved first special symbol or reserved second special symbol is consumed ("reserved special symbol consumption" described later).

On the left side of the image display device 7, a first movable board 14 (also called the first movable gadget 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable gadget 14 is configured as a vertically long rod-shaped member that can move left and right in front of the image display device 7. The first movable gadget 14 is normally stationary in a retracted position (Figure 1) on the left side of the image display device 7, and can move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a to stop at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable gadget 14 is formed to be approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and in the advanced position, it covers a part of the image display device 7 from top to bottom.

A second movable board 15 (also called the second movable gadget 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable gadget 15 is configured so that a rectangular member (decorative part) marked "OARO" can move up and down. The second movable gadget 15 is normally stationary in a retracted position (Fig. 1) above the image display device 7, and can move (advance) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest at an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The second movable gadget 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

The center decorative body 10 is located near the center of the game area 3, in front of the image display device 7. A stage section 11 is formed at the bottom of the center decorative body 10, which corresponds to the bottom of the image display device 7. The stage section 11 has a shape that can guide game balls rolling on the top surface of the stage section 11 to the first starting hole 20, which will be described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the bottom left of the center decorative body 10, which corresponds to the bottom left of the image display device 7. The warp section 12 has an entrance section through which game balls flow in and an exit section through which game balls flow out, and causes the game balls that flow in from the entrance section to flow out from the exit section to the stage section 11.

The fixed winning device (center) 19 is disposed below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball hole, fixed starting hole) 20, which always allows the game ball to enter with a constant ease. The entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the drawing of a lottery for a first special symbol (jackpot lottery). In other words, the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the acquisition of a jackpot random number and the like, as well as the determination of a jackpot.

The normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22 is disposed below the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entry hole, variable starting hole) 21. The entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 triggers the drawing of a lottery for a second special symbol (a big win lottery). The electric chute 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting hole 21, and the second starting hole 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chute solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). The second starting hole 21 is capable of receiving a game ball when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient that the electric chute 22 allows a ball to enter the second starting hole 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in an open state than when it is in a closed state, and may allow a ball to enter the second starting hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in a closed state.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is located above the first big prize device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow the game ball to pass through. The passage of the game ball through the gate 28 triggers a normal pattern lottery that determines whether or not the electric chute 22 will open. In other words, the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 triggers the acquisition of a normal pattern random number (winning random number) and a win determination, etc.

Here, "special symbol lottery" refers to a process in which, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a random number for determining the special symbol is obtained, and this obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "jackpot" to determine whether or not there is a jackpot. The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b described below displays a variable special symbol, and after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed stationary (determined display), and the lottery result is notified to the player. The image display device 7 plays a pattern matching game in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols, and this pattern matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot.

"Drawing a normal pattern" refers to a process in which, when a gaming ball passes through gate 28, a random number for determining the normal pattern is acquired, and this acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "win" to determine whether or not there is a win. The result of the drawing for the normal pattern is also not immediately announced when the gaming ball passes through gate 28; rather, a fluctuating display of the normal pattern is performed on normal pattern display 42 (described below), and after a predetermined fluctuating time has elapsed, the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as a confirmed one (lit or unlit), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first large prize winning device (first attacker, first special variable prize winning device) 31 is located above and to the right of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and includes a first large prize winning hole (first special prize winning hole) 30, a V area 39, a non-V area 70, and a V opening and closing member 71. The first large prize winning hole 30 includes an opening and closing member (first special prize winning hole opening and closing member) 32 that allows or prevents the reception of game balls by a swing-type opening and closing action. The opening and closing member 32 is driven by a first large prize winning hole solenoid 33 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the first large prize winning hole 30 when the opening and closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large prize winning device 31 is equipped with a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (Figure 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, a non-V area sensor 70a (Figure 3), a first large prize winning port sensor 30a (Figure 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (Figure 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured inside the first large prize winning device 31 as areas through which a game ball that has passed through the first large prize winning port 30 can pass. The first large prize winning port sensor 30a is disposed upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize winning port 30. The V area sensor 39a is disposed in the V area 39, and detects the passage of a game ball into the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to distribute the game ball to the V area 39 in a first state (rotating state), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is located at the origin and distributes the game ball to the non-V area 70 in a second state (stopped state). In addition, the V-opening member 71 may be configured to move in a left-right direction with respect to the game board 2, as long as it has a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, without being limited to rotational movement. That is, when the V-opening member solenoid 73 is energized, it is in a retreat state (first state) in which the game ball is distributed to the V area 39, and when the V-opening member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advance state (second state) in which the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V area 39 is a trigger for transition to a high probability state described later. In other words, the V area 39 is a probability variable operation port. On the other hand, the non-V area 70 is not a probability variable operation port. The first large winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first large winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first large winning device 31. The first big prize device discharge sensor is installed at the point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 join downstream, and counts the number of game balls that pass through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second large prize winning device (second attacker, second special variable prize winning device) 36 is located above and to the right of the first large prize winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a second large prize winning opening (second special prize winning opening) 35. The second large prize winning opening 35 is equipped with an opening/closing member (second special prize winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows the reception of game balls by swinging open and closed. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second large prize winning opening solenoid 38 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the second large prize winning opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state.

The large prize opening start port 17 is located above the first large prize opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large prize opening 30 opens when the game ball passes through. However, the game machine 1 does not have to be equipped with the large prize opening start port 17.

The general winning opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the play area 3. The outlet 16 is provided at the bottom of the play area 3, and ejects game balls that do not win at any of the winning openings out of the play area 3. The indicators 40 are located near the center of the right side of the play board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is located at the bottom right of the play area 3, adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30.

The game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called a "left hit". On the other hand, a hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called a "right hit". The game machine 1 is configured so that a left hit can aim for winning at the first starting hole 20. On the other hand, a right hit can aim for passing through the gate 28 and winning at the second starting hole 21, the first large winning hole 30, and the second large winning hole 35.

Figure 2 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reserved display 43a, a second special symbol reserved display 43b, and a normal symbol reserved display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special symbol reserved display 43a displays the number of reserved activations (first special symbol reserved) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reserved display 43b displays the number of reserved activations (second special symbol reserved) of the second special symbol display 41b. The regular symbol reserve display 44 displays the number of reserved activations (regular symbol reserves) stored in the regular symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbols." The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41." The first special symbol reserve display 43a and the second special symbol reserve display 43b are collectively referred to as "special symbol reserve display 43."

The special symbol display 41 notifies the result of a lottery (special symbol winning lottery, jackpot lottery) based on winning at the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 by displaying a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then displaying it in a stopped state. The special symbol (stopped symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) that is stopped is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) of a predetermined jackpot stopping mode, a special game (jackpot game) is played in which the first jackpot opening 30 or the second jackpot opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that has been won). The opening patterns of the jackpot openings (first jackpot opening 30 and second jackpot opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery depending on the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, if a big win (one of the multiple types of big wins described below) is won, the big win symbol is displayed with the first, second, fifth, and sixth LEDs from the left lit, as in "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). If it is a loss, a losing symbol is displayed with only the rightmost LED lit, as in "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol may be adopted. Before the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the special symbol is displayed in a variable display (variable display) for a predetermined variable time. The variable display mode may be, for example, each LED is lit so that light flows repeatedly from left to right. The variable display mode is not limited to the above mode, and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (light display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be all LEDs flashing at once.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number obtained for that entry are temporarily stored in the special pattern reservation memory area 85 (Fig. 5). Specifically, if the game ball enters the first start hole 20, it is stored in the first special pattern reservation memory area 85a (Fig. 5) as the first special pattern reservation, and if the game ball enters the second start hole 21, it is stored in the second special pattern reservation memory area 85b (Fig. 5) as the second special pattern reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special pattern reservations that can be stored in each special pattern reservation memory area 85, and in this embodiment, the upper limit is four for both the first special pattern reservation memory area 85a and the second special pattern reservation memory area 85b. The special pattern reservation stored in the special pattern reservation memory area 85 is consumed when it becomes possible to variably display the special pattern based on the special pattern reservation. "Consuming the reserved special symbols" refers to determining the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the reserved special symbols, and executing the variable display of the special symbols to show the result of the determination. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, even if a winning occurs during the variable display of the special symbols or during the execution of the special game, the right to the jackpot lottery for the winning can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved special symbols is displayed on the reserved special symbol display 43. The first reserved special symbol display 43a and the second reserved special symbol display 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each reserved special symbol display 43 displays the number of reserved special symbols by lighting the LEDs for the number of reserved special symbols.

The variable display of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays (varies) the normal symbol, and then displays it still to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28. The normal symbol that is displayed still (normal symbol stop symbol, normal symbol derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display) is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of normal symbols by the normal symbol lottery. If the normal symbol stop symbol is a specific normal symbol that has been determined in advance (a normal symbol in a predetermined stop mode, i.e., a normal winning symbol), an auxiliary game is played in which the second start hole 21 is opened in an opening pattern that corresponds to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second start hole 21 will be described later.

The normal pattern display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal pattern according to the result of the normal pattern lottery depending on the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning pattern with both LEDs lit is displayed as "○○" (○: lit, ●: off). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss pattern with only the right LED lit is displayed as "●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off as a normal loss pattern may be adopted. Before the normal pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the normal pattern is displayed in a predetermined change time. The mode of the change display may be, for example, both LEDs are turned on alternately. The mode of the change display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, the mode of the change display may be all LEDs flashing at once.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal pattern random number (winning random number) acquired for that passage is temporarily stored as a normal pattern reserve in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86 (Figure 5). There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reserves that can be stored in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reserve stored in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86 is consumed when it becomes possible to variable display the normal pattern based on that normal pattern reserve. The consumption of the normal pattern reserve means determining the normal pattern random number (winning random number) corresponding to that normal pattern reserve and executing variable display of the normal pattern to show the result of the determination. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of the normal pattern based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, even if a prize is won during the variable display of the normal pattern or during the execution of the auxiliary game, the right to draw the normal pattern for that passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of normal pattern reserves is displayed on the normal pattern reserve display 44. The regular map reservation indicator 44 is, for example, composed of four LEDs, and displays the number of regular map reservations by lighting up the LEDs according to the number of regular map reservations.

2. Electrical Configuration of the Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 3 and FIG. 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), a sound control board 106 (FIG. 4), and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as big win lottery and transition of game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is a performance control board that controls performances executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. The sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Examples of sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large prize opening start port sensor 17a, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large prize port sensor 30a, the second large prize port sensor 35a, the V area sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal prize port sensors 27a and 29a. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chute solenoid 24, the first large prize port solenoid 33, the second large prize port solenoid 38, and the V opening and closing member solenoid 73. The large prize opening start opening sensor 17a is provided inside the large prize opening start opening 17 and detects a game ball that has entered the large prize opening start opening 17. The first start opening sensor 20a is provided inside the first start opening 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start opening 20. The second start opening sensor 21a is provided inside the second start opening 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start opening 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large prize opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 30. The second large prize opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 35. The V-area sensor 39a is provided in the V-area 39 inside the first large prize opening 30, and detects game balls that have passed through the V-area 39. The non-V-area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V-area 70 inside the first large prize opening 30, and detects game balls that have passed through the non-V-area 70. The regular prize opening sensor 27a is provided inside the regular prize opening 27, and detects game balls that have won in the regular prize opening 27. The regular prize opening sensor 29a detects game balls that have passed through the regular prize opening 29. The electric chute solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chute 22. The first large prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first large prize device 31. The second large prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second large prize device 36. The V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 of the first big prize device 31.

The main control board 80 is connected to the displays 40 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 controls the display of the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, the normal symbol display 42, the first special symbol reserved display 43a, the second special symbol reserved display 43b, and the normal symbol reserved display 44.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 110 is connected to the prize ball payout device 120, the loan ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135, and is connected to the launch device 112 via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The loan ball payout device 130 pays out loan balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball-lending motor 131 of the ball-lending device 130 to dispense balls based on a signal from a card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. The dispensed balls are detected by a ball-lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information about ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launching device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launching motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launching volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 by the launching volume 115. Then, the launching motor 113 is driven so that the game balls are launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launching volume 115.

The sub-control board 90 (Figure 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that only allows signals to be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (not shown, for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means for restricting the direction of communication.

The sub-control board 90 includes a performance control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The performance control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the performance of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub-CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub-ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the performance control microcomputer 91. The sub-control board 90 is connected to an image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 via an input/output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to a program for controlling the display, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data to be displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64, specifically image data such as characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, and symbols (including performance patterns) and background images. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding the image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. Based on commands received from the main control board 80, the performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64. Based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, the image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 and controls the display based on the read image data.

The speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Sound data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The audio control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and audio data may be stored in the ROM. The speaker 67 may also be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute audio control. Furthermore, audio data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The lamp control board 107 is connected to the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69, and controls them. The performance control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 through the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light pattern data (data that determines the on/off and light color, etc., also called lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and controls the light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 according to the light emission pattern data. The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69, and controls the operation of the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to control the lighting of the lamps and the operation of the movable roles 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

The relay board 108 is connected to a performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a. The volume button detection switch 55a detects that the volume button 55 (Figure 1) has been pressed. When the volume button 55 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the volume button detection switch 55a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The brightness button detection switch 56a detects that the brightness button 56 (Figure 1) has been pressed. When the brightness button 56 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the brightness button detection switch 56a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (Figure 1) has been pressed. When the performance button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the performance button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. In addition, a vibration motor is attached to the effect button detection switch 63a, which can be driven in response to a signal from the relay board 108 to vibrate the effect button 63. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. When the select button 68 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the select button detection switch 68a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. In addition, a sword component detection switch that detects when the sword component 65 has been pressed is also connected to the relay board 108.

3. Data Structure of the Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 5 and 6. Figure 5 (A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. Figure 5 (B) is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. Figure 6 (A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. Figure 6 (B) is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) stores a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol change pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, a change pattern determination table T6, an electric chute opening pattern determination table T7, a large prize opening pattern determination table T8, and a V-shaped opening member opening pattern determination table T9. These determination tables are referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special chart reserved memory area 85, and a normal chart reserved memory area 86. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a pre-determination command, a reserved ball number command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V pass command, a customer waiting standby command, and the like are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, a ceiling flag, a V flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, and the like are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a probability change counter, a time reduction counter, etc. are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area where a status in the special operation process described later is set. The special pattern reserved memory area 85 includes a first special pattern reserved memory area 85a in which the first special pattern reserved is stored, and a second special pattern reserved memory area 85b in which the second special pattern reserved is stored. The first special pattern reserved memory area 85a is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as random numbers for special patterns corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special pattern reserved, respectively. The second special symbol reserved memory area 85b is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special symbol reserved. The normal symbol reserved memory area 86 is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as normal symbol random numbers (winning random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal symbol reserved. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 is provided with a winning type set buffer in which special symbol stop symbol data is set, and a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the movable parts 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600 is set. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off or on, and is maintained as it is. That is, the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and pending information do not change state even when the power is turned OFF and ON, and the information is maintained. Meanwhile, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" as the initial state of the flags, and the other flags are set to "OFF". Also, the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the initial state of the counters, and the other counters are set to "0".

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6(A)) stores a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51, a core performance pattern determination table T52, a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. These determination tables are referenced by the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the performance control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command memory area 94a, a performance command set area 94b, a pre-judgment information memory area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command memory area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side in the sub-control main processing (described later) are stored, and pre-judgment commands, reserved ball number commands, fluctuation start commands, fluctuation stop commands, opening commands, round designation commands, ending commands, game state designation commands, V pass commands, customer waiting standby commands, etc. are stored. The performance command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, and a fluctuation performance start command, a pre-fluctuation end command, a fluctuation performance end command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, an ending performance start command, etc. are set. The pre-judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-judgment information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a first special reserved effect counter, a second special reserved effect counter, a normal reserved effect counter, a ceiling effect counter, an overnight effect counter, a probability change effect counter, a time-saving effect counter, and the like are set. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, the information other than the overnight effect counter is not cleared even when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned OFF or ON, and is maintained as it is. In other words, the above-mentioned commands, counters other than the overnight effect counter, and pre-judgment information are not changed even when the power supply is turned OFF or ON, and the information is maintained. The overnight effect counter is reset by turning the power supply of the gaming machine 1 OFF or ON, and 0 is set as the initial state. The information stored in the sub-RAM 94 is reset by the RAM clear of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling effect counter is set to 500 as the initial state of the counters, and the other counters are set to 0.

Figure 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. Figure 7 (A) shows the random numbers acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and Figure 7 (B) shows the random numbers acquired by the performance control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control unit side. The gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured to acquire a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", and a "normal pattern random number (win random number)" at the timing described below. The "jackpot random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "jackpot type random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine the type of jackpot that has been won (jackpot type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not a reach occurs in the performance pattern change performance that indicates the result when the jackpot judgment is a miss, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The reach is a state in which there is only one performance pattern remaining among multiple performance patterns (decorative patterns) that is displayed in a changing manner, and depending on which of the performance patterns that are displayed in a changing manner are displayed as stopped, a combination of performance patterns that indicates a jackpot win (for example, a "7↓7" state). Note that the performance pattern that is displayed in a stopped state in the reach state may be displayed as if it is flickering on the display screen 7a. The "change pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a change pattern including a change time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "normal pattern random number (win random number)" is used in a lottery (normal pattern lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chute 22. The normal pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The "jackpot random number", "jackpot type random number", "reach random number", and "variation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the start port (first start port 20 or second start port 21). The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 20 is stored in the first special pattern reserve memory area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second start port 21 is stored in the second special pattern reserve memory area 85b. The "normal pattern random number (winning random number)" is obtained based on the passage through the gate 28. The obtained normal pattern random number value is stored in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "look-ahead performance random number" and a "chance up random number" at the timing described below. The "look-ahead performance random number" is a random number used to determine the look-ahead performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead performance random number" is acquired based on a pre-determination command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on a variation start command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

Figure 8 is a diagram for explaining the judgment tables T1 to T4. Figure 8 (A) shows a diagram for explaining the big win judgment table T1, Figure 8 (B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach judgment table T2, Figure 8 (C) shows a diagram for explaining the normal pattern hit judgment table T3, and Figure 8 (D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal pattern change pattern judgment table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the acquired jackpot random number (any of 0 to 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "miss." In FIG. 8(A), it is shown that in the "normal probability state," if the jackpot random number is "0 to 164," it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65535)," it is determined to be a "miss." Also, in the "high probability state," if the jackpot random number is "0 to 649," it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)," it is determined to be a "miss." The contents of the "normal probability state" and "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach judgment table T2 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to judge whether the acquired reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) corresponds to "reach" or "no reach". In FIG. 8 (B), it is shown that in the "non-time-saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 13", it is judged as "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127)", it is judged as "no reach". Also, in the "time-saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is judged as "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is judged as "no reach". The contents of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach judgment table T2, it is more difficult to reach when losing in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because when in the time-saving mode, more no-reach misses with short fluctuation times are selected, speeding up the consumption of reserved special charts.

The normal symbol hit determination table T3 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the acquired normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to a "hit" or a "miss." FIG. 8(C) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2," it is determined to be a "hit," and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 2 (3 to 255)," it is determined to be a "miss." It also shows that in the "time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254," it is determined to be a "hit," and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)," it is determined to be a "miss."

The normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine how many seconds the normal symbol change time is depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). Figure 8 (D) shows that in the "non-time-saving state", the normal symbol change time is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the "time-saving state", the normal symbol change time is determined to be "1 second".

Figure 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine the "jackpot type" and the "type of special symbol" according to the acquired jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127). In Figure 9, when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is selected in the lottery, if the jackpot type random number value is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot" and the special symbol 1 stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". If the jackpot type random number value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot" and the special symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50-55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 15R) V-passing jackpot" and the special symbol stop pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56-67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V-passing jackpot" and the special symbol stop pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68-127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V-non-passing jackpot" and the special symbol stop pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 5". On the other hand, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is selected in the lottery, when the jackpot type random number value is "0-82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV-passing jackpot" and the special symbol 2 stop pattern (special symbol stop pattern) is determined to be "jackpot pattern 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and the special symbol stop pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stop pattern data" corresponding to the special symbol stop pattern, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED) command" of the special game can also be specified. The specific contents of "16RV passing jackpot", "16R (actual 15R) V passing jackpot", "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot", and "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" will be described later.

Figure 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time-saving state. Figure 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time-saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random number value (0 to 127). Figure 10 shows, for example, that in the non-time-saving state, when a ball enters the first starting hole 20, the jackpot determination table T1 determines it as a "miss," the reach determination table T2 determines it as a "reach," the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2," and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 60," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7." In FIG. 11, for example, when the second starting hole 21 is won in the time-saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines it as a "jackpot", the jackpot type determination table T5 determines it as a "jackpot expected to pass 16RV", and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 10", the fluctuation pattern is determined as "P61". As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when a reach occurs, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). A super reach is a reach performance in which the fluctuation time after the reach is longer than that of a normal reach. Here, five types of super reaches (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to SP3, it is executed in a developed manner after a normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo consecutive.

Figure 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). In Figure 12 (A), it is shown that in the "non-time-saving state", the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11", and in the "time-saving state", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12". Figure 12 (B) shows the contents of opening pattern 11 and opening pattern 12. In opening pattern 11, the electric chute 22 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In opening pattern 12, the electric chute 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per time, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 seconds. However, if a predetermined number of game balls are won (a maximum of 10 balls), the electric chute 22 will close even if there is still time left to open it.

Figure 13 is a diagram for explaining the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. The large prize opening pattern determination table T8 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 according to the special symbol stop pattern data (Figure 9). In Figure 13 (A), when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "14H", "15H", or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special symbol stop pattern data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 23". In Figure 13 (B), the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23 are shown. In the opening pattern 21, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 14th and 16th rounds. In the opening pattern 22, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 1st to 13th rounds, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in the 15th round. In opening pattern 23, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in rounds 1 to 13 and 15, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in round 14, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in round 16. However, if a predetermined number of game balls have won (prescribed number of winnings, up to 9 balls), the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 are closed even if there is still opening time remaining.

Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining the V-opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V-opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 according to the special symbol stop pattern data (Figure 9). In Figure 14 (A), when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "opening pattern 31", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 32", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 33", and when the special symbol stop pattern data is "15H" or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the 8th and 10th races, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th races, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th races, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In opening pattern 34, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 seconds.

4. Description of jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots" and "losses" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of a "jackpot", a "jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "loss", a "loss symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a jackpot is won, a "jackpot game" is executed in which the jackpot winning holes (the first jackpot winning hole 30 and the second jackpot winning hole 35) are opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol (type of jackpot) that is displayed on the screen. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (unit opening games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the last round game ends. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game. The time (interval time) for closing the big prize opening between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before that closure.

There are several types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. 9. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types: "V-passing jackpot" and "V-non-passing jackpot". A "V-passing jackpot" is a jackpot that operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37, and the V-opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. Here, a jackpot with special stop pattern data of 11H to 14H, 21H corresponds to a "V-passing jackpot (probable jackpot)". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33), or (opening pattern 23: opening pattern 32), the game ball can pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. A "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is a jackpot that activates the opening/closing members 32, 37, and 71 in an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) that makes it impossible for the game ball to pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. Here, a jackpot with special stop pattern data of 15H and 22H corresponds to a "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), it becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 serves as both the V passing scheduled opening pattern and the V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The "V passing jackpot" includes the "16RV passing jackpot", the "16R (actually 13R) V passing jackpot", and the "16R (actually 15R) V passing jackpot". The "16RV passing jackpot" has a total of 16Rs. The first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R in Rs 1 to 13 and R 15. The second large prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R in Rs 14 and 16 (Figure 13: opening pattern 21). In Rs 10 and 12, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time (Figure 14: opening pattern 31), and it is easy to pass through to the V area 39 in the first large prize opening 30.

In the "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, but in 15R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R, and in 14R and 16R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R (Figure 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of 13R in effect. In rounds 2 and 6, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened long (Figure 14: opening pattern 33), making it easy to pass through to the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

In the "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, and in 16R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, but in 14R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R (Figure 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize opening is extremely short in 14R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be won. In other words, the "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of 15R in effect. In rounds 8 and 10, the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 is opened long (Figure 14: opening pattern 32), making it easy to pass through to the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large prize opening 30.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of opening pattern 22, in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first large prize winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in 15R, the first large prize winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per round, and in 14R and 16R, the second large prize winning hole 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize winning hole is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of essentially 13R. At 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (Figure 14: opening pattern 34), making it almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

As is clear from the above explanation, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (actual 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" have the same opening pattern (opening pattern 22) between the first large prize winning opening 30 and the second large prize winning opening 35 (opening member 32 and opening member 37), and only the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). As will be described later, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (actual 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are designed to play a time-saving game (100 times in this example) after the jackpot game ends. In other words, in the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first large prize winning opening 30, and the game state after the jackpot becomes a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning port 30, and the game state after the jackpot becomes a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high-base state). For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", and it becomes difficult to determine whether the game state after the jackpot becomes a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high-base state) or a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high-base state). In addition, after the time-saving game ends, the game state becomes a low-probability low-base state (normal state) in the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state becomes a high-probability low-base state that appears to be the normal state in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot". That is, in the "16R (actually 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first large winning port 30, when the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, the game state becomes a high probability low base state but a latent state in which a high probability is hidden (latent high probability state), and this latent high probability state is difficult for the player to distinguish. That is, the low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high base state) after the jackpot play of "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot", the high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high base state) after the jackpot play of "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot", and the low-probability low base state after the time-saving end of "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and the high-probability low base state after the time-saving end of "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

As shown in FIG. 9, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the drawing for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing jackpot and 60/128 (about 47%) for the V-non-passing jackpot. In contrast, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the drawing for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing jackpot and 45/128 (about 35.2%) for the V-non-passing jackpot. In this way, the gaming machine 1 is set up so that the jackpot lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) held when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 21 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot lottery (lottery for the first special symbol) held when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 20.

5. Description of the gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The gaming control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. Here, the state in which the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs probability variation control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability change state)," and the state in which the probability variation control is not performed is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)." The gaming control microcomputer 81 realizes the high probability state by performing a jackpot determination using a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is greater in the high probability state than in the normal probability state, as the probability variation control of the special symbols. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the special pattern of the special pattern display device 41, the probability that the display result (stop pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern by the special pattern display device 41 will be a jackpot pattern is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not being executed.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the time-shortening of the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called the "time-shortening state", and the state in which the time-shortening of the special symbol is not controlled is simply called the "non-time-shortening state". In the time-shortening state, the time-shortening of the special symbol (the time from the start of the display of the special symbol to the derivation of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time-shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 judges the variation pattern using the variation pattern judgment table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time-shortening state in the time-shortening state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time-shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, a short variation time is more likely to be selected as the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol compared to when the variation time-shortening control is not executed. As a result, in the time-shortening state, the pace of consumption of the special symbol reservation is faster, and effective winning (winning that can be stored as the special symbol reservation) at the starting port is more likely to occur. This allows players to aim for a big win while playing smoothly. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal pattern of the normal pattern display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special pattern of the special pattern display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal pattern in the time-shortening state, but does not execute them in the non-time-shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the hit judgment (judgment of the normal pattern) using the normal pattern hit judgment table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) in which the number of normal pattern random number values (hit random number values) judged as a hit is higher in the time-shortening state than in the non-time-shortening state, as the probability fluctuation control for the normal pattern. Therefore, in the time-shortening state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal pattern normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the normal pattern of the normal pattern display 42, the probability that the display result (stop pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display 42 will be a winning pattern is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not executed. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than that in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is 30 seconds in the non-time-saving state, but is 1 second in the time-saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chute 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening time extension control on the electric chute 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chute 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than that in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening number increase control on the electric chute 22. In a situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and the opening number increase control for the electric chute 22, the electric chute 22 is opened more frequently and the game balls enter the second start hole 21 more frequently than when these controls are not executed. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of shot balls, becomes higher. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls in hand. The high base state is a state in which the so-called electric support control (control that supports the entry into the second start hole 21 by the electric chute 22) is executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, by executing one or more of the following controls, it is sufficient that the electric chute 22 is more likely to open than when the control is not executed: probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42, fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42, opening time extension control for the electric chute 22, and opening count increase control for the electric chute 22. Also, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time-saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the game state after a jackpot game due to winning a V-passing jackpot is a high probability state, a time-saving state, and a high base state if the game passes through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. This game state is particularly called a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability time-saving state." Specifically, the jackpots that result in a high probability high base state after a jackpot game are the "16RV-passing jackpot," the "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot," and the "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot" among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9. For the "16RV-passing jackpot" and the "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot," the high probability high base state ends when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won after the jackpot game and the jackpot game is executed. In the "16R (actually 13R) V-passing jackpot", the high probability high base state ends when the special pattern is displayed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the jackpot game, resulting in a high probability low base state (latent probability change state), or when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is played. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game due to the winning of the V non-passing jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, i.e., low probability state), time-saving state, and high base state if the V area 39 is not passed during the jackpot game (almost never). This game state is particularly called the "low probability high base state" and the "low probability time-saving state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game becomes a low probability high base state is the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing jackpot" among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9. In this jackpot, the low probability high base state ends when the special symbol is displayed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the jackpot game, or when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is played. When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time-saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly called a "low probability low base state." The low probability low base state is sometimes called a "normal game state" or a "low probability non-time-saving state (also simply called a non-time-saving state)." In addition, the state during which a special game (jackpot game) is being played is sometimes called a "special game state (jackpot game state)." Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is sometimes called a "specific game state."

In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, it is more advantageous to advance the game by hitting the ball to the right game area 3B (Fig. 1). This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chute 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start hole 21 than the first start hole 20. For this reason, in a high base state, the ball is hit to the right to enter the second start hole 21 while passing through the gate 28, which is the trigger for the normal pattern lottery. This allows more start wins (entry into the start hole) to be obtained than by hitting to the left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during a jackpot game. On the other hand, in a low base state, it is more advantageous to advance the game by hitting the ball to the left game area 3A (Fig. 1) by hitting to the left. Because electric support control is not being executed, the electric chute 22 is less likely to open than in the high base state, making it easier to win in the first starting hole 20 than in the second starting hole 21. For this reason, in the low base state, the ball is hit from the left in order to get the game ball to win in the first starting hole 20. This allows more start wins to be obtained than if the ball was hit from the right.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (Fig. 3) will be described with reference to Figs. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the win/lose determination means (Fig. 23) and the win/lose advance determination means (Figs. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flow chart of the main control process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads out a program for executing the main control process from the main ROM 83. In the main control process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs an initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is the ceiling flag, i.e., "1", i.e., "ON", and the initial value of the other flags is "0", i.e., "OFF". The initial value of the status is "1". The initial value of the counter is the ceiling counter, i.e., "500", and the other counters are "0". The initial setting is performed only once after the power supply is turned on, and is not performed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interrupts from the interrupt process (step S002) and performs the normal and special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variable pattern random number, normal symbol random number) shown in FIG. 7(A) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit consisting of a counter IC or the like.

After the normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S004). While the interrupt is allowed, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 4 msec cycle). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, the update process of various counter values by the normal and special symbol main random number update process is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 when the interrupt is prohibited, the main timer interrupt process does not start immediately, but starts after the interrupt is allowed.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flow chart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7 (A). This random number update process is the same as the normal and special pattern main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update process of various random number counter values is performed both during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and during other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process).

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs input processing (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by the various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and sets payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. The various sensors are, for example, the first start hole sensor 20a, the second start hole sensor 21a, the first large winning hole sensor 30a, the second large winning hole sensor 35a, the normal winning hole sensor 27a, and the normal winning hole sensor 29a (Figure 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the start hole sensor detection process (step S103), the normal operation process (step S104), the special operation process (step S105), the V-area sensor detection process (step S106), and the reserved ball number process (step S107) in that order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the output process (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub-control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes other processes (step S109). In the other processes, for example, the second special chart reserved display 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the reserved ball number of the special chart 2 described later, and the first special chart reserved display 43a is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the reserved ball number of the special chart 1.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the start hole sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S202). The number of reserved balls for normal symbols is the number of reserved normal symbols, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved normal symbols provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of reserved normal symbol balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved normal symbol balls (step S203), and then a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-H), and stores the acquired random number value in the first to fourth memory areas of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86 of the main RAM 84 according to the current number of reserved normal symbol balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 21. This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 21a. If a game ball has not entered the second start hole 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If a game ball has entered (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S206). The number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is the number of reserved second special charts, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved second special charts provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 (step S207), and then a special chart 2 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-RC), and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-T1) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special chart reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the second special chart reserved memory area 85b for the special chart 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. After the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special chart 2 pre-determination process (step S209). The details of the special chart 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20. This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting hole sensor 20a. If a game ball has not entered the first starting hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. If a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S211). The number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is the number of reserved first special charts, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved first special charts provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (step S212), and then a random number acquisition process related to special chart 1 is performed (step S213). Here, as in the above-mentioned special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for special chart 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reservation storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the first special chart reservation storage area 85a for the special chart 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later. After the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special chart 1 pre-determination process (step S214). The details of the special chart 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special Drawing 2 Pre-Decision Processing]
FIG. 18 is a flow chart of the special chart 2 pre-judgment process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability of winning is ON or not (step S301). If the probability of winning is OFF (step S301: NO), this process is terminated. That is, if the probability of winning is OFF, no pre-judgment is performed. On the other hand, if the probability of winning is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-judgment of a jackpot by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-judgment buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-judgment of whether or not a jackpot has been won by using the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) and the jackpot random number value to be referred to. Here, since the probability state is high (the probability flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high probability state table (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1 to determine in advance whether or not there is a jackpot. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", it is determined in advance as a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance as a "miss". In this embodiment, the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later is used to perform the pre-determination, but in other embodiments, a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used to perform the pre-determination.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "miss" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random number value is "0" to "127", the pre-determination is "16RV passing scheduled jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but in other embodiments, the pre-determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for pre-determination that is different from the jackpot type determination table T5.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value and the reach random number value as the judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, since the time-saving state (time-saving flag is ON) is in effect here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state (FIG. 11) and specifies the fluctuation pattern from the jackpot pre-determination result of step S304, the reach pre-determination result obtained from the reach random number value, and the fluctuation pattern random number value. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected depending on the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, if a reach or miss is determined in advance based on the jackpot advance determination result and the reach/no reach advance determination result, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 selects two patterns: fluctuation pattern "P64" which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2", and fluctuation pattern "P68" which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "3 to 4". In this embodiment, the advance determination is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but in other embodiments, the advance determination may be performed using a fluctuation pattern determination table for advance determination that is different from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a win, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment Processing]
FIG. 19 is a flow chart of the special chart 1 pre-judgment process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special chart 2 pre-judgment process, if the probability variable flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is terminated. That is, if the probability variable flag is ON, pre-judgment is not performed. On the other hand, if the probability variable flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-judgment by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-judgment buffer by the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). Next, since the state is normal probability (the probability flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines whether or not there is a jackpot based on the table for normal probability (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as a "miss". Note that the jackpot pre-determination may use a jackpot determination table for pre-determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1. The process of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the special chart 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described above, so the description will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the electric chute 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the normal pattern is changing (step S502). If the normal pattern is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal pattern is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), the process ends. If the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of reserved balls of normal symbols is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 with the number of reserved balls of normal symbols being "0", the number of reserved balls of normal symbols becomes "1" once in step S203 of the start hole sensor detection process (FIG. 17), and then the reserved balls are consumed in this step S504, and the reserved balls of normal symbols immediately become "0". This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the start hole sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the reserved balls of special symbols become "1" once, and then the reserved balls are consumed in steps S1404 and S1410 of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) described later, and the reserved balls of special symbols become "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a win judgment by referring to the normal symbol win judgment table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the normal symbol random number value (win random number value) stored as a judgment value in the first memory area (corresponding to the first normal symbol reserved) of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86. Then, it judges whether or not there is a win by using the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not there is a time-saving state), and the normal symbol win judgment table T3. For example, in the non-time-saving state, if the normal symbol random number value is "0" to "2", it is judged as a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is other than that, it is judged as a "lose" (see FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table T4 (FIG. 8 (D)) to select a fluctuation pattern (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first judges the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and selects the normal symbol fluctuation time as a normal symbol fluctuation pattern using the game state judgment result and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table T4. Here, in the non-time-saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is judged to be "30 seconds", and in the time-saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is judged to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8 (D)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern to start displaying the normal symbol fluctuation (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8 (D)). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the normal symbol fluctuation display continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) is a "miss" (step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned hit determination is a "win" (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chute opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is selected by referring to the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 (Figure 12 (A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and selects the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 using the game state determination result and the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. Here, when it is in a non-time-saving state, "opening pattern 11" is selected, and when it is in a time-saving state, "opening pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the operation of the electric chute in accordance with the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In the above-mentioned step S501, if the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that either the number of winning balls in the electric chute 22 has reached a specified maximum number of winning balls (for example, 6 balls) or the operation time of the electric chute 22 has elapsed and it has become time to close the electric chute 22. The operation time of the electric chute 22 is the operation time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chute 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and ends this process.

[Special Action Processing]
FIG. 21 is a flow chart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the process related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is called "1", "2", "3", and "4" of the "special operation status". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a big win determination, a change pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), a special symbol change process is executed (step S1304). In the special symbol change process, a change stop command is output after the change time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), a special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, an opening command is output when a jackpot occurs. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), a special electric device process is performed (step S1308). In the special electric device process, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The initial setting of the special operation status is "1".

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol waiting process, the game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "0" or not (step S1401). If the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, if the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b does not store a random number group acquired due to winning the second starting hole 21, the process proceeds to step S1407. If the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a variable pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variable pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of reserved information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b from the current position to the side to be read, and clears the reserved information stored in the farthest location from the side to be read in the second special chart reserved storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, when reserved information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the reserved information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and when reserved information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas, the reserved information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the reserved second special charts are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is shifted to the reserved consumption image display area side and is displayed as the reserved consumption image 9C. Also, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left out of the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b are shifted one to the left (FIG. 1). This allows the player to recognize that one second special symbol reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 2 variation start processing (step S1406). In the special symbol 2 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the variation time timer is set. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing. Also, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, the fluctuation start command (special chart 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special chart 2 fluctuation start process includes information regarding the special chart stop pattern data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403) (including information regarding the fluctuation time).

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "0" or not (step S1407). If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, if the first special chart reserved memory area 85a does not store a random number group obtained due to winning the first starting hole 20, the process proceeds to step S1413. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a from the current position to the side to be read, and clears the reserved information stored in the farthest location from the side to be read in the first special chart reserved storage area 85a (step S1411). Through the above steps, the first special chart reserved is consumed in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the reserved image 9A at the right end of the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is shifted to the reserved consumption image display area side and is displayed as a reserved consumption image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left of the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a are each shifted one position to the right (FIG. 1). This allows the player to recognize that one first special chart reserved has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 1 variation start processing (step S1412). In the special symbol 1 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the variation display of the first special symbol is started, and the variation time timer is set. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). Note that the variation start command (special symbol 1 variation start command) set in the special symbol 1 variation start processing includes information on the special symbol stop pattern data set in the big win determination processing (step S1408) and information on the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection processing (step S1409) (including information on the variation time).

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a waiting screen or not (step S1413). The waiting screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may judge, for example, by the ON/OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a waiting screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a waiting screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined waiting time to elapse, sets a customer waiting waiting command for displaying a waiting scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1414), and ends this process. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, the consumption of the second reserved special chart is executed with priority over the consumption of the first reserved special chart. Also, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of this embodiment, the lottery based on the second reserved special chart makes it easier for the player to win a jackpot (a jackpot scheduled to pass V) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first reserved special chart.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flow chart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402, S1408). The jackpot determination process for special chart 2 (step S1402) and the jackpot determination process for special chart 1 (step S1408) are similar in process flow, so they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability variable flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special chart 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special chart 1, the jackpot random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first reserved first special chart) of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred by using the jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to which it refers. Here, since the probability of a jackpot is high (the probability flag is ON), the jackpot determination is determined based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1.

In step S1501, if the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value in the same manner as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) is being used here, it determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the type of jackpot (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special chart 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special chart 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the type of jackpot based on the read out jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the type of jackpot, the special stop pattern data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the jackpot determination is "miss," the special stop pattern data (01H) corresponding to the miss pattern is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flow charts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403, S1409). The variation pattern selection process of the special chart 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 1 (step S1409) are similar in flow of processing, so they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the game state is in a time-saving state or not (step S1600). The judgment of whether the game state is in a time-saving state or not is made by whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the game state is in a time-saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If the game state is not in a time-saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the jackpot is a special symbol 2 or not (step S1603). When the jackpot is a special symbol 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always a V-passing jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. When the jackpot is a special symbol 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot or not (step S1604). The jackpot type is judged based on the special symbol stop pattern data set in the main RAM 84.

When the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referring to the table for non-time-saving state V-passing jackpots in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a fluctuation pattern random number value as a judgment value. For example, in the fluctuation pattern selection process for special chart 2, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the fluctuation pattern selection process for special chart 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special chart reserved) of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for a non-time-saving state V-passing jackpot, the portion of the non-time-saving state fluctuation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. 10 that corresponds to a V-passing jackpot (the portion with fluctuation patterns "P1" to "P3" in special chart 1, and the portion with fluctuation patterns "P21" to "P23" in special chart 2) is referenced (the address is set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in special chart 1, and one of "P21" to "P23" is selected in special chart 2.

If the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for a non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Figure 10) to select a fluctuation pattern (step S1606). Here, as the table for a non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Figure 10 that corresponds to a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (the portion "P4" to "P6"). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In step S1602, if the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the reach random number value is a reach establishment random number value or not (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reach random number value as a judgment value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 2, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved memory area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 1, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first of the first special chart reserved) of the first special chart reserved memory area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not there is a reach using the reach judgment table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number value. In this case, since the time-saving state is not in effect, the presence or absence of a reach is determined based on the table for the non-time-saving state (the portion of the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) between "0" and "13") in the reach determination table T2.

If the reach random number is a reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of a reach with miss, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for reach with miss in the non-time-saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Fig. 10) and selects the fluctuation pattern (step S1608). Here, as the table for reach with miss in the non-time-saving state, the part corresponding to reach with miss (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P7" to "P14" in the special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special chart 2) in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Fig. 10 is referred to. In the special chart 1, one of the fluctuation patterns "P7" to "P14" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 (1 to 4). In Special Chart 2, one of the patterns "P24" to "P31" is selected as the pattern from the read-out random number value for the pattern and the current number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 (1 to 4). Since the pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, a shortened pattern function is activated according to the number of reserved balls. In other words, in both Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", more patterns with shorter change times are selected than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". This makes it possible to speed up the consumption of reserved special charts when there are a large number of reserved balls.

If the reach random number is not a reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of a miss without a reach, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for a miss without a reach in the non-time-saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Fig. 10) and selects a fluctuation pattern (step S1609). Here, as the table for a miss without a reach in the non-time-saving state, the part corresponding to a miss without a reach (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P15" to "P16" in the special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special chart 2) in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Fig. 10 is referred to. In the special chart 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 (1 to 4). In the special chart 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern based on the read variation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 (1 to 4). Here too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so the shortened variation function according to the number of reserved balls is activated.

If it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is in the time-saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (FIG. 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above, except for the following points, so explanations will be omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 referenced in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619 is different from that of the already-described steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referenced, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time-saving state is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot, the part corresponding to the V-passing jackpot (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P41" to "P43" in the special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P61" to "P63" in the special chart 2) of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 is referenced. From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the special chart 1, and one of "P61" to "P63" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the special chart 2. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 that corresponds to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (the portion "P44" to "P46") is referenced. From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in a variation start command and is sent to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (Figure 16: step S108). This starts the variation display of the special symbol.

[Special pattern change processing]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, FIG. 25) described above. If the variation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process is terminated. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a variation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes associated with the variation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data, etc. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flow chart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game status management process (step S1801). The game status management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time-saving times, and the details of which will be described later. After the game status management process, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808) and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process moves to the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination for the next reserved game is executed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large prize opening and the V-shaped opening member according to the type of the jackpot that has been won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large prize opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large prize opening from the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large prize opening. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V-shaped opening and closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 from the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening and closing member 71. Along with setting the opening pattern of the big prize opening and the V-shaped opening/closing member, the round counter value is set to the number of rounds according to the type of big win that was won. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) that were executed during the big win game. In this case, the round counter is set to "16" (Figure 13 (B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability bonus flag and time-saving flag, and will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start a jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process ends.

[Game Status Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flow chart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S2001). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. If the probability variable flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variable counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variable counter counts the number of times the special pattern is changed during the high probability state. Here, the probability variable counter is set to "100" when the state transitions to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the counter value becomes "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variable counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability variable counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the high probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the high probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state. Here, the time-saving counter is set to "100" when the time-saving state is entered. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the counter value has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time-saving counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time-saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information about the set current game state (whether the ceiling flag is ON or not, the ceiling counter value, whether or not the game is in a special state, the special state counter value, whether or not the game is in a time-saving state, the time-saving counter value, etc.).

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the specified number of rotations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached, and counts the number of times the special pattern changes when the ceiling flag is ON (during the low probability state). Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified number of rotations. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the counter value becomes "0" as a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by 1 (step S2012). In other words, it judges whether the specified number of rotations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached has elapsed. If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time-saving flag is switched ON (step S2013), and the time-saving counter is set to "700" as the number of time-saving times (number of times awarded). Then, the ceiling flag is switched OFF (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game Status Reset Processing]
FIG. 29 is a flow chart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the high probability flag is ON or not (step S2101). If the high probability flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. If the high probability flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the high probability flag is switched OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time-saving flag is switched OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this process is terminated. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2106). In other words, during the execution of a jackpot game, the ceiling flag is OFF in a non-high probability state and a non-time-saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since the non-time-saving state is always in a low base state, the low base state is maintained during the execution of a jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flow chart of the special electric device processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the big win end flag is ON or not (step S2200). The "big win end flag" is a flag indicating that the opening of all the big win devices (first big win device 31 and second big win device 36) based on the opening pattern in the ongoing big win game has ended. If the big win end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. If the big win end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening and closing member operation process is performed to operate the V opening and closing member 71 (step S2201). The V-shaped opening/closing member 71 of this embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first large winning opening 30, and in the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period of time when a predetermined number of game balls enter according to the V-shaped opening/closing member opening pattern T9. Details of the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process will be described later. After the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the large winning openings (the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35) are open or not (step S2202). If they are open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the large prize opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the large prize opening (step S2203). The time to open the large prize opening includes, for example, when the opening time for the large prize opening has elapsed and it is time to start opening for the first round of play, and when the interval time (closing time) until the large prize opening is temporarily closed after opening has elapsed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the large prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

If it is time (timing) to open the big prize opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big prize opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30 or second big prize opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big prize. After the big prize opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the big prize game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the big prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round of game. However, in another embodiment, when the large prize opening is opened multiple times during one round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 may determine whether the large prize opening is the first opening during one round, and set the round designation command only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this process ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2202, if the large prize opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the closing condition of the large prize opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that either the number of winnings in the large prize opening in that round of play has reached a specified maximum number of winnings (e.g., 9 winnings per round), or the time to close the large prize opening has arrived (i.e., a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened) is satisfied. If the closing condition of the large prize opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the large prize opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the large prize opening (step S2211).

If it is not the time (timing) to open the large prize opening in step S2203 described above, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the round of play has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the large prize opening was closed. As described above, this is because the time (interval time) for the large prize opening to be closed between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before the closure. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the round of play has ended based on whether a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the large prize opening was closed. If the round of play has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round play has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the round counter by 1 (step S2221) and determines whether the round counter value is "0" or not (step S2226). If the round counter value is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of rounds has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round play. On the other hand, if the round counter value is "0", a jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) as a jackpot ending process that ends the jackpot play, and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (e.g., 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot". This allows the player to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot" even if the game ball passed through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot". Note that the ending time when the game ball did not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is also the same length. After the jackpot ending starts, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed (step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol waiting process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation process]
FIG. 31 is a flow chart of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the current round game (the relevant round) is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can judge that it is an opening round when the round counter value is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", or "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process is terminated. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the relevant round.

If it is the round in which the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the first winning flag is ON or not (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won in the first large winning port 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), the process judges whether the first ball has won (step S2503). If the first ball has not won (step S2503: NO), the process ends. This is because there has been no winning in the first large winning port 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V-shaped opening/closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2504). The reason for short-opening the V opening/closing member 71 is to execute a short opening (here, 0.1 seconds) when the first ball wins, regardless of whether the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)) is "short opening" or "long opening". In addition, in the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that wins the first large winning hole 30 passes through the non-V area 70 without passing through the V area 39. In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is open and for several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set to be the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and sets the V effective period during the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and 1 second after closing. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the period other than the V effective period (including when a jackpot game is not being executed) as the V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is judged to be invalid. Here, "judging the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a to be valid" means that the V flag is turned ON based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (see the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 33) described later). Also, "judging the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a to be invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is that, since there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a, the period until the game ball that entered the V area 39 side just before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is taken into consideration until it is detected by the V area sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball into the V area 39) is detected during the V effective period, and the V flag is not turned ON when the V passage is detected outside the V effective period (V invalid period). When the V flag is ON, the probability variable flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the big win game is set to a high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is not turned ON based on the V passage due to fraudulent acts and is not set to a high probability state. After the V opening/closing member 71 is short-circuited and the V valid period is set, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the second winning flag is ON or not (step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first large winning port 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 in the round is a long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. If the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 in the round is a long opening or not (step S2521). If it is not a long opening (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short opening, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if the opening is long (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball has not been detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 long and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2523). The reason for opening the V opening/closing member 71 long is to execute the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) when the second ball wins in the case of "long opening" in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)). Note that here, the maximum play time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning port 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), so generally, the time from the winning of the second ball to the end of the round is shorter than 31.5 seconds. As described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the opening time of the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is configured such that at least a portion of the second and subsequent game balls that enter the first large winning port 30 pass through the V area 39 because the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is relatively long. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening/closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open or not. If the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended or not (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended or not based on whether a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the big prize opening was closed.

If the round of play has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), and performs V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period several seconds (here, 1 second) after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, and ends this processing.

If the round of play has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is met (step S2560). For example, the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 may be that a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) has elapsed since the V opening/closing member 71 was opened in the case of a short opening. If the closing condition is met (step S2560: YES), the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and the process ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the V opening/closing member 71 is left open and the V valid period is continued, and the process ends.

If the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S2540 that the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether the round of play has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572) and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), it ends this process.

[Game Status Setting Process]
FIG. 32 is a flow chart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the V flag is ON or not (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time-saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the time-saving counter is set to "100" (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the current big win game becomes "non-high probability state", "time-saving state", and "high base state" (i.e., low probability high base). This low probability high base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special pattern is performed 100 times, or the next big win is won.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the high probability flag ON (step S2304), sets the high probability counter to "100" (step S2305), and turns the V flag OFF (step S2306). The game control microcomputer 81 also turns the time-saving flag ON (step S2307), and sets the time-saving counter to "100" (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the current jackpot game becomes a "high probability state", a "time-saving state", and a "high base state" (i.e., high probability, high base). This high probability, high base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special pattern is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns the ceiling flag ON, and the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified number of spins until the b time reduction (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, when the probability change flag is OFF after a jackpot game, the game will enter the b time reduction (play time) after 500 spins. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information regarding the set game state (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V-area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the V-area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball has not been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a game ball has been detected (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the V-effective period is in progress (step S2602). The V-effective period is a period set by the V-effective period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V-opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V-effective period is set during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds, during which the V-opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed for several seconds (ball brushing period). If the V valid period is not in progress (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the V valid period is in progress (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V pass command (step S2604), and ends this process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reserved ball number of special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of normal pattern stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the reserved ball number, and includes information on the reserved ball number of special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of normal pattern. After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 The operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to Figures 35 to 45. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
35 is a flow chart showing the sub-control main process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads out a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub-CPU 92 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power supply is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the performance control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupts from the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs a random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches a set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. In addition to incrementing the random number value by 1, it may also be configured to increment by 2 or more. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S4025). While the interrupt is allowed, the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub-CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at each predetermined cycle. Then, the random number update process is executed repeatedly between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). The received command analysis process will be described later in detail. After the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a variable performance process (step S4305). The variable performance process is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variable performance to execute a specific display performance on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the variable performance process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the performance button detection switch 63a. After the switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc., to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands executes a display performance according to the received command using the image display device 7. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a sound performance that outputs sound from the speaker 67 according to the received command. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp performance that controls the light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320) and ends this process. In the other processes, for example, a random number update process is performed.

[Received command analysis process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first judges whether or not a pre-judgment command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), a pre-reading performance determination process is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading performance determination process" is a process for determining whether or not to execute a pre-reading performance, and a pre-reading performance pattern if executed. Details of the pre-reading performance determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-reading performance determination process is skipped. The pre-reading performance is a performance that suggests that the reserved information newly stored in the special chart reserved memory area 85 is highly likely to contain a jackpot, and is performed during a variable performance.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a reserved display process is performed (step S4450). In the reserved display process, the values of the first special reserved performance counter, the second special reserved performance counter, and the normal reserved performance counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated based on the information on the reserved ball number of the special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of the special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of the normal pattern included in the reserved ball number command. This allows the information on the number of reserved balls to be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the reserved images 9A and 9B displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special reserved performance counter, the second special reserved performance counter, and the normal reserved performance counter. On the other hand, if the reserved ball count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the reserved ball display process described above is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If a fluctuation start command has been received (step S4455: YES), a fluctuation performance start process is performed (step S4460). The "fluctuation performance start process" is a process for selecting the fluctuation performance pattern (contents) to be executed during the special pattern fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation performance start process will be described later. On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation performance start process is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a change stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), a change performance end process is performed (step S4470). The "change performance end process" is a process for stopping the change performance executed during the special pattern change. In the change performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a counter based on the analysis result of the change stop command, and sets a change performance end command for ending the change performance. As a result, the decorative pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 or special pattern 2 that is changing is stopped and displayed. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39) described later. Note that if the change stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the change performance end process described above is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If an opening command has been received (step S4475: YES), an opening performance pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening performance pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets information about the special symbol stop pattern data set at the time of the jackpot winning determination, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the performance pattern of the opening performance that is preset in accordance with the winning type indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data is selected, and an opening performance start command for starting the selected opening performance is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a predetermined opening effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that if an opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If a round designation command has been received (step S4485: YES), a round designation pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round designation pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an open game designation pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big prize opening or during the interval between openings in a special game (big prize game). In the round designation pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, a performance pattern of the round designation that is preset in accordance with the winning type and the number of rounds indicated by the special stop pattern data is selected, and a round designation start command for starting the selected round designation is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads out a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if a round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If an ending command has been received (step S4495: YES), an ending performance pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big win game or small win game). In the ending performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special chart stop pattern data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the microcomputer 91 selects an ending performance pattern according to the type of win indicated by the special chart stop pattern data, and sets an ending performance start command to start the selected ending performance in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a specific ending performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If no ending command has been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending performance pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processing, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a game state designation command, it stores information about the game state included in the game state designation command (such as time-saving flag, time-saving counter, probability flag, probability counter, ceiling flag, and ceiling counter) in the sub-RAM 94. Specifically, based on the information included in the game state designation command, the values of the time-saving performance counter, probability-changing performance counter, and ceiling performance counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated. For example, the remaining number of fluctuations (number of games) during time-saving is set in the time-saving performance counter, the remaining number of fluctuations during probability-changing is set in the probability-changing performance counter, and the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling is reached is set in the ceiling performance counter. This allows the information on the time-saving number of times, the probability-changing number of times, and the ceiling number of times to be stored not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a V-pass command, it stores the V-passed information in the sub-RAM 94. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than those mentioned above (such as a customer waiting command or a RAM clear notification command) and then ends this processing.

[Pre-reading performance decision processing]
38 is a flowchart of the pre-reading performance determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a pre-judgment information rewrite process (step S4601). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 stores the jackpot pre-judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type pre-judgment result (jackpot type information), and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result (fluctuation pattern information) contained in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c.

Figure 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c. In addition to the jackpot judgment information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information described above, the pre-judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-reading performance pattern information. The pre-reading performance pattern information is information indicating the contents of the pre-reading performance executed during the fluctuation performance, and is selected in step S4604 described later. Figure 39 (A) shows a state in which the jackpot judgment information "miss" and the fluctuation pattern information "P72" and "P73" are stored in the first to third storage areas as pre-judgment results corresponding to the first to third reserved special charts 2, respectively, and the pre-judgment results corresponding to the fluctuations are stored in the corresponding areas. Figure 39 (B) shows a state in which the special chart 2 wins from the state of Figure 39 (A), and the pre-judgment information included in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 is stored in the fourth storage area corresponding to the fourth reserved special chart 2. Here, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored as the pre-determination information. In addition, "Pattern A" is set as the pre-reading performance pattern information in each of the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth reserved special chart 2 pieces and the area corresponding to the variation. FIG. 39(C) shows the state in which the variation has ended from the state in FIG. 39(B) and the pre-determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the pre-determination information in the fourth storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation performance end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the performance control microcomputer 91 then determines whether or not the pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c. If the pre-reading performance pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process is terminated. That is, if the pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, the pre-reading performance pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, if the pre-judgment information is not stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not the result is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the result of the preliminary determination of the variation pattern (variation pattern information). When the result of the preliminary determination included in the received preliminary determination command is "miss without reach" (step S4603: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead performance. On the other hand, when the result of the preliminary determination included in the received preliminary determination command is "jackpot" or "miss with reach" (step S4603: YES), a look-ahead performance execution determination is performed to determine whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, and a look-ahead performance pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the look-ahead performance random number, and determines whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance and the look-ahead performance pattern selection table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93 by referring to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead performance pattern selection table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-determination result is "big win" and the look-ahead performance random number value is "0-55", the look-ahead performance is "none", if the look-ahead performance random number value is "56-67", "pattern A" is selected as the look-ahead performance, and if the look-ahead performance random number value is "68-127", "pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead performance. Also, if the pre-determination result is "reach with miss" and the look-ahead performance random number value is "0-107", the look-ahead performance is "none", if the look-ahead performance random number value is "108-114", "pattern A" is selected as the look-ahead performance, and if the look-ahead performance random number value is "115-127", "pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead performance. Note that the type, content, and range of the random number value to be selected of the look-ahead performance pattern can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that a look-ahead performance is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead performance pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the look-ahead performance pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, the look-ahead performance pattern is stored not only in the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also in the storage area before the corresponding storage area and in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only is "Pattern A" set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, but "Pattern A" is also set in the first to third storage areas and the area. As a result, the look-ahead performance pattern A is also executed in the variable performance executed before the variable performance corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (the variable performance corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). Note that whether or not the look-ahead performance is executed in the variable performance corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable performance. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance will not be executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it will be executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead performance will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the processing ends.

[Variable performance start processing]
41 is a flow chart of the variable performance start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variable start command (step S5000). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets information on the special symbol stop pattern data included in the variable start command and information on the variable pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current game status, and pattern information indicating the pattern as the judgment result of the hit judgment process of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. The game status information and pattern information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a core performance pattern determination process (step S5010). The core performance pattern determination process is a process for determining the basic configuration of the variable performance (for example, the display and switching of background images on the image display device 7, the display and movement of predetermined characters, the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67, the lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable performance is completed by superimposing additional performances such as chance-up performances and pre-reading performances on this core performance. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines the core performance pattern by referring to the core performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 42 is a diagram for explaining the core performance pattern determination table T52. In Figure 42, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform SP2 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform SP3 performance, and multiple types of core performance patterns that perform no reach miss performance are set. The type of core performance pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1", a core performance pattern that performs an SP1 performance is selected. Also, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", a core performance pattern that performs a no reach miss performance is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the core performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up performance pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up performance pattern determination processing is processing for determining additional performance to be superimposed on the variable performance. The performance control microcomputer 91 obtains the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up performance pattern by referring to the obtained random number value and the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation performance pattern of special chart 1 in the non-time-saving state is shown. That is, Figure 43 shows the chance-up performance pattern that is executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". Note that the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 may or may not include a portion that determines the chance-up performance pattern that is executed when the variation pattern is "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", or "61" to "73".

In FIG. 43, the chance-up effect patterns are set as "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", "4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO". These chance-up effect patterns correspond to the various chance-up effects described below.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up presentation pattern, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a count presentation pattern determination process (step S5016). Here, the count presentation pattern determination process is a process for displaying on the display screen 7a the remaining number of fluctuations (number of games) during the special bonus period, the remaining number of fluctuations during the time-saving period, the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, the number of fluctuations since the power was turned on, the number of fluctuations since the big win was played, etc. During the special bonus period, the presentation control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of times in the special bonus period on the display screen 7a based on the value of the special bonus presentation counter. Also, during the time-saving period, the presentation control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of times in the special bonus period based on the value of the time-saving presentation counter.

The performance control microcomputer 91 can execute various performances based on the value of the ceiling performance counter and the value of the overnight performance counter. The ceiling performance counter stores the number of remaining variations until the ceiling is reached, and the overnight performance counter records the number of variations since the power is turned on. For example, the performance control microcomputer 91 can set the number of variations since the power is turned on by incrementing the overnight performance counter every time it receives a variable performance end command from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the value of the ceiling performance counter is equal to or less than TH2 (for example, TH2 = 200) when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH1 (for example, TH1 = 10). If the value of the ceiling performance counter is equal to or less than TH2, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling performance counter is greater than TH2, the chance image is not displayed. This allows a player who sees the chance image to recognize that the gaming machine 1 has inherited the number of games from the previous day and that RAM clearing has not been performed. The performance control microcomputer 91 may also display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH3 (e.g., TH3=50). The performance control microcomputer 91 may also erase the display or chance image showing the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH4 (e.g., TH4=100). The performance control microcomputer 91 may also display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH5 (e.g., TH5=200) again. The performance control microcomputer 91 may determine whether or not to display the value of the ceiling performance counter based on the value of the overnight performance counter as described above, or may also determine based on the value of the ceiling performance counter. For example, the performance control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the ceiling performance counter is TH6 (e.g., TH6 = 100), may turn off the display of the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the ceiling performance counter is TH7 (e.g., TH7 = 70), and may display the value of the ceiling performance counter again when the value of the ceiling performance counter is TH8 (e.g., TH8 = 50).

After the count effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 may refer to the random number value and the stop pattern pattern determination table T54 to determine the combination of effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed. This determines what type of effect will be performed as the variable effect.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 above is realized (step S5020). When the variable performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads the variable performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the variable performance timer (step S5030) and ends this process. The variable performance timer is set to a variable time (Figure 42) that corresponds to the variable pattern included in the variable start command. For example, when the variable pattern is "P1", the variable performance timer is set to "40 seconds".

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the process during the variable performance (FIG. 36: step S4305). The performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not the variable performance is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable performance is in progress can be judged, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer is set to zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variable performance is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command that the performance control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variable performance, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command, it switches the performance content or displays a specific image according to the information contained in the pre-variation end command.

If it is not the time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: YES), a determination is made as to whether or not there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area of the advance judgment information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-change end command not including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change performance. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead performance in which a look-ahead performance image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead performance pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade performance in which the preview image fades.

8. Operation of the image control microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided in the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIG. 45. The buffers and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flow chart of the display control process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 judges whether or not a variable performance start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If it has been received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable performance display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable performance start command, reads out a predetermined variable performance image designated in the variable performance start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the image display device 7. On the other hand, if the command has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Next, the image control microcontroller 101 determines whether or not a pre-variation end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If a pre-variation end command has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcontroller 101 starts the pre-reading performance display (step S5004). On the other hand, if a pre-variation end command has not been received (step S5003: NO), the image control microcontroller 101 skips the above-mentioned process.

Then, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variable performance end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If so (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM 103 an image that displays the variable performance as stopped, and displays the variable performance stopped on the image display device 7 (step S5006). On the other hand, if the command has not been received (step S5005: NO), the image control microcomputer 101 skips the above-mentioned process.

Then, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007). In other processing, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM 103 predetermined images instructed in various commands in addition to the above-mentioned commands, and displays them on the image display device 7. For example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives an opening performance start command, it reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined opening performance image instructed in the opening performance start command, and displays it on the image display device 7. When the image control microcomputer 101 receives a round performance start command, it reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined round performance image instructed in the round performance start command, and displays it on the image display device 7. When the image control microcomputer 101 receives an ending performance start command, it reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined ending performance image instructed in the ending performance start command, and displays it on the image display device 7, and then this processing ends.

9. Operation of movable body and display performance of sub display screen 64 Using Figures 46 to 50, the operation of the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15), the operation of the frame movable body (frame movable role 69), and the display performance of the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) will be described. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the frame movable role 69 during the game performance (display performance) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a display performance to display a specific image on the sub display screen 64 during the game performance (display performance) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on.

Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement mode of the first movable role 14. Figure 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable role 14. The first movable role 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, with its upper end located near the upper end of the image display device 7 and its lower end located near the lower end of the image display device 7. The first movable role 14 is difficult to see at its upper and lower ends, and the center area is visible in front of the image display device 7. As shown in Figure 1, the first movable role 14 can be stationary at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). In the retracted position, only a portion of the first movable role 14 may be stored and the remaining portion may be visible, or the entirety of the first movable role 14 may be stored and difficult to see. As shown in Figure 46, the first movable role 14 is configured to be movable in the left and right directions in front of the image display device 7. It is configured to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and to be movable in the left and right directions in front of the display screen 7a. It can also stop at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable part 14 can be set arbitrarily. As shown in FIG. 47, the first movable part 14 can move to the right edge of the display screen 7a and stop at that position (second mode). At least a part of the first movable part 14 may be formed with a decorative part, or may be transparent.

Figure 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable role 15. The second movable role 15 has a rectangular decorative part marked "OARO" and is configured to be able to move up and down. As shown in Figure 1, the second movable role 15 can stop at a retreat position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable role 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable role 15 can move downward from the state shown in Figure 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stop at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in Figure 48 (second mode). In this second mode, the decorative part stops in front of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable role 15 can move upward (retreat) from the advanced position of Figure 48 to the retreat position shown in Figure 1 and can stop there.

Figure 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the frame movable role 69. The frame movable role 69 is composed of a pair of flat plate-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and each is configured to be movable in the left and right directions. The two members are formed of flexible materials, and one main surface of each member is configured to approach and move away from the handle 60. As shown in Figure 1, the two members of the frame movable role 69 are normally stationary at retreat positions (home positions) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60 (first mode). As shown in Figure 49, the two members of the frame movable role 69 can move (advance) from the retreat position toward the handle 60, that is, move toward each other, and stop at a position where they touch the handle 60 (second mode). When in the advanced position, the frame movable role 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60. The movable frame part 69 can move in a direction in which the two components move away from each other so that the frame moves from the second position to the first position.

Figure 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U can each display images independently. They can also display effects linked to the images on the display screen 7a.

10. Examples of the performance, effects, modifications, and aspects of the present embodiment The following describes each of the performance examples (display performance examples, role-moving performance examples) of the present embodiment. In addition, effects, modifications, and aspects of the performance examples are also described. The performances described below are, as described above, performances realized by the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81. The following display performance examples are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, etc. In addition, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display performance examples.

The decorative pattern side-by-side effects A to C are explained below using Figures 51 to 53. These decorative pattern side-by-side effects are executed during the decorative pattern changing effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the decorative pattern side-by-side effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64.

[Decorative design side-by-side presentation A]
Fig. 51 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern side-by-side performance A. The decorative pattern side-by-side performance is a performance in which the combination of two decorative patterns arranged horizontally (horizontally) among the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a changes. Fig. 51 (A) to (F) show an example of one variation of the special pattern variation, and Fig. 51 (G) to (L) show an example of another variation.

In decorative pattern horizontal display A, first, as shown in FIG. 51(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a rapidly changing manner on the display screen 7a. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the changing icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and multiple number patterns are displayed vertically when the variable display is performed at a slow speed. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (up and down direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the variable display is performed at high speed as shown in FIG. 51(A), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical lines indicating that they are moving at high speed become visible. On the other hand, when the variable display is performed at low speed, multiple number patterns are displayed vertically in each pattern arrangement so as to be visible, as in the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 51(B), and they frame in from the top end of the display screen 7a, move downward, and frame out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 51(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R decelerate in turn from a high-speed change display to a low-speed change display, and then each is displayed as a stopped "3". At this time, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped display in the upper row of the display screen 7a, and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped display in the lower row of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative patterns are displayed as stopped display in one of three positions, the upper row, the middle row, or the lower row of the display screen 7a. In each pattern arrangement that is changing, when one of the decorative patterns "123456789" stops in the upper row, the middle row, or the lower row of the display screen 7a, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The middle decorative pattern 8C decelerates from a high-speed change display to a low-speed change display, and multiple number patterns lined up vertically become visible in each pattern row.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as stopped (the same as after the temporary stop display) in the upper row of the display screen 7a. Here, it is displayed as stopped at "3". As a result, in the upper row of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C are lined up horizontally, and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R in the lower row of the display screen 7a is not lined up horizontally with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C).

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(D), the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which was displayed in a stopped state in the upper part of the display screen 7a, moves downward again and is displayed in a stopped state again in the lower part of the display screen 7a. As a result, the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned horizontally in the lower part of the display screen 7a, and the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the upper part of the display screen 7a is not aligned horizontally with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R). In this way, when a performance in which the combination of two decorative patterns aligned horizontally among the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R changes (FIG. 51(C) is the first time, and FIG. 51(D) is the second time) is executed, it suggests that there is a high expectation of a big win.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(E), the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C that was displayed as a stop in the lower row of the display screen 7a changes again (moves downward again). After that, as shown in FIG. 51(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stop in the middle row of the display screen 7a. Here, it is displayed as a stop at "3". As a result, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the upper row of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C in the middle row of the display screen 7a, and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R in the lower row of the display screen 7a line up in a diagonal direction, resulting in a winning number of "333".

Figures 51 (G) to (L) show an example of one variation different from Figures 51 (A) to (F). In another variation, first, as shown in Figure 51 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a high-speed variation on the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in Figure 51 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R decelerate in turn from a high-speed variation display to a low-speed variation display, and then each is displayed as a "3". At this time, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a static display in the middle section of the display screen 7a, and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a static display in the upper section of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the decorative patterns are displayed as static displays in one of the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower sections of the display screen 7a. In each pattern arrangement during the variation, when one of the decorative patterns "123456789" stops in one of the upper, middle, or lower sections of the display screen 7a, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The middle decorative pattern 8C slows down and changes from a fast-changing display to a slow-changing display, and multiple number patterns lined up vertically become visible in each pattern row.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a. Here, it is stopped and displayed as a "3". As a result, in the middle of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C are lined up horizontally, and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R in the top row of the display screen 7a is not lined up horizontally with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C).

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(I), the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which was displayed in a stopped state in the middle of the display screen 7a, and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which was displayed in a stopped state in the upper part of the display screen 7a, both move downward again, and are displayed in a stopped state again in the lower part of the display screen 7a. As a result, the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned horizontally in the lower part of the display screen 7a, and the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the middle part of the display screen 7a is not aligned horizontally with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R). In this way, when a performance in which the combination of two decorative patterns aligned horizontally among the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R changes (FIG. 51(H) is the first time, and FIG. 51(I) is the second time) is executed, it suggests that there is a high expectation of a big win.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(J), the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C that was displayed as a stopped symbol on the lower row of the display screen 7a changes again (moves downward again). After that, as shown in FIG. 51(L), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped symbol on the lower row of the display screen 7a. Here, it is displayed as a stopped symbol of "3". After the decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped symbol on the lower row of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward again and is displayed as a stopped symbol on the lower row of the display screen 7a again. As a result, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R on the lower row of the display screen 7a line up in a horizontal row, resulting in a winning number of "333".

[Decorative design side-by-side presentation B]
52 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern side-by-side effect B. The decorative pattern side-by-side effect is an effect in which the combination of two decorative patterns arranged in a horizontal direction (horizontal direction) among the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a is changed.

In decorative pattern horizontal display B, first, as shown in FIG. 52(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a rapidly changing manner on the display screen 7a. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the changing icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and multiple number patterns are displayed vertically when the variable display is performed at a slow speed. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (up and down direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the variable display is performed at high speed as shown in FIG. 52(A), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical lines indicating that they are moving at high speed become visible. On the other hand, when the variable display is performed at low speed, multiple number patterns are displayed vertically in each pattern arrangement so as to be visible, as in the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 52(B), and they frame in from the top end of the display screen 7a, move downward, and frame out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R decelerate in turn from a high-speed change display to a low-speed change display, and then each is displayed as a stopped "3" (the same as after the temporary stop display). At this time, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped display in the upper row of the display screen 7a, and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped display in the lower row of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative patterns are displayed as stopped in one of the three positions of the upper row, middle row, and lower row of the display screen 7a. In each pattern arrangement during the change, when one of the decorative patterns "123456789" stops in the upper row, middle row, or lower row of the display screen 7a, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The middle decorative pattern 8C decelerates from a high-speed change display to a low-speed change display, and multiple number patterns lined up vertically become visible in each pattern row.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the upper row of the display screen 7a. Here, it is stopped and displayed as a "3." As a result, in the upper row of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C are lined up horizontally, and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R in the lower row of the display screen 7a is not lined up horizontally with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C).

Note that the central decorative pattern 8C may be displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 52(C). That is, the central decorative pattern 8C may be displayed in the upper row of the display screen 7a, as well as in the middle or lower row. The central decorative pattern 8C may be displayed as a number different from the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. As an example, when the central decorative pattern 8C displays a "3" in the middle row, it will result in a jackpot of "333" in a diagonal line. On the other hand, when the central decorative pattern 8C displays a number other than "3" in the upper, middle, or lower row (for example, FIG. 52(I)), it will stop as a miss. Then, as shown in FIG. 52(C), if the number "3" is the same as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is stopped and displayed on the same horizontal line as one of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, a re-changing effect of the other decorative pattern (here, the right decorative pattern 8R) that does not align with the horizontal line as the center decorative pattern 8C is executed as a chance effect.

In other words, as shown in Figure 52 (C), due to the stopped display of the middle decorative pattern 8C, two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (left decorative pattern 8L and middle decorative pattern 8C) are lined up horizontally with the same numbers, so as shown in Figure 52 (D), a re-change is performed on the remaining decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) that is not lined up.

After the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 52(D) changes again, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed stopped at the lower row of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 52(E). Here, it is displayed stopped at "3". The right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed stopped in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 52(E). That is, the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed stopped at the upper row or middle row of the display screen 7a in addition to the lower row. The right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed stopped at a number different from the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. As an example, when the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed stopped at "3" at the upper row, it becomes a big win of "333" on a horizontal line (FIG. 52(J)). On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed stopped at any of the upper row, middle row, or lower row with a number other than "3" (for example, FIG. 52(K)), it is stopped at a loss. Then, as shown in FIG. 52(E), if the number "3" is the same as the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed on a different line (horizontal line), one of the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C will move downward again and line up with the right decorative pattern 8R, while the other will move again, creating a chance effect.

That is, when the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the lower row as shown in Fig. 52(E), the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward again and is stopped and displayed in the lower row as shown in Fig. 52(F). As a result, two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R) are lined up horizontally with the same number, so as shown in Fig. 52(G), the remaining decorative pattern that is not lined up (left decorative pattern 8L) is changed again.

After the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 52(G) changes again, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as stopped in the lower row of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 52(H). Here, it is displayed as "3". This notifies the jackpot of "333". The left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed as stopped in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 52(H). That is, the left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed as stopped in the upper row or middle row of the display screen 7a in addition to the lower row. The left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed as stopped with a number different from the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. As an example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as "4" in the lower row, it is confirmed to stop at the edge of "433" on the horizontal line (FIG. 52(L)).

Figure 52 (I) shows the state after Figure 52 (B) where the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a "4" in the middle of the display screen 7a. In this case, two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not lined up horizontally with the same number, so the game stops as a miss.

Figure 52 (J) shows the state after Figure 52 (D) where the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as "3" on the upper row of the display screen 7a. In this case, the horizontal line shows "333" as a jackpot.

Figure 52 (K) shows the state after Figure 52 (D) where the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as "4" on the upper part of the display screen 7a. In this case, the horizontal line stops at the "334" offset, and the reel is confirmed.

Figure 52 (L) shows the state after Figure 52 (G) where the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as "3" on the lower part of the display screen 7a. In this case, the horizontal line stops at the "433" offset.

[Decorative design side-by-side presentation C]
Fig. 53 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern side-by-side performance C. The decorative pattern side-by-side performance is a performance in which the combination of two decorative patterns arranged horizontally (horizontally) among the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a changes. Fig. 53 (A) to (F) show an example of one variation of the special pattern variation, and Fig. 53 (G) to (L) show an example of another variation.

In decorative pattern horizontal display C, first, as shown in FIG. 53(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a rapidly changing manner on the display screen 7a. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the changing icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and multiple number patterns are displayed vertically when the variable display is performed at a slow speed. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (up and down direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the variable display is performed at high speed as shown in FIG. 53(A), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical lines representing the high speed movement become visible. On the other hand, when the variable display is performed at low speed, a plurality of number patterns are displayed vertically in each pattern arrangement so as to be visible, as in the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 53(B), and the pattern moves downward from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and then frames out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is displayed stopped at one of the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the display screen 7a. In each of the changing pattern arrangements, when one of the decorative patterns "123456789" stops on the top, middle, or bottom row of the display screen 7a, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears.

As shown in FIG. 53(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R decelerate in turn from a high-speed change display to a low-speed change display, and then each is displayed as a stopped "3" (the same as after the temporary stop display). At this time, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are both displayed as stopped in the upper part of the display screen 7a. As a result, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up horizontally in the upper part of the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is being displayed as a change, is not lined up horizontally with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R). The middle decorative pattern 8C decelerates from a high-speed change display to a low-speed change display, and multiple number patterns lined up vertically in each pattern row become visible.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a. Here, it is stopped and displayed as "3". Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stopped and displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 53(C). That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stopped in the middle of the display screen 7a, as well as in the upper or lower rows. Also, the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stopped and displayed as a number different from the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. As an example, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as "3" in the upper row, the horizontal line in the upper row will be a big win of "333". On the other hand, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as a number other than "3" in either the upper row, middle row, or lower row, it will be stopped and confirmed as a miss. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(C), if the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R have the same number "3" and are stopped on a different horizontal line (i.e., the middle or bottom line) than the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, then as a chance presentation, one of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R will move downward again and line up with the middle decorative pattern 8C, while the other will move again.

That is, when the "3" of the center decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the middle row as shown in FIG. 53(C), the left decorative pattern 8L (or the right decorative pattern 9R) then moves downward again and is stopped and displayed in the middle row as shown in FIG. 53(D). As a result, two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (left decorative pattern 8L and center decorative pattern 8C) are lined up horizontally with the same number, so the remaining decorative pattern that is not lined up (right decorative pattern 8R) is re-varied as shown in FIG. 53(E).

After the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 53(E) changes again, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed stopped in the middle of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 53(F). Here, it is displayed stopped at "3". This results in a big win of "333" on a horizontal line. The right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed stopped in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 53(F). That is, the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed stopped in the upper or lower row as well as the middle row of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may also be displayed stopped with a number different from the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C. For example, if the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed stopped with a number other than "3" in the upper, middle, or lower row, it will stop as a miss. On the other hand, if the number "3" is the same as the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed on a different line (horizontal line), one of the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C will move again to line up with the right decorative pattern 8R, and the other will change again, creating a chance presentation.

Figures 53 (G) to (L) show an example of one variation different from Figures 53 (A) to (F). In another variation, first, as shown in Figure 53 (A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high-speed variation manner. Then, as shown in Figure 53 (G), two decorative patterns (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C) out of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R simultaneously decelerate from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display, and then each is displayed as "3" in the upper row of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the decorative patterns are displayed as stopped at one of the three positions of the upper row, middle row, and lower row of the display screen 7a. In each pattern arrangement during the variation, when one of the decorative patterns "123456789" stops in the upper row, middle row, or lower row of the display screen 7a, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. In FIG. 53(G), in the upper row of the display screen 7a, the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" in the center decorative pattern 8C are lined up horizontally, while the changing right decorative pattern 8R is not lined up horizontally with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" in the center decorative pattern 8C).

In addition, two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C) may be displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 53(G). That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C may be displayed in the upper row of the display screen 7a, as well as in the middle or lower row. The left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C may be displayed with different numbers, and may be displayed at different vertical positions. When the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C are displayed with different numbers, they are determined to be a miss. And, as shown in FIG. 53(G), when the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C are the same number and are displayed on the same horizontal line, the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are re-varied as a chance performance, suggesting that the expectation of a win is high (for example, 30%). There are also cases where two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped combination other than the combination of the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C.

That is, as shown in FIG. 53(G), when two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C) are stopped, the two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and center decorative pattern 8C) are lined up horizontally with the same numbers, and as shown in FIG. 53(H), the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are re-varied. This suggests that there is a high probability of winning (for example, 30%).

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(I), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R) simultaneously decelerate from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and then each is displayed as a stopped "3" in the middle of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 53(I), the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up horizontally in the middle of the display screen 7a, and the changing left decorative pattern 8L is not lined up horizontally with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R).

In addition, two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R) may be displayed as stopped in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 53(I). That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed as stopped in the middle, upper, or lower rows of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed as stopped with different numbers, and may be displayed as stopped at different vertical positions. When the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped with different numbers, they are determined to be a miss. And, as shown in FIG. 53(I), when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same number and are displayed as stopped on the same horizontal line, the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are re-varied as a chance performance (second time), suggesting that the expectation of a win is high (for example, 60%). There are also cases where two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped combination other than the combination of the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

That is, as shown in FIG. 53(I), when two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed stopped, the two decorative patterns (the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R) are lined up horizontally with the same numbers, and so, as shown in FIG. 53(J), the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This second performance suggests that the probability of winning is even higher (for example, 60).

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(K), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) simultaneously decelerate from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and then each is displayed as a stopped "3" in the lower part of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 53(K), the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up horizontally in the lower part of the display screen 7a, and the changing center decorative pattern 8C is not lined up horizontally with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R).

Note that two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) may be displayed stopped in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 53 (K). That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may stop in the middle or upper row, as well as the lower row, of the display screen 7a. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed stopped with different numbers, and may be displayed stopped in different vertical positions. If the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped with different numbers, they are confirmed as a miss. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(K), when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R have the same number and are stopped and displayed on the same horizontal line, the remaining decorative pattern that has not changed again (here, the middle decorative pattern 8C) is stopped and displayed as the same number pattern (here, "3") as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R as a chance performance (third time), resulting in a big win. As two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a combination other than the combination of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may also be stopped and displayed.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 53(K), when two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed in a stopped state, the two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are lined up horizontally with the same number, and therefore, due to the third chance presentation, the number "333" is displayed in a jackpot manner, as shown in FIG. 53(L).

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the decorative patterns arranged side by side.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 51(C), a first effect is executed in which the center decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L are aligned horizontally on the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is not aligned horizontally with the center decorative pattern 8C, and as shown in Fig. 51(D), after the first effect, a second effect is executed in which the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned horizontally, and the left decorative pattern 8L is not aligned horizontally with the center decorative pattern 8C. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effect, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to Figs. 52(C), (F), 53(C), and (D).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 51(C), in the first performance, the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops at the upper part of the display screen 7a and aligns horizontally with the left decorative pattern 8L, and as shown in Fig. 51(D), in the second performance, after the temporary stop, it moves in the moving direction (downward) and temporarily stops again at the lower part of the display screen 7a and aligns horizontally with the right decorative pattern 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to Figs. 52(C), (F), 53(C), and (D).
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 52(D), in the first performance, the right decorative symbol 8R fluctuates, and as shown in Fig. 52(F), in the second performance, the right decorative symbol R is temporarily stopped. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be increased. The same applies to Figs. 53(B) and (D).
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 51 to 53, the temporarily stopped center decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R each represent the same number "3." According to this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern side-by-side presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
The configurations of the decorative pattern side-by-side effects A to C may be appropriately combined. In addition, the configurations of the decorative pattern side-by-side effects A to C are examples, and some of the effects may not be included.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern side-by-side performances A to C, the center decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number "3". However, in the decorative pattern side-by-side performances A to C, at least one of the center decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped at a different number.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern side-by-side performances A to C, the timing of movement or temporary stop of the center decorative pattern 8C may be replaced with the timing of movement or temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 8L. Also, the timing of movement or temporary stop of the center decorative pattern 8C may be replaced with the timing of movement or temporary stop of the right decorative pattern 8R. Also, the timing of movement or temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 8L may be replaced with the timing of movement or temporary stop of the right decorative pattern 8R.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern representing a number;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern in which a number is represented;
one of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative pattern in which a number is represented;
A first effect in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are aligned along a first direction, and the third decorative pattern is not aligned along the first direction with the first decorative pattern on the display means;
After the first performance, a second performance in which the first decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern are aligned along the first direction, and the second decorative pattern is not aligned along the first direction with the first decorative pattern;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1,
In the first performance, the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at a first position of the display means and aligned horizontally with the second decorative pattern,
In the second performance, after the provisional stop, the symbol moves in a variable direction, provisionally stops again at a second position of the display means, and is aligned horizontally with the third decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the first performance, the third decorative pattern is variable,
In the second performance, the third decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
The first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern each represent the same number.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern reverse movement performances A to C are explained below using Figures 54 to 56. This decorative pattern reverse movement performance is executed during the decorative pattern change performance, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative pattern reverse movement performance, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64.

[Decorative pattern reverse movement performance A]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern reverse movement performance A. The decorative pattern reverse movement performance is a performance in which two or more of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a are temporarily stopped, and one or more of the decorative patterns move in the opposite direction (upward) to the moving direction (downward) while maintaining the display, and then stop at a position different from the position where they were temporarily stopped initially. FIG. 54 (A) to (D) show an example of one variation of the special pattern variation, and FIG. 54 (E) to (H) show an example of another variation. FIG. 54 (I) to (L) show an example of yet another variation.

In decorative pattern reverse movement performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 54(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a rapidly changing manner on display screen 7a. Here, reserved icon 9A and changing icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and multiple number patterns are displayed vertically when the variable display is performed at a slow speed. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (up and down direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the variable display is performed at high speed as shown in FIG. 54(A), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical lines indicating that they are moving at high speed become visible. On the other hand, when the variable display is performed at low speed, a plurality of number patterns are displayed vertically in each pattern arrangement so as to be visible, as in the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 55(D), and they frame in from the top end of the display screen 7a, move downward, and frame out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 54(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C) simultaneously decelerate from the high-speed change display to the low-speed change display, and then are displayed as "3" (temporarily stopped) in the lower part of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative patterns are displayed as stopped in one of three positions, the upper, middle, or lower part of the display screen 7a. In each pattern arrangement during the change, when one of the decorative patterns "123456789" stops in the upper, middle, or lower part of the display screen 7a, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The right decorative pattern 8R maintains the state of high-speed change display. As a result, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the center decorative pattern 8C are lined up horizontally, and the display of the "3" during the change is displayed. The right decorative pattern 8R is not horizontally aligned with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" in the center decorative pattern 8C).

As shown in FIG. 54(B), when two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C) are displayed stopped at the same time, it is suggested that the expectation suggestion effect described below will be executed. The expectation suggestion effect is an effect in which the number and amount of movement of decorative patterns that move in the opposite direction to the movement direction after a temporary stop suggests the expectation of a jackpot in the corresponding movement.

Figure 54 (C) shows an example of the expectation suggestion performance. In the expectation suggestion performance, when one or more of the two decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped state) in the lower or middle section of the display screen 7a move in the opposite direction (upward) to the moving direction (downward) while maintaining the display, it is suggested that the expectation of a win is high. The expected degree of a win suggested varies depending on the number of decorative patterns moving upward and the amount of movement. When the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 0, the expected degree of a win is not suggested. When the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower row to the middle row), it is suggested that the expected degree of a win is 20%. When the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two steps (from the lower row to the upper row), it is suggested that the expected degree of a win is 30%. When the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower row to the middle row), it is suggested that the expected degree of a win is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upwards is two and the amount of movement is two rows (from bottom row to top row), it suggests that the expected probability of winning is 50%.

In FIG. 54(C), of the two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and center decorative symbol 8C) displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) in the lower row of the display screen 7a, two of them move in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of change (downward) while remaining displayed. The two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and center decorative symbol 8C) are then displayed as stopped in the upper row of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the expected probability of a win in this change is 50% (because there are two decorative symbols moving upward, and the amount of movement is two rows (lower row → upper row)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(D), the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed change display to a low-speed change display, and then the upper part of the display screen 7a stops at "3" (temporary stop display). As a result, the upper part of the display screen 7a stops at "333", which is a confirmed jackpot, and a jackpot is announced.

The right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed stopped in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 54(D). That is, the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed stopped in the upper row, middle row, or lower row of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed stopped with a number different from the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. As an example, if the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed stopped with a number other than "3" in the upper row, middle row, or lower row, it will be stopped as a miss. And if the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the same number "3" as the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C and is displayed at a position different in the vertical direction from the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the middle row and the lower row), a re-changing performance of one of the three decorative patterns (here, the right decorative pattern 8R) whose horizontal lines are not aligned is executed as a chance performance.

Figures 54 (E) to (H) show an example of one variation different from Figures 54 (A) to (D). In another variation, first, as shown in Figure 54 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high-speed variation manner. Then, as shown in Figure 54 (B), two decorative patterns (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) among the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R decelerate simultaneously to change from a high-speed variation display to a low-speed variation display, and then are displayed as "3" (temporarily stopped) in the lower part of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the state of high-speed variation display. The simultaneous display of two decorative patterns (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) among the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R suggests that an expectation suggestion performance will be executed. The expectation suggestion performance is a performance in which the expectation of a big win in the corresponding change is suggested by the number of decorative patterns that move in the opposite direction to the movement direction after the temporary stop and the amount of movement. In the expectation suggestion performance, when one or more of the two decorative patterns that are stopped (temporarily stopped) in the lower or middle section of the display screen 7a move in the opposite direction (upward) to the movement direction (downward) while maintaining the display, it is suggested that the expectation of a win is high. The expected degree of a win suggested varies depending on the number of decorative patterns that move upward and the amount of movement. When the number of decorative patterns that move upward is 0, the expected degree of a win is not suggested. When the number of decorative patterns that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower row to the middle row), it is suggested that the expected degree of a win is 20%. When the number of decorative patterns that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two steps (from the lower row to the upper row), it is suggested that the expected degree of a win is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upwards is 2 and the movement is one row (e.g., from bottom row to middle row), it is suggested that the expected probability of winning is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upwards is 2 and the movement is two rows (from bottom row to top row), it is suggested that the expected probability of winning is 50%.

After FIG. 54(B), in FIG. 54(E), one of the two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and middle decorative symbol 8C) displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) in the lower row of the display screen 7a (middle decorative symbol 8C) moves in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of movement (downward) while remaining displayed. Then, one decorative symbol (middle decorative symbol 8C) is displayed as stopped in the middle row of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the expected probability of a win in that movement is 20% (because there is one decorative symbol moving upward, and the amount of movement is one row (lower row → middle row)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(F), the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and then is displayed as a stopped "3" (temporarily stopped) in the middle of the display screen 7a. As a result, the two "3" decorative patterns (middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R) are lined up horizontally in the middle of the display screen 7a.

The right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed in a different manner from that shown in FIG. 54(F). That is, the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed in the upper or lower row, as well as in the middle row of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed with a number different from the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. As an example, if the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with a number other than "3" in the upper, middle, or lower row, it will be stopped as a miss. And if the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the same number "3" as the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C and is displayed in the same vertical position as either the left decorative pattern 8L or the middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the middle or lower row), a re-changing performance of one of the three decorative patterns whose horizontal lines are not aligned (here, the left decorative pattern 8L) is executed as a chance performance.

In other words, as shown in Figure 54 (F), when the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed stopped in the middle row, two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R) are lined up horizontally with the same number, so as shown in Figure 54 (G), a re-change is performed on the remaining decorative pattern that is not lined up (left decorative pattern 8L).

After the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 54(G) changes again, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped in the middle of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 54(H). Here, it is displayed stopped at "4". This notifies the player that "433" is a miss. The left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed stopped in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 54(H). That is, the left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed stopped in the upper or lower row of the display screen 7a in addition to the middle row. The left decorative pattern 8L may also be displayed stopped with the same number as the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. As an example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped at "3" in the middle row, it stops at the horizontal line to confirm the big win of "333".

Figures 54 (I) to (L) show an example of one variation different from Figures 54 (A) to (D). In another variation, first, as shown in Figure 54 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high-speed variation manner. Then, as shown in Figure 54 (B), two decorative patterns (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) among the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R decelerate simultaneously to change from a high-speed variation display to a low-speed variation display, and then are displayed as "3" (temporarily stopped) in the lower part of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the state of high-speed variation display. The simultaneous display of two decorative patterns (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) among the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R suggests that an expectation suggestion performance will be executed. The expectation suggestion performance is a performance in which the expectation of a big win in the corresponding change is suggested by the number of decorative patterns that move in the opposite direction to the movement direction after the temporary stop and the amount of movement. In the expectation suggestion performance, when one or more of the two decorative patterns that are stopped (temporarily stopped) in the lower or middle section of the display screen 7a move in the opposite direction (upward) to the movement direction (downward) while maintaining the display, it is suggested that the expectation of a win is high. The expected degree of a win suggested varies depending on the number of decorative patterns that move upward and the amount of movement. When the number of decorative patterns that move upward is 0, the expected degree of a win is not suggested. When the number of decorative patterns that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower row to the middle row), it is suggested that the expected degree of a win is 20%. When the number of decorative patterns that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two steps (from the lower row to the upper row), it is suggested that the expected degree of a win is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upwards is 2 and the movement is one row (e.g., from bottom row to middle row), it is suggested that the expected probability of winning is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upwards is 2 and the movement is two rows (from bottom row to top row), it is suggested that the expected probability of winning is 50%.

After FIG. 54(B), in FIG. 54(I), one of the two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and center decorative symbol 8C) displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) in the lower row of the display screen 7a (left decorative symbol 8L) moves in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of change (downward) while remaining displayed. Then, one decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) is displayed as stopped in the upper row of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the expected probability of a win in that change is 30% (because the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1, and the amount of movement is two rows (lower row → upper row)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(J), the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and then the "3" is displayed as a stopped (temporary stopped) display in the upper row of the display screen 7a. As a result, the two "3" decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) are lined up horizontally in the upper row of the display screen 7a.

The right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed in a different manner from that shown in FIG. 54(J). That is, the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed in the upper row, middle row, or lower row of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed with a number different from the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C. As an example, if the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with a number other than "3" in the upper, middle, or lower row, it will be stopped as a miss. If the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the same number "3" as the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C and is displayed in the same vertical position as either the left decorative pattern 8L or the center decorative pattern 8C (here, the upper row or lower row), a re-variation performance of one of the three decorative patterns whose horizontal lines are not aligned (here, the center decorative pattern 8C) is executed as a chance performance.

In other words, as shown in Figure 54 (J), when the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the upper row, two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) are lined up horizontally with the same number, so as shown in Figure 54 (K), a re-change is performed on the remaining decorative pattern that is not lined up (middle decorative pattern 8C).

After the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 54(K) changes again, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as stopped in the upper row of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 54(L). Here, it is displayed as "4". This notifies the miss of "343". Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C may be displayed as stopped in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 54(L). That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C may be displayed as stopped in the middle row or lower row of the display screen 7a in addition to the upper row. Also, the middle decorative pattern 8C may be displayed as stopped with the same number as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. As an example, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as "3" in the upper row, it stops as a fixed jackpot of "333" on a horizontal line.

[Decorative pattern reverse movement performance B]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern reverse movement performance B. The decorative pattern reverse movement performance is a performance in which two or more of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a are temporarily stopped, and one or more of the decorative patterns move in the opposite direction (upward) to the moving direction (downward) while maintaining the display, and then stop at a position different from the position where they were temporarily stopped initially. FIG. 55 (A) to (G) show an example of one variation of the special pattern variation, and FIG. 55 (H) to (J) show an example of another variation. FIG. 55 (K) to (L) show an example of yet another variation.

In decorative pattern reverse movement performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 55(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a rapidly changing manner on display screen 7a. Here, reserved icon 9A and changing icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and multiple number patterns are displayed vertically when the variable display is performed at a slow speed. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (up and down direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the variable display is performed at high speed as shown in FIG. 55(A), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical lines indicating that they are moving at high speed become visible. On the other hand, when the variable display is performed at low speed, multiple number patterns are displayed vertically in each pattern arrangement so as to be visible, as in the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 55(D), and they frame in from the top end of the display screen 7a, move downward, and frame out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 55(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) simultaneously decelerate from a high-speed changing display to a low-speed changing display, and then are displayed as "3" (temporarily stopped) in the upper row of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative patterns are displayed as stopped in one of three positions: the upper, middle, or lower row of the display screen 7a. In each pattern arrangement that is changing, when one of the decorative patterns "123456789" stops in the upper, middle, or lower row of the display screen 7a, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains its high-speed changing display state. As a result, in the upper row of the display screen 7a, the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" in the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up horizontally, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is being displayed in a changing state, is not lined up horizontally with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" in the right decorative pattern 8R).

As shown in FIG. 55(B), when two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed stopped at the same time, it is suggested that the expectation suggestion effect described below will be executed. The expectation suggestion effect is an effect in which the number and amount of movement of decorative patterns that move in the opposite direction to the movement direction after a temporary stop suggests the expectation of a jackpot in the corresponding movement.

Figure 55 (C) (D) shows an example of the expectation suggestion performance. In the expectation suggestion performance, when one or more of the two decorative patterns displayed (temporarily displayed) in the lower or middle row of the display screen 7a move in the opposite direction (upward) to the moving direction (downward) while maintaining the display, it is suggested that the expectation of a win is high. The expected degree of a win suggested varies depending on the number of decorative patterns moving upward and the amount of movement. When the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 0, the expected degree of a win is not suggested. When the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower row to the middle row), it is suggested that the expected degree of a win is 20%. When the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two steps (from the lower row to the upper row), it is suggested that the expected degree of a win is 30%. When the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the lower row to the middle row), it is suggested that the expected degree of a win is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upwards is two and the amount of movement is two rows (from bottom row to top row), it suggests that the expected probability of winning is 50%.

When the expectation suggestion effect starts, as shown in FIG. 55(C), first, the two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) in the upper row of the display screen 7a move in the moving direction (downward) while maintaining their display, and stop in the lower row. Here, when the expectation suggestion effect starts, the two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) move downward in two steps, but there are also cases where the embodiment is different. That is, there may be one decorative symbol moving downward, or there may be one step downward. When there is one decorative symbol moving downward in one step, it is suggested that the number of decorative symbols moving upward thereafter is 0 or 1, not 2, and when the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1, it is suggested that the amount of movement will be one step. In other words, it is suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is either not suggested or 20%. In Figure 55(C), the two decorative symbols have moved two levels downward, suggesting that the likelihood of a jackpot is either not present or is 20%, 30%, 40%, or 50%.

In FIG. 55(D), one of the two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) displayed stationary (temporarily stopped) in the lower section of the display screen 7a (right decorative symbol 8R) moves in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of fluctuation (downward) while remaining displayed. Then, one decorative symbol (right decorative symbol 8R) is displayed stationary in the middle section of the display screen 7a. The timing at which one decorative symbol (right decorative symbol 8R) moves is the same as the timing at which the "3" enters the frame in the middle decorative symbol 8C during slow fluctuation, and the timing at which it arrives at the middle section is also the same. This effect suggests that the expected probability of a win in that fluctuation is 20% (because there is one decorative symbol moving upward, and the amount of movement is one section (lower section → middle section)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(E), the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is fluctuating at a slow speed, and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which has moved upward, are stopped and displayed at the same timing in the middle of the display screen 7a. As a result, the two "3" decorative patterns (middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R) are lined up horizontally in the middle of the display screen 7a. In this way, when three decorative patterns are the same number "3", two of the decorative patterns are lined up horizontally, and one decorative pattern is not lined up horizontally with the other two decorative patterns, a re-variation effect of one of the three decorative patterns (here, left decorative pattern 8L) whose horizontal lines are not aligned is executed as a chance effect.

That is, as shown in FIG. 55(E), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R) are lined up horizontally with the same numbers, so as shown in FIG. 55(F), a re-change is performed on the remaining decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L) that is not lined up.

After the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 55(F) changes again, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped in the middle of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 55(G). Here, it is displayed stopped at "4". This notifies the player that "433" is a miss. The left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed stopped in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 55(G). That is, the left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed stopped in the upper or lower row of the display screen 7a in addition to the middle row. The left decorative pattern 8L may also be displayed stopped with the same number as the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. As an example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped at "3" in the middle row, it stops at the horizontal line to confirm the big win of "333".

Figures 55 (H) to (J) show an example of one variation different from Figures 55 (A) to (G). In this other variation, first, as shown in Figure 55 (A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high-speed variation manner. Then, as shown in Figure 55 (B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) simultaneously decelerate from a high-speed variation display to a low-speed variation display, and then each is displayed as a stopped "3" (temporary stop display) in the upper row of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains its high-speed variation display state. As a result, in the upper part of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged horizontally, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is being displayed in a variable manner, is not horizontally arranged with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R). When two decorative patterns (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) out of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state at the same time, it is suggested that an expectation suggestion effect will be executed. The expectation suggestion effect is an effect in which the number and amount of decorative patterns that move in the opposite direction to the variable direction after a temporary stop suggest the expectation of a big win in the variable direction. In the expectation suggestion effect, when one or more decorative patterns out of two decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state (temporarily displayed) in the lower or middle part of the display screen 7a move in the opposite direction (upward) to the variable direction (downward) while maintaining their display, it is suggested that the expectation of a win is high. The expected probability of winning varies depending on the number of decorative symbols moving upward and the amount of movement. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expected probability of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one row (e.g., from the bottom row to the middle row), the expected probability of winning is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two rows (from the bottom row to the top row), the expected probability of winning is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one row (e.g., from the bottom row to the middle row), the expected probability of winning is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 2 and the amount of movement is two rows (from the bottom row to the top row), the expected probability of winning is 50%.

When the expectation suggestion effect starts, as shown in FIG. 55(H), first, one of the two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped state) in the upper row of the display screen 7a (right decorative pattern 8R) moves in the moving direction (downward) while maintaining its display, and stops in the lower row. Here, when the expectation suggestion effect starts, one decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) moves downward two steps, but there are also cases where it is different. That is, there are cases where there are two decorative patterns moving downward, and cases where it moves downward only one step. When there is one decorative pattern moving downward and one step, it is suggested that the number of decorative patterns moving upward afterwards is 0 or 1, not 2, and when the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 1, it is suggested that the amount of movement will be one step. In other words, it is suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is either not suggested or 20%. In Figure 55 (H), one decorative symbol has moved two levels downward, suggesting that the likelihood of a jackpot is either not present or is 20% or 30%.

In Figure 55 (I), one decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) that is displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) in the lower row of the display screen 7a moves in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of fluctuation (downward) while remaining displayed. Then, one decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) is displayed as stopped in the upper row of the display screen 7a. This effect suggests that the expected probability of a win in that fluctuation is 30% (because the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 1, and the amount of movement is two rows (lower row → upper row)).

After that, as shown in Figure 55 (J), the "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is fluctuating at a slow speed, and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which has moved upward, are stopped and displayed at the same time on the upper row of the display screen 7a. As a result, the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are lined up horizontally in the "343" mismatch pattern on the upper row of the display screen 7a and are fixed and stopped.

Figures 55 (K) to (L) show an example of one variation different from Figures 55 (A) to (G). In this other variation, first, as shown in Figure 55 (A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high-speed variation manner. Then, as shown in Figure 55 (B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) simultaneously decelerate from a high-speed variation display to a low-speed variation display, and then each is displayed as a stopped "3" (temporary stop display) in the upper row of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains its high-speed variation display state. As a result, in the upper part of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged horizontally, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is being displayed in a variable manner, is not horizontally arranged with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R). When two decorative patterns (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) out of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state at the same time, it is suggested that an expectation suggestion effect will be executed. The expectation suggestion effect is an effect in which the number and amount of decorative patterns that move in the opposite direction to the variable direction after a temporary stop suggest the expectation of a big win in the variable direction. In the expectation suggestion effect, when one or more decorative patterns out of two decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state (temporarily displayed) in the lower or middle part of the display screen 7a move in the opposite direction (upward) to the variable direction (downward) while maintaining their display, it is suggested that the expectation of a win is high. The expected probability of winning varies depending on the number of decorative symbols moving upward and the amount of movement. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expected probability of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one row (e.g., from the bottom row to the middle row), the expected probability of winning is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two rows (from the bottom row to the top row), the expected probability of winning is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one row (e.g., from the bottom row to the middle row), the expected probability of winning is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 2 and the amount of movement is two rows (from the bottom row to the top row), the expected probability of winning is 50%.

When the expectation suggestion effect starts, as shown in FIG. 55(C), first, the two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) in the upper row of the display screen 7a move in the moving direction (downward) while maintaining their display, and stop in the lower row. Here, when the expectation suggestion effect starts, the two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) move downward in two steps, but there are also cases where the embodiment is different. That is, there may be one decorative symbol moving downward, or there may be one step downward. When there is one decorative symbol moving downward in one step, it is suggested that the number of decorative symbols moving upward thereafter is 0 or 1, not 2, and when the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 1, it is suggested that the amount of movement will be one step. In other words, it is suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is either not suggested or 20%. In Figure 55(C), the two decorative symbols have moved two levels downward, suggesting that the likelihood of a jackpot is either not present or is 20%, 30%, 40%, or 50%.

After FIG. 55(C), in FIG. 55(K), of the two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) in the lower row of the display screen 7a, two of them move in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of change (downward) while maintaining their display. Then, the two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) are displayed as stopped in the upper row of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the expected probability of a win in that change is 50% (because there are two decorative symbols moving upward, and the amount of movement is two rows (lower row → upper row)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(L), the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is fluctuating at a slow speed, and the "3"s of the two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) that have moved upward are displayed stopped at the same time on the upper row of the display screen 7a. As a result, the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are lined up horizontally on the upper row of the display screen 7a in a "333" winning pattern and are fixed and stopped.

[Decorative pattern reverse movement effect C]
Fig. 56 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern reverse movement performance C. The decorative pattern reverse movement performance is a performance in which two or more of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a are temporarily stopped, and one or more of the decorative patterns move in the opposite direction (upward) to the moving direction (downward) while maintaining the display, and then stop at a position different from the position where they were temporarily stopped initially. Figs. 56(A) to (F) show an example of one variation of the special pattern variation, and Figs. 56(G) to (L) show an example of another variation.

In decorative pattern reverse movement performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 56(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a rapidly changing manner. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the changing icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and multiple number patterns are displayed vertically when the variable display is performed at a slow speed. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the variable direction (up and down direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the variable display is performed at high speed as shown in FIG. 56(A), each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the vertical lines indicating that they are moving at high speed become visible. On the other hand, when the variable display is performed at low speed, multiple number patterns are displayed vertically in each pattern arrangement so as to be visible, as in the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 56(D), and they frame in from the top end of the display screen 7a, move downward, and frame out from the bottom end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 56(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) simultaneously decelerate from the high-speed change display to the low-speed change display, and then the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a "3" (temporarily stopped) in the upper row of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a "3" (temporarily stopped) in the lower row of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative patterns are displayed as stopped in one of the three positions of the upper row, middle row, and lower row of the display screen 7a. In each pattern arrangement during the change, when one of the decorative patterns "123456789" stops in the upper row, middle row, or lower row of the display screen 7a, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the state of high-speed change display. As a result, the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" in the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up diagonally, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is being displayed in a variable manner, is not lined up diagonally with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" in the right decorative pattern 8R).

As shown in FIG. 56(B), when two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed stopped at the same time, it is suggested that the expectation suggestion effect described below will be executed. The expectation suggestion effect is an effect in which the number and amount of movement of decorative patterns that move in the opposite direction to the movement direction after a temporary stop suggests the expectation of a jackpot in the corresponding movement.

Figure 56 (C) shows an example of an expectation suggestion effect. In the expectation suggestion effect, when one or more decorative patterns move in the opposite direction (upward) to the moving direction (downward) while maintaining their display, it is suggested that the expectation of a win is high. The number of decorative patterns moving upward and the amount of movement vary the expected degree of a win suggested. When the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 0, no expectation of a win is suggested. When the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (e.g., from the lower step to the middle step), it is suggested that the expectation of a win is 20%. When the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two steps (from the lower step to the upper step), it is suggested that the expectation of a win is 30%. When the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (e.g., from the lower step to the middle step), it is suggested that the expectation of a win is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upwards is two and the amount of movement is two rows (from bottom row to top row), it suggests that the expected probability of winning is 50%.

When the expectation indication effect starts, as shown in FIG. 56(C), one decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) in the lower row of the display screen 7a moves in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of fluctuation (downward) while remaining displayed. Then, one decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) is displayed as stopped in the upper row of the display screen 7a. This effect suggests that the expectation of a win in that fluctuation is 30% (because there is one decorative pattern moving upward, and the amount of movement is two rows (lower row → upper row)).

After that, as shown in Figures 56(D) and (E), the "3" comes into frame as the middle decorative pattern 8C during the slow fluctuation, and the two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) that were displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) in the upper row move downward while lined up horizontally. Then, as shown in Figure 56(F), the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped in the middle row of the display screen 7a. This causes the horizontal line to stop as a confirmed jackpot of "333."

Figures 56 (G) to (L) show an example of one variation different from Figures 56 (A) to (F). In another variation, first, as shown in Figure 56 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high-speed variation manner. Then, as shown in Figure 56 (G), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C) simultaneously decelerate from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display, and then the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a "4" (temporary stop display) in the middle of the display screen 7a, and the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a "6" (temporary stop display) in the middle of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R maintains the state of high-speed variation display. As a result, in the middle row of the display screen 7a, the "4" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the "6" in the center decorative pattern 8C are lined up horizontally, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which is being displayed in a changing state, is not lined up horizontally with the other two decorative patterns (the "4" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the "6" in the center decorative pattern 8C).

As shown in FIG. 56(G), the execution of an expectation suggestion effect is indicated by two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C) being stopped at the same time. The expectation suggestion effect is an effect in which the number and amount of movement of decorative patterns that move in the opposite direction to the direction of movement after a temporary stop suggests the likelihood of a jackpot in the corresponding movement.

Figure 56 (H) shows an example of an expectation suggestion effect. In the expectation suggestion effect, when one or more decorative patterns move in the opposite direction (upward) to the moving direction (downward) while maintaining their display, it is suggested that the expectation of a win is high. The number of decorative patterns moving upward and the amount of movement vary the expected degree of a win suggested. When the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 0, no expectation of a win is suggested. When the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (e.g., from the lower step to the middle step), it is suggested that the expectation of a win is 20%. When the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two steps (from the lower step to the upper step), it is suggested that the expectation of a win is 30%. When the number of decorative patterns moving upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (e.g., from the lower step to the middle step), it is suggested that the expectation of a win is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols moving upwards is two and the amount of movement is two rows (from bottom row to top row), it suggests that the expected probability of winning is 50%.

When the expectation indication effect starts, as shown in FIG. 56 (H), the two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and middle decorative symbol 8C) that are displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) in the middle row of the display screen 7a move in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of movement (downward) while remaining displayed. Then, the two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and middle decorative symbol 8C) are displayed as stopped in the upper row of the display screen 7a. This effect suggests that the expectation of a win in that movement is 40% (because there are two decorative symbols moving upward, and the amount of movement is one row (middle row → upper row)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(I), the "4" that has entered the frame in the slowly fluctuating right decorative pattern 8R, and the two decorative patterns (the "4" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the "6" in the center decorative pattern 8C) that were displayed stationary (temporarily stopped) in the upper row move downward while lined up horizontally. Then, the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stationary in the middle row of the display screen 7a as "464." As a result, only the center decorative pattern 8C has a different number from the other two decorative patterns, so the center decorative pattern 8C is fluctuated again.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(J), when the middle decorative pattern 8C changes again, a second expectation suggestion effect is started. Specifically, the "4"s of the two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) that are displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) in the lower section of the display screen 7a move in the opposite direction (upward) to the change direction (downward) while remaining displayed. Then, the two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed as stopped in the upper section of the display screen 7a. This effect suggests that the expectation of a win in that change is 50% (because there are two decorative patterns that move upward, and the amount of movement is two stages (middle row → upper row)).

After that, as shown in Figure 56 (K), the "4" that has entered the frame in the slowly fluctuating middle decorative pattern 8C, and the two decorative patterns (the "4" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the "4" in the middle decorative pattern 8C) that were displayed stationary (temporarily displayed) in the upper row move downward while lined up horizontally. After that, as shown in Figure 56 (L), the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stationary in the lower row of the display screen 7a as "444". This confirms and indicates that a jackpot has been won.

[Example of effect]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern reverse movement presentation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 54(B), a first effect is performed in which two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and center decorative symbol 8C) of a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped on the lower part of the display screen 7a, and as shown in Fig. 54(C), after the first effect, one or more decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and center decorative symbol 8C) of the two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and center decorative symbol 8C) temporarily stopped on the lower part of the display screen 7a move in the opposite direction (upward) to the moving direction (downward) while maintaining their display, and then stop at a position (upper part of the display screen 7a) different from the lower part of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and can increase the interest. The same is true for Figures 54 (E), (I), 55 (D), (I), (K), 56 (C), (H), and (J).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(B), in the first performance, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is not temporarily stopped at the lower part of the display screen 7a, moves in the moving direction (downward), and as shown in FIG. 54(B)(C), in the second performance, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is moving in the moving direction in the first performance, continues to move in the moving direction (downward) and then temporarily stops. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be improved. The same is true for FIG. 54(B)(E), (B)(I), FIG. 55(B)-(D), (B)(H)(I), (B)(C)(K), FIG. 56(B)(C), (G)(H), (I)(J).
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 55(B), in the first performance, the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) temporarily stopped on the upper part of the display screen 7a are in a reach state. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel performance that has never been seen before, and the interest can be increased. The same is true for Fig. 56(I)(J).

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern reverse movement performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
The configurations of the decorative symbol reverse movement effects A to C may be appropriately combined. In addition, the configurations of the decorative symbol reverse movement effects A to C are examples, and some of the effects may not be included.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern reverse movement performances A to C, the center decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number "3". However, in the decorative pattern reverse movement performances A to C, at least one of the center decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be temporarily stopped at a different number.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern reverse movement performances A to C, the decorative pattern moving in the opposite direction to the moving direction may change its pattern. For example, the decorative pattern moving in the opposite direction to the moving direction may change color or size.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing a win,
A first effect in which a plurality of decorative symbols among the set of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at a specific position on the display means;
After the first performance, one or more of the decorative patterns temporarily stopped at the specific position move in a direction opposite to the moving direction while maintaining the display, and then stop at a position different from the specific position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1,
In the first performance, among the set of decorative symbols, the decorative symbols that are not temporarily stopped at the specific position are moving in a variable direction,
In the second performance, the decorative pattern moving in the variable direction in the first performance continues to move in the variable direction and then temporarily stops.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1,
In the first performance, the decorative pattern stopped at the specific position is in a reach mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern warp effects A to C are explained below using Figures 57 to 59. These decorative pattern warp effects are executed during decorative pattern variation effects, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a decorative pattern warp effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64.

[Decorative Pattern Warp A]
Fig. 57 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern warp performance A. The decorative pattern warp performance is a performance in which, when the decorative patterns included in the vertical pattern row moving in the change direction (downward) reach the first area of the display screen 7a, the display disappears from the reached part in order, and the part of the decorative pattern that has reached the first area and disappeared appears in order from the second area of the display screen 7a. Fig. 57 (A) to (I) show an example of one change of the special pattern change, and Fig. 57 (J) to (L) show an example of another change.

In decorative pattern warp performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 57(A), during the special pattern change, a rectangular upper area UE is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a, and a rectangular lower area LE is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Therefore, the upper area UE and the lower area LE are in different horizontal positions (shifted from each other). The upper area UE and the lower area LE may be in a form in which the entire area can be distinguished from other parts by color, etc., or the outline of the area cannot be distinguished. Here, the upper area UE and the lower area LE are in a form in which the entire area can be distinguished by color and pattern. Note that the reserved icon 9A and the change icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(B), the middle decorative pattern 8C of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R moves from the upper area UE to the frame while moving in the changing direction (downward). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern change), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during the slow changing display, multiple number patterns are displayed vertically lined up. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from top to bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from top to bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each have decorative patterns representing "123456789" arranged along the variable direction (up and down direction). During variable display, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed such that multiple number patterns are arranged vertically and can be seen, framed in from the upper side of the display screen 7a, moved downward, and framed out from the lower side of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 57(C), when the number pattern "7" located at the bottom of the pattern row (pattern arrangement) of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (becomes difficult to see) from the part that reached it. Then, the part that has disappeared after reaching the lower area LE (becomes difficult to see) appears in order from the upper area UE. Here, two parts that have disappeared after reaching the lower area LE (becomes difficult to see) appear from the upper area UE. One of the two becomes the left decorative pattern 8L, and the other becomes the right decorative pattern 8R. In FIG. 57(C), the lower half of the "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and disappears in order (becomes difficult to see), and the lower half of the "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C that has disappeared after reaching the lower area LE appears in order from the upper area UE. Two parts corresponding to the lower half of the "7" in the disappeared middle decorative pattern 8C appear from the upper area UE, one of which becomes the left decorative pattern 8L and the other becomes the right decorative pattern 8R. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward with the same number pattern lined up side by side.

In FIG. 57(D), the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and disappears in sequence (becomes difficult to see in sequence), and the lower halves of the "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C that reached the lower area LE and disappeared appear in sequence from the upper area UE as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. The pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continues to move downward, and when the number pattern reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, it disappears (becomes difficult to see). The part that has become difficult to see does not reappear from the upper area UE. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward with the same number pattern lined up side by side.

In FIG. 57(E), the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "2" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and disappears in sequence (becomes difficult to see in sequence), and the lower halves of the "2" of the middle decorative pattern 8C that reached the lower area LE and disappeared appear in sequence from the upper area UE as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. The pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continues to move downward, and when the number pattern reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, it disappears (becomes difficult to see). The part that has become difficult to see does not reappear from the upper area UE. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward with the same number pattern lined up side by side.

In FIG. 57(F), the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "1" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and disappears in sequence (becomes difficult to see in sequence), and the lower half of the "1" of the middle decorative pattern 8C that has disappeared after reaching the lower area LE appears in sequence from the upper area UE as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. The pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continues to move downward, and when the number pattern reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, it disappears (becomes difficult to see). The part that has become difficult to see does not reappear from the upper area UE. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward with the same number pattern lined up side by side.

In FIG. 57(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the order of "76543219", and the number following the "9" of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed, and "9" is the last number pattern in the pattern row. When the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, the "9" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order), and as shown in FIG. 57(G), the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are moved and displayed in the order of "76543219". After the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stop at "1". Here, as shown in FIG. 57(H), in each pattern arrangement, when one number pattern of "76543219" temporarily stops on the display screen 7a, the display of the other number patterns in the pattern arrangement disappears. This will result in a "1 1" reach.

After that, in FIG. 57(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a "1" reach state, and the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed again in a changed state. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(I), the center decorative pattern 8C stops at "1" (provisional stop display), and the jackpot state of "111" is reached, and the jackpot is confirmed.

Figure 57 (J) to (L) show an example of one variation different from Figure 57 (A) to (I). In another variation, first, the above-mentioned Figure 57 (A) to (E) are performed. After Figure 57 (E), Figure 57 (J) to (L) are executed. In Figure 57 (J), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the order of "7654321987", and the number following the "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed, and "7" is the last number pattern in the pattern row. When the pattern row of the decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, the "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and disappears in order (becoming harder to see in order), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed. After the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "8". Here, as shown in FIG. 57(K), when one of the number symbols "123456789" in each symbol arrangement temporarily stops on the display screen 7a, the display of the other number symbols in the symbol arrangement disappears. This results in a "8 8" reach mode.

After that, in Fig. 57(K), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a ready state of "8", and the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed again in a changed state. After that, as shown in Fig. 57(L), the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as stopped at "8" (provisional stop display), and the jackpot state of "888" is reached, and the jackpot is confirmed and stopped.
[Decorative Pattern Warp Feature B]
58 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol warp effect B. The decorative symbol warp effect is an effect in which, when the decorative symbols included in the vertical pattern row moving in the moving direction (downward) reach the first area of the display screen 7a, the display disappears from the reached part in order, and the parts of the decorative symbols that have reached the first area and disappeared appear in order from the second area of the display screen 7a.

In the decorative pattern warp performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 58(A), during the special pattern change, a rectangular upper area UE is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a, and a rectangular lower area LE is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Therefore, the upper area UE and the lower area LE are different in horizontal position (shifted from each other). The upper area UE and the lower area LE may be in a form in which the entire area can be distinguished from other parts by color, etc., or the outer shape of the area cannot be distinguished. Here, the upper area UE and the lower area LE are in a form in which the entire area can be distinguished by color and pattern. Note that the reserved icon 9A and the change icon (the reserved icon) 9C are not displayed, but may be displayed. Of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L moves in the change direction (downward) from the upper area UE and frames in.

Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and multiple number patterns are displayed vertically when the variable display is performed at a slow speed. Here, the arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a when they are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are lined up along the variable direction (up and down direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when they are displayed in a variable manner, multiple number patterns are lined up vertically in each pattern arrangement and are displayed visibly, framing in from the upper side of the display screen 7a, moving downward, and framing out from the lower side of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), when the number pattern "7" located at the bottom of the pattern row (pattern arrangement) of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (becomes difficult to see) from the part that has reached it. Then, the part that has disappeared after reaching the lower area LE (becomes difficult to see) appears in order from the upper area UE. Here, the part that has disappeared after reaching the lower area LE (becomes difficult to see) appears one by one from near the center of the upper area UE. This becomes the middle decorative pattern 8C. In FIG. 57(B), the lower half of the "7" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower area LE and disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order), and the lower half of the "7" of the left decorative pattern 8L that has disappeared after reaching the lower area LE appears in order from the upper area UE. The part corresponding to the lower half of the "7" of the disappeared left decorative pattern 8L appears one by one from near the center of the upper area UE, becoming the middle decorative pattern 8C.

In FIG. 58(C), the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower area LE and disappears in sequence (becomes difficult to see in sequence), and the lower half of the "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L that has disappeared after reaching the lower area LE appears in sequence from the upper area UE as the middle decorative pattern 8C. When the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward and reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears in sequence from the part that has reached it (becomes difficult to see). Then, the part that has disappeared after reaching the lower area LE (the part that has become difficult to see) appears in sequence from the upper area UE. Here, one part that has disappeared after reaching the lower area LE (the part that has become difficult to see) appears near the right side of the upper area UE. This becomes the right decorative pattern 8R. In FIG. 58(C), the bottom end of the "6" in the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and disappears (becoming harder to see), and the bottom end of the "6" in the middle decorative pattern 8C that has disappeared after reaching the lower area LE appears from the upper area UE. A part corresponding to the bottom end of the "6" in the disappeared middle decorative pattern 8C appears near the right side of the upper area UE, becoming the right decorative pattern 8R. The pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward.

In FIG. 58(D), the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower area LE and disappears in sequence (becomes difficult to see in sequence), and the lower half of the "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L that has disappeared after reaching the lower area LE appears in sequence from the upper area UE as the middle decorative pattern 8C. When the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward and reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears in sequence from the part that has reached it (becomes difficult to see). Then, the part that has disappeared after reaching the lower area LE (the part that has become difficult to see) appears in sequence from the upper area UE. Here, one part that has disappeared after reaching the lower area LE (the part that has become difficult to see) appears near the right side of the upper area UE. This becomes the right decorative pattern 8R. In FIG. 58(D), the "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and disappears (becoming difficult to see), and the "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C that disappeared when it reached the lower area LE appears from the upper area UE. One of the "4"s of the middle decorative pattern 8C that disappeared appears from near the right side of the upper area UE and becomes the right decorative pattern 8R. The pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R continues to move downward, and when the number pattern reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, it disappears (becoming difficult to see). The part that became difficult to see does not reappear from the upper area UE.

In Figure 58 (E), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in the order "76543219," with no numbers following the "9" in the left decorative pattern 8L, making the "9" the last number in the pattern row. As the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, the "9"s in the left decorative pattern 8L reach the lower area LE and disappear one by one (becoming harder to see one by one), until the left decorative pattern 8L is no longer displayed, as shown in Figure 58 (F).

After that, in Fig. 58(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the order of "76543219" like the left decorative pattern 8L, and the numbers following the "9" of the middle decorative pattern 8C are not displayed, and the "9" is the last number pattern in the pattern row. When the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, as shown in Fig. 58(G), the "9" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and disappears in sequence (becoming increasingly difficult to see), and as shown in Fig. 58(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C is no longer displayed.

In Figure 58 (I), the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in the order "76543219" like the other two decorative patterns 8L and 8C, and no numbers are displayed following the "9" in the right decorative pattern 8R, making the "9" the last number pattern in the pattern row. As the pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R continues to move downward, as shown in Figure 58 (J), the "9" in the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower area LE and disappears in sequence (becoming increasingly difficult to see), and as shown in Figure 58 (K), the middle decorative pattern 8C is no longer displayed. This results in a state in which none of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed.

After that, as shown in Figure 58 (L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a new jackpot pattern of "888" in a state where they are not displayed.

[Decorative Pattern Warp Feature C]
Fig. 59 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern warp effect C. The decorative pattern warp effect is an effect in which, when the decorative patterns included in the vertical pattern row moving in the moving direction (downward) reach the first area of the display screen 7a, the display disappears from the reached part in order, and the part of the decorative pattern that has reached the first area and disappeared appears in order from the second area of the display screen 7a. Fig. 59 (A) to (I) show an example of the decorative pattern warp effect C, and Fig. 59 (J) to (L) show other examples.

In the decorative pattern warp performance C, unlike the decorative pattern warp performance A (Fig. 57) and the decorative pattern warp performance B (Fig. 58), the visible upper area UE and lower area LE are not displayed. Instead, the lower left area EL1, the upper left area EL2, the lower right area ER1, the upper right area ER2, the lower middle area EC1, and the upper middle area EC2 are set, which are difficult to distinguish from other areas. Hereinafter, the upper left area EL2, the upper right area ER2, and the upper middle area EC2 are collectively referred to as the "upper area EL2, EC2, ER2", and the lower left area EL1, the lower right area ER1, and the lower middle area EC1 are collectively referred to as the "lower area EL1, EC1, ER1". In these areas, background images and the like are displayed without distinction from other areas of the display screen 7a, so the player cannot distinguish between the inside and the outside of the area. Although these areas are described here as rectangular, the shape of the area can be any shape. The upper regions EL2, EC2, ER2 and the lower regions EL1, EC1, ER1 are in different horizontal positions (shifted from each other). As shown in FIG. 59(A), during the special pattern change, the left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R moves in the change direction (downward) from the top edge of the display screen 7a and enters the frame.

Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and multiple number patterns are displayed vertically when the variable display is performed at a slow speed. Here, the arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a when they are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are lined up along the variable direction (up and down direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, when they are displayed in a variable manner, multiple number patterns are lined up vertically in each pattern arrangement and are displayed visibly, framing in from the upper side of the display screen 7a, moving downward, and framing out from the lower side of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 59(B), when the numeral pattern "7" located at the bottom of the pattern row (pattern arrangement) of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1 at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (becomes difficult to see) from the part that has reached it. Then, the part that has disappeared after reaching the lower left area EL1 (becomes difficult to see) appears in order from the upper left area EL2 and moves downward. The numeral pattern that appears from the upper left area EL2 is also the left decorative pattern 8L. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in two rows. In FIG. 59(B), the lower half of the "7" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1 and disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order), and the lower half of the "7" of the left decorative pattern 8L that has disappeared after reaching the lower left area EL1 appears in order from the upper left area EL2. The part corresponding to the lower half of the "7" of the disappeared left decorative pattern 8L appears from the upper left area EL2 to become the second row of the left decorative pattern 8L.

In FIG. 59(C), the row of symbols in the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "4" in the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left region EL1 and disappears in sequence (becoming increasingly difficult to see), and the lower half of the "4" in the left decorative pattern 8L that disappeared in the lower left region EL1 appears in sequence from the upper left region EL2. The right decorative pattern 8R moves in the moving direction (downward) from the top edge of the display screen 7a and frames in.

As shown in FIG. 59(D), when the number pattern "7" located at the bottom of the pattern row (pattern arrangement) of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right region ER1 at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (becomes difficult to see) from the part that reached it. Then, the part that has disappeared after reaching the lower right region ER1 (the part that has become difficult to see) appears in order from the upper right region ER2 and moves downward. The number pattern that appears from the upper right region ER2 is also the right decorative pattern 8R. That is, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in two rows. In FIG. 59(D), the lower half of the "7" of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right region ER1 and disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order), and the lower half of the "7" of the right decorative pattern 8R that has disappeared after reaching the lower right region ER1 appears in order from the upper right region ER2. The part corresponding to the lower half of the "7" of the disappeared right decorative pattern 8R appears from the upper right region ER2 to become the second row of the right decorative pattern 8R. The middle decorative pattern 8C moves in the moving direction (downward) from the top of the display screen 7a and frames in. The row of left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1 and disappears in sequence (becoming increasingly difficult to see), and the lower half of the "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L that disappeared when it reached the lower left area EL1 appears in sequence from the upper left area EL2.

As shown in FIG. 59(E), when the number pattern "7" located at the bottom of the pattern row (pattern arrangement) of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower middle area EC1 at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (becomes difficult to see) from the part that has reached it. Then, the part that has disappeared after reaching the lower middle area EC1 (becomes difficult to see) appears in order from the upper middle area EC2 and moves downward. The number pattern that appears from the upper middle area EC2 is also a middle decorative pattern 8C. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in two rows. In FIG. 59(E), the lower half of the "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower middle area EC1 and disappears in order (becomes difficult to see in order), and the lower half of the "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C that has disappeared after reaching the lower middle area EC1 appears in order from the upper middle area EC2. The part corresponding to the lower half of the "7" of the disappeared middle decorative pattern 8C appears from the upper middle area EC2 to become the second row of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right region ER1 and disappears in sequence (becoming difficult to see in sequence), and the lower half of the "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R that disappeared when it reached the lower right region ER1 appears in sequence from the upper right region ER2. The left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in the order "76543219", and the number following the "9" of the left decorative pattern 8L is not displayed, and the "9" is the last number pattern in the pattern row. As the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, the "9" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left region EL1 and disappears in sequence (becoming difficult to see in sequence), and only the left decorative pattern 8L remains after appearing in sequence from the upper left region EL2.

As shown in FIG. 59(F), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "1". Here, when one of the number patterns of "76543219" in the pattern arrangement included in the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped on the display screen 7a, the display of the other number patterns in the pattern arrangement disappears. Here, as shown in the previous FIG. 59(E), when the lower half of the "1" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1 and disappears (becoming difficult to see in turn), and the lower half of the "1" appears from the upper left area EL2, the display switches and "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, here, the number pattern that has reached the lower left area EL1 and the display of the lower part disappears, and the lower part appears from the upper left area EL2 becomes the number pattern that is stopped and displayed. The pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right region ER1 and disappears in sequence (becoming difficult to see in sequence), and the lower half of the "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R that has disappeared after reaching the lower right region ER1 appears in sequence from the upper right region ER2. The pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C also continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower middle region EC1 and disappears in sequence (becoming difficult to see in sequence), and the lower half of the "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C that has disappeared after reaching the lower middle region EC1 appears in sequence from the upper middle region EC2.

As shown in FIG. 59(G), the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in the order of "76543219", and the numbers following the "9" of the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed, and "9" is the last number pattern in the pattern row. As the pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R continues to move downward, the "9" of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right region ER1 and disappears in sequence (becomes difficult to see in sequence), and only the right decorative pattern 8R appears in sequence from the upper right region ER2. The pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "2" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower middle region EC1 and disappears in sequence (becomes difficult to see in sequence), and the lower half of the "2" of the middle decorative pattern 8C that has disappeared after reaching the lower middle region EC1 appears in sequence from the upper middle region EC2. The left decorative pattern 8L continues to be temporarily stopped at "1".

As shown in FIG. 59(H), the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at "9". Here, when one of the number patterns of "76543219" in the pattern arrangement included in the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped on the display screen 7a, the display of the other number patterns in the pattern arrangement disappears. Here, as shown in the previous FIG. 59(G), when the lower end of the "9" of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right region ER1 and the display disappears (becoming difficult to see in turn), and the lower end of the "9" appears from the upper right region ER2, the display switches and the "9" is temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, here, the number pattern that has reached the lower right region ER1 and the display of the lower part disappears, and the lower part appears from the upper right region ER2 becomes the number pattern that is stopped and displayed. After that, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at "2". Here, when one of the number patterns "76543219" in the pattern arrangement included in the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped on the display screen 7a, the display of the other number patterns in the pattern arrangement disappears. Here, as shown in the previous FIG. 59(G), when the bottom end of the "2" in the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the middle lower region EC1 and the display disappears (becoming harder to see in turn), and the bottom end of the "2" appears from the middle upper region EC2, the display switches and the "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, here, the number pattern that has reached the middle lower region EC1 and the display of the lower part disappears, and the lower part appears from the middle upper region EC2 becomes the number pattern that is stopped and displayed. As a result, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a losing state of "129".

Figure 59 (I) shows another example of the decorative pattern warp performance C. In Figures 59 (A) to (I), the upper end of the lower left region EL1 is located lower than the lower end of the upper left region EL2. Similarly, the upper end of the lower right region ER1 is located lower than the lower end of the upper right region ER2, and the upper end of the lower middle region EC1 is located lower than the lower end of the upper middle region EC2. However, as in Figure 59 (I), the upper end of the lower left region EL1 may be horizontally aligned with the lower end of the upper left region EL2. Similarly, the upper end of the lower right region ER1 may be horizontally aligned with the lower end of the upper right region ER2, and the upper end of the lower middle region EC1 may be horizontally aligned with the lower end of the upper middle region EC2.

Figures 59 (J) to (L) show other examples of the decorative pattern warp performance C. In Figures 59 (A) to (I), when the number patterns of the pattern row (pattern arrangement) of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R reach the lower area EL1, EC1, and ER1 at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears in order from the reached part, and the disappeared part appears in order from the upper area EL2, EC2, and ER2. However, as shown in Figures 59 (J) to (L), there may be a time lag until the part where the number patterns of the pattern row (pattern arrangement) of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R reach the lower area EL1, EC1, and ER1 at the bottom of the display screen 7a and disappears from the upper area EL2, EC2, and ER2 appears. In addition, the lower area EL1, EC1, and ER1 and the upper area EL2, EC2, and ER2 may be located at different positions in the vertical direction. Additionally, the moving speed when it reaches the upper region EL2, EC2, ER2 may be different from the moving speed when it emerges from the lower region EL1, EC1, ER1 and moves downward.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the decorative pattern warp effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 57(C), it is possible to execute a performance in which a pattern row in which a plurality of middle decorative patterns 8C are arranged along the moving direction is displayed on the display screen 7a, and when one of the middle decorative patterns 8C included in the pattern row moving in the moving direction reaches the lower area LE of the display screen 7a, a first performance in which the display disappears from the part that has reached it, and a second performance in which the part of the middle decorative pattern 8C that has reached the lower area LE and disappeared appears in order from the upper area UE of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and to improve the interest. The same is true for Fig. 58(B) and Fig. 59(B).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 59(A), the upper area EL2, EC2, ER2 and the lower area EL1, EC1, ER1 are shifted from each other in the horizontal direction. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by a novel presentation that has never been seen before, and improves the interest. In the lower area LE and the upper area UE of Fig. 57(A) and Fig. 58(A), the part of the lower area LE where the display of the decorative pattern disappears and the part of the upper area UE where the decorative pattern appears are shifted from each other in the horizontal direction. Therefore, if these parts are the lower area LE and the upper area UE, it can be said that the lower area LE and the upper area UE are shifted from each other in the horizontal direction.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 57(A), the lower area LE is located lower than the upper area UE in the vertical direction. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game with a novel presentation that has never been seen before, and increases the player's interest. The same is true for Fig. 58(A) and Fig. 59(A).

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of decorative pattern warp effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern warp performances A and B, the upper area UE and the lower area LE are made identifiable by color and pattern throughout the entire area. However, the upper area UE and the lower area LE may be in a form in which the inside and outside of the area cannot be distinguished. Also, the upper area UE and the lower area LE may be made identifiable only by the outline of the area, and the inside of the area may be displayed with the same background image as the outside of the area. The same applies to the upper area EL2, EC2, ER2 and the lower area EL1, EC1, ER1 of the decorative pattern warp performance C.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern warp effects A and B, the edge of the lower area LE where the decorative pattern disappears and the edge of the upper area UE where the decorative pattern appears extend horizontally. However, these edges may extend in a direction intersecting the horizontal direction. The same applies to the upper areas EL2, EC2, and ER2 and the lower areas EL1, EC1, and ER1 of the decorative pattern warp effect C.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern warp effects A and B, the lower area LE and the upper area UE have been described as fixed areas that are part of the display screen 7a. However, the positions of the lower area LE and the upper area UE on the display screen 7a may be changed, and the size of the areas may be changed. The same applies to the upper areas EL2, EC2, ER2 and the lower areas EL1, EC1, ER1 of the decorative pattern warp effect C.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern;
The display means can execute an effect of displaying a pattern row in which the plurality of decorative patterns are arranged along a moving direction,
a first effect in which, when the decorative pattern included in the pattern row moving in the moving direction reaches a first area of the display means, the display disappears in order from the part that has reached the first area;
A second performance in which the decorative pattern that has disappeared after reaching the first area appears in sequence from the second area of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1,
The first region and the second region are offset from each other in the horizontal direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1,
In the vertical direction, the first region is located below the second region.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern movement performances A to C are explained below using Figures 60 to 62. These decorative pattern movement performances are executed while the decorative patterns are changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative pattern movement performance, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Decorative pattern movement performance A]
Fig. 60 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern movement performance A. The decorative pattern movement performance is a performance in which the first part of the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen 7a moves in a first direction, and the second part moves in a second direction. Fig. 60 (A) to (F) show a first example of the decorative pattern movement performance A, and Fig. 60 (G) to (L) show a second example of the decorative pattern movement performance A.

In the first example of decorative pattern movement performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), a left pattern stop performance is executed after a change start performance. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the movement speed (changing speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, a "4" pattern is stopped as the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that the pending icon and the changing icon are not displayed, but they may be displayed (same below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), a right pattern stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the right decorative pattern slows down and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, an "8" pattern is stopped as the right decorative pattern 8R. As the "8" pattern stops, a line L is displayed that passes through the center of the "8" pattern and extends from the upper left to the lower right. The line L separates the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 of the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in Figures 60 (C) to (E), a pattern part moving performance is executed. The pattern part moving performance is a performance in which a first part of the decorative pattern moves in a first direction, and a second part of the decorative pattern moves in a second direction. Here, the first part B1 moves in the upper right direction (first direction) so as to move away from line L, and the second part B2 moves in the lower left direction (second direction) so as to move away from line L.

Figure 60 (C) shows the beginning of the pattern part movement presentation. At this time, the display shows that the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 gradually increases. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 is the same.

Figure 60 (D) shows the middle of the pattern part movement presentation. At this time, the display is such that the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 is at its maximum. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 is the same.

Figure 60 (E) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement presentation. At this time, the display shows that the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 gradually slows down. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 is the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(F), a symbol update effect is executed. The symbol update effect is an effect in which a different symbol is displayed in place of the decorative symbol that was the subject of the symbol portion movement effect. Here, a "4" symbol is displayed in place of the divided "8" symbol. This creates a reach state together with the "4" symbol of the left decorative symbol 8L.

In the second example of decorative pattern movement performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 60 (G), a left pattern stop performance is executed after a change start performance. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the movement speed (changing speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, a "4" pattern is stopped as the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that the pending icon and the changing icon are not displayed, but they may be displayed (same below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), a right pattern stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the right decorative pattern slows down and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, an "8" pattern is stopped as the right decorative pattern 8R. As the "8" pattern stops, a line L is displayed that passes through the center of the "8" pattern and extends from the upper left to the lower right. The line L separates the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 of the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in Figures 60 (I) to (K), a pattern part moving performance is executed. The pattern part moving performance is a performance in which a first part of the decorative pattern moves in a first direction, and a second part of the decorative pattern moves in a second direction. Here, the first part B1 of the right decorative pattern 8R moves in a lower right direction (first direction) along line L, and the second part B2 of the right decorative pattern 8R moves in an upper left direction (second direction) along line L.

Figure 60 (I) shows the beginning of the pattern part movement presentation. At this time, the display shows that the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 gradually increases. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 is the same.

Figure 60 (J) shows the middle of the pattern part movement presentation. At this time, the display is such that the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 is at its maximum. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 is the same.

Figure 60 (K) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement presentation. At this time, the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 is displayed to gradually slow down. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 is the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(L), a symbol update effect is executed. The symbol update effect is an effect in which a different symbol is displayed in place of the decorative symbol that was the subject of the symbol portion movement effect. Here, a "4" symbol is displayed in place of the divided "8" symbol. This creates a reach state together with the "4" symbol of the left decorative symbol 8L.

[Decorative pattern movement production B]
Fig. 61 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern movement performance B. The decorative pattern movement performance is a performance in which a first part of the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen 7a moves in a first direction, and a second part moves in a second direction. Fig. 61 (A) to (F) show a first example of the decorative pattern movement performance B, and Fig. 61 (G) to (L) show a second example of the decorative pattern movement performance B.

In the first example of decorative pattern movement performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), a left pattern stop performance is executed after a change start performance. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the movement speed (changing speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, a "4" pattern is stopped as the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that the pending icon and the changing icon are not displayed, but they may be displayed (same below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the right decorative symbol slows down and the right decorative symbol stops. Here, a "4" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. This forms a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L that has stopped at the "4" symbol. As the "4" symbol stops as the right decorative symbol 8R, a horizontal line L passing through the center of the "4" symbol is displayed for each of the "4" symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L and the "4" symbol as the right decorative symbol 8R. The line L separates the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in Figures 61 (C) to (E), a pattern part moving performance is executed. The pattern part moving performance is a performance in which a first part of the decorative pattern moves in a first direction, and a second part of the decorative pattern moves in a second direction. Here, for each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the first part B1 moves to the right (first direction) along line L, and the second part B2 moves to the left (second direction) along line L.

Figure 61 (C) shows the beginning of the pattern part movement presentation. At this time, the display shows the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 gradually increasing. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 is the same.

Figure 61 (D) shows the middle of the symbol part movement presentation. At this time, the display is such that the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 is at its maximum. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 is the same.

Figure 61 (E) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement presentation. At this time, the display shows that the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 gradually slows down. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speed of the first part B1 and the second part B2 is the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), a symbol update effect is executed. The symbol update effect is an effect in which a different symbol is displayed in place of the decorative symbol that was the target of the symbol part movement effect. Here, a "5" symbol is displayed in place of the divided "4" symbol. This creates a "5" symbol reach state in place of the "4" symbol reach state.

In the second example of decorative pattern movement performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), a left pattern stop performance is executed after a change start performance. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the movement speed (changing speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, a "4" pattern is stopped as the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that the pending icon and the changing icon are not displayed, but they may be displayed (same below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(H), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the right decorative symbol slows down and the right decorative symbol stops. Here, a "4" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. This forms a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L that stops at the "4" symbol. With the "4" symbol stopping as the right decorative symbol 8R, a horizontal line L1 passing through the center of the "4" symbol and a vertical line L2 passing through the center of the "4" symbol are displayed for each of the "4" symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L and the "4" symbol as the right decorative symbol 8R. The lines L1 and L2 separate the first portion B1, second portion B2, third portion B3, and fourth portion B4 of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (I) to (K), a pattern part movement performance is executed. The pattern part movement performance is a performance in which the first part of the decorative pattern moves in the first direction, the second part of the decorative pattern moves in the second direction, the third part of the decorative pattern moves in the third direction, and the fourth part of the decorative pattern moves in the fourth direction. Here, for each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the first part B1 moves in the upper left direction (first direction) so as to move away from the intersection of the lines L1 and L2, the second part B2 moves in the lower right direction (second direction) so as to move away from the intersection of the lines L1 and L2, the third part B3 moves in the upper right direction (third direction) so as to move away from the intersection of the lines L1 and L2, and the fourth part B4 moves in the lower left direction (fourth direction) so as to move away from the intersection of the lines L1 and L2.

Figure 61 (I) shows the beginning of the pattern part movement presentation. At this time, the first part B1, the second part B2, the third part B3, and the fourth part B4 are displayed so that their movement speeds gradually increase. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speeds of the first part B1, the second part B2, the third part B3, and the fourth part B4 is the same.

Figure 61 (J) shows the middle of the symbol part movement presentation. At this time, the first part B1, the second part B2, the third part B3, and the fourth part B4 are displayed so that their movement speeds are at their maximum. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speeds of the first part B1, the second part B2, the third part B3, and the fourth part B4 is the same.

Figure 61 (K) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement presentation. At this time, the movement speed of the first part B1, the second part B2, the third part B3, and the fourth part B4 is displayed to gradually slow down. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speed of the first part B1, the second part B2, the third part B3, and the fourth part B4 is the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (L), a symbol update effect is executed. The symbol update effect is an effect in which a different symbol is displayed in place of the decorative symbol that was the target of the symbol part movement effect. Here, a "5" symbol is displayed in place of the divided "4" symbol. This creates a "5" symbol reach state in place of the "4" symbol reach state.

[Decorative pattern movement production C]
Fig. 62 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern movement performance C. The decorative pattern movement performance is a performance in which the first part of the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen 7a moves in a first direction, and the second part moves in a second direction. Fig. 62 (A) to (F) show a first example of the decorative pattern movement performance C, and Fig. 62 (G) to (L) show a second example of the decorative pattern movement performance C.

In the first example of decorative pattern movement performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), a left pattern stop performance is executed after a change start performance. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the movement speed (changing speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, a "4" pattern is stopped as the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that the pending icon and the changing icon are not displayed, but they may be displayed (same below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the right decorative symbol slows down and the right decorative symbol stops. Here, a "4" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. This forms a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L that has stopped at the "4" symbol. As the "4" symbol stops as the right decorative symbol 8R, a horizontal line L passing through the center of the "4" symbol is displayed for each of the "4" symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L and the "4" symbol as the right decorative symbol 8R. The first portion P and second portion Q of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are symmetrically positioned with respect to the line L.

Next, as shown in Figures 62 (C) to (E), a pattern part moving performance is executed. The pattern part moving performance is a performance in which a first part of the decorative pattern moves in a first direction, and a second part of the decorative pattern moves in a second direction. Here, for each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, point P (first part) moves to the right (first direction) along line L, and point Q (second part) moves to the left (second direction) along line L.

Figure 62 (C) shows the beginning of the symbol part movement presentation. At this time, the movement speed of points P and Q is displayed to gradually increase. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speed of points P and Q is the same.

Figure 62 (D) shows the middle of the symbol part movement presentation. At this time, the display is such that the movement speed of points P and Q is at its maximum. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speed of points P and Q is the same.

Figure 62 (E) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement presentation. At this time, the movement speed of points P and Q is displayed to gradually slow down. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speed of points P and Q is the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), a symbol update effect is executed. The symbol update effect is an effect in which a different symbol is displayed in place of the decorative symbol that was the target of the symbol part movement effect. Here, a "5" symbol is displayed in place of the divided "4" symbol. This creates a "5" symbol reach state in place of the "4" symbol reach state.

In the second example of decorative pattern movement performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), a left pattern stop performance is executed after a change start performance. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the movement speed (changing speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, a "4" pattern is stopped as the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that the pending icon and the changing icon are not displayed, but they may be displayed (same below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(H), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the right decorative symbol slows down and the right decorative symbol stops. Here, a "4" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. This forms a reach state together with the left decorative symbol 8L that stops at the "4" symbol. With the "4" symbol stopping as the right decorative symbol 8R, a horizontal line L1 passing through the center of the "4" symbol and a vertical line L2 passing through the center of the "4" symbol are displayed for each of the "4" symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L and the "4" symbol as the right decorative symbol 8R. The points P (first portion), Q (second portion), R (third portion), and S (fourth portion) of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are symmetrically positioned with respect to the lines L1 and L2.

Next, as shown in Fig. 62 (I) to (K), a pattern part movement performance is executed. The pattern part movement performance is a performance in which the first part of the decorative pattern moves in the first direction, the second part of the decorative pattern moves in the second direction, the third part of the decorative pattern moves in the third direction, and the fourth part of the decorative pattern moves in the fourth direction. Here, for each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, point P (first part) moves in the upper left direction (first direction) so as to move away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2, point Q (second part) moves in the lower right direction (second direction) so as to move away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2, point R (third part) moves in the upper right direction (third direction) so as to move away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2, and point S (fourth part) moves in the lower left direction (fourth direction) so as to move away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2.

Figure 62 (I) shows the beginning of the pattern part movement presentation. At this time, the movement speed of points P, Q, R, and S is displayed to gradually increase. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speed of points P, Q, R, and S is the same.

Figure 62 (J) shows the middle of the symbol part movement presentation. At this time, the display is such that the movement speeds of points P, Q, R, and S are at their maximum. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speeds of points P, Q, R, and S is the same.

Figure 62 (K) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement presentation. At this time, the movement speed of points P, Q, R, and S is displayed to gradually slow down. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the movement speed of points P, Q, R, and S is the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (L), a symbol update effect is executed. The symbol update effect is an effect in which a different symbol is displayed in place of the decorative symbol that was the target of the symbol part movement effect. Here, a "5" symbol is displayed in place of the divided "4" symbol. This creates a "5" symbol reach state in place of the "4" symbol reach state.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of moving decorative patterns.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute a pattern part movement effect (movement effect) in which the first part B1 (point P) of the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a and the second part B1 (point Q) other than the first part of the decorative pattern move in different directions (FIGS. 60(C)-(E), 60(I)-(K), 61(C)-(E), 61(I)-(K), 62(C)-(E), 62(I)-(K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented and novel effect using the decorative pattern, and to increase the interest of the game. The effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "effect execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first portion B1 (point P) is on one side of the line L (lines L1, L2) that passes through the center of the decorative pattern, and the second portion B2 (point Q) is on the other side of the line L (lines L1, L2) (FIGS. 60(C)-(E), 60(I)-(K), 61(C)-(E), 61(I)-(K), 62(C)-(E), 62(I)-(K)). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a novel presentation that has never been seen before using the decorative pattern, and to increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute a symbol part movement effect (opposite movement effect) in which the first part B1 (point P) is moved in the first direction and the second part B2 (point Q) is moved in the opposite direction to the first direction by the same distance as the movement distance of the first part B1 (point P) (FIGS. 60(C)-(E), 60(I)-(K), 61(C)-(E), 61(I)-(K), 62(C)-(E), 62(I)-(K)). With this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented and novel effect using decorative symbols, and to increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first part B1 (point P) and the second part B2 (point Q) are moved so that the magnitude of the acceleration, which is the derivative of the moving speed of the first part B1 (point P) and the second part B2 (point Q) in the symbol part moving effect (pair moving effect), becomes the same. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a novel effect that has not been seen before using decorative symbols, and to increase the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of decorative pattern movement are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the decorative pattern 8R (8L and 8R) that is the target of the pattern part movement performance is divided. In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 62, the points P and Q (points P, Q, R, and S) may be moved without dividing the decorative pattern. In order to avoid division, for example, it is possible to expand and contract the decorative pattern or to enlarge and reduce it according to the movement of points P and Q (points P, Q, R, and S).

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the first part B1 (point P) and the second part (point Q) are configured to move in the in-plane direction of the display screen 7a. In contrast, the first part and the second part may be moved in the out-of-plane direction (for example, in a direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a). For example, it is possible to enlarge and reduce a part of the decorative pattern in accordance with the forward and backward movement of points P and Q (points P, Q, R, and S).

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the line L1 (lines L1, L2) is displayed to show that the decorative pattern 8R (8L and 8R) is divided. In contrast, a specific line may not be displayed. Alternatively, the line may be displayed only during a specific period of the pattern portion movement performance.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the first part B1 (point P) and the second part B2 (point Q) of the decorative pattern 8R (8L and 8R) move away from each other (FIGS. 60(C)-(E), 60(I)-(K), 61(C)-(E), 61(I)-(K), 62(C)-(E), 62(I)-(K)), and then, another pattern is displayed in place of the decorative pattern 8R (8L and 8R) that was the target of the pattern part movement performance (FIGS. 60(F), 60(L), 61(F), 61(L), 62(F), 62(L)). In contrast, the first part B1 (point P) and the second part B2 (point Q) of the decorative pattern 8R (8L and 8R) may move away from each other, then move closer to each other, and then move away from each other, so that a performance of moving away and approaching each other may be performed. For example, in the first example of the decorative pattern movement performance A, a performance such as Fig. 60(C)→(D)→(E)→(D)→(C)→(D)→(E)→... may be executed. In this case, in addition to the above configuration (Fig. 60(E)→(F)) in which the "4" pattern is displayed after moving away from each other, a configuration (Fig. 60(C)→(B)) in which the divided decorative patterns 8R form an "8" pattern again after approaching each other may be used to end the game. In the latter case, the reach mode may not be formed and the game may end in a miss.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine having a presentation execution means capable of executing a variation presentation of a decorative pattern on a display screen,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a moving effect in which a first portion of a decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen and a second portion of the decorative pattern other than the first portion move in different directions.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1,
The first portion is on one side of a line passing through the center of the decorative pattern, and the second portion is on the other side of the line.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1 or A4-2,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a paired movement performance in which the first part is moved in a first direction and the second part is moved in a direction opposite to the first direction by a distance equal to the moving distance of the first part.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-3,
The performance execution means moves the first part and the second part so that the magnitude of acceleration, which is a derivative of the moving speed of the first part and the second part in the pair movement performance, becomes equal to each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1,
The performance execution means targets a plurality of decorative patterns and executes the movement performance in synchronization with the plurality of decorative patterns.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-3,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a subsequent pair movement performance in which, after the pair movement performance, the first part that has moved in the first direction is moved in the second direction, and the second part that has moved in the second direction by a distance equal to the moving distance of the first part is moved in the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, the aspect change variation effects A to C will be explained using Figures 63 to 65. These aspect change variation effects are executed in conjunction with the decorative pattern variation start effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the aspect change variation effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Aspect change variation performance A]
63 is a diagram for explaining the mode change variation performance A. The mode change variation performance is a performance in which all of the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display screen 7a change from the first mode to the second mode, and then the decorative symbols in a predetermined row among the multiple rows of decorative symbols change from the second mode to the third mode and start to vary.

In the mode change variation performance A, first, a stop display performance is executed as shown in FIG. 63 (A). The stop display performance is a performance in which multiple rows of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at a "2" symbol, the middle decorative symbol 8C is fixed and stopped at a "7" symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R is fixed and stopped at a "9" symbol. Note that the stops do not have to be fixed and may be temporary stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), a character display effect is executed. The character display effect is an effect in which an ally character is displayed on the screen. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, overlapping with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The middle decorative pattern 8C is invisible (not visible). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are partially covered by the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), a mode change effect (first change effect) is executed. The mode change effect is an effect in which all of the decorative patterns in multiple columns change from the first mode to the second mode. Here, the modes of the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the normal display mode (first mode) to the 7-segment display mode (second mode). The center decorative pattern 8C is made invisible by the ally character CRA. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are partially covered by the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), a character non-display effect is executed. The character non-display effect is an effect in which an ally character is not displayed. Here, the ally character CRA is not displayed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are displayed. The appearance of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is the 7-segment display appearance (second appearance).

Next, as shown in Figures 63 (E) and (F), a decorative pattern movement effect is executed. The decorative pattern movement effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns in a specified row move left and right. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L moves rightward as indicated by the arrow Y1, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves leftward as indicated by the arrow Y2.

In Figure 63(E), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move in the directions of the arrows Y1 and Y2, respectively, and approach the "7" pattern as the central decorative pattern 8C. In Figure 63(F), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move further in the directions of the arrows Y1 and Y2, respectively, and overlap with the "7" pattern as the central decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), a center pattern change effect (second change effect) is executed. The center pattern change effect is an effect that changes the state of the center decorative pattern. Here, the center decorative pattern 8C changes from the 7-segment display state (second state) to the simple display state (third state). The center decorative pattern 8C overlaps with the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is displayed at the front.

Next, as shown in Figures 63 (H) and (I), a decorative pattern movement effect is executed. The decorative pattern movement effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns in a specified row move left and right. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L moves left as indicated by the arrow Y1, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves right as indicated by the arrow Y2.

In Figure 63 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R have moved in the directions of the arrows Y1 and Y2, respectively, and are now away from the "7" pattern as the central decorative pattern 8C. In Figure 63 (I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R have moved further in the directions of the arrows Y1 and Y2, respectively, and are now further away from the "7" pattern as the central decorative pattern 8C, and have moved to their normal display position (Figure 63 (D)).

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (J) to (L), the change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which multiple rows of decorative symbols start changing.
In Fig. 63(J), the left decorative pattern 8L starts to change. After the left decorative pattern 8L starts to change, it becomes transparent or semi-transparent. In Fig. 63(K), the right decorative pattern 8R starts to change. After the right decorative pattern 8R starts to change, it becomes transparent or semi-transparent. In Fig. 63(L), the middle decorative pattern 8C starts to change. After the middle decorative pattern 8C starts to change, it becomes transparent or semi-transparent.

In Figures 63 (J) to (L), the change started in the order of left decorative pattern 8L → right decorative pattern 8R → center decorative pattern 8C, but the change may start in any order. For example, the change may start in the order of left decorative pattern 8L → center decorative pattern 8C → right decorative pattern 8R. Also, the change may start in the order of right decorative pattern 8R → center decorative pattern 8C → left decorative pattern 8L. The left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may also start changing in parallel. The word "in parallel" is intended to include cases where the change starts at the same time, as well as cases where the change starts with a slight lag.

[Aspect change variation performance B]
64 is a diagram for explaining the mode change variation performance B. The mode change variation performance is a performance in which all of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a change from the first mode to the second mode, and then the decorative symbols in a predetermined row among the multiple rows of decorative symbols change from the second mode to the third mode and start to vary.

In the mode change variation performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), a stop display performance is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which multiple rows of decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at a "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at a "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at a "9" pattern. Note that the stops do not have to be fixed and may be temporary stops.

Next, as shown in Figures 64 (B) and (C), a character movement effect is executed. The character movement effect is an effect in which an ally character moves on the screen. It may be an effect that utilizes animation. In Figure 64 (B), the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. After this, the ally character CRA moves in the upper right direction on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y, and is gradually enlarged. In Figure 64 (C), the ally character CRA is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. A dialogue image SG saying "It's super hot" is displayed to the left of the ally character CRA.

Note that during character movement performance, all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are hidden. In other words, during character movement performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), a mode change effect (first change effect) is executed. The mode change effect is an effect in which all of the decorative patterns in multiple columns change from the first mode to the second mode. Here, the modes of the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the normal display mode (first mode) to the 7-segment display mode (second mode). The center decorative pattern 8C is displayed enlarged compared to the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the center decorative pattern 8C covers part of the right decorative pattern 8R. The left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed slightly inward from their normal display positions (FIG. 64 (H)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), a center symbol shrinking effect is executed. The center symbol shrinking effect is an effect in which the center decorative symbol is gradually reduced in size. Here, the "7" symbol is reduced in size as the center decorative symbol 8C in the 7-segment display mode (second mode). At this stage, the center decorative symbol 8C is larger than the decorative symbols 8L and 8R on the left and right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), a center pattern change effect (second change effect) is executed. The center pattern change effect is an effect that changes the state of the center decorative pattern. Here, the center decorative pattern 8C changes from the 7-segment display state (second state) to the simple display state (third state). The center decorative pattern 8C is larger in size than the decorative patterns 8L and 8R on the left and right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), a center symbol shrinking effect is executed. The center symbol shrinking effect is an effect in which the center decorative symbol is gradually reduced in size. Here, the "7" symbol is reduced in size as the center decorative symbol 8C in the simple display mode (third mode). At this stage, the center decorative symbol 8C is the same size as the decorative symbols 8L and 8R on the left and right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (H), a decorative pattern movement effect is executed. The decorative pattern movement effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns in a specified row move left and right. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L moves leftward as indicated by the arrow Y1, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves rightward as indicated by the arrow Y2.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (I) to (K), the change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which multiple rows of decorative symbols start changing.
In Fig. 64(I), the left decorative pattern 8L starts to change. After the left decorative pattern 8L starts to change, it becomes transparent or semi-transparent. In Fig. 64(J), the right decorative pattern 8R starts to change. After the right decorative pattern 8R starts to change, it becomes transparent or semi-transparent. In Fig. 64(K), the middle decorative pattern 8C starts to change. After the middle decorative pattern 8C starts to change, it becomes transparent or semi-transparent.

In Figures 64 (I) to (K), the change started in the order of left decorative pattern 8L → right decorative pattern 8R → center decorative pattern 8C, but the change may start in any order. For example, the change may start in the order of left decorative pattern 8L → center decorative pattern 8C → right decorative pattern 8R. Also, the change may start in the order of right decorative pattern 8R → center decorative pattern 8C → left decorative pattern 8L. The left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may also start changing in parallel. The word "in parallel" is intended to include cases where the change starts at the same time, as well as cases where the change starts with a slight lag.

[Aspect change variation performance C]
65 is a diagram for explaining the mode change variation performance C. The mode change variation performance is a performance in which all of the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display screen 7a change from the first mode to the second mode, and then the decorative symbols in a predetermined row among the multiple rows of decorative symbols change from the second mode to the third mode and start to vary.

In the mode change variation performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), a stop display performance is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which multiple rows of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at a "2" symbol, the middle decorative symbol 8C is fixed and stopped at a "7" symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R is fixed and stopped at a "9" symbol. Note that the stops do not have to be fixed and may be temporary stops.

Next, as shown in Figures 65(B) and (C), a character movement effect is executed. The character movement effect is an effect in which an ally character moves on the screen. It may be an effect that utilizes animation. In Figure 65(B), the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. After this, the ally character CRA moves in the upper right direction on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y, and is gradually enlarged. In Figure 65(C), the ally character CRA is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. A dialogue image SG saying "It's super hot" is displayed to the left of the ally character CRA.

Note that during character movement performance, all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are hidden. In other words, during character movement performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), a mode change effect (first change effect) is executed. The mode change effect is an effect in which all of the decorative patterns in multiple columns change from the first mode to the second mode. Here, the modes of the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the normal display mode (first mode) to the 7-segment display mode (second mode). The center decorative pattern 8C is displayed enlarged compared to the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the center decorative pattern 8C covers part of the right decorative pattern 8R. The left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed slightly inward from their normal display positions (FIG. 64(H)).

Next, as shown in Figures 65 (E) and (F), a center symbol shrinking effect is executed. The center symbol shrinking effect is an effect in which the center decorative symbol is gradually reduced in size. In Figure 65 (E), the "7" symbol is reduced as the center decorative symbol 8C in the 7-segment display mode (second mode). At this stage, the center decorative symbol 8C is larger in size than the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R. In Figure 65 (F), the "7" symbol is further reduced as the center decorative symbol 8C in the 7-segment display mode (second mode). At this stage, the center decorative symbol 8C is the same size as the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(G), a middle pattern change effect (second change effect) is executed. The middle pattern change effect is an effect that changes the state of the middle decorative pattern. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from the 7-segment display state (second state) to the simple display state (third state).

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (H), a decorative pattern movement effect is executed. The decorative pattern movement effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns in a predetermined row move left and right. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L moves leftward as indicated by the arrow Y1, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves rightward as indicated by the arrow Y2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(I), a middle pattern change effect is executed. The middle pattern change effect is an effect that changes the state of the middle decorative pattern. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from the simple display state (third state) to the 7-segment display state (second state).

Next, as shown in Figure 65 (J) to (L), the change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which multiple rows of decorative symbols start changing.
In FIG. 65(J), the left decorative pattern 8L starts to change. After the left decorative pattern 8L starts to change, it becomes transparent or semi-transparent. In FIG. 65(K), the right decorative pattern 8R starts to change. After the right decorative pattern 8R starts to change, it becomes transparent or semi-transparent. In FIG. 65(L), the center decorative pattern 8C starts to change. After the center decorative pattern 8C starts to change, it becomes transparent or semi-transparent.

In Figures 65 (J) to (L), the change started in the order of left decorative pattern 8L → right decorative pattern 8R → center decorative pattern 8C, but the change may start in any order. For example, the change may start in the order of left decorative pattern 8L → center decorative pattern 8C → right decorative pattern 8R. Also, the change may start in the order of right decorative pattern 8R → center decorative pattern 8C → left decorative pattern 8L. The left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may also start changing in parallel. The word "in parallel" is intended to include cases where the change starts at the same time, as well as cases where the change starts with a slight lag.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the change in appearance.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a mode change performance (first change performance) is executed to change all of the multiple rows of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in a stopped state from a normal display mode (first mode) to a 7-segment display mode (second mode) (FIG. 63(C), FIG. 64(D), FIG. 65(D)), and then a variation performance of the multiple rows of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is started (FIG. 63(J)-(L), FIG. 64(I)-(K), FIG. 65(J)-(L)). According to this configuration, the start of the variation performance of the decorative patterns becomes novel, and the interest of the game can be improved. The performance control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "performance execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the execution of the mode change performance (first change performance), before starting the change performance of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the multiple rows, a middle pattern change performance (second change performance) is executed to change the middle decorative pattern 8C among the multiple rows of decorative patterns from the 7-segment display mode (second mode) to the simple display mode (third mode) (FIG. 63(G), FIG. 64(F), FIG. 65(G)). According to this configuration, the start of the change performance of the decorative patterns becomes novel, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in at least one of the 7-segment display mode (second mode) and the simple display mode (third mode) so that a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C overlaps with the decorative patterns 8L and 8R in the adjacent rows (FIGS. 63(G), 64(D), and 65(D)). According to this configuration, the start of the decorative pattern variation presentation becomes novel, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in accordance with the change in appearance of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R accompanying the appearance change appearance (first change appearance), character display appearances (FIGS. 63(B)(C)) and character movement appearances (FIGS. 64(B)(C), 65(B)(C)) are performed to make the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R less visible. With this configuration, the start of the decorative symbol variation appearance becomes innovative, and the interest of the game can be increased.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the aspect change variation presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the character movement effect displays the dialogue image SG saying "It's super hot" to indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot, but it is not necessary to display information indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the center decorative pattern 8C is changed (FIG. 63(G), FIG. 64(F), FIG. 65(G)). Instead of the center decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L or the right decorative pattern 8R may be changed. Furthermore, two of the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be changed, or three decorative patterns may be changed.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, character display effects (FIGS. 63(B)(C)) and character movement effects (FIGS. 64(B)(C), 65(B)(C)) were performed. At this time, only one image of the ally character CRA was displayed. In contrast, an effect may be used in which multiple specific images are displayed. At this time, an effect may be used in which the number of specific images gradually increases.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine having a presentation execution means capable of executing a variation presentation of a decorative pattern on a display screen,
The performance execution means executes a first change performance in which all of the plurality of columns of decorative patterns stopped and displayed are changed from a first state to a second state, and then starts a change performance of the plurality of columns of decorative patterns.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
The performance execution means executes a second change performance in which the decorative pattern of a predetermined row among the plurality of rows of decorative patterns is changed from the second aspect to a third aspect before starting a variation performance of the decorative patterns of the plurality of rows after executing the first change performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
In at least one of the second and third aspects, the decorative symbols in the predetermined row are displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative symbols in an adjacent row.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a visually difficult performance that makes the decorative pattern difficult to see in accordance with a change in the state of the decorative pattern associated with the first change performance or the second change performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern change presentation will be explained below with reference to Figures 66 to 68. This decorative pattern change presentation is executed during the variable presentation. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command contains an instruction to execute the decorative pattern change presentation, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Decorative pattern change performance A]
66(A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining the decorative pattern change performance A. The decorative pattern change performance A is a performance in which the decorative pattern changes during the change performance, and the decorative pattern is displayed changeably and stationarily. In this example, the image display is performed by the display screen 7a, but may be performed by the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, respectively, and during deceleration variation, they are displayed vertically side by side so that two or more patterns are visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. During high-speed variation, the contents of the patterns are displayed so that they are difficult to see. During stop display, one pattern is displayed so that it is visible on the display screen 7a, but multiple patterns may be visible at the same time. Also, if the result of the special drawing is a winning combination, the three symbols lined up in a straight line will stop in a winning configuration. Note that the three symbols lined up in a straight line here include those lined up in a roughly straight line. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

When executing decorative pattern change performance A, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be displayed in three different display modes. Specifically, the numbers in the number images that represent the content of each decorative pattern can be changed to three different display modes: a mode in which the numbers are displayed in Arabic numerals (hereafter referred to as the Arabic mode), a mode in which they are displayed in Roman numerals (hereafter referred to as the Roman mode), and a mode in which they are displayed in large Chinese numerals (hereafter referred to as the large character mode).

The display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable performance will be the same as the display mode of the decorative pattern that was fixed and stopped after the end of the variable performance that was executed immediately before. For example, if the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped in an Arabic style, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped in a large font style, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped in a Roman style after the end of the variable performance, the display mode of each decorative pattern at the start of the next variable performance executed will be the Arabic style for the left decorative pattern 8L, the large font style for the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the Roman style for the right decorative pattern 8R.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative pattern can be changed at any timing during the variation performance. For example, during the deceleration variation display, the display mode can be changed from the Roman mode to the large character mode from the decorative pattern that frames in the decorative pattern transition representing a certain number. In this case, the pattern arrangement in which the contents represented by each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged from bottom to top of the display screen 7a as "123456789" does not change in each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, and 8R. For example, in a decorative pattern displayed in an Arabic numerals mode, if the display mode of the decorative pattern after the decorative pattern representing "4" becomes the large character mode, the pattern arrangement becomes "123456789", and from the next lap onwards it becomes "123456789". Also, for example, when a decorative pattern is displayed in a temporary stop mode, the display mode of the decorative pattern displayed in a temporary stop mode can be changed from the large character mode to the Arabic mode. As mentioned above, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable performance is inherited from the display mode when it stopped after the previous variable performance ended. For example, if a decorative pattern in an Arabic form representing "7" temporarily stops, then changes to a large character form and stops, the pattern arrangement displayed in the next variable performance will continue with "Urushi Sakku", and from the next lap it will be "Ichi Ni San Shi Go Roku Urushi Sakku".

Furthermore, the decorative pattern may be configured by combining a number image that represents the content of the decorative pattern with a character image. In this case, the change in the display mode may be such that in addition to or instead of the change in the display mode of the number image, the display mode of the character image is changed. For example, the display modes of the character image may be a front-facing display mode in which the character image faces forward, a right-facing display mode in which the character image faces to the right, and a left-facing display mode in which the character image faces to the left, and the display mode may be changed arbitrarily at the timing described above.

First, as shown in FIG. 66(A), the change performance begins, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed, making it difficult to see their respective contents. Here, the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the change icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed. After the change performance that was being performed prior to this change performance ends, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed as fixed and stopped in an Arabic style, and the explanation will continue assuming that the result of the special symbol lottery that triggered this change performance was a miss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R undergo deceleration fluctuations. The order in which the high-speed fluctuations are followed by the deceleration fluctuations may be set arbitrarily. For example, the high-speed fluctuation display may be switched to the deceleration fluctuation display in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the center decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are displayed in a decelerating manner, changes from an Arabic mode to a Roman mode. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "7" changes from an Arabic mode to a Roman mode, and all decorative patterns that frame in thereafter become Roman mode. In addition, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "4" changes from an Arabic mode to a Roman mode, and all decorative patterns that frame in thereafter become Roman mode. Note that the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "7" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern representing "4" in the right decorative pattern 8R may be in the Roman mode at the time of frame in, or may change from the Arabic mode to the Roman mode after frame in. If the change occurs after frame in, the change may be accompanied by animation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are displayed with decelerating fluctuations, the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L changes from the Roman mode to the large character mode. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "1" changes from the Roman mode to the large character mode, and all decorative patterns that frame in thereafter will be in the large character mode. Note that the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "1" in the left decorative pattern 8L may be in the large character mode when framing in, or may change from the Roman mode to the large character mode after framing in. If it changes after framing in, it may change with animation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were displayed in a decelerating and varying manner, are displayed as temporarily stopped. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as temporarily stopped, respectively, representing a large character "3", an Arabic "5", and a Roman "9". Note that the order in which the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped may be set arbitrarily. For example, the decelerating and varying manner display ends and the temporary stop display is displayed in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), of the decorative patterns that were temporarily stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the display modes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R each change. Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing a "3" that was temporarily stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a large font mode to an Arabic mode, and the display mode of the decorative pattern representing a "9" that was temporarily stopped in the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a Roman mode to an Arabic mode. After this, the variable performance ends, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each stop for a certainty.

The above is a display example of decorative pattern change presentation A. By configuring the device to be able to execute decorative pattern change presentation A, the display state of each of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R changes during the deceleration change display or temporary stop display, making it possible to entertain the player with the display of the decorative patterns in the change presentation, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Decorative pattern change performance B]
66(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the decorative pattern change performance B. The decorative pattern change performance B is a performance in which the decorative pattern changes during the change performance, and the decorative pattern is displayed changeably and stationarily. In this example, the image display is performed by the display screen 7a, but may be performed by the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, respectively, and during deceleration variation, they are displayed vertically side by side so that two or more patterns are visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. During high-speed variation, the contents of the patterns are displayed so that they are difficult to see. During stop display, one pattern is displayed so that it is visible on the display screen 7a, but multiple patterns may be visible at the same time. Also, if the result of the special drawing is a winning combination, the three symbols lined up in a straight line will stop in a winning configuration. Note that the three symbols lined up in a straight line here include those lined up in a roughly straight line. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

When executing decorative pattern change performance B, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be displayed in three different display modes. Specifically, each can be changed to the three display modes described above: Arabic mode, Roman mode, and large font mode.

The display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable performance will be the same as the display mode of the decorative pattern that was fixed and stopped after the end of the variable performance that was executed immediately before. For example, if the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped in an Arabic style, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped in a large font style, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped in a Roman style after the end of the variable performance, the display mode of each decorative pattern at the start of the next variable performance executed will be the Arabic style for the left decorative pattern 8L, the large font style for the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the Roman style for the right decorative pattern 8R.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative pattern can be changed at any timing during the variation performance. For example, during the deceleration variation display, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing a certain number can be changed from the Roman mode to the large character mode. In this case, the pattern arrangement in which the contents represented by each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged from bottom to top of the display screen 7a as "123456789" does not change in each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, and 8R. For example, in a decorative pattern displayed in an Arabic numerals mode, if the display mode of the decorative pattern after the decorative pattern representing "4" becomes the large character mode, the pattern arrangement becomes "123456789", and from the next lap onwards it becomes "123456789". Also, for example, when a decorative pattern is displayed in a temporary stop mode, the display mode of the decorative pattern displayed in a temporary stop mode can be changed from the large character mode to the Arabic mode. As mentioned above, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable performance is inherited from the display mode when it stopped after the previous variable performance ended. For example, if a decorative pattern in an Arabic form representing "7" temporarily stops, then changes to a large character form and stops, the pattern arrangement displayed in the next variable performance will continue with "Urushi Sakku", and from the next lap it will be "Ichi Ni San Shi Go Roku Urushi Sakku".

Furthermore, the decorative pattern may be configured by combining a number image that represents the content of the decorative pattern with a character image. In this case, the change in the display mode may be such that in addition to or instead of the change in the display mode of the number image, the display mode of the character image is changed. For example, the display modes of the character image may be a front-facing display mode in which the character image faces forward, a right-facing display mode in which the character image faces to the right, and a left-facing display mode in which the character image faces to the left, and the display mode may be changed arbitrarily at the timing described above.

First, as shown in FIG. 66(G), the change performance begins, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed, making it difficult to see their respective contents. Here, the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the change icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed. After the change performance that was being performed prior to this change performance ends, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed as fixed and stopped in an Arabic style, and the explanation will continue assuming that the result of the special symbol lottery that triggered this change performance was a miss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(H), of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed as temporarily stopped. Here, the decorative symbols representing "4" are displayed as temporarily stopped in an Arabic style in the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, forming a reach. The order in which the temporary stops are displayed may be set arbitrarily. For example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may be switched from the variable display to the temporary stop display in this order, or the right decorative symbol 8R and the left decorative symbol 8L may be switched from the variable display to the temporary stop display in this order. Also, this change in display mode may be performed with animation. This also applies to the changes in display mode described below.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(I), the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that are temporarily stopped changes from an Arabic mode to a large character mode. Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern that represents "4" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R changes from an Arabic mode to a large character mode. The display mode of the decorative pattern that represents "4" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern that represents "4" in the right decorative pattern 8R may change with animation. This also applies to the changes in the display mode below. The order in which the display mode changes may be set arbitrarily. For example, the display mode of the decorative pattern that represents "4" that is temporarily stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may change to a large character mode at the same time, or may change in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may change in the order of the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(J), the center decorative pattern 8C, which was being displayed in a variable manner, is temporarily stopped. Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "5" in the center decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped in an Arabic mode.

Next, as shown in Figure 66 (K), the display modes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped, all change. Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "4" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a large character mode to a Roman mode, and the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "5" in the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from a Roman mode to a large character mode. The order in which the display mode of each decorative pattern changes may be set arbitrarily. That is, the order in which the display mode changes may be the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, or the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or the right decorative pattern 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, or the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, or the middle decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8L. In addition, two decorative patterns may change simultaneously, and then the remaining one decorative pattern may change, or one decorative pattern may change, and then two decorative patterns may change simultaneously. Furthermore, all three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may change simultaneously.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(L), of the decorative patterns that were temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the display modes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change again. Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "4" that was temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R changes from the Roman mode to the large font mode. The order in which the display modes change may be set arbitrarily. For example, the left decorative pattern 8L may change in the order of the right decorative pattern 8R, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8L, or the two may change simultaneously. After this, the variable performance ends, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

The above is a display example of decorative pattern change presentation B. By configuring the device to be able to execute decorative pattern change presentation B, the display state of each of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R changes during the provisional stop display that indicates a reach, making it possible to entertain the player with the display of decorative patterns in the variable presentation, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Decorative pattern change performance C]
67(A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining the decorative pattern change performance C. The decorative pattern change performance C is a performance in which the decorative pattern changes during the change performance, and the decorative pattern is displayed changeably and stationarily. In this example, the image display is performed by the display screen 7a, but may be performed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, respectively, and during deceleration variation, they are displayed vertically side by side so that two or more patterns are visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. During high-speed variation, the contents of the patterns are displayed so that they are difficult to see. During stop display, one pattern is displayed so that it is visible on the display screen 7a, but multiple patterns may be visible at the same time. Also, if the result of the special drawing is a winning combination, the three symbols lined up in a straight line will stop in a winning configuration. Note that the three symbols lined up in a straight line here include those lined up in a roughly straight line. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

When executing decorative pattern change performance C, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be displayed in three different display modes. Specifically, each can be changed to the three display modes described above: Arabic mode, Roman mode, and large font mode.

The display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable performance will be the same as the display mode of the decorative pattern that was fixed and stopped after the end of the variable performance that was executed immediately before. For example, if the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped in an Arabic style, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped in a large font style, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped in a Roman style after the end of the variable performance, the display mode of each decorative pattern at the start of the next variable performance executed will be the Arabic style for the left decorative pattern 8L, the large font style for the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the Roman style for the right decorative pattern 8R.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative pattern can be changed at any timing during the variation performance. For example, during the deceleration variation display, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing a certain number can be changed from the Roman mode to the large character mode. In this case, the pattern arrangement in which the contents represented by each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged from bottom to top of the display screen 7a as "123456789" does not change in each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, and 8R. For example, in a decorative pattern displayed in an Arabic numerals mode, if the display mode of the decorative pattern after the decorative pattern representing "4" becomes the large character mode, the pattern arrangement becomes "123456789", and from the next lap onwards it becomes "123456789". Also, for example, when a decorative pattern is displayed in a temporary stop mode, the display mode of the decorative pattern displayed in a temporary stop mode can be changed from the large character mode to the Arabic mode. As mentioned above, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable performance is inherited from the display mode when it stopped after the previous variable performance ended. For example, if a decorative pattern in an Arabic form representing "7" temporarily stops, then changes to a large character form and stops, the pattern arrangement displayed in the next variable performance will continue with "Urushi Sakku", and from the next lap it will be "Ichi Ni San Shi Go Roku Urushi Sakku".

Furthermore, the decorative pattern may be configured by combining a number image that represents the content of the decorative pattern with a character image. In this case, the change in the display mode may be such that in addition to or instead of the change in the display mode of the number image, the display mode of the character image is changed. For example, the display modes of the character image may be a front-facing display mode in which the character image faces forward, a right-facing display mode in which the character image faces to the right, and a left-facing display mode in which the character image faces to the left, and the display mode may be changed arbitrarily at the timing described above.

First, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the decorative pattern representing "7" in the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed temporarily stopped in an Arabic style, and the other decorative patterns are displayed changing rapidly and are difficult to see. This is the state in which only the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed temporarily stopped after the changing performance has started and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change rapidly and their respective contents become difficult to see. Here, the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the changing icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed. Note that, after the changing performance that was executed before this changing performance has ended, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed as fixedly stopped in an Arabic style, and the explanation will continue assuming that the result of the special drawing that triggered this changing performance was a miss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L, which was temporarily stopped, changes from an Arabic mode to a large font mode. This change in display mode may be accompanied by animation. This also applies to the following changes in display mode. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed and remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), the Arabic-style decorative pattern representing the number "8" temporarily stops in the right decorative pattern 8R, which was being displayed in a changing manner. Meanwhile, the center decorative pattern 8C is changing at high speed and remains difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R, which was temporarily stopped, changes from an Arabic mode to a large font mode. Meanwhile, the center decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed and remains difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), the Arabic-style decorative pattern representing the number "5" temporarily stops in the middle decorative pattern 8C that was being displayed in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in Figure 67 (F), the display modes of all the decorative patterns that were temporarily stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change. Specifically, the display modes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change from the large character mode to the Arabic mode, and the display mode of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from the Arabic mode to the large character mode. The order in which the display modes of the decorative patterns change may be set arbitrarily. That is, the order of the change of the display mode may be the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, or the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or the right decorative pattern 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, or the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, or the middle decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8L. In addition, the remaining one decorative pattern may change after two decorative patterns change at the same time, or two decorative patterns may change at the same time after one decorative pattern changes. Furthermore, all three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may change at the same time. After this, the variable performance ends and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

The above is a display example of the decorative pattern change presentation C. By configuring the device to be able to execute the decorative pattern change presentation C, the display state of each of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R changes during the temporary stop display, making it possible to entertain the player with the display of the decorative patterns in the variable presentation, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Decorative pattern change performance D]
67(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the decorative pattern change performance D. The decorative pattern change performance D is a performance in which the decorative pattern changes during the change performance, and the decorative pattern is displayed changeably and stationarily. In this example, the image display is performed by the display screen 7a, but may be performed by the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, respectively, and during deceleration variation, they are displayed vertically side by side so that two or more patterns are visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. During high-speed variation, the contents of the patterns are displayed so that they are difficult to see. During stop display, one pattern is displayed so that it is visible on the display screen 7a, but multiple patterns may be visible at the same time. Also, if the result of the special drawing is a winning combination, the three symbols lined up in a straight line will stop in a winning configuration. Note that the three symbols lined up in a straight line here include those lined up in a roughly straight line. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

When executing decorative pattern change performance D, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be displayed in three different display modes. Specifically, each of the three display modes can be changed to a frameless mode in which the number image included in the decorative pattern is not surrounded by a pattern frame image, a hexagonal frame mode in which the number image included in the decorative pattern is surrounded by a hexagonal pattern frame, and a circular frame mode in which the number image included in the decorative pattern is surrounded by a circular pattern frame. Hereinafter, the notation of the decorative pattern may be expressed in accordance with the content of the decorative pattern, such as simply "4," or may be expressed including the display mode, such as "4 (no)" or "6 (circle)."

The display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable performance will be the same as the display mode of the decorative pattern that was fixed and stopped after the end of the variable performance that was executed immediately before. For example, if the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped in a frameless mode, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped in a hexagonal frame mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped in a circular frame mode after the variable performance ends, the display mode of each decorative pattern at the start of the next variable performance executed will be the left decorative pattern 8L in a frameless mode, the middle decorative pattern 8C in a hexagonal frame mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R in a circular frame mode.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative pattern can be changed at any timing during the variation performance. For example, during the deceleration variation display, the display mode can be changed from a hexagonal frame mode to a frameless mode from a decorative pattern representing a certain number. In this case, the pattern arrangement in which the contents represented by each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged from bottom to top of the display screen 7a as "123456789" does not change for each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, and 8R. For example, in a decorative pattern displayed in a frameless number mode, if the display mode of the decorative pattern after the decorative pattern representing "4" becomes a hexagonal frame mode, the pattern arrangement becomes "1 (no) 2 (no) 3 (no) 4 (hexagon) 5 (hexagon) 6 (hexagon) 7 (hexagon) 8 (hexagon) 9 (hexagon)", and from the next lap onwards it becomes "1 (hexagon) 2 (hexagon) 3 (hexagon) 4 (hexagon) 5 (hexagon) 6 (hexagon) 7 (hexagon) 8 (hexagon) 9 (hexagon)". Also, for example, when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern can change from a circular frame mode to a hexagonal frame mode. As described above, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable performance is inherited from the display mode when it was fixedly stopped after the previous variable performance ended. For example, in a certain decorative pattern, if a decorative pattern of a circular frame mode representing "7" temporarily stops, then changes to a hexagonal frame mode and is fixedly stopped, the pattern arrangement displayed in the next variable performance will be "7 (hexagon) 8 (hexagon) 9 (hexagon)" and will continue, and from the next lap, it will be "1 (hexagon) 2 (hexagon) 3 (hexagon) 4 (hexagon) 5 (hexagon) 6 (hexagon) 7 (hexagon) 8 (hexagon) 9 (hexagon)".

Furthermore, the decorative pattern may be configured by combining a number image that represents the content of the decorative pattern with a character image. In this case, the change in the display mode may be such that the display mode of the character image changes in addition to or instead of the change in the display mode of the pattern frame. For example, the display modes of the character image may be a front-facing display mode in which the character image faces forward, a right-facing display mode in which the character image faces to the right, and a left-facing display mode in which the character image faces to the left, and the display mode may be changed arbitrarily at the timing described above.

First, as shown in FIG. 67(G), the decorative pattern representing "7" in the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed temporarily stopped in a frameless manner, and the other decorative patterns are displayed changing rapidly and are difficult to see. This is a state in which only the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed temporarily stopped after the changing performance has started and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change rapidly and their respective contents become difficult to see. Here, the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the changing icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed. Note that, after the changing performance that was executed before this changing performance has ended, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed as fixedly stopped in a frameless manner, and the explanation will continue assuming that the result of the special drawing that triggered this changing performance was a miss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(H), the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L, which has been temporarily stopped, changes from a frameless mode to a hexagonal frame mode. This change in display mode may be accompanied by animation. This also applies to the following changes in display mode. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed and remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(I), the frameless decorative pattern representing "6" in the right decorative pattern 8R that was being displayed changes temporarily stops, forming a reach. Note that the center decorative pattern 8C is changing at high speed and remains difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(J), the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R, which was temporarily stopped, changes from a frameless mode to a hexagonal frame mode. Note that the center decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed and remains difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(K), the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that were temporarily stopped changes from a hexagonal frame mode to a circular frame mode. The order in which the display modes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change may be set arbitrarily. That is, the display modes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may change simultaneously, or may change in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may change in the order of the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(L), in the center decorative pattern 8C that was being displayed in a variable manner, the frameless decorative pattern representing "7" temporarily stops, and the display modes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that were temporarily stopped change. Specifically, the display modes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change from a circular frame mode to a hexagonal frame mode. The order of the temporary stop of the center decorative pattern 8C and the change in the display modes of the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R may be set arbitrarily. That is, the order may be a change in the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L, a change in the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R, and a temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C; or the order may be a change in the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L, a temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and a change in the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R, a change in the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L, and a temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C; or the order may be a change in the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R, a temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and a change in the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L, or the order may be a temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C, a change in the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L, and a change in the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R, or the order may be a temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C, a change in the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R, and a change in the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L. Also, the display modes of the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R may change simultaneously and then the center decorative pattern 8C may temporarily stop, or the display modes of the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R may change simultaneously after the center decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. Furthermore, the change in the child modes of the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R and the temporary stop of the center decorative pattern 8C may all be executed simultaneously. After this, the variable performance ends and each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is fixed and stopped.

The above is a display example of the decorative pattern change performance D. By configuring the device to be able to execute the decorative pattern change performance D, the display state of each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R changes during the provisional stop display that indicates a reach, making it possible to entertain the player with the display of the decorative patterns in the variable performance, and thus increasing the interest of the game.

[Decorative pattern change effect E]
68(A) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the decorative pattern change performance E. The decorative pattern change performance E is a performance in which the decorative pattern changes during the change performance, and the decorative pattern is displayed changeably and stationarily. In this example, the image display is performed by the display screen 7a, but may be performed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, respectively, and during deceleration variation, they are displayed vertically side by side so that two or more patterns are visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. During high-speed variation, the contents of the patterns are displayed so that they are difficult to see. During stop display, one pattern is displayed so that it is visible on the display screen 7a, but multiple patterns may be visible at the same time. Also, if the result of the special drawing is a winning combination, the three symbols lined up in a straight line will stop in a winning configuration. Note that the three symbols lined up in a straight line here include those lined up in a roughly straight line. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

When executing the decorative pattern change performance E, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be displayed in three different display modes. Specifically, each can be changed to the three display modes described above: the Arabic mode, the Roman mode, and the large font mode.

The display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable performance will be the same as the display mode of the decorative pattern that was fixed and stopped after the end of the variable performance that was executed immediately before. For example, if the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped in an Arabic style, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped in a large font style, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped in a Roman style after the end of the variable performance, the display mode of each decorative pattern at the start of the next variable performance executed will be the Arabic style for the left decorative pattern 8L, the large font style for the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the Roman style for the right decorative pattern 8R.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative pattern can be changed at any timing during the variation performance. For example, during the deceleration variation display, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing a certain number can be changed from the Roman mode to the large character mode. In this case, the pattern arrangement in which the contents represented by each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged from bottom to top of the display screen 7a as "123456789" does not change in each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, and 8R. For example, in a decorative pattern displayed in an Arabic numerals mode, if the display mode of the decorative pattern after the decorative pattern representing "4" becomes the large character mode, the pattern arrangement becomes "123456789", and from the next lap onwards it becomes "123456789". Also, for example, when a decorative pattern is displayed in a temporary stop mode, the display mode of the decorative pattern displayed in a temporary stop mode can be changed from the large character mode to the Arabic mode. As mentioned above, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable performance is inherited from the display mode when it stopped after the previous variable performance ended. For example, if a decorative pattern in an Arabic form representing "7" temporarily stops, then changes to a large character form and stops, the pattern arrangement displayed in the next variable performance will continue with "Urushi Sakku", and from the next lap it will be "Ichi Ni San Shi Go Roku Urushi Sakku".

Furthermore, the decorative pattern may be configured by combining a number image that represents the content of the decorative pattern with a character image. In this case, the change in the display mode may be such that in addition to or instead of the change in the display mode of the number image, the display mode of the character image is changed. For example, the display modes of the character image may be a front-facing display mode in which the character image faces forward, a right-facing display mode in which the character image faces to the right, and a left-facing display mode in which the character image faces to the left, and the display mode may be changed arbitrarily at the timing described above.

First, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the change performance begins, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed, making it difficult to see their respective contents. Here, the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the change icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed. After the change performance that was being performed prior to this change performance ends, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed as fixed and stopped in an Arabic style, and the explanation will continue assuming that the result of the special symbol lottery that triggered this change performance was a miss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(B), of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that were displayed at high speed, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed at a decelerated speed. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed at a decelerated speed so that at least two of the decorative patterns included in the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L are visible on the display screen 7a. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R maintain their high speed display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(C), the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L, which is displayed in a decelerating manner, changes from an Arabic mode to a large character mode. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "3" changes from an Arabic mode to a large character mode, and all decorative patterns which frame in thereafter will be in the large character mode. The display mode of the decorative pattern representing "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L may be in the large character mode when framed in, or may change from the Arabic mode to the Roman mode after framing in. If it changes after framing in, it may change with an animation. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain their high-speed variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(D), the large-font decorative pattern representing the number "6" in the left decorative pattern 8L, which had been displayed in a decelerating manner, temporarily stops. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain their high-speed display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(E), the display mode of the decorative pattern representing the "6" that was temporarily stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a large font mode to a Roman font mode. This change may be accompanied by animation. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain the high-speed changing display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(F), the right decorative pattern 8R, which had been displayed as fluctuating at high speed, is displayed as fluctuating at a reduced speed. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at a reduced speed so that at least two of the decorative patterns included in the pattern arrangement of the right decorative pattern 8R are visible on the display screen 7a. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L maintains a temporary stop of the Roman-shaped decorative pattern representing "6," and the center decorative pattern 8C maintains a fluctuating display at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(G), the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R, which is displayed with a decelerating fluctuation, changes from an Arabic mode to a large character mode. Here, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "7" changes from an Arabic mode to a large character mode, and all decorative patterns that frame in thereafter will be in the large character mode. The display mode of the decorative pattern representing "7" in the left decorative pattern 8L may be in the large character mode when framed in, or may change from the Arabic mode to the Roman mode after framing in. If it changes after framing in, it may change with animation. Note that the temporary stop of the Roman mode decorative pattern representing "6" is maintained in the left decorative pattern 8L, and the high-speed fluctuation display is maintained in the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H), the large-lettered decorative pattern representing the number "9" temporarily stops in the right decorative pattern 8R, which had been displayed with a decelerating fluctuation. Note that the Roman-lettered decorative pattern representing the number "6" temporarily stops in the left decorative pattern 8L, and the high-speed fluctuation display is maintained in the center decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(I), the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "9" that was temporarily stopped in the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a large font mode to a Roman font mode. This change may be accompanied by animation. Note that the temporarily stopped Roman font mode decorative pattern representing "6" is maintained in the left decorative pattern 8L, and the high-speed changing display is maintained in the center decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(J), the center decorative pattern 8C, which had been displayed changing at high speed, changes at a reduced speed, and the Arabic-style decorative pattern representing the number "3" is temporarily stopped. Note that the temporarily stopped Roman-style decorative pattern representing the number "6" is maintained in the left decorative pattern 8L, and the temporarily stopped Roman-style decorative pattern representing the number "9" is maintained in the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(K), the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "3" that was temporarily stopped in the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from an Arabic mode to a large font mode. This change may be accompanied by animation. Note that the temporarily stopped Roman-style decorative pattern representing "6" is maintained in the left decorative pattern 8L, and the temporarily stopped Roman-style decorative pattern representing "9" is maintained in the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(L), the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "6" that was temporarily stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern representing "9" that was temporarily stopped in the right decorative pattern 8R both change from the Roman mode to the large font mode. The order in which the display modes change may be set arbitrarily. For example, the display modes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may change simultaneously, or the display modes may change in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, or the display modes may change in the order of the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L. After this, the variable performance ends, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

The above is a display example of the decorative pattern change performance E. By configuring the device to be able to execute the decorative pattern change performance E, the display state of each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R changes during the deceleration change display or the temporary stop display, making it possible to entertain the player with the display of the decorative patterns in the change performance and increasing the interest of the game.

[Example of effect]
The following are examples of the effects of this embodiment.
[Effect 1]
According to Figs. 66 to 68, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can execute a performance in which the number of times the display mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R changes varies depending on the decorative pattern from the start to the end of the variable performance. For example, the number of times the display mode changes in the decorative pattern change performance A is 3 times for the left decorative pattern 8L, 0 times for the center decorative pattern 8C, and 2 times for the right decorative pattern 8R. Also, the number of times the display mode changes in the decorative pattern change performance B is 3 times for the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and 1 time for the center decorative pattern 8C. The number of times the display mode changes in the decorative pattern change performance C is 2 times for the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and 1 time for the center decorative pattern 8C. The number of times the display mode changes in the decorative pattern change performance D is 3 times for the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and 0 times for the center decorative pattern 8C. The number of times the display mode changes in the decorative symbol change presentation E is three times for the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, and one time for the center decorative symbol 8C. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be increased.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponds to the "display means" in claim 1.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 66(G) to (K), the first effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the second effect in which the display mode of the left decorative symbol 8L changes from an Arabic mode to a large character mode after the first effect, the third effect in which the display mode of the left decorative symbol 8L changes from a large character mode to a Roman mode after the second effect, and the fourth effect in which the display mode of the center decorative symbol 8C changes from an Arabic mode to a large character mode after the second effect can be executed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effects, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
As shown in Figures 66(G) to 66(K), the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to be able to execute a fifth effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped after the first effect and before the second effect, and a sixth effect in which the center decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped after the second effect and before the fourth effect. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented and novel effects, and the interest can be increased.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 66(K) to 66(L), after the third effect, a seventh effect can be executed in which the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a Roman form to a large character form. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented and novel effect, and can increase the player's interest.

[Modification]
A modified example of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern change performance, the display mode of each decorative pattern at the time of the fixed stop may be changed according to the expectation that the result of the special pattern lottery that triggered the variable performance will be a hit. For example, the expectation that the result of the special pattern lottery that triggered the variable performance will be a hit increases as the decorative pattern at the time of the fixed stop is in the order of Arabic mode, large character mode, and Roman mode.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern change performance, a decorative pattern may be used that is configured by combining a character image, a number image, and a pattern frame. In this case, the display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed by changing the positional relationship between the character image, the number image, and the pattern frame. In addition, in this case, the display mode may be changed by changing the pose or expression of the character image. In addition, the voice or sound of the character may be output, or the displayed character may be changed to another character. Furthermore, in this case, the size of the pattern frame may be changed to change the display mode of the decorative pattern.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern change performance, the display mode of the decorative pattern may change so that the number image representing the content of the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see. In addition, other character strings may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
When the display mode of the decorative pattern changes during the decorative pattern change performance, the display mode may be switched to another display mode at the start of the next change performance. For example, if the display mode is always Arabic at the start of the change performance, and the display mode is fixed and stopped in the large font mode after the end of a certain change performance, the display mode will change to Arabic at the start of the next change performance.

[Modification 5]
The decorative pattern change effects A to E described above may be combined as appropriate.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a plurality of decorative patterns;
The display mode of the plurality of decorative patterns may change,
The number of times the display mode changes between the start and end of the variable performance varies depending on the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to A6-1,
A first effect in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner;
A second effect in which the display mode of the first decorative pattern changes from the first effect to the second effect after the first effect;
After the second effect, a third effect in which the display mode of the first decorative pattern changes from the second mode to the third mode;
After the second performance, a fourth performance in which the display mode of the second decorative pattern changes from the first mode to the second mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-2,
A fifth effect in which the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the first effect and before the second effect;
A sixth effect in which the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the second effect and before the fourth effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-2,
After the third performance, a seventh performance can be executed in which the display mode of the first decorative pattern changes from the third mode to the second mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The character pop-out effect 1, character pop-out effect 2, and number pattern change effect are explained below with reference to Figures 69 to 71. These character pop-out effect 1, character pop-out effect 2, and number pattern change effects are executed in the decorative pattern change effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a change effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Character pop-out effect 1]
69 is a diagram for explaining the character pop-out performance 1. The character pop-out performance 1 is a performance in which the characters 8LK, 8CK, and 8RK displayed inside the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a are displayed in front of the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW, and then the characters 8LK, 8CK, and 8RK displayed in front of the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW are displayed inside the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW.

First, as shown in FIG. 69(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed, and the decorative patterns are changing. Here, reserved icons 9A and 9C are displayed. Note that reserved icon 9B may be displayed, or not all reserved icons may be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the left decorative pattern 8L stops. Here, the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern is displayed inside the frame 8LW of the left decorative pattern. The center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(C), a predetermined period of time has passed since the left decorative pattern 8L stopped, and then the right decorative pattern 8R stops. In this embodiment, the number of the stopped right decorative pattern 8R is the same as the number of the left decorative pattern 8L. In other words, a reach is achieved. Immediately after the right decorative pattern 8R stops, the character 8RK of the right decorative pattern is displayed inside the frame 8RW of the right decorative pattern. The center decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 69 (D) and (E), the character 8LK inside the left decorative pattern changes with animation. The timing for starting this animation is immediately after the right decorative pattern 8R stops, that is, immediately after the reach is established. The character 8LK of the left decorative pattern after the change is displayed in front of the frame 8LW of the left decorative pattern. The head and tail of the fish character 8LK cover part of the frame 8LW of the left decorative pattern. The character 8LK of the left decorative pattern is presented as if it is jumping out of the frame 8LW of the left decorative pattern. The right decorative pattern 8R also changes with animation in the same way as the left decorative pattern 8L, and the character 8RK of the right decorative pattern after the change is displayed in front of the frame 8RW of the right decorative pattern and covers part of the frame 8RW of the right decorative pattern. The middle decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(F), after the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern and the character 8RK of the right decorative pattern change, the center decorative pattern 8C slows down. This slow speed is a speed at which the player can tell which decorative pattern is changing. In this embodiment, the timing of this slow speed is after the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern and the character 8RK of the right decorative pattern change with animation, but it may also be immediately after a reach is established.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(G), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reach was achieved, the center decorative pattern 8C stops. In this embodiment, the number on the stopped center decorative pattern 8C is different from the numbers on the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. In other words, the stopped left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R indicate that the reach has been missed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(H) and (I), for the left decorative pattern 8L, the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern is displayed inside the frame 8LW of the left decorative pattern with animation immediately after the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. The character 8LK of the left decorative pattern is presented as if it jumps into the frame 8LW of the left decorative pattern. The right decorative pattern 8R is presented in the same manner as the left decorative pattern 8L. For the middle decorative pattern 8C, the character 8CK inside the middle decorative pattern changes with animation in parallel with the change of the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern and the character 8RK of the right decorative pattern immediately after the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. The character 8CK of the middle decorative pattern after the change is displayed in front of the frame 8CW of the middle decorative pattern. The character 8CK of the middle decorative pattern after the change covers a part of the frame 8CW of the middle decorative pattern. The character 8CK of the middle decorative pattern is presented as if it is jumping out from the frame 8CW of the middle decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(J), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the character 8CK of the middle decorative pattern is displayed in front of the middle decorative pattern frame 8CW, the character 8CK in front of the middle decorative pattern frame is displayed inside the middle decorative pattern frame 8CW accompanied by animation. The character 8CK of the middle decorative pattern is presented as if it is jumping into the middle decorative pattern frame 8CW. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R do not change.

In this embodiment, the timing at which the character 8LK inside the left decorative pattern performs the animation is immediately after the right decorative pattern 8R stops, but the timing at which the character 8LK inside the left decorative pattern performs the animation may also be immediately after the left decorative pattern 8L stops. In this case, the timing at which the character 8LK inside the left decorative pattern and the character 8RK inside the right decorative pattern perform the animation is different.

[Character pop-out effect 2]
70 is a diagram for explaining the character pop-out performance 2. The character pop-out performance 2 is a performance in which the characters 8LK, 8CK, and 8RK displayed inside the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a are displayed in front of the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW, and the appearance of the characters 8LK, 8CK, and 8RK changes, and then the characters 8LK, 8CK, and 8RK displayed in front of the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW are displayed inside the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW.

In character pop-out performance 2, the same operations as in character pop-out performance 1 are performed during the change of decorative patterns. Although not detailed here, in character pop-out performance 2, the same operations as those in Figures 69(A), (B), (C), (D), and (E) are performed, and then the operation shown in Figure 70(A), which is the same as the operation in Figure 69(F), is performed.

After the same operations as those shown in Figures 69 (A), (B), (C), (D), and (E) are performed, as shown in Figure 70 (A), the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern and the character 8RK of the right decorative pattern change, and then the middle decorative pattern 8C slows down. In this embodiment, the timing of this slowing down is after the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern and the character 8RK of the right decorative pattern change with animation, but it may also be immediately after a reach is established. Here, the reserved icons 9A and 9C are displayed. Note that the reserved icon 9B may be displayed, or all reserved icons may not be displayed (same below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reach was achieved, the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern changes with animation. Specifically, the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern, which represents a fish, performs an animation of opening its mouth, changing from a closed mouth state to an open mouth state. Also, the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern remains displayed in front of the frame 8LW of the left decorative pattern, covering a part of the frame 8LW of the left decorative pattern. The character 8RK of the right decorative pattern also changes in the same way as the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at a slow speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), even after the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern and the character 8RK of the right decorative pattern change, the center decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at a slow speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reach was achieved, the center decorative pattern 8C stops. In this embodiment, the number on the stopped center decorative pattern 8C is different from the numbers on the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. In other words, the stopped left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R indicate that the reach has been missed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), for the left decorative pattern 8L, immediately after the center decorative pattern 8C stops, the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern, which represents a fish, changes from an open-mouthed state to a closed-mouthed state, accompanied by animation. The character 8RK of the right decorative pattern also changes in the same way as the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern. Here, the center decorative pattern does not change.

Next, as shown in Fig. 70(F) and (G), for the left decorative pattern 8L, the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern is displayed inside the frame 8LW of the left decorative pattern with animation immediately after the action of Fig. 70(E). The character 8LK of the left decorative pattern is presented as if jumping into the frame 8LW of the left decorative pattern. The right decorative pattern 8R is also presented in the same manner as the left decorative pattern 8L. For the middle decorative pattern 8C, the character 8CK inside the middle decorative pattern changes with animation in parallel with the change of the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern and the character 8RK of the right decorative pattern immediately after the action of Fig. 70(E). The character 8CK of the middle decorative pattern after the change is displayed in front of the frame 8CW of the middle decorative pattern. The character 8CK of the middle decorative pattern after the change covers a part of the frame 8CW of the middle decorative pattern. The character 8CK of the middle decorative pattern is presented as if it is jumping out from the frame 8CW of the middle decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(H), after a certain period of time has elapsed since the character 8CK of the middle decorative pattern is displayed in front of the frame 8CW of the middle decorative pattern, the character 8CK of the middle decorative pattern is displayed inside the frame 8CW of the middle decorative pattern accompanied by animation. The character 8CK of the middle decorative pattern is presented as if it is jumping into the frame 8CW of the middle decorative pattern. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R do not change.

[Number and pattern change effect]
71 is a diagram for explaining the number symbol change effect. The number symbol change effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing numbers on the display screen 7a change at the timing of reaching a winning state, reaching a winning state, and when the middle symbol stops.

As shown in FIG. 71(A), the right decorative pattern 8R stops. The left decorative pattern 8L has been stopped before the right decorative pattern 8R stops. The right decorative pattern 8R stops. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are decorative patterns with a flat design. In this embodiment, the number of the stopped right decorative pattern 8R is the same as the number of the left decorative pattern 8L. In other words, a reach is achieved. The middle decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Here, the reserved icons 9A and 9C are displayed. Note that the reserved icon 9B may be displayed, or not all reserved icons may be displayed (same below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), immediately after the reach is achieved, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change from a two-dimensional design to a three-dimensional design. This change is accompanied by animation. The center decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), after a certain period of time has passed since the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R changed, the middle decorative pattern 8C will change at a slower speed. In this embodiment, the timing of this slowing down is after the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R have changed to decorative patterns with a three-dimensional design accompanied by animation, but it may also be immediately after a reach is achieved. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C is a decorative pattern with a two-dimensional design.

Next, as shown in Figures 71(D) and (E), after a certain period of time has passed since the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R changed to decorative patterns with a three-dimensional design, the left decorative pattern 8L changes to a larger pattern than before the change. This change is accompanied by animation.
The right decorative pattern 8R changes in the same manner as the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(F), even after the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change into larger patterns, the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at a slow speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(G), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reach was achieved, the center decorative pattern 8C stops. In this embodiment, the number on the stopped center decorative pattern 8C is different from the numbers on the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. In other words, the stopped left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R indicate that the reach has been missed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(H), immediately after the center decorative pattern 8C stops, the left decorative pattern 8L changes to a decorative pattern with a three-dimensional design accompanied by animation. The right decorative pattern 8R also changes in the same way as the left decorative pattern 8L. Here, the center decorative pattern does not change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (I), immediately after the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change into decorative patterns with a three-dimensional design, the left decorative pattern 8L changes into a decorative pattern with a two-dimensional design accompanied by animation. The right decorative pattern 8R also changes in the same way as the left decorative pattern 8L. The center decorative pattern 8C changes into a decorative pattern with a three-dimensional design accompanied by animation in parallel with the changes in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(J), after a certain period of time has passed since the middle decorative pattern 8C changed into a decorative pattern with a three-dimensional design, the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from a three-dimensional design to a decorative pattern with a two-dimensional design accompanied by animation. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R do not change.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of character pop-out effect 1, character pop-out effect 2, and number and pattern change effect.

[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "character pop-out performance 1", the display screen 7a is provided with a display screen capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, one of which is a left decorative pattern 8L, which includes a frame image 8LW representing a pattern frame and a character image 8LK representing a character, and the display screen 7a is capable of executing a first performance (FIGS. 69(B), (C)) in which the left decorative pattern 8L of a first mode in which an image 8LK representing a part of a character is displayed inside the frame image 8LW, and a second performance (FIGS. 69(D), (E)) in which a character pops out from inside the frame image 8LW, the character image 8LK is displayed on the front side of the frame image 8LW, and at least a part of the frame image 8LW is covered by the character image 8LK is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "character jump-out effect 1", after the second effect (Fig. 69 (D), (E)), the character displayed on the front side of the frame image 8LW on the display screen 7a jumps into the frame represented by the frame image 8LW, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the first aspect is displayed with an image 8LK representing a part of the character displayed inside the frame image 8LW. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel effect, and can increase the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "character pop-out effect 1", one of the multiple types of images is a second middle decorative pattern 8C different from the left decorative pattern 8L, and the second middle decorative pattern 8C includes a frame image 8CW representing the frame of the pattern and a character image 8CK representing a character, and after the second effect (FIGS. 69(D), (E)) and before the third effect (FIGS. 69(H), (I)), an image 8CK representing a part of the character is displayed inside the frame image 8CW on the display screen 7a. In parallel with the fourth effect (FIGS. 69(F), (G)) in which the second central decorative pattern 8C of the first mode shown is displayed, and the third effect (FIGS. 69(H), (I)), a fifth effect (FIGS. 69(H), (I)) in which a character jumps out from inside the frame image 8CW on the display screen 7a, a character image 8CK is displayed on the front side of the frame image 8CW, and the second central decorative pattern 8C of the second mode in which at least a part of the frame image 8CW is covered by the character image 8CK is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effect, and the interest can be increased.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Character Pop-out Presentation 1," the second presentation (FIGS. 69(D), (E)) is performed after a reach is achieved (FIG. 69(C)). With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining for the player, and can increase the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of character pop-out effect 1, character pop-out effect 2, and number and pattern change effect are shown.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the first effect (Figures 69 (B) and (C)), the second effect (Figures 69 (D) and (E)), the third effect (Figures 69 (H) and (I)), the fourth effect (Figures 69 (F) and (G)), and the fifth effect (Figures 69 (H) and (I)) are performed, but it is also possible to perform up to the first effect (Figures 69 (B) and (C)) and the second effect (Figures 69 (D) and (E)).

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, not only the left decorative pattern 8L but also the right decorative pattern 8R are produced, but only the left decorative pattern 8L may be produced. In other words, only the first production (FIGS. 69(B), (C)), the second production (FIGS. 69(D), (E)), and the third production (FIGS. 69(H), (I)) may be produced.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the second effect (FIGS. 69(D) and (E)) is performed after a reach is achieved, but it may be performed before the reach is achieved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative design;
The decorative pattern includes a frame image representing a frame of the pattern and a character image representing a character,
A first effect is displayed on the display means, the decorative pattern being a first aspect in which an image representing a part of the character is displayed inside the frame image;
and a second effect is displayed on the display means after the first effect, in which the character pops out from inside the frame image, the character image is displayed on the front side of the frame image, and the decorative pattern in a second mode in which at least a part of the frame image is covered by the character image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-1,
After the second performance, the display means is capable of executing a third performance in which the character displayed on the front side of the frame image jumps into the inside of the frame represented by the frame image, and the decorative pattern of the first aspect in which an image representing a part of the character is displayed inside the frame image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern;
The second decorative pattern includes a frame image representing a frame of the pattern and a character image representing a character,
a fourth effect in which, after the second effect and before the third effect, the display means displays the second decorative pattern of the first aspect in which an image representing a part of the character is displayed inside the frame image;
A fifth effect is executed in which, in parallel with the third effect, the display means displays the second decorative pattern in a second mode in which the character pops out from inside the frame image, the character image is displayed on the front side of the frame image, and at least a part of the frame image is covered with the character image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-3,
The second performance is performed after a reach is established.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending icon blocking effect will be explained below with reference to Figures 72 to 74. This pending icon blocking effect is executed during the variable effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command contains an instruction to execute the pending icon blocking effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Pending icon cover-up effect A]
72(A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining the reserved icon shielding effect A. The reserved icon shielding effect A is an effect in which a cover image including a character image frames in from the bottom of the display screen 7a during a change effect, covers a part of the reserved icon and the decorative pattern, and then frames out, which is an effect to suggest a change in reserved status. In this example, the image display is performed by the display screen 7a, but may also be performed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, respectively, and during deceleration variation, they are displayed vertically side by side so that two or more patterns are visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. During high-speed variation, the contents of the patterns are displayed so that they are difficult to see. During stop display, one pattern is displayed so that it is visible on the display screen 7a, but multiple patterns may be visible at the same time. Also, if the result of the special drawing is a winning combination, the three symbols lined up in a straight line will stop in a winning configuration. Note that the three symbols lined up in a straight line here include those lined up in a roughly straight line. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 72(A), the change performance begins, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed, making it difficult to see their respective contents. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the change performance icon 9C are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a (below the left decorative pattern 8L). Note that no reserved change performance is performed during this change performance, and furthermore, the explanation will continue assuming that the result of the special pattern lottery that triggered this change performance was a miss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), the cover image CI1 including the character image is moved vertically upward from the lower part of the position where the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, and is framed in. As a result, a part of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a and a part of the variable icon 9C are covered by the cover image CI1. After this, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area becomes difficult to see, and then the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, and the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area become difficult to see one by one in that order. That is, the number of reserved icons 9A that become difficult to see gradually increases. In addition, the character image included in the cover image CI1 may be displayed while performing animation, or the cover image CI1 may be composed of only the character image, or may be of a size that makes only the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C difficult to see and does not make the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see. The same applies to the subsequent cases. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), the cover image CI1, which has been framed in from the lower part of the position where the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, is framed in entirely and then stopped, and all the displayed reserved icons 9A, the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L become difficult to see. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L undergoes a deceleration variable display and the decorative pattern representing "3" is temporarily stopped. In this case, the time when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and the time when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes difficult to see may be set arbitrarily. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped at the same time as it becomes difficult to see due to the cover image CI1, or it may be temporarily stopped after it becomes difficult to see, or it may become difficult to see after it is temporarily stopped. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly fluctuating and maintain a state in which the contents are difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), the right decorative pattern 8R, which had been displayed as changing at high speed, undergoes a deceleration change display and the decorative pattern representing "6" is displayed as temporarily stopped. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains its display of changing at high speed. At this time, the cover image CI1 maintains its stopped display, which makes the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see, so it is unclear whether it is changing again or maintaining its temporary stop display, but here it is assumed that it is maintaining its temporary stop display. After the left decorative pattern 8L changes again, a reach may be formed, etc.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(E), the cover image CI1, which was displayed as stopped, moves vertically upward on the display screen 7a and frames out. In addition, along with this, a part of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a and a part of the variable icon 9C, which were each difficult to see, become visible. After this, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area becomes visible, and then the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, and the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area become visible one by one in that order. That is, the number of the reserved icons 9A that become visible gradually increases. The scene shown in FIG. 72(E) is a display example after all the reserved icons 9A become visible. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed variable display, and the right decorative pattern 8R maintains the temporary stop display. At this time, the cover image CI1 maintains the moving display, but the left decorative pattern 8L is still difficult to see, so it is unclear whether it is changing again or maintaining the temporary stop display, but here we will assume that it is maintaining the temporary stop display. Also, the reserved icon obscuring effect A is an effect that suggests that the display mode of the reserved icon 9A or the changing icon 9C will change to a mode with a higher probability of a jackpot, but in this case, we will assume that the reserved has not changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(F), the bottom end of the cover image CI1, which had been moving upward on the display screen 7a, frames out. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, which had been difficult to see, becomes visible. After this, the center decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops, the variable performance ends, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

The above is an example of the display of reserved icon obscuring effect A. By configuring the device to be able to execute reserved icon obscuring effect A, it is possible to make the reserved icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C difficult to see, leading the player to anticipate that a reserved change will occur while they are difficult to see. This makes it possible to entertain the player with the presentation of the reserved icon in the variable effect, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Pending icon cover-up effect B]
72(G)-(L) are diagrams for explaining the reserved icon shielding effect B. The reserved icon shielding effect A is an effect in which a cover image including a character image frames in from the left part of the display screen 7a during a change effect, covers a part of the reserved icon and the decorative pattern, and then frames out, which is an effect to suggest a change in reserved status. In this example, the image display is performed by the display screen 7a, but may also be performed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, respectively, and during deceleration variation, they are displayed vertically side by side so that two or more patterns are visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. During high-speed variation, the contents of the patterns are displayed so that they are difficult to see. During stop display, one pattern is displayed so that it is visible on the display screen 7a, but multiple patterns may be visible at the same time. Also, if the result of the special drawing is a winning combination, the three symbols lined up in a straight line will stop in a winning configuration. Note that the three symbols lined up in a straight line here include those lined up in a roughly straight line. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 72(G), the change performance begins, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed, making it difficult to see their respective contents. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the change performance icon 9C are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a (below the left decorative pattern 8L). Note that no reserved change performance is performed during this change performance, and furthermore, the explanation will continue assuming that the result of the special pattern lottery that triggered this change performance was a miss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(H), the cover image CI2 including the character image is displayed moving horizontally from the left end of the display screen 7a toward the right and framed in. As a result, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special chart reserved memory area 85a, the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L are covered by the cover image CI2. Specifically, first, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth memory area becomes difficult to see, and then the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third memory area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second memory area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first memory area, and the variable icon 9C become difficult to see one by one in this order. That is, the number of reserved icons that become difficult to see gradually increases. In addition, the character image included in the cover image CI2 may be displayed while performing animation, or the cover image CI2 may be composed of only the character image, or may be a size that makes only the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C difficult to see and does not make the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see. The same applies to the subsequent cases. Furthermore, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing rapidly, making it difficult to see the content.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(I), the entire cover image CI2 that has been framed in from the left end of the display screen 7a is stopped and displayed, and all the displayed reserved icons 9A, the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L become difficult to see. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L undergoes a deceleration variable display, and the decorative pattern representing "3" is temporarily stopped. In this case, the time when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and the time when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes difficult to see may be set arbitrarily. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped at the same time as it becomes difficult to see due to the cover image CI2, or it may be temporarily stopped after it becomes difficult to see, or it may become difficult to see after it is temporarily stopped. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly fluctuating, and the content remains in a state where it is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(J), the right decorative pattern 8R, which had been displayed as changing at high speed, undergoes a deceleration change display and the decorative pattern representing "6" is displayed as temporarily stopped. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains its display of changing at high speed. At this time, the cover image CI2 maintains its stopped display, which makes the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see, so it is unclear whether it is changing again or maintaining its temporary stop display, but here it is assumed that it is maintaining its temporary stop display. After the left decorative pattern 8L changes again, a reach may be formed, etc.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(K), the cover image CI2 that was displayed in a stopped state is moved horizontally to the right on the display screen 7a and frames out. In addition, the reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a and the variable icon 9C, which were previously difficult to see, become visible. Specifically, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area becomes visible first, and then the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the variable icon 9C become visible one by one in this order. That is, the number of reserved icons that become visible gradually increases. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L gradually becomes visible from the left end. In addition, the cover image CI2 was displayed in front of the reserved icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, making them difficult to see, but since it is displayed on the back side of the circular area in which the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed, even if the cover image CI2 is moved, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not difficult to see. However, this is not limited to this, and the cover image CI2 may be displayed in front of at least one of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, and one of the decorative patterns displayed on the back side of the cover image CI2 may be difficult to see with the moving display of the cover image CI2. The scene shown in FIG. 72(K) is an example of a display after all the reserved icons 9A have become visible. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed variable display, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain a temporary stop display. However, at this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, which had been difficult to see due to the cover image CI2, becomes visible again, so this may be used as an opportunity to change again. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes visible with the moving display of the cover image CI2, it has already started to change again, and then a decorative pattern with the same content as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed, forming a reach. In addition, the reserved icon obscuring effect B is an effect that suggests that the display mode of the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C will change to a mode with a higher probability of a jackpot, but in this case, it is considered that the reserved icon has not changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(L), the left edge of the cover image CI2, which was moving horizontally to the right on the display screen 7a, goes out of the frame. After this, the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops, the variable performance ends, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

The above is an example of the display of reserved icon obscuring effect B. By configuring the device to be able to execute reserved icon obscuring effect B, it is possible to make the reserved icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C difficult to see, leading the player to anticipate that a reserved change will occur while they are difficult to see. This makes it possible to entertain the player with the presentation of the reserved icon in the variable effect, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Pending icon cover-up effect C]
73 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon shielding effect C. The reserved icon shielding effect C is an effect in which a cover image including a character image frames in from the bottom of the display screen 7a during a change effect, covers a part of the reserved icon and the decorative pattern, and then frames out, which is an effect to suggest a change in reserved status. In this example, the display of the image is performed by the display screen 7a, but may also be performed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, respectively, and during deceleration variation, they are displayed vertically side by side so that two or more patterns are visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. During high-speed variation, the contents of the patterns are displayed so that they are difficult to see. During stop display, one pattern is displayed so that it is visible on the display screen 7a, but multiple patterns may be visible at the same time. Also, if the result of the special drawing is a winning combination, the three symbols lined up in a straight line will stop in a winning configuration. Note that the three symbols lined up in a straight line here include those lined up in a roughly straight line. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

In reserved icon obscuring performance C, a cover image CI3 frames in from the bottom of the display screen 7a, making the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C difficult to see, and then the cover image CI3 frames out and the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C become visible again. While the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are difficult to see due to the cover image CI3, a reserved change may be performed in which the display state of each reserved icon changes from a normal state to a state in which the corresponding special drawing result has a relatively high expectation of winning. In this example, the reserved icon is a white round icon in the normal state, and can be changed to either a shaded square icon or a patterned hexagon icon.

Furthermore, cover image CI3 may change to cover image CI4, which indicates a relatively high likelihood that either the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C will execute a reserved change. This is referred to as development. Cover image CI3 includes a character string image of "天坤" ("Win"), and cover image CI4 includes a character string image of "一擲" ("One move"), and by developing, the four-character idiom "天坤一擲" ("Win") is completed, giving the player a sense of anticipation for a reserved change.

In Fig. 73 (A)-(F) we explain the pattern with no pending changes and no development, in Fig. 73 (A)-(E) and (G) we explain the pattern with a pending change and no development, in Fig. 73 (A)-(D) and (H)-(J) we explain the pattern with no pending change and development, in Fig. 73 (A)-(D), (H)-(I) and (K) we explain the pattern with a pending change and development, and in Fig. 73 (A)-(D), (H)-(I) and (L) we explain the pattern with multiple pending changes and development. First, we will explain the pattern with no pending changes and no development.

First, as shown in FIG. 73(A), the change performance starts, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed, making it difficult to see their contents. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a (below the left decorative pattern 8L).

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), the cover image CI3 including the character image is moved vertically upward from the lower part of the position where the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, and is framed in. As a result, a part of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a and a part of the variable icon 9C are covered by the cover image CI1. After this, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area becomes difficult to see, and then the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, and the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area become difficult to see one by one in this order. That is, the number of reserved icons 9A that become difficult to see gradually increases. In addition, the cover image CI3 may be displayed while performing animation, or may be composed of only a character string image, or may be of a size that makes only the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C difficult to see and does not make the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see. The same applies to the subsequent cases. Furthermore, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing rapidly, making it difficult to see the content.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), the cover image CI3, which has been framed in from below the position where the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, is stopped and displayed in its entirety, and all the displayed reserved icons 9A, the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L become difficult to see. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L undergoes a deceleration variable display and the decorative pattern representing "3" is temporarily stopped. In this case, the time when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and the time when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes difficult to see may be set arbitrarily. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped at the same time as it becomes difficult to see due to the cover image CI3, or it may be temporarily stopped after it becomes difficult to see, or it may become difficult to see after it is temporarily stopped. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly fluctuating and maintain a state in which the contents are difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), the right decorative pattern 8R, which had been displayed as changing at high speed, undergoes a deceleration change display and the decorative pattern representing "6" is displayed as temporarily stopped. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains its display of changing at high speed. At this time, the cover image CI3 maintains its stopped display, which makes the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see, so it is unclear whether it is changing again or maintaining its temporary stop display, but here it is assumed that it is maintaining its temporary stop display. Note that a configuration in which a reach is formed after the left decorative pattern 8L changes again may also be used.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(E), the cover image CI3, which was displayed as stopped, moves vertically downward on the display screen 7a and frames out. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, and the variable icon 9C, which were each difficult to see, become visible. Specifically, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area becomes visible first, and then the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area become visible one by one in that order. That is, the number of the reserved icons 9A that become visible gradually increases. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed variable display, and the right decorative pattern 8R maintains a temporary stop display. At this time, the cover image CI3 is displayed moving, but the left decorative pattern 8L transitions from a difficult to see state to a visible state. By the time it becomes visible, it is unclear whether it will change again or maintain the temporary stop display, but here it is assumed that the temporary stop display is maintained. After the left decorative pattern 8L changes again, a reach may be formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(F), the bottom end of cover image CI3, which had been displayed moving vertically downward on display screen 7a, frames out. As a result, reserved icon 9A and variable icon 9C, which had been difficult to see, become visible in their entirety. After this, middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops, the variable performance ends, and each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R stops for a definite period. The above is an example of the display of reserved icon obscuring performance C in a pattern with no reserved change and no development.

Next, a pattern with a reservation change and no development will be described. The flow from (A) to (E) in Figure 73 is the same as the pattern without a reservation change and no development described above, so the description will be omitted.
After the scene shown in FIG. 73(E), when the cover image CI3 completely goes out of the frame, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes from a white round icon to a shaded square icon as shown in FIG. 73(G). This change in the display mode of the reserved icon 9A may be performed during a period when it is difficult to see due to the cover image CI3, or may be performed after the cover image CI3 moves and becomes visible. In addition, when the reserved icon changes after it becomes visible, it may change with animation. Furthermore, the reserved icon change may be performed on the variable icon 9C. The above is a display example of the reserved icon shielding performance C in a pattern with a reserved change and no development.

Next, we will explain the pattern with no pending changes and development. The flow of Figures 73 (A) to (D) is the same as the pattern with no pending changes and no development described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

After the scene shown in FIG. 73(D), the display mode of cover image CI3 changes to cover image CI4 as shown in FIG. 73(E). Note that animation may be performed when this change occurs, but the left decorative pattern 8L, the reserved icon 9A, and the variable icon 9C will still remain difficult to see due to the cover image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(I), the cover image CI4, which was displayed as stopped, moves vertically downward on the display screen 7a and frames out. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, and the variable icon 9C, which were each difficult to see, become visible. Specifically, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth memory area becomes visible first, and then the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third memory area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second memory area, and the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first memory area become visible one by one in that order. That is, the number of the reserved icons 9A that become visible gradually increases. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed variable display, and the right decorative pattern 8R maintains a temporary stop display. At this time, the cover image CI4 is displayed moving, but the left decorative pattern 8L transitions from a difficult to see state to a visible state. By the time it becomes visible, it is unclear whether it will change again or maintain the temporary stop display, but here it is assumed that the temporary stop display is maintained. After the left decorative pattern 8L changes again, a reach may be formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(J), the bottom end of cover image CI4, which was displayed moving vertically downward on display screen 7a, frames out. As a result, reserved icon 9A and variable icon 9C, which had been difficult to see, become visible in their entirety. After this, middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops, the variable performance ends, and each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R stops for a certainty. The above is an example of the display of reserved icon obscuring performance C in a pattern with no reserved change and development.

Next, we will explain the pattern with pending changes and development. The flow in Figure 73 (A) to (D) is similar to the pattern with no pending changes and no development described above, and the flow after that in Figure 73 (H) to (I) is similar to the pattern with no pending changes and development, so we will not explain each one.

After the scene shown in FIG. 73(I), when the cover image CI4 completely frames out, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third memory area changes from a white round icon to a shaded square icon as shown in FIG. 73(K). This change in the display mode of the reserved icon 9A may be performed during the period when it is difficult to see because the cover image CI4 was displayed, or it may be performed after the cover image CI4 moves and becomes visible. In addition, if the reserved icon changes after it becomes visible, the change may be accompanied by an animation. Furthermore, the reserved icon change may be performed on the variable icon 9C. The above is an example of the display of the reserved icon obscuring effect C in a pattern with a reserved change and development.

Finally, we will explain the pattern with multiple pending changes and development. The flow in Figure 73 (A) to (D) is similar to the pattern with no pending changes and no development described above, and the subsequent flow in Figure 73 (H) to (I) is similar to the pattern with no pending changes and development, so we will not explain each one.

After the scene shown in FIG. 73(I), when the cover image CI4 is completely framed out, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes from a white round icon to a patterned hexagonal icon, and the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area changes from a white round icon to a shaded square icon, as shown in FIG. 73(L). These changes in the display mode of the reserved icon 9A may be performed during the period when it is difficult to see because the cover image CI4 was displayed, or may be performed after the cover image CI4 moves and becomes visible. In addition, when the reserved icon changes after becoming visible, the change may be accompanied by an animation. Furthermore, the reserved icon 9C may be subjected to the reserved icon change. In addition, the order of the reserved icon change may be set arbitrarily. That is, the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area and the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area may change to pending at the same time, or the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area may change to pending before the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, or the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area may change to pending before the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area. The above is an example of the display of the pending icon obscuring effect C in a pattern with multiple pending changes and development.

The above are examples of the display of the reserved icon obscuring effect C in various patterns. By configuring the system to be able to execute the reserved icon obscuring effect C, it is possible to make the reserved icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C difficult to see, and by having a reserved change occur while they are difficult to see, and by changing the display mode of the cover image to create anticipation of this, it is possible to make the player look forward to a reserved change, and it is possible to entertain the player with the presentation of the reserved icon in the variable effect, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Pending icon occlusion effect D]
74(A)-(F) are diagrams for explaining the reserved icon shielding effect D. The reserved icon shielding effect D is an effect in which a plurality of suggestive images CI5 and a plurality of suggestive images CI6 are continuously framed in from the left part of the display screen 7a during the change effect, cover a part of the reserved icon and the decorative pattern, and then framed out, which is an effect for suggesting the re-change of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the reserved change of the variable icon 9C. In this example, the display of the image is performed by the display screen 7a, but may be performed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, respectively, and during deceleration variation, they are displayed vertically side by side so that two or more patterns are visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. During high-speed variation, the contents of the patterns are displayed so that they are difficult to see. During stop display, one pattern is displayed so that it is visible on the display screen 7a, but multiple patterns may be visible at the same time. Also, if the result of the special drawing is a winning combination, the three symbols lined up in a straight line will stop in a winning configuration. Note that the three symbols lined up in a straight line here include those lined up in a roughly straight line. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 74(A), the change performance starts, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed, making it difficult to see their contents. Here, the reserved icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a (below the left decorative pattern 8L). The explanation will continue assuming that the result of the special drawing that triggered this change performance was a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), a plurality of suggestion images CI5 and a plurality of suggestion images CI6 are displayed moving horizontally to the right from the left end of the display screen 7a, and are framed in one after another. As a result, the reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L are covered by the plurality of suggestion images CI5 and the plurality of suggestion images CI6. Specifically, first, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth memory area becomes difficult to see, and then the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third memory area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second memory area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first memory area, and the variable icon 9C become difficult to see one by one in that order. In other words, the number of reserved icons that become difficult to see gradually increases. In addition, the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 may be displayed while performing animation, or at least one of the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 may be composed of a character image, or may be a size that makes only the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C difficult to see and does not make the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see. The same applies to the subsequent cases. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L that was displayed in a high-speed variable state is temporarily stopped and displayed as a decorative pattern representing "3" after a deceleration variable display. The timing of the temporary stop display is preferably before it becomes difficult to see due to the multiple suggestion images CI5 and the multiple suggestion images CI6, but it may also be after it becomes difficult to see. In this case, it is assumed that it becomes difficult to see after the temporary stop. Furthermore, the multiple images that make the left decorative pattern 8L, the reserved icon 9A, and the variable icon 9C difficult to see by being displayed in a moving manner may be only the suggestion image CI5. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain the high-speed variable display, and the contents are in a state where they are difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), all the displayed reserved icons 9A, the variable icons 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L are difficult to see due to the multiple suggestive images CI5 and multiple suggestive images CI6 framed in from the left end of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly fluctuating, and the contents are maintained in a state in which they are difficult to see. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in front of all the suggestive images CI5 and CI6, and are configured so that they are not difficult to see even if they overlap with the suggestive images CI5 and CI6. However, this is not limited to this, and the cover image CI2 may be displayed in front of at least one of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, and one of the decorative patterns displayed on the back side of the cover image CI2 may be difficult to see as the cover image CI2 moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), the new suggestion image CI5 and suggestion image CI6 are no longer framed in from the left end of the display screen 7a, and the suggestion image CI5 and suggestion image CI6 that have already framed in are continuously displayed by moving horizontally to the right on the display screen 7a. In addition, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, which were each difficult to see, become visible. Specifically, first, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth memory area becomes visible, and then the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third memory area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second memory area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first memory area, and the variable icon 9C become visible one by one in this order. That is, the number of reserved icons that become visible gradually increases. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L gradually becomes visible from the left end. The right decorative pattern 8R, which had been changing at high speed, changes to a decelerated change display, and the decorative pattern representing the number "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed. The center decorative pattern 8C continues to change at high speed.

Furthermore, the display mode of the variable icon 9C that has become visible changes from a white round icon to a shaded square icon. This change in the display mode of the variable icon 9C may be performed during the period when it is difficult to see because the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 are displayed, or it may be performed after the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 have moved and become visible. Furthermore, if the pending change occurs after it becomes visible, the change may be accompanied by an animation. Furthermore, the pending change may be performed on the pending icon 9A.

In addition, the content of the decorative pattern that was temporarily stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L, which has become visible, changes from "3" to "6". As a result, the content of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L matches the content of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped in the right decorative pattern 8R, forming a reach. This change in the content of the decorative pattern may be performed during the period when it is difficult to see because suggestive image CI5 and suggestive image CI6 are displayed, or it may be performed after suggestive image CI5 and suggestive image CI6 have moved and become visible. Furthermore, if the content changes after it becomes visible, it may change accompanied by an animation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), suggested image CI5 and suggested image CI6, which had been displayed moving horizontally to the right on the display screen 7a, are framed out one after another.

Next, as shown in Figure 74 (F), the middle decorative pattern 8C undergoes a deceleration change display, and the decorative pattern representing "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed. As a result, the contents of the decorative patterns displayed as divergent stops in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R match with "6," suggesting that the result of the special drawing that triggered this change performance was a win. After this, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop and the win is confirmed.

The above is an example of the display of the reserved icon shielding effect D. By configuring the device to be able to execute the reserved icon shielding effect D, it is possible to make the left decorative pattern 8L, the reserved icon 9A, and the variable icon 9C difficult to see, and while they are difficult to see, it is possible to make the player look forward to a change in the contents of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped, or a change in the reserved icon, which makes it possible to entertain the player with the presentation of the reserved icon in the variable effect, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Pending icon occlusion effect E]
74(G)-(L) are diagrams for explaining the reserved icon shielding effect E. The reserved icon shielding effect E is an effect in which a plurality of suggestive images CI5 and a plurality of suggestive images CI6 are successively framed in from the left part of the display screen 7a during a change effect, cover a part of the reserved icon and the decorative pattern, and then framed out, which is an effect for suggesting a change in reserved status. In this example, the display of the images is performed by the display screen 7a, but may be performed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, respectively, and during deceleration variation, they are displayed vertically side by side so that two or more patterns are visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. During high-speed variation, the contents of the patterns are displayed so that they are difficult to see. During stop display, one pattern is displayed so that it is visible on the display screen 7a, but multiple patterns may be visible at the same time. Also, if the result of the special drawing is a winning combination, the three symbols lined up in a straight line will stop in a winning combination. Note that the three symbols lined up in a straight line here include symbols lined up in a roughly straight line. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in Figure 74 (G), the change performance begins, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed, making it difficult to see their respective contents. Here, the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a (below the left decorative pattern 8L). Note that the hold change performance is not performed during this change performance, and furthermore, the explanation will continue assuming that the result of the special pattern lottery that triggered this change performance was a miss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(H), the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 are displayed moving horizontally to the right from the left end of the display screen 7a, and are framed in succession in multiples. As a result, the reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a, the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L are covered by the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6. Specifically, first, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth memory area becomes difficult to see, and then the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third memory area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second memory area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first memory area, and the variable icon 9C become difficult to see one by one in that order. In other words, the number of reserved icons that become difficult to see gradually increases. Furthermore, the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 may be composed of a character image, may be displayed while an animation is running, and may be of a size that makes only the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C difficult to see, but does not make the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see. Furthermore, the multiple images that are displayed in a moving manner to make the left decorative pattern 8L, the reserved icon 9A, and the variable icon 9C difficult to see may be only the suggestion image CI5. The same applies to the subsequent cases. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are rapidly changing, and the contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(I), the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 that have framed in from the left end of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed, and new suggestive images CI5 and CI6 are no longer framed in. The suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6 make all the displayed reserved icons 9A, the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see. Also, at this time, the left decorative pattern 8L undergoes a deceleration variable display, and the decorative pattern representing "3" is temporarily stopped. In this case, the time when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and the time when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes difficult to see may be set arbitrarily. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L may be temporarily stopped at the same time as it becomes difficult to see due to the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6, or it may be temporarily stopped after it becomes difficult to see, or it may become difficult to see after it is temporarily stopped. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly fluctuating, and the content remains in a state where it is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (J), the right decorative pattern 8R, which had been displayed as changing at high speed, undergoes a deceleration change display and the decorative pattern representing "6" is displayed as temporarily stopped. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains its display of changing at high speed. At this time, suggestive image CI5 and suggestive image CI6 maintain their stopped display, which makes the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see, so it is unclear whether it is changing again or maintaining its temporary stop display, but here it is assumed that it is maintaining its temporary stop display. After the left decorative pattern 8L changes again, a reach may be formed, etc.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(K), the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6, which were displayed in a stopped state, are displayed moving horizontally to the left of the display screen 7a and frame out. In addition, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a and the variable icon 9C, which were difficult to see, become visible. Specifically, the variable icon 9C becomes visible first, and then the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first memory area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second memory area, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third memory area, and the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth memory area become visible one by one in this order. That is, the number of the reserved icons that become visible gradually increases. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L gradually becomes visible from the right end. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed variable display. However, at this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, which was difficult to see due to the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6, becomes visible again, so this may be used as a trigger to change again. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes visible with the movement of the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6, the re-change has already started, and then, a decorative pattern with the same content as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped in the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, forming a reach. Furthermore, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area that has become visible has changed from a white round icon to a shaded square icon. This change in the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area may be performed during the period when it is difficult to see due to the display of the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6, or may be performed after the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 have moved and become visible. In addition, when the reserved changes after becoming visible, it may change with animation. Furthermore, the reserved change may be performed on the variable icon 9C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(L), the suggestive image CI5 and the suggestive image CI6, which had been displayed moving horizontally to the right on the display screen 7a, all frame out. After this, the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops, the variable performance ends, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

The above is an example of the display of the reserved icon obscuring effect E. By configuring the device to be able to execute the reserved icon obscuring effect E, it is possible to make the reserved icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C difficult to see, leading the player to anticipate that a reserved change will occur while they are difficult to see. This makes it possible to entertain the player with the presentation of the reserved icon in the variable effect, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Example of effect]
The following are examples of the effects of this embodiment.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to Figs. 72 to 74, the first effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the second effect in which at least one of the cover images CI1, CI2, CI3, CI4, CI5, and CI6 is displayed in a moving manner after the first effect, and the third effect in which at least one of the cover images CI1, CI2, CI3, CI4, CI5, and CI6 overlaps with the reserved icon 9A and is displayed stationary in front of the reserved icon 9A, making the reserved icon 9A difficult to see. For example, in the reserved icon shielding effect A, as shown in Fig. 72(C), the cover image CI1 makes the reserved icon 9A difficult to see. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented and novel effect, and the interest can be improved.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponds to the "display screen" in claim 1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R correspond to the "plurality of decorative patterns", the hold icon 9A corresponds to the "hold image", and one of the cover images corresponds to the "predetermined image".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 72(C) to (F), in the third performance, the cover image CI1 overlaps with the left decorative pattern 8L and is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, making the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see, and after the third performance, a fourth performance in which the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed stationary, and after the fourth performance, the cover image CI1 is displayed moving, making the reserved icon 9A and the left decorative pattern 8L visible, are executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be increased.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 73, the reserved icon 9A may be displayed as a white round icon with a relatively low expectation that the result of the corresponding special drawing will be a win, or may be displayed as a shaded square icon with a relatively high expectation, and after the second performance, the reserved icon 9A is configured to be able to execute a sixth performance in which the white round icon changes to a shaded square icon. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 73, after the second effect and before the sixth effect, the cover image CI3 changes to a cover image CI4, thereby making it possible to execute a seventh effect that suggests that the sixth effect will be executed. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 72(G) to (L), in the first performance, multiple reserved icons 9A are displayed at the same time, in the second performance, the number of reserved icons 9A that are changed from visible to difficult to see by the movement of the cover image CI2 gradually increases, and in the third performance, all reserved icons 9A are changed to difficult to see. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be increased.

[Modification]
A modified example of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the reserved icon shielding performance, the cover image may be configured so that the left decorative pattern 8L is not difficult to see due to the cover image. On the other hand, the decorative patterns other than the left decorative pattern 8L may also be configured to be difficult to see.

[Modification 2]
In the reserved icon shielding performance C, the cover image CI3 may be configured to include a character image. In this case, the cover image CI4 may be configured to include the same character image as the cover image CI3 but in a different display mode, and when the cover image CI3 changes to the cover image CI4, the character image may perform an animation.

[Modification 3]
In the reserved icon shielding performances D and E, the cover images that make the reserved icons 9A and the like difficult to see may be composed of one type of image. In this case, the one type of cover image may be configured to include a character image, or may be configured so that the character image performs an animation when the cover image is moved.

[Modification 4]
In the pending icon obscuring performances A and B, the pending change may be executed after the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C become difficult to see due to the cover images CI1 and CI2.

[Modification 5]
In the pending icon obscuring performance, the cover image does not have to make all of the pending icons 9A and the floating icons 9C difficult to see, but may be configured to make only a predetermined number of the pending icons 9A and the floating icons 9C difficult to see.

[Modification 6]
The decorative pattern change effects A to E described above may be combined as appropriate.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine having a display screen capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a plurality of decorative patterns;
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold image representing a hold;
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
A first effect in which the plurality of decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner;
a second effect in which the predetermined image is displayed in a moving manner after the first effect;
After the second performance, the predetermined image overlaps with the reserved image and is stopped and displayed in front of the reserved image, making the reserved image difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
In the third performance, the predetermined image overlaps with the first decorative pattern and is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern, making the first decorative pattern difficult to see;
After the third effect, a fourth effect in which the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed;
After the fourth performance, the predetermined image is moved and the reserved image and the first decorative pattern are made visible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The reserved image may be displayed in a first reserved state in which the corresponding special drawing result has a relatively low expectation of a jackpot, or in a second reserved state in which the expectation is relatively high,
After the second performance, a sixth performance in which the reserved image changes from the first reserved state to the second reserved state can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-3,
After the second performance and before the sixth performance, the predetermined image changes from the first state to the second state, thereby executing a seventh performance that suggests that the sixth performance will be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
In the first performance, a plurality of the reserved images are displayed simultaneously,
In the second performance, the number of reserved images that change from a visible state to a difficult-to-visible state due to the movement of the predetermined image gradually increases,
In the third performance, all the reserved images are difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, icon image display effects A to C are explained using Figures 75 to 77. The icon image display effects are executed while the decorative patterns are changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute an icon image display effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Icon image display effect A]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the icon image display performance A. In the icon image display performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 75(A), a stop display performance is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which a plurality of rows of decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" pattern. It should be noted that the fixed stop may be a temporary stop. Four reserved icons 9A and the corresponding variable icons 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The reserved icons 9A and the corresponding variable icons 9C are regular hexagonal images. The reserved icons 9A correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called the first reserved, the second reserved, the third reserved, and the fourth reserved, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which multiple rows of decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are changing at high speed. As the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, the hold icon 9A is shifted. Specifically, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is moved to the corresponding change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the first hold, the hold icon 9A for the third hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the second hold, and the hold icon 9A for the fourth hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the third hold.

Next, as shown in Figures 75 (C) to (E), an icon display effect is executed. The icon display effect is an effect in which an icon image of the same object as the object represented by the hold icon image is displayed. Here, a hexagonal icon image IG is displayed, the same as the hexagon that is the object represented by the hold icon 9A. Multiple icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of holds. The icon image IG is equal to or larger than the image size of the hold icon 9A. The icon image IG frames in from the top edge of the display screen 7a, and gradually expands as it frames out from the bottom edge. Therefore, it is displayed as if it is flying from the back of the display screen to the front.

In Figure 75(C), the icon image IG has just been framed into the display screen 7a, and is displayed above the center. In Figure 75(D), the icon image IG is gradually enlarged and moving downward. In Figure 75(E), the icon image IG is further enlarged and moves downward, framing out of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which decorative symbols form a predetermined reach state. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a reach state. The center decorative symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), a battle reach development presentation is executed. The battle reach development presentation is a presentation that suggests development into a battle presentation. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Develop into battle reach" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 75 (H) and (I), the icon display effect is executed again. The icon display effect is an effect in which an icon image of the same object as the object represented by the hold icon image is displayed. Here, a hexagonal icon image IG is displayed that is the same as the hexagonal object represented by the hold icon 9A. Multiple icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of holds. At this time, the image of the hold icon 9A is not displayed. In Figure 75 (H), multiple icon images IG are displayed on the display screen 7a. After the icon image IG is displayed, the icon image IG moves downward and frames out from the bottom edge of the display screen 7a as shown in Figure 75 (I).

Next, as shown in Figures 75 (J) and (K), a battle presentation is executed. A battle presentation is one in which a battle unfolds between an ally character and an enemy character. In Figure 75 (J), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB face off in the center of the display screen 7a. In Figure 75 (K), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB collide. A hit is confirmed when an ally character CRA defeats an enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (L), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies whether or not there is a win. Here, the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "3" patterns, notifying that there is a win. Note that in the case of a loss, although not shown in the figure, for example, the left and right decorative patterns will be "3" patterns and the center decorative pattern will be a "4" pattern.

[Icon image display effect B]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the icon image display performance B. In the icon image display performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 76(A), a stop display performance is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which a plurality of rows of decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" pattern. It should be noted that the fixed stop may be a temporary stop. Four reserved icons 9A and the corresponding variable icons 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The reserved icons 9A and the corresponding variable icons 9C are regular hexagonal images. The reserved icons 9A correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called the first reserved, the second reserved, the third reserved, and the fourth reserved, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which multiple rows of decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are changing at high speed. As the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, the hold icon 9A is shifted. Specifically, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is moved to the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the first hold, the hold icon 9A for the third hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the second hold, and the hold icon 9A for the fourth hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the third hold.

Next, as shown in Fig. 76 (C) to (E), an icon display effect is executed. The icon display effect is an effect in which an icon image of the same object as the reserved icon image is displayed. Here, a hexagonal icon image IG is displayed, the same as the hexagonal object represented by the reserved icon 9A. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of reserved items. The icon image IG is equal to or larger than the image size of the reserved icon 9A. The display color of the icon image IG is blue (shown with hatching). The display color of the icon image IG indicates the expectation of a win. The expectation of a win in the display color is set in the following order, for example: white → blue → green → red → gold. The icon image IG frames in from the top of the display screen 7a, and gradually expands as it frames out from the bottom. Therefore, it is displayed as if it is flying from the back of the display screen to the front.

In Figure 76 (C), the icon image IG has just been framed into the display screen 7a, and is displayed above the center. In Figure 76 (D), the icon image IG is gradually enlarged and moving downward. In Figure 76 (E), the icon image IG is further enlarged and moves downward, framing out of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which decorative symbols form a predetermined reach state. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a reach state. The center decorative symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (G), a battle reach development presentation is executed. The battle reach development presentation is a presentation that suggests development into a battle presentation. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Develop into battle reach" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(H)(I), the icon display effect is executed again. The icon display effect is an effect in which an icon image of the same object as the reserved icon image is displayed. Here, a hexagonal icon image IG is displayed, which is the same as the hexagonal object represented by the reserved icon 9A. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of reserved items. The icon image IG is equal to or larger than the image size of the reserved icon 9A. The display color of the icon image IG is green (shown with hatching). This suggests an increase in the expectation of a win. At this time, the image of the reserved icon 9A is not displayed. In FIG. 76(H), a plurality of icon images IG are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, three reserved icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. After the icon image IG is displayed, the icon image IG moves downward and frames out from the bottom edge of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 76(I). Here, the three reserved icons 9A are not displayed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 76 (J) and (K), a battle presentation is executed. A battle presentation is one in which a battle unfolds between an ally character and an enemy character. In Figure 76 (J), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB face off in the center of the display screen 7a. In Figure 76 (K), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB collide. A hit is confirmed when an ally character CRA defeats an enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (L), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies whether or not there is a win. Here, the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "3" patterns, indicating a win. Note that in the case of a loss, although not shown, for example, the left and right decorative patterns will be "3" patterns and the center decorative pattern will be a "4" pattern.

[Icon image display effect C]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the icon image display performance C. In the icon image display performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a stop display performance is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which a plurality of rows of decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" pattern. It should be noted that the fixed stop may be a temporary stop. Four reserved icons 9A and the corresponding variable icons 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The reserved icons 9A and the corresponding variable icons 9C are regular hexagonal images. The reserved icons 9A correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called the first reserved, the second reserved, the third reserved, and the fourth reserved, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which multiple rows of decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are changing at high speed. As the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, the hold icon 9A is shifted. Specifically, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is moved to the corresponding change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the first hold, the hold icon 9A for the third hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the second hold, and the hold icon 9A for the fourth hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the third hold.

Next, as shown in Fig. 77 (C) to (E), an icon display effect is executed. The icon display effect is an effect in which an icon image of the same object as the reserved icon image is displayed. Here, a hexagonal icon image IG is displayed, the same as the hexagonal object represented by the reserved icon 9A. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of reserved items. The icon image IG is equal to or larger than the image size of the reserved icon 9A. The display color of the icon image IG is blue (shown with hatching). The display color of the icon image IG indicates the expectation of a win. The expectation of a win in the display color is set in the following order, for example: white → blue → green → red → gold. The icon image IG frames in from the top of the display screen 7a, and gradually expands as it frames out from the bottom. Therefore, it is displayed as if it is flying from the back of the display screen to the front.

In Figure 77(C), the icon image IG has just been framed into the display screen 7a, and is displayed above the center. In Figure 77(D), the icon image IG is gradually enlarged and moves downward. In Figure 77(E), the icon image IG is further enlarged and moves downward, framing out of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which decorative symbols form a predetermined reach state. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a reach state. The center decorative symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (G), a battle reach development presentation is executed. The battle reach development presentation is a presentation that suggests development into a battle presentation. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Develop into battle reach" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (H), the icon display effect is executed again. The icon display effect is an effect in which an icon image of the same object as that represented by the reserved icon image is displayed. Here, a hexagonal icon image IG is displayed, the same as the hexagonal object represented by the reserved icon 9A. Multiple icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of reserved items. The display color of the icon image IG is green (shown with hatching). This suggests an increase in the expectation of a win. At this time, the image of the reserved icon 9A is hidden.

Next, as shown in Figures 77(I) and (J), a battle presentation is executed. A battle presentation is one in which a battle unfolds between an ally character and an enemy character. In Figure 77(I), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB face off in the center of the display screen 7a. In Figure 77(J), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB collide. A hit is confirmed when the ally character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (K), a third icon display effect is executed. The icon display effect is an effect in which an icon image of the same object as that represented by the reserved icon image is displayed. Here, a hexagonal icon image IG is displayed, the same as the hexagonal object represented by the reserved icon 9A. Multiple icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of reserved items. Moreover, the icon images IG are displayed so as to fill the display screen 7a. The display color of the icon image IG is red (shown with hatching). This suggests a further increase in the expectation of a win. At this time, the image of the reserved icon 9A is hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (L), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies whether or not there is a win. Here, the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "3" patterns, indicating a win. Note that in the case of a loss, although not shown, for example, the left and right decorative patterns will be "3" patterns and the center decorative pattern will be a "4" pattern.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the icon image display effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute an icon display effect in which a predetermined number of icon images IG representing a regular hexagon (target) the same as the regular hexagon (target) represented by the reserved icon 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a regardless of the number of reserved balls. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a novel effect that has never been seen before, and to increase the interest of the game. The effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "display control means."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute icon display effects multiple times during one variation (FIGS. 75(C)-(E)(H)(I), 76(C)-(E)(H)(I), 77(C)-(E)(H)(K)). With this configuration, it is possible to provide novel effects that have not been seen before, and to increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the icon image IG displayed in the icon display effect is changed multiple times during one variation (FIGS. 77(C)-(E)(H)(K)). With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the icon display effect, the display state in which the reserved icon 9A is displayed is switched to a non-display state in which the reserved icon 9A is not displayed (FIG. 76 (H) (I)). With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, at least one of the predetermined number of icon images IG displayed in the icon display effect is equal to or larger than the image size of the reserved icon 9 A. This configuration makes it possible to provide an unprecedented and novel effect, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Modification]
The following describes modified examples of icon image display presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the reserved icon 9A is switched from a display state to a non-display state during the icon display performance (FIG. 76 (H) (I)). In contrast, the reserved icon 9A may be configured to be switched to a non-display state from the start of the icon display performance.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the reserved icon 9A is switched from a display state to a non-display state during the icon display performance, and the variable icon 9C is displayed (FIG. 76 (H) (I)). The variable icon 9C may also be switched from a display state to a non-display state together with the reserved icon 9A.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, an icon image representing the same target as the hold icon 9A was displayed, but it is also possible to display an icon image representing the same target as the hold icon 9B.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine having a display control means capable of displaying a reserved icon image indicating a reserved number on a display screen,
The display control means is capable of executing an icon display effect in which a predetermined number of icon images representing the same object as the reserved icon image are displayed on the display screen regardless of the number of reserved objects.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The display control means is capable of executing the icon display performance a plurality of times during one change.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The display control means changes a display color of the icon image displayed in the icon display performance a plurality of times during one change.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The display control means switches the display state in which the hold icon image is displayed to a non-display state in which the hold icon image is not displayed during execution of the icon display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B2-1 to B2-4,
The display control means is configured such that at least one icon image among the predetermined number of icon images displayed in the icon display performance is equal to or larger than the image size of the reserved icon image.
The gaming machine is characterized by the above.

Below, icon shape area effects A to C are explained using Figures 78 to 80. The icon shape area effects are executed while the decorative patterns are changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute an icon shape area effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Icon Shape Area Presentation A]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the icon shape area performance A. In the icon shape area performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a stop display performance is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which a plurality of rows of decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" pattern. It should be noted that the fixed stop may be a temporary stop. Four reserved icons 9A and the corresponding variable icons 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The reserved icons 9A and the corresponding variable icons 9C are regular hexagonal images. The reserved icons 9A correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called the first reserved, the second reserved, the third reserved, and the fourth reserved, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which multiple rows of decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are changing at high speed. As the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, the hold icon 9A is shifted. Specifically, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is moved to the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the first hold, the hold icon 9A for the third hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the second hold, and the hold icon 9A for the fourth hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the third hold.

Next, as shown in Fig. 78(C) to (E), a specific area effect is executed. A specific area effect is an effect in which a specific display is made inside a specific area having the same outline as the reserved icon image. In Fig. 78(C), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is framed in from the top edge of the display screen 7a. The specific area TA expands and moves to the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in Fig. 78(D), where it stops. At this time, the variable icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the specific area TA. The variable icon 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific area TA. In Fig. 78(E), a message image MG saying "Develop into a battle?" is displayed inside the specific area TA. The message image MG suggests an effect that will be executed after the message image MG is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which decorative symbols form a specified reach state. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a reach state. The center decorative symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. Three reserved icons 9A and the fluctuating icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), a battle reach development presentation is executed. The battle reach development presentation is a presentation that suggests development to a battle presentation. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Develop to battle reach" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Fig. 78 (H) to (J), the specific area presentation is executed again. The specific area presentation is a presentation in which a specific display is made inside a specific area having the same outline as the reserved icon image. In Fig. 78 (H), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is framed in from the top edge of the display screen 7a. The specific area TA expands and moves to the center of the display screen 7a and stops there, as shown in Fig. 78 (I). The specific area TA is enlarged larger than the specific area TA shown in Fig. 78 (D) (E). At this time, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A of the first reservation are displayed overlapping on a part of the specific area TA. The variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are displayed on the front side of the specific area TA. In Fig. 78 (J), a battle presentation is executed inside the specific area TA. Here, an animation of a battle between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB is displayed inside the specific area TA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (K), the specific area TA is hidden, and the final battle performance is executed on the entire display screen 7a. The final battle performance is a performance that decides the outcome of the battle. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB clash. A win is confirmed when the ally character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (L), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies whether or not there is a win. Here, the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "3" patterns, indicating a win. Note that in the case of a loss, although not shown, for example, the left and right decorative patterns will be "3" patterns and the center decorative pattern will be a "4" pattern.

[Icon Shape Area Presentation B]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the icon shape area performance B. In the icon shape area performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a stop display performance is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which a plurality of rows of decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" pattern. It should be noted that the fixed stop may be a temporary stop. Four reserved icons 9A and the corresponding variable icons 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The reserved icons 9A and the corresponding variable icons 9C are regular hexagonal images. The reserved icons 9A correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called the first reserved, the second reserved, the third reserved, and the fourth reserved, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which multiple rows of decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are changing at high speed. As the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, the hold icon 9A is shifted. Specifically, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is moved to the corresponding change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the first hold, the hold icon 9A for the third hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the second hold, and the hold icon 9A for the fourth hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the third hold.

Next, as shown in Fig. 79(C) to (E), a specific area presentation is executed. The specific area presentation is a presentation in which a specific display is made inside a specific area having the same outline as the reserved icon image. In Fig. 79(C), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is framed in from the top edge of the display screen 7a. The specific area TA expands and moves to the center of the display screen 7a and stops there, as shown in Fig. 79(D). At this time, the variable icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the specific area TA. The variable icon 9C is hidden behind the specific area TA. By displaying the variable icon 9C behind the specific area TA, the player can be surprised. The variable icon 9C may be hidden. The specific area TA may be displayed in place of the variable icon 9C. In Fig. 79(E), the inside of the specific area TA is filled in red. This suggests the expectation of a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which decorative symbols form a specified reach state. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a reach state. The center decorative symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. Three reserved icons 9A and the fluctuating icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (G), a battle reach development presentation is executed. The battle reach development presentation is a presentation that suggests development to a battle presentation. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Develop to battle reach" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Fig. 79 (H) to (J), the specific area presentation is executed again. The specific area presentation is a presentation in which a specific display is performed inside a specific area having the same outline as the reserved icon image. The specific area TA is larger than the specific area TA shown in Fig. 79 (D) (E). The specific area TA also overlaps with a part of the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A. The variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are displayed on the front side of the specific area TA. In Fig. 79 (H), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a battle presentation is performed inside the specific area TA. Here, the enemy character CRB pushes the ally character CRA to the right side of the display screen 7a, and an animation display is performed in which the ally character CRA is at a disadvantage. In Fig. 79 (I), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a battle presentation is performed inside the specific area TA. Here, an animation is displayed in which the ally character CRA is pushing the enemy character CRB to the left side of the display screen 7a, with the ally character CRA having the upper hand. In FIG. 79(J), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a battle performance is taking place within the specific area TA. Here, an animation is displayed in which the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is balanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (K), the specific area TA is hidden, and the final battle performance is executed on the entire display screen 7a. The final battle performance is a performance that decides the outcome of the battle. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB clash. A win is confirmed when the ally character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (L), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies whether or not there is a win. Here, the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "3" patterns, indicating a win. Note that in the case of a loss, although not shown in the figure, for example, the left and right decorative patterns will be "3" patterns and the center decorative pattern will be a "4" pattern.

[Icon Shape Area Presentation C]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the icon shape area performance C. In the icon shape area performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 80(A), a stop display performance is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which a plurality of rows of decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" pattern. It should be noted that the fixed stop may be a temporary stop. Four reserved icons 9A and the corresponding variable icons 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The reserved icons 9A and the corresponding variable icons 9C are regular hexagonal images. The reserved icons 9A correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area of the first special pattern reserved storage area 85a, in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called the first reserved, the second reserved, the third reserved, and the fourth reserved, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(B), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which multiple rows of decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are changing at high speed. As the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, the hold icon 9A is shifted. Specifically, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is moved to the corresponding change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the first hold, the hold icon 9A for the third hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the second hold, and the hold icon 9A for the fourth hold is moved to the hold icon 9A for the third hold.

Next, as shown in Fig. 80(C) to (E), a specific area presentation is executed. The specific area presentation is a presentation in which a specific display is made inside a specific area having the same outline as the reserved icon image. In Fig. 80(C), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is framed in from the top edge of the display screen 7a. The specific area TA expands and moves to the center of the display screen 7a and stops there, as shown in Fig. 80(D). At this time, the variable icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the specific area TA. The variable icon 9C is hidden behind the specific area TA. By displaying the variable icon 9C behind the specific area TA, the player can be surprised. The variable icon 9C may be hidden. The specific area TA may be displayed in place of the variable icon 9C. In Fig. 80(E), a message image MG saying "Super Hot" is displayed inside the specific area TA. The message image MG suggests the expectation of a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which decorative symbols form a specified reach state. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a reach state. The center decorative symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. Three reserved icons 9A and the fluctuating icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 80 (G), a battle reach development presentation is executed. The battle reach development presentation is a presentation that suggests development to a battle presentation. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Develop to battle reach" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 80(H) and (I), a battle presentation is executed. A battle presentation is a presentation in which a battle unfolds between an ally character and an enemy character. In Figure 80(H), an animation is displayed in which the ally character CRA is being pushed to the right side of the display screen 7a by the enemy character CRB, and the ally character CRA is at a disadvantage. In Figure 80(I), an animation is displayed in which the ally character is pushing the enemy character CRB to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is at a disadvantage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(J), a final battle performance is executed across the entire display screen 7a. The final battle performance is a performance that determines the outcome of the battle. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB collide. A win is confirmed when the ally character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (K), the specific area presentation is executed again. The specific area presentation is a presentation in which a specific display is made inside a specific area having the same contour as the reserved icon image. Here, the specific area TA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed inside the specific area TA. In addition, a message image MG saying "Congratulations" is displayed inside the specific area TA. The specific area TA is larger than the specific area TA shown in FIG. 80 (D) (E). In addition, the specific area TA overlaps with a portion of the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A. The variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are displayed closer to the front than the specific area TA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (L), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether or not there is a win. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are all "3" patterns, notifying the player that there is a win.

[Example of effect]
Examples of the icon shape area effects are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a specific display is made within a specific area TA having the same contour as the reserved icon image 9A (Fig. 87(E)(J), Fig. 79(E)(H)-(J), Fig. 80(E)(K)). With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can be provided, and the interest in the game can be increased. The presentation control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "display control means."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an image suggesting the expectation of a win may be displayed as a specific display (FIG. 79(E), FIG. 80(E)). With this configuration, a novel presentation not seen before can be provided, and the interest of the game can be increased.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an image suggesting an effect to be executed after the specific display is displayed may be displayed as the specific display (FIG. 78(E), FIG. 80(K)). With this configuration, an unprecedented and novel effect can be provided, and the interest of the game can be increased.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display the reserved icon image 9A superimposed on at least a part of the specific area TA (FIGS. 78(I)(J), 79(H)-(J), and 80(K)). This configuration makes it possible to provide a novel presentation that has not been seen before, and to increase the interest of the game.

[Modification]
The following describes modified examples of the icon shape area presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the specific area effect is executed twice during one change. However, the number of times the specific area effect is executed is not particularly limited, and the specific area effect may be executed once or may be executed three or more times.

[Modification 2]
Regarding the anteroposterior relationship between the specific area TA and the hold icon 9A (the variable icon 9C) in the above embodiment, the specific area TA may be on the front side or the back side of the hold icon 9A (the variable icon 9C).

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the specific display may be an image suggesting the probability of winning, an image suggesting the effect to be executed after the specific display is performed, or an animation display. However, the specific display may be two or more of these.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B3-1]
A gaming machine having a display control means capable of displaying a reserved icon image indicating a reserved number on a display screen,
The display control means performs a specific display within a specific area having a contour similar to that of the hold icon image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The display control means may display, as the specific display, an image suggesting an expectation of a win.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The display control means may display, as the specific display, an image suggesting a performance to be executed after the specific display is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B3-1 to B3-3,
The display control means is capable of displaying the hold icon image superimposed on at least a part of the specific area,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending icon continuous change presentation will be explained below with reference to Figures 81 to 83. This pending icon continuous change presentation is executed during the variation presentation. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command contains an instruction to execute the pending icon continuous change presentation, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Continuous change of reserved icon A]
81 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon continuous change performance A. The reserved icon continuous change performance A is a notice performance in which the display state of the reserved icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A changes to a state with a higher expectation of winning in the order in which the change performance is consumed during the change performance. In this example, the image display is performed by the display screen 7a, but may be performed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, respectively, and during deceleration variation, they are displayed vertically side by side so that two or more patterns are visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. During high-speed variation, the contents of the patterns are displayed so that they are difficult to see. During stop display, one pattern is displayed so that it is visible on the display screen 7a, but multiple patterns may be visible at the same time. Also, if the result of the special drawing is a winning combination, the three symbols lined up in a straight line will stop in a winning combination. Note that the three symbols lined up in a straight line here include symbols lined up in a roughly straight line. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

When executing the reserved icon continuous change performance A, the icons displayed in the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are determined to have a display mode that is determined by a combination of multiple types of shapes and multiple types of colors (in the example of FIG. 81, the difference in color is expressed by a pattern. The patterns may be different.) that have different expectations of winning the corresponding special drawing result. In addition, in each reserved icon (including the variable icon 9C), one of multiple types of characters may be assigned according to the expectation of winning the corresponding special drawing result, and the character image may be displayed as each reserved icon. In the reserved icon continuous change performance A, there are four types of shapes: circle, square, hexagram, and pentagram, and three types of colors (patterns): white (white-out), green (diagonal lines), and red (shaded). The expectation of winning the corresponding special drawing result increases in the order of circle, square, hexagram, and pentagram, and increases in the order of white (white-out), green (diagonal lines), and red (shaded).

Here, for each reserved icon (including the variable icon 9C), the difference in the probability of winning when the shape is different and the difference in the probability of winning when the color is different may be set arbitrarily. For example, the probability of winning may be set to increase in the following order: white circular icon, green circular icon, red circular icon, white square icon, green square icon, red square icon, white hexagonal star icon, green hexagonal star icon, red hexagonal star icon, white pentagram icon, green pentagram icon, red pentagram icon. Also, the probability of winning may be set to increase in the following order: white circular icon, green circular icon, white square icon, green square icon, white hexagonal star icon, green hexagonal star icon, white pentagram icon, green pentagram icon, red circular icon, red square icon, red hexagonal star icon, red pentagram icon. Also, for example, the order of the expectation of winning may be set to be higher in the following order: white circle icon, white square icon, white hexagonal star icon, white pentagram icon, green circle icon, green square icon, green hexagonal star icon, green pentagram icon, red circle icon, red square icon, red hexagonal star icon, red pentagram icon. Also, for example, the order of the expectation of winning may be set to be higher in the following order: white circle icon, white square icon, white hexagonal star icon, white pentagram icon, green circle icon, red circle icon, green square icon, red square icon, green hexagonal star icon, red hexagonal star icon, green pentagram icon, red pentagram icon. Other orders are also possible.

Furthermore, when the final display form becomes a green hexagram icon, the winning expectation may be the same or different between the case where the reserved icon was a green hexagram icon from the time when the display of the reserved icon started and the case where the reserved icon was a white hexagram icon when the display of the reserved icon started and changed to a green hexagram icon during the execution of the reserved icon continuous change performance A. In other words, the winning expectation may be different or may be the same depending on the change path leading to the final display form.
In the following examples, the patterns will be used in place of the respective colors and associated with the respective colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 81(A), the change performance starts, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed, and after each of the contents becomes difficult to see, an effect image EG is displayed, which suggests that the display mode of the change icon 9C will change. The effect image EG may be displayed with animation, or the effect image EG itself may be an image that is performing animation. At this time, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a is displayed, and no new balls have entered the first start hole 20 and the second start hole 21 until the end of this change performance. The reserved icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a (below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R). The display mode of each reserved icon when the ball is entered is assumed to be a white hexagram icon for the variable icon 9C, a white square icon for the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first memory area, a white pentagram icon for the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second memory area, and a white circular icon for the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third memory area. Here, for example, the display mode of each reserved icon when the ball is entered may all be a white circular icon, which has the lowest probability of winning. The explanation will continue assuming that the result of the special drawing that triggered this variable performance was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes from a white six-pointed star icon to a diagonal six-pointed star icon. This change in display mode may be performed with animation. In this case, the shape of the variable icon 9C does not change, and only the pattern changes. However, this is not limited to this, and the pattern and shape may change, for example, to a diagonal five-pointed star icon. Also, for example, only the shape may change, for example, to a white five-pointed star icon. Also, the timing at which the effect image EG becomes difficult to see and the timing at which the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes may be set arbitrarily. For example, the display mode of the variable icon 9C may change after the effect image EG becomes difficult to see. Also, for example, the effect image EG may become difficult to see after the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes. Furthermore, for example, the display mode of the variable icon 9C may change at the same time as the effect image EG becomes difficult to see. Furthermore, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing rapidly, making it difficult to see their contents.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), the effect image EG is displayed again, suggesting that the display mode of the variable icon 9C will change. The effect image EG may be displayed with animation, or the effect image EG itself may be an animated image. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed, and the contents remain in a state that is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), the effect image EG becomes difficult to see, and the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes from a diagonal hexagram icon to a shaded hexagram icon. That is, the display mode of the reserved icon 9C has changed twice. This change in display mode may be accompanied by animation, or the second change in display mode may be performed without displaying the effect image EG. In addition, the timing at which the effect image EG becomes difficult to see and the timing at which the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes may be set arbitrarily. For example, the display mode of the variable icon 9C may change after the effect image EG becomes difficult to see. In addition, for example, the effect image EG may become difficult to see after the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes. Furthermore, for example, the display mode of the variable icon 9C may change at the same time as the effect image EG becomes difficult to see. In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, and the contents remain difficult to see.

Here, for the variable icon 9C, in Fig. 81 (A)-(B), the variable icon changes from a white hexagram icon to a diagonal hexagram icon, and in Fig. 81 (C)-(D), the diagonal hexagram icon changes to a shaded hexagram icon. That is, the first and second changes are both changes that increase the winning expectancy by one level. In contrast, a change that increases the winning expectancy by several levels may be executed in a single change, for example, changing from a white hexagram icon to a shaded hexagram icon in the first change. In addition, a special performance pattern may be set in which the variable icon 9C changes suddenly without displaying the effect image EG, with the performance in which the effect image EG is displayed and then the change in the variable icon 9C being executed as the usual performance pattern. These may also be executed in the change in the reserved icon 9A described below.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), an effect image EG is displayed, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first memory area will change. The effect image EG may be displayed with animation, or the effect image EG itself may be an animated image. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are rapidly changing, and the contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(F), the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes from a white square icon to a diagonal square icon. This change in display mode may be performed with animation. In this case, the shape of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area does not change, and only the pattern changes. However, this is not limited to this, and the pattern and shape may change, for example, to a diagonal hexagram icon. Also, for example, only the shape may change, for example, to a white pentagram icon. Also, the timing at which the effect image EG becomes difficult to see and the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes may be set arbitrarily. For example, the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area may change after the effect image EG becomes difficult to see. Also, for example, the effect image EG may become difficult to see after the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes. Furthermore, for example, the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area may change at the same time as the effect image EG becomes difficult to see. Furthermore, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing rapidly, making it difficult to see the content.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (G), an effect image EG is displayed, suggesting that the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area will change. The effect image EG may be displayed with animation, or the effect image EG itself may be an animated image. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed, and the contents remain in a state that is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (H), the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes from a white pentagram icon to a diagonal pentagram icon. This change in display mode may be performed with animation. In this case, the shape of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area does not change, and only the pattern changes. However, this is not limited to this, and the pattern and shape may change, for example, to a diagonal six-pointed star icon. Also, for example, only the shape may change, for example, to a white six-pointed star icon. Also, the timing at which the effect image EG becomes difficult to see and the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes may be set arbitrarily. For example, after the effect image EG becomes difficult to see, the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area may change. Also, for example, after the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes, the effect image EG may become difficult to see. Furthermore, for example, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area may change at the same time that the effect image EG becomes difficult to see. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are rapidly changing, and the contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(I), an effect image EG is displayed, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third memory area will change. The effect image EG may be displayed with animation, or the effect image EG itself may be an animated image. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed, and the contents remain in a state that is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (J), an effect image EG is displayed suggesting that the display mode will change, but the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third memory area does not change. In other words, even though a performance suggesting that the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third memory area will change has been executed, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third memory area has not changed. In this case, a suggestion performance may be executed in which the display mode changes with animation. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed, and the contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(K), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which had been displayed changing at high speed, change to a decelerated changing display, and the decorative symbols representing "3", "2", and "6" are displayed temporarily frozen. After this, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the next changing performance begins, as shown in FIG. 81(L).

The above is an example of the display of the reserved icon continuous change presentation A. By configuring the device to be able to execute the reserved icon continuous change presentation A, it is possible to make the player expect that during one change presentation, not only the change presentation of the reserved icon 9C, but also the reserved icon 9A will change. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the presentation of the reserved icon in the change presentation, and the interest of the game can be increased.

[Continuous change of reserved icon B]
82 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon continuous change performance B. The reserved icon continuous change performance B is a notice performance in which the display state of the reserved icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A changes to a state with a higher expectation of winning in the order in which the change performance is consumed during the change performance. In this example, the image display is performed by the display screen 7a, but may be performed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, respectively, and during deceleration variation, they are displayed vertically side by side so that two or more patterns are visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. During high-speed variation, the contents of the patterns are displayed so that they are difficult to see. During stop display, one pattern is displayed so that it is visible on the display screen 7a, but multiple patterns may be visible at the same time. Also, if the result of the special drawing is a winning combination, the three symbols lined up in a straight line will stop in a winning combination. Note that the three symbols lined up in a straight line here include symbols lined up in a roughly straight line. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

When executing the reserved icon continuous change performance B, the icons displayed in the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are determined to have a display mode that is determined by a combination of multiple types of shapes and multiple types of colors (in the example of FIG. 82, the difference in color is expressed by a pattern. The patterns may actually be different.) that have different expectations of winning the corresponding special drawing result. In addition, in each reserved icon (including the variable icon 9C), one of multiple types of characters may be assigned according to the expectation of winning the corresponding special drawing result, and the character image may be displayed as each reserved icon. In the reserved icon continuous change performance B, there are four types of shapes: circle, square, hexagram, and pentagram, and four types of colors (patterns): white (white-out), green (diagonal lines), red (shaded), and gold (honeycomb). The likelihood of winning the associated special drawing increases in the order of circle, square, hexagram, and pentagram, followed by white (outlined), green (diagonal lines), red (shaded), and gold (honeycomb).

Here, for each reserved icon (including the variable icon 9C), the difference in the probability of winning when the shape is different and the difference in the probability of winning when the color is different may be set arbitrarily. For example, the probability of winning may be set to increase in the following order: white circle icon, green circle icon, red circle icon, gold circle icon, white square icon, green square icon, red square icon, gold square icon, white hexagonal star icon, green hexagonal star icon, red hexagonal star icon, gold hexagonal star icon, white pentagram icon, green pentagram icon, red pentagram icon, gold pentagram icon. Also, for example, the order of the expectation of winning may be set to be higher in the order of white circle icon, green circle icon, white square icon, green square icon, white hexagonal star icon, green hexagonal star icon, white pentagram icon, green pentagram icon, red circle icon, gold circle icon, red square icon, gold square icon, red hexagonal star icon, gold hexagonal star icon, red pentagram icon, and gold pentagram icon. Also, for example, the order of the expectation of winning may be set to be higher in the order of white circle icon, white square icon, white hexagonal star icon, white pentagram icon, green circle icon, green square icon, green hexagonal star icon, green pentagram icon, red circle icon, red square icon, red hexagonal star icon, red pentagram icon, gold circle icon, gold square icon, gold hexagonal star icon, and gold pentagram icon. Also, for example, the likelihood of winning may be increased in the following order: white circle icon, white square icon, white hexagonal star icon, white pentagram icon, green circle icon, red circle icon, green square icon, red square icon, green hexagonal star icon, red hexagonal star icon, green pentagram icon, red pentagram icon, gold circle icon, gold square icon, gold hexagonal star icon, gold pentagram icon. Other orders may also be used.

Furthermore, when the final display form of a certain reserved icon becomes a green hexagram icon, the winning expectation may be the same or different between the case where the reserved icon was a green hexagram icon from the time when the display of the reserved icon started and the case where the reserved icon was a white hexagram icon when the display of the reserved icon started and changed to a green hexagram icon during the execution of the reserved icon continuous change performance A. In other words, the winning expectation may be different or may be the same depending on the change path leading to the final display form.
In the following examples, the colors (white, green, red, gold) are substituted with the patterns (white outline, diagonal lines, hatching, honeycomb) associated with the colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 82(A), the variable performance starts, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed, making it difficult to see their contents. At this time, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a is displayed, and it is assumed that no new balls have entered the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 until the end of this variable performance. The reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a (below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R). It is assumed that the display form of each reserved icon when a ball enters is all a white circular icon. Here, the display form of each reserved icon when a ball enters may be different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), a performance is executed that suggests that the display mode of the variable icon 9C will change. Here, a performance is displayed in which the candidate icon HK1 after the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes hits the enlarged icon 9CK, which is the enlarged variable icon 9C. Also, at this time, instead of the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a in FIG. 82(A), a mini reserved icon 9AM and a mini variable icon 9CM, which are icon images in which the respective icons are reduced, are displayed. This display is to be continued until the reserved icon continuous change performance B ends. Here, the candidate icon HK1 is a shaded hexagram icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the icon will change from a white circular icon to a shaded hexagram icon, and in this change, both the shape and the pattern of the variable icon 9C will change. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the icon may change only in shape, such as changing to a white pentagram icon, or the icon may change only in pattern, such as changing to a shaded circular icon. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but the changes continue. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may also be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), an enlarged icon 9CK of the variable icon 9C whose display mode has changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the variable icon 9C has changed from a white circle icon to a shaded hexagram icon. However, this is not limited to this, and the variable icon 9C may change to a display mode different from the candidate icon HK2 in the suggestion performance shown in FIG. 82(D), such as changing to a shaded pentagram icon. In this case, the display mode of the variable icon 9C has changed in both shape and pattern. In addition, the display of the enlarged icon 9CK may be performed with animation. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but the change continues. In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), an effect is executed that suggests that the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will change. Here, an effect is displayed in which the candidate icon HK2 after the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes hits the enlarged icon 9AK, which is the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged first storage area. The candidate icon HK2 is a white five-pointed star icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the white circular icon will change to a white five-pointed star icon, and this change will change the shape of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area. However, this is not limited to this, and both the shape and the pattern may change, for example, to a diagonal five-pointed star icon, or only the pattern may change, for example, to a shaded circular icon. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but the change continues. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may also be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), an enlarged icon 9AK of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area whose display mode has changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area has changed from a white circle icon to a white five-pointed star icon. However, this is not limited to this, and the display mode may change to a different display mode from the candidate icon HK2 in the suggestion performance shown in FIG. 82(D), such as changing to a shaded five-pointed star icon. In addition, the display of the enlarged icon 9AK may be performed with animation. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but the change continues. In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(F), an effect is executed again suggesting that the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will change. As in FIG. 82(D), an effect is displayed in which the candidate icon HK3 after the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes hits the enlarged icon 9AK, which is the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged first storage area. In FIG. 82(D)-(E), since the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area has already changed once, the enlarged icon 9AK is a white five-pointed star icon. The candidate icon HK3 is a honeycomb five-pointed star icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the white five-pointed star icon will change to a honeycomb five-pointed star icon, and in this change, only the pattern of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will change. However, this is not limiting, and both the shape and the pattern may be changed, for example, to a diagonal hexagram icon, or only the shape may be changed, for example, to a hollow hexagram icon. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but the change continues. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may also be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(G), an enlarged icon 9AK of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area after the second display mode change is displayed. That is, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area has changed from a hollow pentagram icon to a honeycomb pentagram icon. However, this is not limited to this, and the display mode may be changed to a different display mode from the candidate icon HK3 in the suggestion performance shown in FIG. 82(F), such as changing to a shaded pentagram icon. In addition, the display of the enlarged icon 9AK may be performed with animation. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but the change continues. In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(H), an effect is executed that suggests that the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area will change. Here, an effect is displayed in which the candidate icon HK4 after the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area has changed hits the enlarged icon 9AK, which is the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged second storage area. The candidate icon HK4 is a white five-pointed star icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the white circular icon will change to a white five-pointed star icon, and this change will change the shape of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area. However, this is not limited to this, and both the shape and the pattern may change, for example, to a diagonal five-pointed star icon, or only the pattern may change, for example, to a shaded circular icon. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but the change continues. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may also be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(I), an enlarged icon 9AK of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area whose display mode has not changed is displayed. That is, even though the suggestive performance is performed in FIG. 82(H), the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area maintains the display mode of a white circular icon. However, this is not limited to this, and the display mode may change to a different display mode from the candidate icon HK2 in the suggestive performance shown in FIG. 82(H), such as changing to a shaded five-pointed star icon. In addition, the display of the enlarged icon 9AK may be performed with animation. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but the change continues. In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(J), an effect is executed that suggests that the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area will change. Here, an effect is displayed in which the candidate icon HK5 after the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area has changed collides with the enlarged icon 9AK, which is the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged third storage area. The candidate icon HK5 is a white-filled square icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will change from a white-filled circular icon to a white-filled square icon, and this change will change the shape of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area. However, this is not limited to this, and both the shape and the pattern may change, for example, to a diagonal pentagram icon, or only the pattern may change, for example, to a shaded circular icon. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but the change continues. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may also be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(K), an enlarged icon 9AK of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area whose display mode has changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area has changed from a white circle icon to a white square icon. However, this is not limited to this, and the display mode may change to a different display mode from the candidate icon HK5 in the suggestion performance shown in FIG. 82(J), such as changing to a shaded pentagram icon. In addition, the display of the enlarged icon 9AK may be performed with animation. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but the change continues. In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. With this scene, the reserved icon continuous change performance B is considered to have ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(L), with the end of the reserved icon continuous change presentation B, the display returns to the normal change presentation display as in FIG. 82(A). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed, making their respective contents difficult to see. Also displayed are the change icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas. Each reserved icon is displayed in the display mode after the display mode has changed in FIG. 82(B) to (K). After this, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each go through a deceleration change display and a temporary stop display, and then come to a definite stop, ending this change presentation.

The above is an example of the display of the reserved icon continuous change presentation B. By configuring the device to be able to execute the reserved icon continuous change presentation B, it is possible to make the player expect that during one change presentation, not only the change presentation of the reserved icon 9C, but also multiple reserved icons 9A will change. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the presentation of the reserved icons in the change presentation, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Continuous change of reserved icon C]
83 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon continuous change performance C. The reserved icon continuous change performance C is a notice performance in which the display state of the reserved icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A changes to a state with a higher expectation of winning in the order in which the change performance is consumed during the change performance. In this example, the image display is performed by the display screen 7a, but may be performed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the stop display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern here may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, respectively, and during deceleration variation, they are displayed vertically side by side so that two or more patterns are visible at the same time on the display screen 7a. During high-speed variation, the contents of the patterns are displayed so that they are difficult to see. During stop display, one pattern is displayed so that it is visible on the display screen 7a, but multiple patterns may be visible at the same time. Also, if the result of the special drawing is a winning combination, the three symbols lined up in a straight line will stop in a winning combination. Note that the three symbols lined up in a straight line here include symbols lined up in a roughly straight line. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

When executing the reserved icon continuous change performance C, the icons displayed in the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are determined to have a display mode that is determined by a combination of multiple types of shapes and multiple types of colors (in the example of FIG. 83, the difference in color is expressed by a pattern. The patterns may actually be different.) that have different expectations of winning the corresponding special drawing result. In addition, in each reserved icon (including the variable icon 9C), one of multiple types of characters may be assigned according to the expectation of winning the corresponding special drawing result, and the character image may be displayed as each reserved icon. In the reserved icon continuous change performance C, there are five types of shapes: circle, square, hexagram, pentagram, and octagram, and four types of colors (patterns): white (white-out), green (diagonal lines), red (shaded), and gold (honeycomb). The likelihood of winning the associated special drawing increases in the order of circle, square, hexagram, pentagram, and octagram, followed by white (whiteout), green (diagonal lines), red (shaded), and gold (honeycomb).

Here, for each reserved icon (including the variable icon 9C), the difference in the probability of winning when the shape is different and the difference in the probability of winning when the color is different may be set arbitrarily. For example, the probability of winning may be set to increase in the following order: white circle icon, green circle icon, red circle icon, gold circle icon, white square icon, green square icon, red square icon, gold square icon, white hexagonal star icon, green hexagonal star icon, red hexagonal star icon, gold hexagonal star icon, white pentagram icon, green pentagram icon, red pentagram icon, gold pentagram icon, white eight-pointed star icon, green eight-pointed star icon, red eight-pointed star icon, and gold eight-pointed star icon. In addition, for example, the likelihood of winning may be increased in the following order: white circle icon, green circle icon, white square icon, green square icon, white hexagonal star icon, green hexagonal star icon, white pentagram icon, green pentagram icon, white eight-pointed star icon, green eight-pointed star icon, red circle icon, gold circle icon, red square icon, gold square icon, red hexagonal star icon, gold hexagonal star icon, red pentagram icon, gold pentagram icon, red eight-pointed star icon, gold eight-pointed star icon. In addition, for example, the likelihood of winning may be increased in the following order: white circle icon, white square icon, white hexagonal star icon, white pentagram icon, white eight-pointed star icon, green circle icon, green square icon, green hexagonal star icon, green pentagram icon, green eight-pointed star icon, red circle icon, red square icon, red hexagonal star icon, red pentagram icon, red eight-pointed star icon, gold circle icon, gold square icon, gold hexagonal star icon, gold pentagram icon, and gold eight-pointed star icon. Also, for example, the likelihood of winning may be increased in the following order: white circle icon, white square icon, white six-pointed star icon, white pentagram icon, white eight-pointed star icon, green circle icon, red circle icon, green square icon, red square icon, green six-pointed star icon, red six-pointed star icon, green pentagram icon, red pentagram icon, green eight-pointed star icon, red eight-pointed star icon, gold circle icon, gold square icon, gold six-pointed star icon, gold pentagram icon, gold eight-pointed star icon. Other orders may also be used.

Furthermore, when the final display form of a certain reserved icon becomes a green hexagram icon, the winning expectation may be the same or different between the case where the reserved icon was a green hexagram icon from the time when the display of the reserved icon started and the case where the reserved icon was a white hexagram icon when the display of the reserved icon started and changed to a green hexagram icon during the execution of the reserved icon continuous change performance A. In other words, the winning expectation may be different or may be the same depending on the change path leading to the final display form.
In the following examples, the colors (white, green, red, gold) are substituted with the patterns (white outline, diagonal lines, hatching, honeycomb) associated with the colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 83(A), the variable performance starts, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. At this time, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern reserved memory area 85a is displayed, and no new balls have entered the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 until the end of this variable performance. The reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a (below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R). The display mode of each reserved icon when a ball enters is as follows: the variable icon 9C is a white square, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first memory area is a white eight-pointed star icon, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second memory area is a white six-pointed star icon, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third memory area is a white circular icon, and the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth memory area is a white five-pointed star icon. Here, the display mode of each reserved icon when a ball enters is the same, although all shapes are different. Alternatively, they may all have the same shape, or they may all have different shapes and patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), a performance is executed that suggests that the display mode of the variable icon 9C will change. Here, a character represented by the character image CRX attacks the enlarged icon 9CB, which is the variable icon 9C that is enlarged, and a performance is displayed in which a candidate icon after the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes appears from inside the broken enlarged icon 9CB. Also, at this time, in a predetermined area of the display screen 7a, an area for storing each reserved icon (including the variable icon 9C) and an area for displaying a reduced decorative pattern are provided. Here, the candidate icon is a shaded square icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the icon will change from a white square icon to a shaded square icon, and this change will change the pattern of the variable icon 9C. However, this is not limited to this, and both the shape and the pattern may be changed, for example, to a shaded pentagram icon, or only the shape may be changed, for example, to a white circular icon. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a, and the change is assumed to be continuous. Not limited to this, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. Also, the reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Not limited to this, the reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. For the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the reserved icons other than the reserved icon (including the changing icon 9C) in which the reserved change is currently being performed, the display method and position shown in FIG. 83 (B) are assumed to be maintained until the reserved icon continuous change performance C ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), an enlarged icon 9CB of the variable icon 9C whose display mode has changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the variable icon 9C has changed from a white square icon to a shaded square icon. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the display mode may be changed to a different display mode from the candidate icon in the suggestion performance shown in FIG. 83(B), such as changing to a shaded pentagram icon. In addition, the display of the enlarged icon 9CB may be performed with animation. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a, and the change is assumed to be continuous. Not limited to this, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. Also, the reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Not limited to this, the reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a performance is executed that suggests that the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will change. Here, a performance is displayed in which a character represented by the character image CRX attacks the enlarged icon 9AB, which is the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged first storage area, and a candidate icon after the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes appears from inside the broken enlarged icon 9AB. Here, the candidate icon is a shaded eight-pointed star icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the icon will change from a white eight-pointed star icon to a shaded eight-pointed star icon, and this change will change the pattern of the variable icon 9C. However, this is not limited to this, and both the shape and the pattern may change, for example, to a shaded five-pointed star icon, or only the shape may change, for example, to a white circular icon. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a, and the change is assumed to continue. Not limited to this, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. Also, the reserved icons 9A and the variable icons 9C corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Not limited to this, the reserved icons 9A and the variable icons 9C corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), an enlarged icon 9AB of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area whose display mode has not changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area remains the white eight-pointed star icon. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be changed to a display mode different from the candidate icon in the suggestion performance shown in FIG. 83(F), such as changing to a shaded five-pointed star icon. In addition, the display of the enlarged icon 9AB may be performed with animation. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a, and the change is assumed to be continuous. Not limited to this, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. Also, the reserved icons 9A and the change icons 9C corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Not limited to this, the reserved icons 9A and the change icons 9C corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), a performance is executed that suggests that the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area will change. Here, a performance is displayed in which a character representing the character image CRY envelops the enlarged icon 9AB, which is the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged second storage area, with an aura similar to the pattern of the candidate icon when the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes. That is, the candidate icon is a shaded eight-pointed star icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the icon will change from a white eight-pointed star icon to a shaded eight-pointed star icon, and in this change, the pattern of the variable icon 9C will change. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, both the shape and the pattern may change, such as changing to a shaded five-pointed star icon, or only the shape may change, such as changing to a white circular icon. In addition, the suggestive performance using this character image CRY has a higher probability of changing the display mode of the target reserved icon than the suggestive performance using the character image CRX shown in FIG. 83(B) and (D). That is, in the pending icon continuous change performance C, as a performance suggesting the display mode of the pending icon, either a suggestion performance using a character image CRX with a relatively low expectation of change in the display mode or a performance using a character image CRY with a relatively high expectation of change in the display mode is executed. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to execute one of three or more suggestion performances each having a different expectation of change in the display mode. In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a, and the change is assumed to be continuous. In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. In addition, the pending icons 9A and the change icons 9C corresponding to the first, third, and fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In addition, the pending icons 9A and the change icons 9C corresponding to the first, third, and fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(G), an enlarged icon 9AB of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area whose display mode has changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area has changed from a white eight-pointed star icon to a shaded eight-pointed star icon. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the display mode may be changed to a different display mode from the candidate icon in the suggestion performance shown in FIG. 83(F), such as changing to a shaded five-pointed star icon. The display of the image representing the aura in the suggestion performance shown in FIG. 83(F) is maintained. In addition, the display of the enlarged icon 9AB may be performed with animation. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a, and the change is assumed to be continuous. In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. In addition, the reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first, third, and fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Not limited to this, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first, third, and fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

After this, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third memory area is not changed, and furthermore, the performance suggesting that the display mode will change is not executed. In other words, when the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third memory area will not change, it is configured to be able to select not to execute the performance suggesting that the display mode will change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(H), an effect is executed that suggests that the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area will change. Here, a character represented by the character image CRX attacks the enlarged icon 9AB, which is the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged fourth storage area, and an effect is displayed in which a candidate icon after the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes appears from inside the broken enlarged icon 9AB. Also, at this time, in a predetermined area of the display screen 7a, an area for storing each reserved icon (including the variable icon 9C) and an area for displaying a reduced decorative pattern are provided. Here, the candidate icon is a diagonal pentagram icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the icon will change from a hollow pentagram icon to a diagonal pentagram icon, and this change will change the pattern of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area. However, without being limited to this, both the shape and the pattern may be changed, for example, by changing to a shaded hexagram icon, or only the shape may be changed, for example, by changing to a white circular icon. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a, and the change is assumed to be continuous. Without being limited to this, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. Also, the change icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first, second, and fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Without being limited to this, the change icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first, second, and fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(I), an enlarged icon 9AB of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area whose display mode has changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area has changed from a white pentagram icon to a diagonal pentagram icon. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the display mode may be changed to a different display mode from the candidate icon in the suggestion performance shown in FIG. 83(H), such as changing to a shaded pentagram icon. In addition, the display of the enlarged icon 9AB may be performed with animation. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a, and the change is assumed to continue. In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64. In addition, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed one by one in an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Without being limited to this, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A corresponding to the first to third memory areas may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(J), the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area whose display mode has changed in FIG. 83(H)-(I) is stored in an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a, and then the display mode changes again. Here, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area has changed from a diagonal pentagram icon to a honeycomb pentagram icon. Also, in the upper area of the display screen 7a (the area where the enlarged icon 9AB of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area whose display mode has changed was displayed as a suggestion effect or a suggestion effect), a honeycomb pattern image is displayed as an effect suggesting that the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area will change from a diagonal pentagram icon to a honeycomb pentagram icon. The timing at which this honeycomb pattern image is displayed and the timing at which the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area changes from a diagonal pentagram icon to a honeycomb pentagram icon may be set arbitrarily. That is, the honeycomb pattern image is displayed. At the same time as the image of the honeycomb pattern is displayed, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area may change from a diagonal pentagram icon to a honeycomb pentagram icon, or after the image of the honeycomb pattern is displayed, the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area may change from a diagonal pentagram icon to a honeycomb pentagram icon, or after the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area changes from a diagonal pentagram icon to a honeycomb pentagram icon, the image of the honeycomb pattern may be displayed. In addition, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area may change from the change suggested by the suggestion performance to a shaded pentagram icon or change in shape, for example, even though an image of a honeycomb pattern is displayed in the suggestion performance. In this way, when the suggestion performance using the character images CRX and CRY is not performed, or when the display mode has changed once, the display mode of the reserved icon may be changed suddenly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(K), the effect related to the change in the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area has ended, that is, the reserved icon continuous change effect C has ended, so the display mode of the change effect returns to the same mode as in FIG. 83(A). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a high-speed change, and the reserved icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a (below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R). The display mode of each reserved icon (including the change icon 9C) is the display mode after the change in FIG. 83(B) to (J). Specifically, the change icon 9C is displayed as a shaded square icon, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is displayed as a white eight-pointed star icon, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area is displayed as a honeycomb hexagram icon, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area is displayed as a white circular icon, and the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area is displayed as a honeycomb pentagram icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(L), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed in a variable manner in FIG. 83(A)-(K) are displayed as still. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a "5", the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a "9". After this, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the next variable performance begins.

The above is an example of the display of the reserved icon continuous change presentation C. By configuring the reserved icon continuous change presentation C to be executable, it is possible to make the player expect that during one change presentation, not only the change presentation of the relevant reserved icon 9C, but also multiple reserved icons 9A will change. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the presentation of the reserved icons in the change presentation, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

[Example of effect]
The following are examples of the effects of this embodiment.
[Effect 1]
81 to 83, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to execute a first effect in which the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes after the variable effect starts, a second effect in which the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes after the first effect, and a third effect in which the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes after the second effect. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effect, and the interest can be increased.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponds to the "display screen" in claim 1, the variable icon 9C corresponds to the "variable icon," and the hold icon 9A corresponds to the "hold icon."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 81 to 83, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect may each be executed multiple times. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by the unprecedented and novel effects, and can increase the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
81 to 83, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to be able to execute a fourth effect, which is an effect suggesting that the display mode of the variable icon 9C will change before the first effect, a fifth effect, which is an effect suggesting that the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will change before the second effect, and a sixth effect, which is an effect suggesting that the display mode of the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area will change before the third effect. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented and novel effects, and the interest can be increased.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A may all have different shapes when they are first displayed, as shown in Figures 81 and 83. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by a novel presentation that has never been seen before, and can increase the player's interest.

[Modification]
A modified example of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the reserved icon continuous change performance, a character image corresponding to each reserved icon may be displayed together with each reserved icon, and the display mode of each character image may be changed. In this case, for example, when a character corresponding to each reserved icon wins a battle, the display mode of the character image may be changed to a mode with a higher expectation of a big win. In addition, in this case, the type of character may be determined by the expectation of winning the corresponding special drawing lottery, and the display mode of each character image may be changed by the reserved icon continuous change performance. Furthermore, for example, when a character image corresponding to each reserved icon is displayed, the reserved icon may be difficult to see or may be temporarily hidden.

[Modification 2]
In the pending icon continuous change performances A and C, when the performance in which the display mode of each pending icon is changed is being executed, the state in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing may be made invisible. Also, in the pending icon continuous change performance B, the state in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing may be made visible.

[Modification 3]
In the pending icon continuous change performances A and B, as a performance suggesting that the display mode of the pending icon will change, as shown in the pending icon continuous change performance C, one may be selected and executed from a plurality of types of performances, each of which has a different expectation of the change in the display mode of the pending icon.

[Modification 4]
In the continuous change presentation of reserved icons, before the change in the display mode of each reserved icon is executed, a specific numerical value such as the ranking of the reserved icon's expected jackpot probability after the change in display mode, or the probability of a jackpot, may be presented.

[Modification 5]
In the pending icon continuous change presentation B, as shown in Figures 81 (A) and 83 (A), the display mode of each pending icon before the display mode is changed may all be different.

[Modification 6]
The decorative pattern change effects A to E described above may be combined as appropriate.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine having a display screen capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific icon corresponding to the special drawing that triggered the variable performance being executed,
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined icon corresponding to a special drawing lottery that will be the trigger for the variable performance to be executed next time onwards,
A first effect in which the display mode of the specific icon changes after the change effect is started;
A second performance in which the display mode of the first predetermined icon corresponding to the special drawing to be consumed in the next variable performance after the first performance is changed;
After the second performance, a third performance is executed in which the display mode of the second predetermined icon corresponding to the special drawing to be consumed in the next variable performance is changed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
The first effect, the second effect, and the third effect may each be executed multiple times.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
a fourth effect which is an effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific icon will change before the first effect;
a fifth effect which is an effect suggesting that a display mode of the first predetermined icon will change before the second effect;
and a sixth effect, which is an effect suggesting that the display mode of the second predetermined icon will change, before the third effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B4-1 to B4-3,
The specific icon and the plurality of predetermined icons may all have different display forms.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following describes the pattern change update effects A to C using Figures 84 to 86. This pattern change update effect is executed during the decorative pattern change effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the pattern change update effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Pattern change update performance A]
Fig. 84 is a diagram for explaining the symbol change update performance A. Fig. 84 (A) to (F) show a first example of the symbol change update performance A, and Fig. 84 (G) to (L) show a second example of the symbol change update performance A.

In the first example of the pattern change update performance A, first, a stop display performance is executed as shown in FIG. 84 (A). The stop display performance is a performance in which multiple rows of decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the "9" pattern. The changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed by scrolling up and down inside the frame image WG (same below).

Next, as shown in Figures 84 (B) to (D), a pattern change effect is executed. The pattern change effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns in a predetermined row among the multiple rows of decorative patterns are changed again. Here, a button image BG is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image that imitates the effect button 63 with a downward arrow image added. The button image BG is an image that encourages pressing of the effect button 63. The same applies below. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the effect button 63 has been operated.

In Fig. 84(B), the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to move downward. As a result, the "7" image and the "9" image move downward, and the "8" image and the "0" image are framed in.
In Fig. 84(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are further moved downward. As a result, the "7" image and the "9" image are framed out, and the "8" image and the "0" image are moved closer to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 84(D), of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Note that the configuration may be such that the pattern change effects of Fig. 84 (B) to (D) are executed by a single operation of the effect button 63. Also, the configuration may be such that the pattern change effects of Fig. 84 (B) to (D) are executed by repeatedly tapping or pressing and holding the effect button 63. Here, the effect button 63 is operated, but the pattern change effects of Fig. 84 (B) to (D) may be executed without operating the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the decorative pattern stops in a predetermined reach state. Here, the right decorative pattern 8R stops at the "2" pattern, and forms a reach state together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. At this time, too, the button image BG is displayed in the lower right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may be configured to stop at the "2" pattern in accordance with the operation timing of the effect button 63. Also, the right decorative pattern 8R may be configured to stop at the "2" pattern regardless of the operation of the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the middle decorative symbol stops as the final stop symbol. Here, the middle decorative symbol 8C stops at the "3" symbol, which is a missed reach. At this time, the button image BG is also displayed at the bottom right of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative symbol 8C may be configured to stop at the "3" symbol in accordance with the operation timing of the effect button 63. Also, the middle decorative symbol 8C may be configured to stop at the "3" symbol regardless of the operation of the effect button 63.

In the second example of the pattern change update performance A, first, a stop display performance is executed as shown in FIG. 84 (G). The stop display performance is a performance in which multiple rows of decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the "9" pattern. The changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed by scrolling up and down inside the frame image WG (same below).

Next, as shown in Figures 84 (H) to (K), a pattern change effect is executed. The pattern change effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns of a predetermined row among the multiple rows of decorative patterns are changed again. Here, a button image BG is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image that imitates the effect button 63 with a downward arrow image added. The button image BG is an image that encourages pressing of the effect button 63. The same applies below. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the effect button 63 has been operated.

In Fig. 84(H), the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to move downward. As a result, the "7" image and the "9" image move downward, and the "8" image and the "0" image are framed in.
In Fig. 84(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are further moved downward. As a result, the "7" image and the "9" image are framed out, and the "8" image and the "0" image are moved closer to the center of the frame image WG.
In Fig. 84(J), the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are further moved downward. As a result, the "8" image and the "0" image are moved to the center of the frame image WG.
84(K), the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are further moved downward. As a result, the “9” image and the “1” image are moved to the center of the frame image WG.

Note that the configuration may be such that the pattern change presentation of Fig. 84 (H) to (K) is executed by a single operation of the presentation button 63. Also, the configuration may be such that the pattern change presentation of Fig. 84 (H) to (K) is executed by repeatedly tapping or pressing and holding the presentation button 63. Here, the presentation button 63 is operated, but the configuration may be such that the pattern change presentation of Fig. 84 (H) to (K) is executed without operating the presentation button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (L), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the decorative pattern stops in a predetermined reach state. Here, the right decorative pattern 8R stops at the "2" pattern, and forms a reach state together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C starts to fluctuate at high speed. At this time, too, the button image BG is displayed in the lower right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may be configured to stop at the "2" pattern in accordance with the operation timing of the effect button 63. Also, the right decorative pattern 8R may be configured to stop at the "2" pattern regardless of the operation of the effect button 63.

[Pattern change update performance B]
Fig. 85 is a diagram for explaining the symbol change update performance B. Fig. 85 (A) to (F) show a first example of the symbol change update performance B, and Fig. 85 (G) to (L) show a second example of the symbol change update performance B.

In the first example of the pattern change update performance B, first, a stop display performance is executed as shown in FIG. 85 (A). The stop display performance is a performance in which multiple rows of decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the "9" pattern. The changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed by scrolling up and down inside the frame image WG (same below).

Next, as shown in Figures 85 (B) to (D), a pattern change effect is executed. The pattern change effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns of a predetermined row among the multiple rows of decorative patterns are changed again. Here, a button image BG is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image that imitates the effect button 63 with a downward arrow image added. The button image BG is an image that encourages pressing of the effect button 63. The same applies below. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the effect button 63 has been operated.

In Fig. 85(B), the right decorative symbol 8R among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R starts to move downward. As a result, the "9" image moves downward and the "0" image is framed in.
In Fig. 85(C), the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is further moved downward. As a result, the "9" image is framed out, and the "0" image is moved closer to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 85(D), of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the right decorative pattern 8R is fluctuating at high speed.

Note that the configuration may be such that the pattern change effects of Fig. 85 (B) to (D) are executed by a single operation of the effect button 63. Also, the configuration may be such that the pattern change effects of Fig. 85 (B) to (D) are executed by repeatedly tapping or pressing and holding the effect button 63. Here, the effect button 63 is operated, but the pattern change effects of Fig. 85 (B) to (D) may be executed without operating the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in Figures 85 (E) and (F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols stop in a predetermined reach state. Here, the right decorative symbol 8R stops at the "2" symbol, and together with the left decorative symbol 8L, forms a reach state. In Figure 85 (E), the "2" symbol is enlarged as it stops. The "2" symbol is temporarily enlarged, and then returns to its original size. In Figure 85 (F), the center decorative symbol 8C begins to fluctuate at high speed.

At this time, the button image BG is also displayed at the bottom right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may be configured to stop at the "2" symbol in accordance with the operation timing of the performance button 63. Also, the right decorative pattern 8R may be configured to stop at the "2" symbol regardless of the operation of the performance button 63.

In a second example of the pattern change update effect B, first, a stop display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 85 (G). The stop display effect is an effect in which multiple rows of decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the "9" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern. The changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed by scrolling up and down inside the frame image WG (same below).

Next, as shown in Figures 85 (H) to (K), a pattern change effect is executed. The pattern change effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns of a predetermined row among the multiple rows of decorative patterns are changed again. Here, a button image BG is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image that imitates the effect button 63 with a downward arrow image added. The button image BG is an image that encourages pressing of the effect button 63. The same applies below. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the effect button 63 has been operated.

In Fig. 85(H), the central decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R starts to move downward. As a result, the "9" image moves downward and the "0" image is framed in.
In Fig. 85(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is further moved downward. As a result, the "9" image is framed out, and the "0" image is moved closer to the center of the frame image WG.
In Fig. 85(J), the central decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is further moved downward. As a result, the "0" image is moved to the center of the frame image WG.
85(K), the central decorative symbol 8C among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is further moved downward. As a result, the “1” image is moved to the center of the frame image WG.

The configuration may be such that the pattern change effects of Fig. 85 (H) to (K) are executed by a single operation of the effect button 63. The configuration may also be such that the pattern change effects of Fig. 85 (H) to (K) are executed by repeatedly tapping or pressing and holding the effect button 63. Here, the effect button 63 is operated, but the pattern change effects of Fig. 85 (H) to (K) may be executed without operating the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (L), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the middle decorative symbol stops as the final stop symbol. Here, the middle decorative symbol 8C stops at the "2" symbol, which indicates a win. At this time, the button image BG is also displayed in the lower right of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative symbol 8C may be configured to stop at the "2" symbol in accordance with the operation timing of the effect button 63. Also, the middle decorative symbol 8C may be configured to stop at the "2" symbol regardless of the operation of the effect button 63.

[Pattern change update performance C]
Fig. 86 is a diagram for explaining the symbol change update performance C. Fig. 86 (A) to (F) show a first example of the symbol change update performance C, and Fig. 86 (G) to (L) show a second example of the symbol change update performance C.

In the first example of the pattern change update performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), a stop display performance is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which multiple rows of decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the "9" pattern. The changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed by scrolling up and down inside the frame image WG (same below).

Next, as shown in Figures 86 (B) to (D), a pattern change effect is executed. The pattern change effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns of a predetermined row among the multiple rows of decorative patterns are changed again. Here, a button image BG is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image that imitates the effect button 63 with a downward arrow image added. The button image BG is an image that encourages pressing of the effect button 63. The same applies below. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the effect button 63 has been operated.

In Fig. 86(B), the right decorative symbol 8R among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R starts to move downward. As a result, the "9" image moves downward and the "0" image is framed in.
In Fig. 86(C), the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is further moved downward. As a result, the "9" image is framed out, and the "0" image is moved closer to the center of the frame image WG.
In Fig. 86(D), the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is fluctuating at high speed. The right decorative pattern 8R is fluctuating at high speed in a reduced state. The right decorative pattern 8R is sufficiently reduced and then becomes invisible.

Note that the configuration may be such that the pattern change effects of Fig. 86 (B) to (D) are executed by a single operation of the effect button 63. Also, the configuration may be such that the pattern change effects of Fig. 86 (B) to (D) are executed by repeatedly tapping or pressing and holding the effect button 63. Here, the effect button 63 is operated, but the pattern change effects of Fig. 86 (B) to (D) may be executed without operating the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(E), a specific symbol stop effect is executed. A specific symbol stop effect is an effect in which a specific symbol stops in a predetermined row of decorative symbols. Here, the right decorative symbol 8R stops at the "NEXT" symbol as a specific symbol. The "NEXT" symbol is enlarged as the "NEXT" symbol stops. The "NEXT" symbol is temporarily enlarged and then returns to its original size. The "NEXT" symbol is a specific symbol that suggests a pseudo consecutive effect. At this time, the button image BG is also displayed at the bottom right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative symbol 8R may be configured to stop at the "NEXT" symbol in accordance with the operation timing of the effect button 63. Also, the right decorative symbol 8R may be configured to stop at the "NEXT" symbol regardless of the operation of the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), a re-changing performance is executed in association with the pseudo consecutive performance. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are changing at high speed. At this time, the button image BG is also displayed in the lower right of the display screen 7a. The re-changing performance may be executed in accordance with the operation timing of the performance button 63. Also, the re-changing performance may be executed regardless of the operation of the performance button 63.

In a second example of the pattern change update effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 86 (G), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display effect is an effect in which multiple rows of decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the "9" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern. The changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed by scrolling up and down inside the frame image WG (same below).

Next, as shown in Figures 86 (H) to (K), a pattern change effect is executed. The pattern change effect is an effect in which the decorative patterns of a predetermined row among the multiple rows of decorative patterns are changed again. Here, a button image BG is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image that imitates the effect button 63 with a downward arrow image added. The button image BG is an image that encourages pressing of the effect button 63. The same applies below. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the effect button 63 has been operated.

In Fig. 86(H), the central decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R starts to move downward. As a result, the "9" image moves downward and the "0" image is framed in.
In Fig. 86(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is further moved downward. As a result, the "9" image is framed out, and the "0" image is moved closer to the center of the frame image WG.
In Fig. 86(J), the middle decorative symbol 8C among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is further moved downward. As a result, the "0" image is moved to the center of the frame image WG.
86(K), the middle decorative symbol 8C among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is further moved downward. As a result, the “1” image is moved to the center of the frame image WG.

Note that the configuration may be such that the pattern change presentation of Fig. 86 (H) to (K) is executed by a single operation of the presentation button 63. Also, the configuration may be such that the pattern change presentation of Fig. 86 (H) to (K) is executed by repeatedly tapping or pressing and holding the presentation button 63. Here, the presentation button 63 is operated, but the configuration may be such that the pattern change presentation of Fig. 86 (H) to (K) is executed without operating the presentation button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (L), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the middle decorative symbol stops as the final stop symbol. Here, the middle decorative symbol 8C stops at the "NEXT" symbol. The "NEXT" symbol is a specific symbol that suggests a pseudo consecutive effect. At this time, too, the button image BG is displayed at the bottom right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative symbol 8R may be configured to stop at the "NEXT" symbol in accordance with the operation timing of the effect button 63. Also, the right decorative symbol 8R may be configured to stop at the "NEXT" symbol regardless of the operation of the effect button 63.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the pattern change update performance.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in accordance with the operation of the effect button 63, a pattern change effect (FIG. 84(B)-(E), FIG. 84(H)-(K), FIG. 85(B)-(D), FIG. 85(H)-(K), FIG. 86(B)-(D), FIG. 86(H)-(K)) in which a predetermined row of decorative patterns among the multiple rows of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in a stopped state is changed again can be performed, and a pattern update effect (FIG. 84(E)(F), FIG. 84(L), FIG. 85(E), FIG. 85(L), FIG. 86(E), FIG. 86(L)) in which a specific row of decorative patterns among the predetermined rows of decorative patterns is stopped with a different pattern from the pattern that was stopped before the change again can be performed. According to this configuration, an unprecedented re-changing effect can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved. The effect button 63 corresponds to the "operation means", and the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "effect execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols in a specific row are stopped at the "NEXT" symbol as a symbol update effect, suggesting that a pseudo consecutive effect will be executed (FIG. 86(E), FIG. 86(L)). According to this configuration, a re-changing effect that has not been seen before can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols in a specific row are expanded or contracted in response to the symbol renewal effect (FIG. 85(E), FIG. 86(E)). This configuration provides a re-changing effect that has not been seen before, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a non-display effect is executed in which the decorative symbols in a specific row are hidden during the expansion/contraction effect (FIG. 86(D)). With this configuration, a non-conventional re-changing effect can be provided, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the pattern change update performance are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the "NEXT" symbol is given as an example of the specific symbol, but the specific symbol is not limited to this. For example, if the symbol that suggests a specific effect (such as a pseudo consecutive effect) is determined in advance as the "3" symbol, the "3" symbol may be set as the specific symbol.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the button image BG is continuously displayed, but the button image BG may be switched between displayed and hidden in accordance with the timing at which the effect button 63 becomes active.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the decorative patterns in a predetermined row are scrolled up and down inside the frame image. However, the patterns may be switched without scrolling. Specifically, after Fig. 84(J), the patterns are not moved up and down and are displayed as shown in Fig. 84(K).

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A8-1]
an operation means operable by a player;
A game machine including: a performance execution means capable of executing a performance triggered by the operation of the operation means;
The performance execution means, in accordance with the operation of the operation means,
A pattern change performance in which the decorative patterns of a predetermined row among the multiple rows of decorative patterns in a stopped state are changed again;
After the pattern change performance, a pattern update performance is executed in which the decorative patterns of a specific row among the decorative patterns of the predetermined row are stopped with a pattern different from the pattern stopped before the re-change.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A8-1,
The effect execution means stops the decorative symbols in the specific row at a specific symbol as the symbol update effect, and suggests that a specific effect will be executed after the specific symbol is stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-2,
The decorative symbols in the specific row are stopped at specific symbols, suggesting the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A8-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A8-1 to A8-3,
The effect execution means executes an enlargement/reduction effect including at least one of enlarging and reducing the decorative pattern of the specific row in association with at least one of the pattern change effect and the pattern update effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A8-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A8-4,
Executing a non-display effect in which the decorative pattern of the specific column is not displayed during the enlargement/reduction effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning probability indication effects 1 to 3 are explained below with reference to Figures 87 to 89. These winning probability indication effects 1 to 3 are executed in the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a variation effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Winning probability indication 1]
87 is a diagram for explaining the winning expectation suggestion performance 1. The winning expectation suggestion performance 1 is a performance in which, during a change on the display screen 7a, four reserved special drawing lots are accumulated, and a performance is performed in which the winning expectation of the special drawing lottery of the change and the winning expectation of the reserved special drawing lottery are suggested one by one, and then, the results of the winning or losing judgment are announced one by one.

First, as shown in FIG. 87(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, which are currently changing. Also, four second special patterns are reserved. In other words, reserved icon 9C (the change icon corresponding to the change) and reserved icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth reserved second special patterns, respectively, are displayed. Here, reserved icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, 9B4, and 9C are displayed. Note that reserved icon 9A may be displayed, reserved icon 9C may not be displayed, and all reserved icons may not be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), the fortune-telling performance is performed. This fortune-telling performance is performed when four second special reserved figures are accumulated. When this performance is performed, in order to make the player see the fortune-telling performance as the main focus, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the fortune-telling tube OMK is displayed on the display screen 7a. This fortune-telling performance changes the state of the reserved icon 9C and the reserved icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4, and in order to suggest the expected probability of a win based on this changed state, the reserved icon 9C and the reserved icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 are enlarged and displayed. In addition, the special drawing of the relevant change and the reserved special drawing are performed one by one, and in order to make it appear that there are five chances, they are displayed in a row with the same size. Here, the first fortune-telling is performed, and "Daikichi" is displayed as the result of the fortune-telling OK.

Here, the results of the fortune lottery OKA can be "Daikichi", "Chuukichi", "Koukichi" or "Suekichi", and represent the expected probability of winning the special lottery, with "Daikichi" having the highest expected probability of 50, "Chuukichi" having the second highest expected probability of 30, "Koukichi" having the third highest expected probability of 20, and "Suekichi" having the lowest expected probability (fourth highest) of 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), the pending icon 9C for the change corresponding to the first fortune-telling lottery shows "Dai" (big), which indicates the result "Daikichi" (great luck). At this time, pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 do not show any indication of the fortune-telling lottery result.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), the second fortune is drawn, and the fortune result is displayed as "small good fortune."

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(E), the first reserved icon 9B1 of the second special reserved chart corresponding to the second fortune-telling draw displays "Small," which represents the result "Small Good Fortune." At this time, reserved icon 9C still displays "Large," which represents the result of the first fortune-telling draw, "Great Good Fortune," and reserved icons 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 do not display the result of the fortune-telling draw.

As described above, a fortune telling performance will be performed for all reserved special drawing drawings, and the fortune telling results will be displayed on all reserved icons. This fortune telling performance will be performed with the same change.

Figure 87 (F) shows a state in which fortune-telling performance is performed for all reserved special drawing lotteries, and all reserved icons are displayed to show the results of the fortune-telling. Reserve icon 9C displays "Dai" which represents the result of the corresponding fortune-telling lottery, "Small" which represents the result of the first fortune-telling lottery for the second reserved special drawing, reserve icon 9B1 displays "Small" which represents the result of the first fortune-telling lottery for the second reserved special drawing, reserve icon 9B2 displays "Dai" which represents the result of the second fortune-telling lottery for the second reserved special drawing, reserve icon 9B3 displays "Sue" which represents the result of the third fortune-telling lottery for the second reserved special drawing, and reserve icon 9B4 displays "Chu" which represents the result of the fourth fortune-telling lottery for the second reserved special drawing. Reserve icon 9C and reserve icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 are displayed in a row of similar size.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(G), the result of the special drawing for the first fortune drawing is displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L displays a "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C displays an "8", and the right decorative pattern 8R displays a "9", indicating that the special drawing was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (H), the results of the special drawing for which the first fortune was drawn are displayed, causing the reserved lottery to shift. That is, reserved icon 9B1 becomes reserved icon 9C, reserved icon 9B2 becomes reserved icon 9B1, reserved icon 9B3 becomes reserved icon 9B2, and reserved icon 9B4 becomes reserved icon 9B3. After this, the results of the special drawing for which the second fortune was drawn are displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L displays "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C displays "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R displays "3", indicating that the special drawing was a miss.

The shifting of the pending numbers and the display of the results of the special drawing for which the fortune was drawn are repeated. This is repeated until all the results of the special drawing that were pending when the fortune drawing was performed are displayed. In other words, the results of five special drawing are displayed after the fortune drawing has ended. Note that if the result of the special drawing is a winning number, this will be described later in "Winning Probability Suggestion Display 2".

Figure 87 (I) shows the result of the fifth special drawing. The left decorative pattern 8L shows "4", the middle decorative pattern 8C shows "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R shows "6", indicating that the special drawing was a loss.

[Winning probability indication 2]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the winning probability suggestion performance 2. In the winning probability suggestion performance 2, four reserved special drawing lots are accumulated during a change on the display screen 7a, and a performance is performed in which the winning probability of the special drawing lottery of the change and the winning probability of the reserved special drawing lottery are suggested one by one, and then the results of the winning/losing judgment are announced one by one. If the result of the winning/losing judgment is a winning, the winning is announced and a winning game is played. After the winning game is played, after the reserved lots are accumulated, a performance is again performed in which the winning probability of the special drawing lottery of the change and the winning probability of the reserved special drawing lottery are suggested one by one.

This winning probability suggestion effect 2 is similar to the winning probability suggestion effects 1 to 5 (Figures 87 (B) to (F)) in winning probability suggestion effect 1. Figure 88 (A) is the same effect as Figure 87 (F).

Here too, the results of the fortune-telling lottery OKA can be "Daikichi", "Chuukichi", "Koukichi" or "Suekichi", and represent the expected probability of winning the special lottery, with "Daikichi" having the highest expected probability of 50, "Chuukichi" having the second highest expected probability of 30, "Koukichi" having the third highest expected probability of 20 and "Suekichi" having the lowest expected probability (fourth highest) of 10.

In Figure 88 (A), a fortune-telling performance is performed, and reserved icon 9C displays "Dai" which represents the result of the fortune-telling for that change, "Daikichi" which is the result of the fortune-telling for that change, reserved icon 9B1 displays "Ko" which represents the result of the first fortune-telling for the second special chart reserved, reserved icon 9B2 displays "Dai" which represents the result of the second fortune-telling for the second special chart reserved, reserved icon 9B3 displays "Sue" which represents the result of the third fortune-telling for the second special chart reserved, "Sueyoshi" which is the result of the third fortune-telling for the second special chart reserved, and reserved icon 9B4 displays "Chu" which represents the result of the fourth fortune-telling for the second special chart reserved, "Chu" which represents the result of the fourth fortune-telling for the second special chart reserved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), the result of the special drawing for the first fortune is displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L displays a "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C displays an "8", and the right decorative pattern 8R displays a "9", indicating that the special drawing was a miss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), the results of the special drawing for which the first fortune was drawn are displayed, causing the reserved lottery to shift. That is, reserved icon 9B1 becomes reserved icon 9C, reserved icon 9B2 becomes reserved icon 9B1, reserved icon 9B3 becomes reserved icon 9B2, and reserved icon 9B4 becomes reserved icon 9B3. After this, the results of the special drawing for which the second fortune was drawn are displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L displays "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C displays "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R displays "3", indicating that the special drawing was a loss.

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (D), the reserved numbers are shifted and the result of the special drawing for the third drawing is displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L displays "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C displays "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R displays "7", displaying a repeat number and indicating that the special drawing is a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(E), a "Big Win" caption TATR is displayed, indicating that the big win game is about to start, and the big win game is played. Note that, although the winning game is a big win game here, it may also be a small win game.

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (F), after the big win, the game will start to change. This is where the reserved numbers start to accumulate.

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (G) to (I), the accumulation of reserved balls causes a fortune-telling presentation to be performed. This fortune-telling presentation is the same as that explained in Figure 88 (B) to (F), so it will not be explained here.

[Winning probability indication 3]
89 is a diagram for explaining the winning probability suggestion performance 3. In the winning probability suggestion performance 3, four reserved special drawing lots are accumulated during a change on the display screen 7a, and a performance is performed to suggest the winning probability of the special drawing lottery of the change and the winning probability of the reserved special drawing lottery, one by one, and even in the reserved display, a performance is performed to suggest the winning probability of the special drawing lottery, one by one, and after performing the performance to suggest the winning probability of those special drawing lotteries, a performance is performed to notify the result of the winning or losing judgment, one by one.

First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, which are currently changing. Also, four second special patterns are reserved. In other words, reserved icon 9C and reserved icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth reserved second special patterns, respectively, are displayed. Here, reserved icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, 9B4, and 9C are displayed. Note that reserved icon 9A may be displayed, reserved icon 9C may not be displayed, and all reserved icons may not be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), the fortune-telling performance is performed. This fortune-telling performance is performed when four second special reserved figures have been accumulated. When this performance is performed, in order to make the player see the fortune-telling performance as the main focus, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the fortune-telling tube OMK is displayed on the display screen 7a. This fortune-telling performance changes the state of the reserved icon 9C and the reserved icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4, and in order to suggest the expected probability of a win based on this changed state, the reserved icon 9C and the reserved icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 are enlarged and displayed. In addition, the special drawing for the change and the reserved special drawing are performed one by one, and in order to make it look like there are five chances, they are displayed in a row with the same size. Here, the first fortune-telling is performed, and "Daikichi" is displayed as the result of the fortune-telling OK.

Here, the result of the fortune lottery OK is the same as the type and reliability order described above in "Winning Probability Indication Performance 1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), the reserved icon 9C for that change changes from "white" (no hatching) to "red" (hatching 1). The colors represented by the hatching will be described later. This change in color of the reserved icon does not represent the result of the fortune-telling lottery, but represents the expected probability of winning the special drawing separately from the fortune-telling lottery. At this time, there is no color change in reserved icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4.

As shown in Figure 89 (J), in Figure 89, "white" is represented by no hatching, "red" by hatching 1, "green" by hatching 2, and "blue" by hatching 3.

Here, the colors of the reserved icon are "red," "green," and "blue," and represent the expected probability of winning the special lottery, with "red" having the highest expected probability of 50, "green" having the second highest expected probability of 30, and "blue" having the lowest expected probability (third highest) of 10.

Next, as shown in Figure 89 (D), the second fortune is drawn, and the fortune result is displayed as "small good fortune."

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(E), the first reserved icon 9B1 for the second special reserved chart changes from "white" to "blue" (hatching 3). At this time, reserved icon 9C remains in "red" (hatching 1), and there is no color change for reserved icons 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4.

As described above, a fortune telling effect will be performed for all reserved special drawing lotteries, and all reserved icons will be displayed with a color change. This fortune telling effect and the color change of the reserved icons will occur at the same time.

FIG. 89(F) shows a state in which a lottery performance has been performed for all reserved special drawing lotteries, and a color change performance has been performed for all reserved icons. The reserved icon 9C is displayed in "red", the reserved icon 9B1 is displayed in "blue",
The hold icon 9B2 is displayed in “green,” the hold icon 9B3 is displayed in “blue,” and the hold icon 9B4 is displayed in “green.” The hold icon 9C and the hold icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 are displayed in a row with the same size.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(G), the result of the special drawing for the first fortune is displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L displays a "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C displays an "8", and the right decorative pattern 8R displays a "9", indicating that the special drawing was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (H), the results of the special drawing for which the first fortune was drawn are displayed, causing the reserved lottery to shift. That is, reserved icon 9B1 becomes reserved icon 9C, reserved icon 9B2 becomes reserved icon 9B1, reserved icon 9B3 becomes reserved icon 9B2, and reserved icon 9B4 becomes reserved icon 9B3. After this, the results of the special drawing for which the second fortune was drawn are displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L displays "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C displays "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R displays "3", indicating that the special drawing was a miss.

The shift movement and display of the results of the special drawing lottery for which the fortune was drawn are repeated. This is repeated until all the results of the special drawing lottery that are pending when the fortune-telling performance is performed are displayed. In other words, the results of five special drawing lotteries are displayed after the fortune-telling performance ends.

Figure 89 (I) shows the state in which the result of the fifth special drawing is displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L displays "4", the middle decorative pattern 8C displays "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R displays "6", indicating that the special drawing is a miss. If the result of the special drawing is a win, a winning game will be played after a display indicating that it is a win, and then, as described above in "Win probability indication performance 2", the fortune-telling performance will be played again for all reserved balls.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the winning probability indication effects 1 to 3.

[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Winning Probability Suggestion Presentation 1", a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images is provided, and the first presentation (FIG. 87(D)-(F)) that suggests the winning probability of all reserved special drawing during the same change can be executed using the display screen 7a. With this configuration, the results of multiple reserved special drawing can be suggested, and the interest can be increased.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Winning Probability Suggestion Presentation 1", a second presentation (FIG. 87(B), (C)) suggesting the winning probability in the special drawing of the corresponding variation can be executed before the first presentation (FIG. 87(D)-(F)). With this configuration, the results of multiple reserved special drawing can be suggested, and the interest can be increased.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Winning Probability Indication Presentation 1", one of the multiple types of images is the reserved icon 9C corresponding to the change, and one of the multiple types of images is the reserved icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4. In the second presentation (FIG. 87(B), (C)), the state of the reserved icon 9C changes, and the state of the reserved icon 9C after the change suggests the expected probability of winning in the special drawing of the change, and in the first presentation (FIG. 87(D) to (F)), the state of the reserved icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 changes, and suggests the expected probability of winning in all reserved special drawing after the change. According to this configuration, the results of multiple reserved special drawing drawings can be suggested, and interest can be increased.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Winning Probability Suggestion Presentation 1", after the first presentation (FIG. 87(D)-(F)), the result of the winning/losing judgment in the special drawing of the corresponding variation is announced, and then the results of the winning/losing judgment in all reserved special drawing are announced in the third presentation (FIG. 87(G)-(I)). With this configuration, the results of multiple reserved special drawing can be suggested, and the interest can be increased.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Winning Probability Suggestion Presentation 1", in the first presentation (FIG. 87(D)-(F)), the reserved icon 9C and the reserved icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 are displayed in a row. According to this configuration, the results of the special drawing of multiple reserved symbols can be suggested, and the interest can be increased.

[Modification]
Below, variations of the winning probability indication effects 1 to 3 are shown.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the first effect (Figures 87 (D) to (F)), the second effect (Figures 87 (B), (C)), and the third effect (Figures 87 (G) to (I)) suggest the expected probability of winning the special drawing and notify the result of the judgment on whether the special drawing is a success or failure, but it is also possible to suggest the expected probability of winning the regular drawing and notify the result of the judgment on whether the regular drawing is a success or failure.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the type, presence or absence, and color of text on hold icon 9C and hold icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 change between the first presentation (Figures 87 (D) to (F), Figures 88 (D) to (F)) and the second presentation (Figures 87 (B), (C), Figures 88 (B), (C)), but the size and shape may also change.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, in the first presentation (Figures 87 (D) to (F), Figures 89 (D) to (F)), the hold icon 9C and the hold icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 are displayed in a horizontal row, but they may also be displayed in a vertical row.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, a display indicating the probability of a win and a display notifying the result of the win/loss determination are performed for the lottery for the second special chart, but this may also be the case for the lottery for the first special chart.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the fortune-telling performance suggests the probability of winning the special drawing for all reserved drawings, and notifies the result of the judgment of winning or losing the special drawing, but it may also suggest the probability of winning the special drawing for a specific reserved drawing, and notify the result of the judgment of winning or losing the special drawing. Up to the drawing of a specific reserved drawing is, for example, the variation, up to the 1st to 3rd reserved drawing. Also, in the performance suggesting the probability of winning the special drawing, it is up to the reserved drawing where the performance in which the winning is confirmed is performed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A first performance can be executed by using the display means to indicate the expected probability of winning in all reserved special drawing or regular drawing during the same variation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
Before the first performance, a second performance can be executed which suggests the expected probability of winning in the special drawing or the regular drawing of the variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a change icon corresponding to the change,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
In the second performance, the state of the variable icon changes, and the state of the variable icon after the change indicates the expected probability of winning in the special drawing or the normal drawing of the variable,
In the first performance, the state of the reserved icon changes, and indicates the expected probability of winning in all the reserved special drawing or regular drawing after the change,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-3,
After the first performance, a third performance is performed in which the result of the winning/losing judgment in the special drawing or the normal drawing of the change is announced, and then the results of the winning/losing judgment in all the reserved special drawing or normal drawing are announced,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-4,
In the first performance, the variable icon and the reserved icon are displayed in a row.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending icon change effects A to C are explained below using Figures 90 to 92. The pending icon change effects are executed while the decorative pattern is changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a pending icon change effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Pending icon change performance A]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon change performance A. In the reserved icon change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which multiple rows of decorative patterns start to change. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are changing at high speed. Four reserved icons 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), a left pattern stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, a "7" pattern is stopped as the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. The hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), a right pattern stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the right decorative pattern slows down and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, a "7" pattern is stopped as the right decorative pattern 8R. This forms a reach state together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparently or semi-transparently. The hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 90 (D) to (G), an image movement effect is executed. An image movement effect is an effect in which a specific image moves within the display screen. Here, a circular character image CG frames in from the right edge of the display screen 7a, then moves leftward and frames out from the left edge of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 90(D), the first character image CG is framed in from the right edge of the display screen 7a. The framed character image CG moves leftward. In FIG. 90(E), the "7" symbol as the right decorative pattern 8R is difficult to see. In FIG. 90(F), the character image CG moves further, and the entire display screen 7a is covered with the character image CG. This makes the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R difficult to see. In addition, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are difficult to see. In FIG. 90(G), the last character image CG is framed out from the left edge of the display screen 7a. Here, the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to change. In addition, the display color of the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C has changed from white to red (shown with hatching).

Next, as shown in Figure 90 (H), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which decorative symbols form a specified reach state. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "7" pattern to form the reach state. Note that the reach state may be formed by stopping the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in that order as shown in Figures 90 (B) and (C), or the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R may stop almost simultaneously to form the reach state. Here too, a red reserved icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (I), a battle reach development presentation is executed. The battle reach development presentation is a presentation that suggests development to a battle presentation. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Develop to battle reach" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, after a battle between the ally character and the enemy character, as shown in FIG. 90(J), a final battle is performed across the entire display screen 7a. The final battle is a performance that determines the outcome of the battle. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB collide. Note that a win is confirmed when the ally character CRA beats the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (K), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a winning has occurred definitively. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Congratulations" is displayed to the left of the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (L), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether or not there is a win. Here, the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7" patterns, notifying the player that there is a win. If the above-mentioned win confirmation effect is executed, there will be no loss. If the above-mentioned win confirmation effect is not executed and there is a loss, for example, the left and right decorative patterns stop at the "7" pattern, and the center decorative pattern stops at the "8" pattern.

[Pending icon change performance B]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon change performance B. In the reserved icon change performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which multiple rows of decorative patterns start to change. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are changing at high speed. Four reserved icons 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), a left pattern stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, a "7" pattern is stopped as the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. The hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), a right pattern stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the right decorative pattern slows down and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, a "7" pattern is stopped as the right decorative pattern 8R. This forms a reach state together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparently or semi-transparently. The hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 91 (D) to (F), an image increase effect is executed. An image increase effect is an effect in which a specific image increases within the display screen. Here, circular character images CG are displayed one after another at various positions on the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 91(D), three character images CG are displayed on the display screen 7a. This makes the variable icon 9C difficult to see. A part of the "8" pattern as the middle decorative pattern 8C is also covered by the character image CG. In FIG. 91(E), multiple character images CG are further displayed. This makes the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R difficult to see. Also, the variable icon 9C is difficult to see. In FIG. 92(F), in FIG. 91(E), multiple character images CG are further displayed. This covers the entire display screen 7a with the character images CG. This makes the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R difficult to see. Also, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), a no-image display effect is executed. The no-image display effect is an effect in which a specific image is hidden. Here, the character image CG that covered the entire display screen 7a is hidden. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right have begun to change. In addition, the display color of the pending icon 9A and the change icon 9C has changed from white to red (shown with hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(H), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols form a predetermined reach state. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "7" pattern to form a reach state. The state of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has changed. Specifically, the normal display state (FIG. 91(C)) has been changed to a 7-segment display state. Note that, as shown in FIG. 91(B)(C), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may stop in this order to form a reach state, or the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R may stop almost simultaneously to form a reach state. Here again, a red reserved icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (I), a battle reach development presentation is executed. The battle reach development presentation is a presentation that suggests development to a battle presentation. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Develop to battle reach" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, after a battle between the ally character and the enemy character, as shown in FIG. 91(J), a final battle performance is executed across the entire display screen 7a. The final battle performance is a performance that decides the outcome of the battle. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB clash. Note that a win is confirmed when the ally character CRA beats the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (K), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a winning has occurred definitively. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Congratulations" is displayed to the left of the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (L), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies whether or not there is a win. Here, the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7" patterns, notifying that there is a win. The "7" pattern is in a 7-segment display mode. If the above-mentioned win confirmation effect is executed, it will not result in a miss. If the above-mentioned win confirmation effect is not executed and there is a miss, for example, the left and right decorative patterns stop at the "7" pattern, and the center decorative pattern stops at the "8" pattern. The "8" pattern may also be in a 7-segment display mode.

[Pending icon change performance C]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon change performance C. In the reserved icon change performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which multiple rows of decorative patterns start to change. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are changing at high speed. Four reserved icons 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), a left pattern stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, a "7" pattern is stopped as the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. The hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), a right pattern stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the right decorative pattern slows down and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, a "7" pattern is stopped as the right decorative pattern 8R. This forms a reach state together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparently or semi-transparently. The hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(D), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the middle decorative symbol slows down and the middle decorative symbol stops. Here, the "8" symbol is stopped as the middle decorative symbol 8C. This creates a reach miss mode. Note that the hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (E) and (F), an image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which a specific image is displayed on the display screen.

In Figure 92 (E), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are covered by the ally character CRA, making them difficult to see. Specifically, the ally character CRA covers the entire middle decorative pattern 8C and parts of the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R. It also covers the variable icon 9C. In Figure 92 (F), the display of the ally character CRA is maintained, and the decorative patterns, pending icon, and variable icon are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (G), an image non-display effect is executed. The image non-display effect is an effect in which a specific image is hidden. Here, the ally character CRA, which covered the entire display screen 7a, is hidden. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right have begun to change. In addition, the display color of the reserved icon 9A and the changeable icon 9C have changed from white to red (shown with hatching). The appearance of the background image has also changed. The display color of the background image has changed from white to green (shown with hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(H), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the decorative symbols form a predetermined reach state. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "7" pattern to form the reach state. Note that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may stop in that order to form the reach state, as shown in FIG. 92(B)(C), or the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R may stop almost simultaneously to form the reach state. Here again, a red reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. Also, the display color of the background image is green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (I), a battle reach development presentation is executed. The battle reach development presentation is a presentation that suggests development to a battle presentation. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Develop to battle reach" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, after a battle between the ally character and the enemy character, as shown in FIG. 92(J), a final battle is performed across the entire display screen 7a. The final battle is a performance that determines the outcome of the battle. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB collide. Note that a win is confirmed when the ally character CRA beats the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (K), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a winning has occurred definitively. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Congratulations" is displayed to the left of the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (L), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies whether or not there is a win. Here, the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7" patterns, notifying that there is a win. Again, the display color of the background image is green. The reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, but they may be displayed. In that case, they may be displayed in red or white. If the above-mentioned winning confirmation effect is executed, it will not result in a loss. If the above-mentioned winning confirmation effect is not executed and there is a loss, for example, the left and right decorative patterns stop at the "7" pattern, and the center decorative pattern stops at the "8" pattern.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the pending icon change presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a character image CG is displayed that overlaps with the multiple reserved icons 9A so that at least a part of the reserved icons 9A is difficult to see (FIG. 90(F), FIG. 91(F)), and then the specific image is hidden, and all of the multiple reserved icon images 9A are changed to another form with the non-display of the specific image (FIG. 90(G), FIG. 91(G)). With this configuration, the player can be surprised by the unprecedented change in the reserved icons, and the interest in the game can be improved. The performance control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "performance execution means". Also, the image movement performance of FIG. 90(D) to (G) corresponds to both the "image display performance" and the "image non-display performance". Also, the image increase performance of FIG. 91(D) to (F) corresponds to the "image display performance", and the image non-display performance of FIG. 91(G) corresponds to the "image non-display performance". Also, the performance of changing the display color of the reserved icon 91 of FIG. 90(G) and FIG. 91(G) corresponds to the "reserved change performance".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect is executed in which the display area of the character image CG on the display screen is expanded (FIGS. 90(D)-(F), 91(D)-(F)). With this configuration, the player can be surprised by an unprecedented change in the reserved icon, and the interest of the game can be increased. The effects in FIG. 90(D)-(F) and FIG. 91(D)-(F) correspond to the "expanded area effect."

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of character images CG displayed on the display screen is increased over time (FIGS. 90(D)-(F), 91(D)-(F)). With this configuration, the player can be surprised by the unprecedented change in the reserved icon, and the interest of the game can be increased.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the background image behind the reserved icon 9A, which is displayed superimposed on the reserved icon 9A, is changed in accordance with the change in the reserved icon 9A (FIG. 92(G)). With this configuration, the player can be surprised by the unprecedented change in the reserved icon, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display mode of the decorative pattern is changed from the normal display mode to the 7-segment display mode in accordance with the change in the reserved icon 9A (FIG. 91(H)). With this configuration, the player can be surprised by the unprecedented change in the reserved icon, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below are some modified examples of the pending icon change presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the character image CG is configured to overlap multiple hold icons 9 A. In contrast, as shown in Figures 92 (E) and (F), the hold icons 9 A may be made invisible to make them difficult to see.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the change in the appearance of the decorative pattern (Figure 91) and the change in the display color of the background image (Figure 92) were configured separately, but it is also possible to configure it so that both the change in the appearance of the decorative pattern and the change in the display color of the background image are performed.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the display color of the background image is changed (FIG. 92). However, the object depicted in the background image may be changed.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the display color of the hold icon is changed (FIGS. 90 to 92). However, the shape of the hold icon may be changed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine having an effect execution means capable of executing a reserved display effect that displays a reserved icon image indicating a reserved number on a display screen,
The performance execution means includes:
An image display effect in which a specific image is displayed that overlaps a plurality of the reserved icon images so as to make at least a portion of the reserved icon image difficult to see;
After the image display performance, an image non-display performance in which the specific image is not displayed;
A hold change effect in which all of the plurality of hold icon images are changed to a different state in association with the image non-display effect can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1,
The performance execution means executes an enlarged area performance in which a display area of the specific image occupying a display screen is enlarged in the image display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-2,
The effect execution means increases the number of the specific images displayed on the display screen over time as the enlarged area effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B6-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B6-1 to B6-3,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that changes at least one of the state of the image on the back side of the reserved icon image displayed superimposed on the reserved icon image and the state of the decorative pattern in accordance with the reserved change performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, button operation performances A to C are explained using Figures 93 to 95. In Figures 93 to 95, the various movable props, decorative members, background images, etc. arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing. Figure 93 is a diagram for explaining button operation performance A, Figure 94 is a diagram for explaining button operation performance B, and Figure 95 is a diagram for explaining button operation performance C.

In this button operation effect, when the effect pattern change effect (changing display) starts, an image is displayed at a predetermined timing to encourage the pressing of the effect button 63. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the button operation effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the second movable device 15 is activated during the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols, it can suggest to the player that there is a higher probability of a win occurring after the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols ends (i.e., after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed) compared to when the second movable device 15 is not activated. Also, when the second movable device 15 is activated during a temporary stop display in which multiple performance symbols are aligned to form the same pattern, it can suggest to the player that there is a higher probability of a win that will provide a greater benefit to the player out of the multiple types of wins that exist compared to when the second movable device 15 is not activated. For this reason, players are highly interested in the operation (movement) of the second movable device 15.

Here, we will first provide a brief explanation of the performance patterns, hold icons, etc., and then explain performance button operation performance A, performance button operation performance B, and performance button operation performance C in order.

[Performance design]
First, a brief description of the performance symbols will be given. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left performance symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center performance symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right performance symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a in a display mode in which the reels rotate, and a variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started. In the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols, the performance symbols are displayed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of the numbers "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "7" → "8" → "9" → "1" → "2" → ... which are the numbers.

When the performance pattern change (changing display) starts, the performance patterns displayed in a stopped state at the stop position all move downwards (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "changing direction") at the same time (at the same time), slowly increasing in speed as they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, changing at high speed. This allows the background image behind the performance patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent performance patterns that are changing at high speed. The performance patterns slow down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and appear temporarily stopped or stopped (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the performance patterns are temporarily stopped, the light reflected by the performance patterns rotates clockwise along the outline of the performance patterns at the stop position, and then the reflected light rotating clockwise stops and disappears, resulting in a stopped display state.

When the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in the same pattern, a win is confirmed, and when the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed without being in the same pattern, a loss is confirmed. In this way, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are images that can notify the result of the hit or miss determination.

[Pending icon, etc.]
Next, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B will be explained. The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special chart reserved is consumed is displayed (placed) in the variable display position (above the white rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area to the left of the variable display position, a first reserved display area is provided as the first special chart reserved, and in the area to the right of the variable display position, a second reserved display area is provided as the second special chart reserved. In the first reserved display area, four reserved icons 9A can be displayed in a straight line, and a maximum of four reserved icons 9A can be stored. The hold icon 9A closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A second closest to the variable icon 9C is called the second hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A third closest to the variable icon 9C is called the third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A furthest from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth hold icon 9A. In the second hold display area, four hold icons 9B can be displayed in a straight line, and a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be stocked. The hold icon 9B closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first hold icon 9B, the hold icon 9B second closest to the variable icon 9C is called the second hold icon 9B, the hold icon 9B third closest to the variable icon 9C is called the third hold icon 9B, and the hold icon 9B furthest from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth hold icon 9B. In this embodiment, the variable icon 9C, the hold icons 9A, and 9B can suggest the expectation of a hit by color, and the expectation of a hit increases in the order of white → red → yellow (gold). For this reason, players are highly interested in the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B.

When the performance pattern change (changing display) starts, the changing performance music is output (starts playing) from the speaker 67, and when the performance pattern is stopped and displayed, the output of the changing performance music from the speaker 67 is stopped. In other words, each time the performance pattern change (changing display) starts, the changing performance music is started from the beginning.

[Button Operation A]
Next, the button operation performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 93. Here, the button operation performance A will be described, which is executed when the player rotates the handle 60 to launch the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A and plays a game by hitting the ball from the left.

As shown in FIG. 93(A), on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, a volume level image SL is displayed in the upper row indicating the current volume level among five levels, namely, the first volume level (minimum (not muted)) to the fifth volume level (maximum), and a brightness level image LL is displayed in the lower row indicating the current brightness level among five levels, namely, the first brightness level (minimum (not completely dark)) to the fifth brightness level (maximum). Note that the volume level is the volume of the sound output from the speaker 67. The brightness level is the brightness of the display screen 7a, as well as the brightness of the board lamp 5 and various lamps arranged on the game board 2, and the brightness of the frame lamp 66. Warning sounds (for example, when the upper surplus ball tray (lower tray) 62 is full of game balls, when the front frame 53 is open, etc.), abnormal operation notification sounds (for example, when various movable parts cannot return to their evacuation positions, when there is a malfunction in the payout operation of paying out game balls, etc.), and fraud confirmation alarm sounds (for example, when abnormal vibrations are detected, when abnormal magnetism is detected, when abnormal balls are detected entering various winning slots, etc.) are always at the maximum volume level, independent of the changed volume level. In addition, the warning light emission modes corresponding to warning sounds, the abnormal operation notification light emission modes corresponding to abnormal operation notifications, and the fraud confirmation alarm sound and the fraud confirmation alarm light emission modes corresponding to fraud confirmation alarm sounds are also always at the maximum brightness level, independent of the changed brightness level.

At the fifth volume level (maximum), five rectangular volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the fourth volume level, four rectangular volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the third volume level, three rectangular volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the second volume level, two rectangular volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and at the first volume level (minimum (not muted)), one rectangular volume level image SL is displayed. The volume level image SL is a rectangular image filled in solid light blue.

At the fifth luminance level (maximum), five rectangular luminance level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the fourth luminance level, four rectangular luminance level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the third luminance level, three rectangular luminance level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the second luminance level, two rectangular luminance level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and at the first luminance level (minimum (not completely black)), one rectangular luminance level image LL is displayed. The luminance level image LL is a rectangular image painted solid green, which is a different color from the volume level image SL.

Here, the current volume level is set to the fifth volume level, five rectangular volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and the current brightness level is set to the fifth brightness level, five rectangular brightness level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction.

The volume level image SL, which indicates the volume level, is always displayed in the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level image LL, which indicates the brightness level, is always displayed in the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a.

Also, the volume level and brightness level can be changed from the point when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the system is started up, and the volume level image SL and brightness level image LL are displayed in their respective predetermined positions on the display screen 7a. In other words, the setting mode is not displayed when the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state without starting a game (hereinafter, including when a demo performance for waiting for customers is being performed), and the volume level and brightness level are changed from among the setting items, but rather, once the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the system is started up, the player can change the volume level and brightness level at the timing he or she wishes.

The player turns the handle 60 to shoot the game ball so that it flows down the left play area 3A, playing by hitting from the left, the game ball flows down and enters the first starting hole 20, the white reserved icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, and the variable display of the performance pattern (variable display) begins. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60, the game ball has not yet entered the first starting hole 20.

First, the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "1", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "3", and the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at the number "2". Then, as shown in FIG. 93(A), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped without lining up in the same pattern, while aligned in a line on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, and a miss is confirmed. As a result, the white variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, the game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and turns into a white reserved icon 9A. When the white reserved icon 9A moves to the variable display position and turns into a white variable icon 9C, the variable display (variable display) of the performance pattern starts, as shown in FIG. 93 (B). Although the player continues to operate the handle 60, the game ball has not entered the first starting hole 20.

During this change, the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 several times to lower the volume level to the desired volume level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55, a volume down button image SDG and a volume up button image SUG (simulating the volume down button and the volume up button) corresponding to the volume down button and the volume up button are displayed to the right of the volume level image SL, respectively, as shown in FIG. 93(C), and the display mode is such that only the volume down button image SDG flashes as a result of the player pressing the volume down button of the volume button 55 (the volume up button image SUG is lit). The volume level change dedicated sound "pawn" is played from the speaker 67 at a volume level adjusted to the volume level corresponding to the player pressing the volume down button of the volume button 55, and various performance sounds related to the performance such as the change performance music and sound effects are also adjusted to the changed volume level and played from the speaker 67. Additionally, each time the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55, the rectangular volume level images SL are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a) in order, starting with the one located at the far right.

Here, the player has lowered the volume level from the fifth volume level to the third volume level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). Note that once the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 and the volume level is lowered to the first volume level (minimum), from this point on, no matter how many times the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55, the volume level is maintained at the first volume level (minimum), and only one rectangular volume level image SL is displayed.

After that, during this change, the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 several times to lower the brightness level to the desired brightness level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG (simulating the brightness down button and the brightness up button) corresponding to the brightness down button and the brightness up button are displayed to the right of the brightness level image LL, respectively, as shown in FIG. 93 (D), and the display mode is such that only the brightness down button image LDG blinks as the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 (the brightness up button image LUG is lit). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted to the brightness level corresponding to the player's pressing of the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the board lamp 5 and the various lamps arranged on the game board 2, and the brightness of the frame lamp 66 are also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Additionally, each time the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness buttons 56, the rectangular brightness level images LL are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a) in order, starting with the one located at the far right.

Here, the player lowers the brightness level from the fifth brightness level to the third brightness level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). Note that when the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 and the brightness level is lowered to the first brightness level (minimum), the brightness level of the first brightness level (minimum) is maintained and only one rectangular brightness level image LL is displayed, no matter how many times the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56.

After that, as shown in Figure 93 (E), first the left performance pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", then the right performance pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", and they are aligned in a row on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, while the middle performance pattern 8C continues to fluctuate, forming a reach.

After the reach is formed, the white variable icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a) and the screen switches from the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern to the battle performance screen of the Super Reach (SP Reach), and the battle performance develops. Note that by switching from the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern screen to the battle performance screen of the Super Reach (SP Reach), the white variable icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a) and the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are also hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). In contrast, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is arranged in the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level is arranged in the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and maintained in a displayed state.

In this battle presentation, as shown in FIG. 93(F), an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a, creating a super reach (SP reach) presentation in which the probability of winning is preset high. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, it is a miss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle presentation, it is a win.

When a predetermined time (8 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the battle performance, as shown in FIG. 93(G), in a state in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are fighting in the center of the display screen 7a, a large performance button image BG (simulating the performance button 63) corresponding to the performance button 63 to encourage the pressing of the performance button 63 is displayed in front of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB in the center of the display screen 7a, and a gauge image TB having a horizontally long rectangular shape indicating the remaining effective time for the pressing operation is arranged and displayed so as to cover a portion of the lower side of the performance button image BG.

The effect button image BG has the English word "PUSH" engraved on it. The effect button image BG is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting state, and is designed to suggest to the player the expectation that the ally character CRA will win and the enemy character CRB will lose in the battle effect. For example, the "predetermined light-emitting state" is set to a high expectation that the ally character CRA will win and the enemy character CRB will lose in the order of white flashing → red flashing → yellow flashing (gold flashing). Here, since the white variable icon 9C is not displayed (disappeared from the display screen 7a), the effect button image BG is in a light-emitting state where it flashes in white, which is the same color as the variable icon 9C (the effect button image BG is in a light-emitting state where it flashes in white). Note that the light-emitting state of the effect button image BG may be changed from the hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) white color to a white flashing to a red flashing, to perform an effect in which the expectation of a win is increased.

The gauge image TB changes to an image in which the gauge length shortens, thereby informing the player of the remaining effective time for pressing the effect button 63. Here, the length of the gauge from the inner left end to the inner right end of the horizontally long rectangular gauge image TB is the maximum gauge length, and the maximum remaining effective time is set to 15 seconds. As time passes, the right end of the gauge moves toward the left end, thereby indicating the passage of time as an image in which the gauge length shortens, and when 15 seconds have passed, the gauge length becomes zero. Note that if 15 seconds have passed without the effect button 63 being operated before the gauge length reaches zero, the effect button image BG and gauge image TB are then hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a).

In the battle effect, two seconds after the effect button image BG and gauge image TB are displayed, the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 several times to increase the volume level to the desired volume level. When the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55, a volume down button image SDG and a volume up button image SUG (simulating the volume down button and the volume up button) corresponding to the volume down button and the volume up button are displayed to the right of the volume level image SL, respectively, as shown in FIG. 93(H), and the display mode is such that only the volume up button image SUG flashes as a result of the player pressing the volume up button of the volume button 55 (the volume down button image SDG is displayed lit). When the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55, the volume level change sound "pawn" is adjusted to a volume level corresponding to the pressing of the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 and is output from the speaker 67, and various performance sounds related to the performance such as variable performance music and sound effects are also adjusted to the changed volume level and output from the speaker 67. In addition, each time the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55, a volume level image SL having a rectangular shape is added to the right of the rightmost image and displayed in order.

Here, the player is increasing the volume level from the third volume level to the fifth volume level (maximum). When the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). Note that once the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 and the volume level is increased to the fifth volume level (maximum), the volume level of the fifth volume level (maximum) is maintained no matter how many times the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55, and five rectangular volume level images SL are displayed.

In FIG. 93(H), even if the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 to increase the volume level, the effect button 63 is treated as having been pressed, and the effect button image BG and gauge image TB are not hidden (they do not disappear from the display screen 7a). Also, even if the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 to decrease the volume level, the effect button 63 is treated as having been pressed, and the effect button image BG and gauge image TB are not hidden (they do not disappear from the display screen 7a).

After that, in the battle performance, when 7 seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB were displayed, the player then presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 several times to raise the brightness level to the desired brightness level. When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, in response to this, as shown in FIG. 93 (I), the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG (simulating the brightness down button and the brightness up button) corresponding to the brightness down button and the brightness up button are displayed to the right of the brightness level image LL, respectively, and the display mode is such that only the brightness up button image LUG blinks as a result of the player pressing the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 (the brightness down button image LDG is displayed in a lit state). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted to the brightness level corresponding to the player pressing the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the board lamp 5 and the various lamps arranged on the game board 2 and the brightness of the frame lamp 66 are also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Additionally, each time the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness buttons 56, a rectangular brightness level image LL is added to the right of the rightmost image in order and displayed.

Here, the player is increasing the brightness level from the third brightness level to the fifth brightness level (maximum). When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). Note that once the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 and the brightness level is increased to the fifth brightness level (maximum), the brightness level of the fifth brightness level (maximum) is maintained no matter how many times the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, and five rectangular brightness level images LL are displayed.

In FIG. 93(I), even if the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness buttons 56 to increase the brightness level, the effect button 63 is treated as having been pressed, and the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are not hidden (they do not disappear from the display screen 7a). Also, even if the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness buttons 56 to decrease the brightness level, the effect button 63 is treated as having been pressed, and the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are not hidden (they do not disappear from the display screen 7a).

Then, in the battle performance, when 12 seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and gauge image TB were displayed, the player presses the performance button 63, and the result of the battle performance is displayed as shown in FIG. 93 (J), the ally character CRA is hidden (disappears from the display screen a), the enemy character CRB remains displayed on the left center of the display screen 7a, and a large message image MS saying "Defeat" is displayed to the right of the enemy character CRB, informing the player that the ally character CRA has been defeated and the enemy character CRB has won.

When the battle performance ends, the battle performance screen switches back to the performance pattern change performance (change display) screen, and a white change icon 9C appears on the display screen 7a, while the left performance pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", the middle performance pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1", and the right performance pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", all aligned in a row on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in Figure 93 (K), the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R do not line up with the same pattern (here, the number "2") and are displayed stopped, confirming a miss. As a result, the white variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Even in this state, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is displayed in the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level is displayed in the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a.

After that, the game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and becomes the reserved icon 9A. When the reserved icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable display of the performance pattern (variable display) begins. Of course, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is arranged in the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level is arranged in the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. When the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are stopped and displayed without matching the same pattern, a miss is confirmed, whereas when the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, a win is confirmed, a big win opening is started, and then a big win game in which the player is given a profit is started. Furthermore, even if the jackpot opening starts, or even if the jackpot game starts, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level and the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level are arranged and displayed in the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, respectively, continue to be displayed.

Thus, although the volume button 55, brightness button 56, and effect button 63 are important buttons related to the effects that can be pressed by the player, if the player presses the volume up button or the volume down button of the volume button 55, or the brightness up button or the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, before 15 seconds have elapsed since the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB were displayed during the battle effect, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are not hidden (they do not disappear from the display screen 7a) as if the effect button 63 had been pressed, and the result of the battle effect is not displayed as a result of the win/loss judgment, whereas if the player presses the effect button 63, the result of the battle effect is displayed as a result of the win/loss judgment.

[Button Operation Performance B]
Next, the button operation effect B will be described with reference to Fig. 94. Here, the button operation effect B will be described, which is executed when the player rotates the handle 60 to launch the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A and plays a game by hitting the ball from the left.

As shown in FIG. 94 (A), on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, a volume level image SL is displayed in the upper row indicating the current volume level out of five levels, namely, the first volume level (minimum (not muted)) to the fifth volume level (maximum), and a brightness level image LL is displayed in the lower row indicating the current brightness level out of five levels, namely, the first brightness level (minimum (not completely dark)) to the fifth brightness level (maximum). Note that the volume level is the volume of the sound output from the speaker 67. The brightness level is the brightness of the display screen 7a, as well as the brightness of the board lamp 5 and various lamps arranged on the game board 2, and the brightness of the frame lamp 66. Warning sounds (for example, when the upper surplus ball tray (lower tray) 62 is full of game balls, when the front frame 53 is open, etc.), abnormal operation notification sounds (for example, when various movable parts cannot return to their evacuation positions, when there is a malfunction in the payout operation of paying out game balls, etc.), and fraud confirmation alarm sounds (for example, when abnormal vibrations are detected, when abnormal magnetism is detected, when abnormal balls are detected entering various winning slots, etc.) are always at the maximum volume level, independent of the changed volume level. In addition, the warning light emission modes corresponding to warning sounds, the abnormal operation notification light emission modes corresponding to abnormal operation notifications, and the fraud confirmation alarm sound and the fraud confirmation alarm light emission modes corresponding to fraud confirmation alarm sounds are also always at the maximum brightness level, independent of the changed brightness level.

At the fifth volume level (maximum), five rectangular volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the fourth volume level, four rectangular volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the third volume level, three rectangular volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the second volume level, two rectangular volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and at the first volume level (minimum (not muted)), one rectangular volume level image SL is displayed. The volume level image SL is a rectangular image filled in solid light blue.

At the fifth luminance level (maximum), five rectangular luminance level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the fourth luminance level, four rectangular luminance level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the third luminance level, three rectangular luminance level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the second luminance level, two rectangular luminance level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and at the first luminance level (minimum (not completely dark)), one rectangular luminance level image LL is displayed. The luminance level image LL is a rectangular image painted solid green, which is a different color from the volume level image SL.

Here, the current volume level is set to the fifth volume level, five rectangular volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and the current brightness level is set to the fifth brightness level, five rectangular brightness level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction.

On the display screen 7a, a presentation mode selection display area SEL is arranged and displayed in the lower right corner, where the presentation modes consisting of spring mode, summer mode, autumn mode, and winter mode are displayed as the reels spin, and a select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) corresponding to the select button 68 is arranged and displayed to the left of the presentation mode selection display area SEL. In the center of the presentation mode selection display area SEL, a selection mode section TR is arranged that shows the selected (changed) presentation mode.

Each time the upper button of the select button 68 is pressed, the reels in the presentation mode selection display area SEL rotate upward from the bottom to the top, and the presentation mode that has rotated to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other presentation modes and is displayed inverted (the background color and the text color are switched). On the other hand, each time the lower button of the select button 68 is pressed, the reels in the presentation mode selection display area SEL rotate downward from the top to the bottom, and the presentation mode that has rotated to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other presentation modes and is displayed inverted (the background color and the text color are switched). The presentation mode that has rotated to the selection mode section TR becomes the presentation mode that is selected (changed), and the presentation corresponding to this selected (changed) presentation mode will proceed. Here, the presentation mode called summer mode is arranged in the selection mode section TR, and the presentation corresponding to the summer mode is proceeding.

A volume level image SL indicating the volume level and a brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level are always displayed in the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the performance mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are always displayed in the lower right side of the display screen 7a, and a select button image SBG corresponding to the select button 68 (simulating the select button 68) is always displayed to the left of the performance mode selection display area SEL.

Also, the volume level, brightness level, and presentation mode can be changed from the point when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the system is started up, and the volume level image SL, brightness level image LL, presentation mode selection display area SEL, and selection mode section TR are displayed in their respective predetermined positions on the display screen 7a. In other words, the setting mode is not displayed when the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state without starting a game (hereinafter including when a demo presentation for waiting for customers is being performed), and the volume level, brightness level, and presentation mode can be changed from among the setting items, but rather, after the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the system is started up, the player can change the volume level, brightness level, and presentation mode at the timing he or she wishes.

The player turns the handle 60 to shoot the game ball so that it flows down the left play area 3A, playing by hitting from the left, the game ball flows down and enters the first starting hole 20, the white reserved icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, and the variable display of the performance pattern (variable display) begins. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60, the game ball has not yet entered the first starting hole 20.

First, the left performance pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "1", the right performance pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "3", and the middle performance pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the number "2". Then, as shown in FIG. 94(A), the left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R are stopped without lining up in the same pattern, aligned in a line on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, and a miss is confirmed. As a result, the white variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, the game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and turns into a white reserved icon 9A. When the white reserved icon 9A moves to the variable display position and turns into a white variable icon 9C, the variable display of the performance pattern (variable display) starts, as shown in FIG. 94 (B). Although the player continues to operate the handle 60, the game ball has not entered the first starting hole 20.

During this change, the player can press the lower button of the select buttons 68 to change the presentation mode and set it to the presentation mode of their choice. When the player presses the lower button of the select buttons 68, the display mode accordingly changes to one in which only the lower button image flashes among the upper, right, lower, and left button images of the select button image SBG (the upper, right, and left button images of the select button image SBG are displayed in a lit state).

Here, the player changes the presentation mode from summer mode to autumn mode, and the autumn mode that has rotated into the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other presentation modes and inverted (the background color and text color are swapped). When this change in presentation mode ends this change (i.e. the current change) and the next presentation pattern change presentation (changing display) begins, the mode switches from summer mode to autumn mode, and the presentation corresponding to the autumn mode will proceed in the next presentation pattern change presentation (changing display). When the player presses the lower button of the select button 68 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has passed, the display mode in which the lower button image flashes is released and the display returns to the same display mode (illuminated display mode) as the upper button image, right button image, and left button image of the select button image SBG.

After that, during this change, the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 several times to lower the volume level to the desired volume level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55, a volume down button image SDG and a volume up button image SUG (simulating the volume down button and the volume up button) corresponding to the volume down button and the volume up button are displayed to the right of the volume level image SL, respectively, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), and the display mode is such that only the volume down button image SDG flashes as a result of the player pressing the volume down button of the volume button 55 (the volume up button image SUG is lit). The volume level is adjusted to the volume level corresponding to the player's pressing of the volume down button of the volume button 55, and a sound dedicated to changing the volume level, "pawn," is played from the speaker 67, and various performance sounds related to the performance, such as the change performance music and sound effects, are also adjusted to the changed volume level and played from the speaker 67. Additionally, each time the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55, the rectangular volume level images SL are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a) in order, starting with the one located at the far right.

Here, the player has lowered the volume level from the fifth volume level to the third volume level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). Note that once the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 and the volume level is lowered to the first volume level (minimum), from this point on, no matter how many times the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55, the volume level is maintained at the first volume level (minimum), and only one rectangular volume level image SL is displayed.

After that, during this change, the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 several times to lower the brightness level to the desired brightness level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG (simulating the brightness down button and the brightness up button) corresponding to the brightness down button and the brightness up button are displayed to the right of the brightness level image LL, respectively, as shown in FIG. 94 (D), and the display mode is such that only the brightness down button image LDG blinks as a result of the player pressing the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 (the brightness up button image LUG is lit). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted to the brightness level corresponding to the player pressing the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the board lamp 5 and the various lamps arranged on the game board 2, and the brightness of the frame lamp 66 are also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Additionally, each time the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness buttons 56, the rectangular brightness level images LL are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a) in order, starting with the one located at the far right.

Here, the player lowers the brightness level from the fifth brightness level to the third brightness level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). Note that when the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 and the brightness level is lowered to the first brightness level (minimum), the brightness level of the first brightness level (minimum) is maintained and only one rectangular brightness level image LL is displayed, no matter how many times the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56.

When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 several times to lower the brightness level, the white fluctuation icon 9C changes to a red fluctuation icon 9C, indicating to the player that the probability of winning for that fluctuation has increased.

After that, as shown in Figure 94 (E), first the left performance pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", then the right performance pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", and they are aligned in a row on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, while the middle performance pattern 8C continues to fluctuate, forming a reach.

After the reach is formed, the red variable icon 9C is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the screen switches from the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern to the battle performance screen of the super reach (SP reach), and the battle performance develops. Note that by switching from the screen of the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern to the battle performance screen of the super reach (SP reach), the red variable icon 9C is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are also hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). In contrast, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level as the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level as the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a are arranged and displayed, respectively, and are maintained. Furthermore, the performance mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are arranged and maintained in a displayed state on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, and a select button image SBG corresponding to the select button 68 (simulating the select button 68) is arranged and maintained in a displayed state to the left of the performance mode selection display area SEL.

In this battle presentation, as shown in FIG. 94(F), an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a, creating a super reach (SP reach) presentation in which the probability of winning is preset high. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, it is a miss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle presentation, it is a win.

When a predetermined time (8 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the battle performance, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), in a state in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are fighting in the center of the display screen 7a, a large performance button image BG (simulating the performance button 63) corresponding to the performance button 63 to encourage the pressing of the performance button 63 is displayed in front of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB in the center of the display screen 7a, and a gauge image TB having a horizontally long rectangular shape indicating the remaining effective time for the pressing operation is arranged and displayed so as to cover a portion of the lower side of the performance button image BG.

The effect button image BG has the English word "PUSH" engraved on it. The effect button image BG is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting state, and is designed to suggest to the player the expectation that the ally character CRA will win and the enemy character CRB will lose in the battle effect. For example, the "predetermined light-emitting state" is set to a high expectation that the ally character CRA will win and the enemy character CRB will lose in the order of white flashing → red flashing → yellow flashing (gold flashing). Here, since the red variable icon 9C is not displayed (disappeared from the display screen 7a), the effect button image BG is in a light-emitting state where it flashes red, which is the same color as the variable icon 9C (the effect button image BG is in a light-emitting state where it flashes red). Note that the light-emitting state of the effect button image BG may be changed from the hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) red to a flashing yellow (gold flashing) to perform an effect in which the expectation of a win is increased.

The gauge image TB changes to an image in which the gauge length shortens, thereby informing the player of the remaining effective time for pressing the effect button 63. Here, the length of the gauge from the inner left end to the inner right end of the horizontally long rectangular gauge image TB is the maximum gauge length, and the maximum remaining effective time is set to 15 seconds. As time passes, the right end of the gauge moves toward the left end, thereby indicating the passage of time as an image in which the gauge length shortens, and when 15 seconds have passed, the gauge length becomes zero. Note that if 15 seconds have passed without the effect button 63 being operated before the gauge length reaches zero, the effect button image BG and gauge image TB are then hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a).

In the battle effect, two seconds after the effect button image BG and gauge image TB are displayed, the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 several times to increase the volume level to the desired volume level. When the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55, a volume down button image SDG and a volume up button image SUG (simulating the volume down button and the volume up button) corresponding to the volume down button and the volume up button are displayed to the right of the volume level image SL, respectively, as shown in FIG. 94(H), and the display mode is such that only the volume up button image SUG flashes as a result of the player pressing the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 (the volume down button image SDG is displayed lit). When the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55, the volume level change sound "pawn" is adjusted to a volume level corresponding to the pressing of the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 and is output from the speaker 67, and various performance sounds related to the performance such as variable performance music and sound effects are also adjusted to the changed volume level and output from the speaker 67. In addition, each time the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55, a volume level image SL having a rectangular shape is added to the right of the rightmost image and displayed in order.

Here, the player is increasing the volume level from the third volume level to the fifth volume level (maximum). When the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). Note that once the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 and the volume level is increased to the fifth volume level (maximum), the volume level of the fifth volume level (maximum) is maintained no matter how many times the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55, and five rectangular volume level images SL are displayed.

In FIG. 94 (H), even if the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 to increase the volume level, the effect button 63 is treated as having been pressed, and the effect button image BG and gauge image TB are not hidden (they do not disappear from the display screen 7a). Also, even if the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 to decrease the volume level, the effect button 63 is treated as having been pressed, and the effect button image BG and gauge image TB are not hidden (they do not disappear from the display screen 7a).

After that, in the battle performance, when 7 seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB were displayed, the player then presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 several times to raise the brightness level to the desired brightness level. When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG (simulating the brightness down button and the brightness up button) corresponding to the brightness down button and the brightness up button are displayed to the right of the brightness level image LL, respectively, as shown in FIG. 94 (I), and the display mode is such that only the brightness up button image LUG blinks as the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 (the brightness down button image LDG is lit). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted to the brightness level corresponding to the player's pressing of the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the board lamp 5 and the various lamps arranged on the game board 2 and the brightness of the frame lamp 66 are also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Additionally, each time the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness buttons 56, a rectangular brightness level image LL is added to the right of the rightmost image in order and displayed.

Here, the player is increasing the brightness level from the third brightness level to the fifth brightness level (maximum). When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). Note that once the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 and the brightness level is increased to the fifth brightness level (maximum), the brightness level of the fifth brightness level (maximum) is maintained no matter how many times the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, and five rectangular brightness level images LL are displayed.

In FIG. 94(I), even if the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness buttons 56 to increase the brightness level, the effect button 63 is treated as having been pressed, and the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are not hidden (they do not disappear from the display screen 7a). Also, even if the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness buttons 56 to decrease the brightness level, the effect button 63 is treated as having been pressed, and the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are not hidden (they do not disappear from the display screen 7a).

After that, in the battle presentation, when 10 seconds have passed since the presentation button image BG and gauge image TB were displayed, the player then presses the upper button of the select button 68 to change the presentation mode and set it to the presentation mode of his choice. When the player presses the upper button of the select button 68, in response, as shown in FIG. 94 (J), of the upper, right, down and left button images of the select button image SBG, only the upper button image flashes (the right, down and left button images of the select button image SBG are displayed in a lit state).

Here, the player operates the select button 68 to return the presentation mode to the summer mode before the change, changing (returning) from autumn mode back to summer mode, and the summer mode that has rotated to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other presentation modes and inverted (the background color and text color are swapped). Even if this change in presentation mode ends the change (i.e., the change in question) and the next presentation pattern change presentation (change display) begins, the mode will not switch from summer mode to autumn mode, and the current summer mode will continue even in the next presentation pattern change presentation (change display). When the player presses the upper button of the select button 68 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has passed, the display mode in which the upper button image flashes is released, and the display returns to the same display mode (illuminated display mode) as the right button image, down button image, and left button image of the select button image SBG.

In addition, in FIG. 94 (J), even if the player presses any of the up, right, down or left buttons of the select button 68 to change the presentation mode or by mistake, the presentation button 63 is considered to have been pressed and the presentation button image BG and gauge image TB will not be hidden (they will not disappear from the display screen 7a).

Then, in the battle performance, when 13 seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB were displayed, the player presses the performance button 63, and as shown in FIG. 94 (K), the second movable device 15 having a rectangular decorative part with "OARO" written on it moves downward from the retreat position (home position) to the advance position in the center of the display screen 7a and stops for a predetermined time (1.5 seconds in this embodiment). In addition, when the player presses the performance button 63, the result of the battle performance is displayed, the enemy character CRB is hidden (disappears from the display screen a), the ally character CRA remains displayed on the left center of the display screen 7a, and a large message image MS saying "Victory" is displayed at the upper left of the ally character CRA and in a position not covered at all by the second movable device 15 stopped at the advance position, notifying the player that the ally character CRA has won and the enemy character CRB has been defeated.

When the second movable part 15 is stopped in the advanced position, the second movable part 15 does not cover the volume level image SL, which indicates the volume level and is displayed as the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, or the brightness level image LL, which indicates the brightness level and is displayed as the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and does not at all impede the visibility of the volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL.

Furthermore, when the second movable part 15 is stopped in the advanced position, the second movable part 15 does not cover the performance mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, nor the select button image SBG displayed to the left of the performance mode selection display area SEL, and does not at all impede the visibility of the performance mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR, and the select button image SBG.

When the second movable device 15 moves from the advanced position back to the retreated position (home position) and disappears from the display screen 7a, the battle effect ends and the screen switches again from the battle effect screen to the effect pattern changing effect (changing display), with the left effect pattern 8L displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", the middle effect pattern 8C displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", and the right effect pattern 8R displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", all aligned in a row on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(L), the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed stopped in the same pattern (here, the number "2"), and a win is confirmed. Even in this state, a volume level image SL indicating the volume level is arranged and displayed in the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and a brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level is arranged and displayed in the lower row on the left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the performance mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are arranged and displayed in the lower right side of the display screen 7a, and a select button image SBG corresponding to the select button 68 (simulating the select button 68) is arranged and displayed to the left of the performance mode selection display area SEL.

When a win is confirmed, the jackpot opening starts, and then the jackpot game begins, in which the player is awarded a profit. Note that even if the jackpot opening starts, and even if the jackpot game starts, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level and the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level are still displayed in the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level are still displayed in the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the display mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are still displayed in the lower right side of the display screen 7a, and the select button image SBG corresponding to the select button 68 (simulating the select button 68) is still displayed to the left of the display mode selection display area SEL.

Thus, although the volume button 55, brightness button 56, select button 68, and effect button 63 are important buttons related to the effects that the player can press, if the player presses the volume up button or the volume down button of the volume button 55, if the player presses the brightness up button or the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, or if the player presses any of the up button, right button, down button, or left button of the select button 68, before 15 seconds have elapsed since the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB were displayed, the effect button 63 is considered to have been pressed, and the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are not hidden (do not disappear from the display screen 7a), and the result of the battle effect is not displayed as a result of the win/loss judgment, whereas if the player presses the effect button 63, the result of the battle effect is displayed as a result of the win/loss judgment.

[Button Operation Performance C]
Next, the button operation effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 95. Here, the button operation effect C executed when the player rotates the handle 60 and launches the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A and plays a game by hitting the left side will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 95(A), the left effect pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped number "1", the middle effect pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped number "2", and the right effect pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped number "3" in a state where they are aligned in a row on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. At this point, the player has not rotated the handle 60 and has not launched the game ball, so there is no reserved icon and the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state.

On the lower left side of the display screen 7a, a volume level image SL is displayed in the upper row indicating the current volume level out of five levels, from the first volume level (minimum (not muted)) to the fifth volume level (maximum), and a brightness level image LL is displayed in the lower row indicating the current brightness level out of five levels, from the first brightness level (minimum (not completely dark)) to the fifth brightness level (maximum). The volume level is the volume of the sound output from the speaker 67. The brightness level is the brightness of the display screen 7a, as well as the brightness of the board lamp 5 and various lamps arranged on the game board 2, and the brightness of the frame lamp 66. Warning sounds (for example, when the upper surplus ball tray (lower tray) 62 is full of game balls, when the front frame 53 is open, etc.), abnormal operation notification sounds (for example, when various movable parts cannot return to their evacuation positions, when there is a malfunction in the payout operation of paying out game balls, etc.), and fraud confirmation alarm sounds (for example, when abnormal vibrations are detected, when abnormal magnetism is detected, when abnormal balls are detected entering various winning slots, etc.) are always at the maximum volume level, independent of the changed volume level. In addition, the warning light emission modes corresponding to warning sounds, the abnormal operation notification light emission modes corresponding to abnormal operation notifications, and the fraud confirmation alarm sound and the fraud confirmation alarm light emission modes corresponding to fraud confirmation alarm sounds are also always at the maximum brightness level, independent of the changed brightness level.

At the fifth volume level (maximum), five rectangular volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the fourth volume level, four rectangular volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the third volume level, three rectangular volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the second volume level, two rectangular volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and at the first volume level (minimum (not muted)), one rectangular volume level image SL is displayed. The volume level image SL is a rectangular image filled in solid light blue.

At the fifth luminance level (maximum), five rectangular luminance level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the fourth luminance level, four rectangular luminance level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the third luminance level, three rectangular luminance level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, at the second luminance level, two rectangular luminance level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and at the first luminance level (minimum (not completely black)), one rectangular luminance level image LL is displayed. The luminance level image LL is a rectangular image painted solid green, which is a different color from the volume level image SL.

Here, the current volume level is set to the fifth volume level, five rectangular volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and the current brightness level is set to the fifth brightness level, five rectangular brightness level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction.

On the display screen 7a, a presentation mode selection display area SEL is arranged and displayed in the lower right corner, where the presentation modes consisting of spring mode, summer mode, autumn mode, and winter mode are displayed as the reels spin, and a select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) corresponding to the select button 68 is arranged and displayed to the left of the presentation mode selection display area SEL. In the center of the presentation mode selection display area SEL, a selection mode section TR is arranged that shows the selected (changed) presentation mode.

Each time the upper button of the select button 68 is pressed, the reels in the presentation mode selection display area SEL rotate upward from the bottom to the top, and the presentation mode that has rotated to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other presentation modes and is displayed in reverse (the background color and the text color are switched). On the other hand, each time the lower button of the select button 68 is pressed, the reels in the presentation mode selection display area SEL rotate downward from the top to the bottom, and the presentation mode that has rotated to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other presentation modes and is displayed in reverse (the background color and the text color are switched). The presentation mode that has rotated to the selection mode section TR becomes the presentation mode that is selected (changed), and the presentation corresponding to this selected (changed) presentation mode will proceed. Here, the presentation mode called summer mode is arranged in the selection mode section TR, and the presentation corresponding to the summer mode is proceeding.

A volume level image SL indicating the volume level and a brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level are always displayed in the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the performance mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are always displayed in the lower right side of the display screen 7a, and a select button image SBG corresponding to the select button 68 (simulating the select button 68) is always displayed to the left of the performance mode selection display area SEL.

Also, the volume level, brightness level, and presentation mode can be changed from the point when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the system is started up, and the volume level image SL, brightness level image LL, presentation mode selection display area SEL, and selection mode section TR are displayed in their respective predetermined positions on the display screen 7a. In other words, the setting mode is not displayed when the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state without starting a game (hereinafter including when a demo presentation for waiting for customers is being performed), and the volume level, brightness level, and presentation mode can be changed from among the setting items, but rather, after the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the system is started up, the player can change the volume level, brightness level, and presentation mode at the timing he or she wishes.

When the performance symbols are displayed in a stopped state (when the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state), the player presses the lower button of the select button 68 to change the performance mode and set it to the desired performance mode. When the player presses the lower button of the select button 68, the display mode changes to one in which only the lower button image flashes among the upper button image, right button image, lower button image, and left button image of the select button image SBG (the upper button image, right button image, and left button image of the select button image SBG are displayed in a lit state).

Here, the player changes the presentation mode from summer mode to autumn mode, and the autumn mode that has rotated into the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other presentation modes and inverted (the background color and text color are swapped). This change in presentation mode switches from the current summer mode to autumn mode when the next presentation pattern change presentation (changing display) begins, and the presentation corresponding to the autumn mode will proceed in the next presentation pattern change presentation (changing display). When the player presses the lower button of the select button 68 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has passed, the display mode in which the lower button image flashes is released and the display returns to the same display mode (illuminated display mode) as the upper button image, right button image, and left button image of the select button image SBG.

After that, when the performance symbol is displayed in a stopped state (when the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state), the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 several times to lower the volume level to the desired volume level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55, a volume down button image SDG and a volume up button image SUG (simulating the volume down button and the volume up button) corresponding to the volume down button and the volume up button are displayed to the right of the volume level image SL, respectively, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), and the display mode is such that only the volume down button image SDG flashes as a result of the player pressing the volume down button of the volume button 55 (the volume up button image SUG is displayed in a lit-up state). The volume level is adjusted to the level corresponding to the player's pressing of the volume down button of the volume button 55, and a "pawn" sound dedicated to changing the volume level is played from the speaker 67. Additionally, each time the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55, the rectangular volume level images SL are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a) in order, starting with the one located at the far right.

Here, the player has lowered the volume level from the fifth volume level to the third volume level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). Note that once the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 and the volume level is lowered to the first volume level (minimum), from this point on, no matter how many times the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55, the volume level is maintained at the first volume level (minimum), and only one rectangular volume level image SL is displayed.

After that, when the performance symbol is displayed in a stopped state (when the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state), the player then presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 several times to lower the brightness level to the desired brightness level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG (simulating the brightness down button and the brightness up button) corresponding to the brightness down button and the brightness up button are displayed to the right of the brightness level image LL, respectively, as shown in FIG. 95 (C), and the display mode is such that only the brightness down button image LDG flashes as a result of the player pressing the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 (the brightness up button image LUG is displayed in a lit state). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted to the brightness level corresponding to the player pressing the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the board lamp 5 and the various lamps arranged on the game board 2, and the brightness of the frame lamp 66 are also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Additionally, each time the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness buttons 56, the rectangular brightness level images LL are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a) in order, starting with the one located at the far right.

Here, the player lowers the brightness level from the fifth brightness level to the third brightness level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). Note that when the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 and the brightness level is lowered to the first brightness level (minimum), the brightness level of the first brightness level (minimum) is maintained and only one rectangular brightness level image LL is displayed, no matter how many times the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56.

Then, the player rotates the handle 60 to shoot the game ball so that it flows down the left play area 3A, playing by hitting from the left. When the flowing game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and the white reserved icon 9A moves to the variable display position, it becomes a yellow (gold) variable icon 9C as shown in Figure 95 (D), and the variable display of the performance pattern (variable display) begins. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60, the game ball has not entered the first starting hole 20.

After that, as shown in Figure 95 (E), first the left performance pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", then the right performance pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", and they are aligned in a row on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, while the middle performance pattern 8C continues to fluctuate, and a reach is formed.

After the reach is formed, the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the screen of the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern is switched to the battle performance screen of the super reach (SP reach), and the battle performance is developed. In addition, by switching from the screen of the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern to the battle performance screen of the super reach (SP reach), the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are also hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). In contrast, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level as the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level as the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a are arranged and displayed, respectively, and are maintained. Furthermore, the performance mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are arranged and maintained in a displayed state on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, and a select button image SBG corresponding to the select button 68 (simulating the select button 68) is arranged and maintained in a displayed state to the left of the performance mode selection display area SEL.

In this battle presentation, an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a, creating a super reach (SP reach) presentation with a high expected winning rate set in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle presentation, it is a win.

In the battle performance, ally character CRA falls and is defeated once, while enemy character CRB wins, but then ally character CRA gets up and revives, and fights enemy character CRB again, and finally ally character CRA wins and enemy character CRB is defeated, ending the battle performance. The screen switches again from the battle performance screen to a screen showing the performance pattern change performance (changing display), and as shown in Figure 95 (F), the left performance pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", the middle performance pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", and the right performance pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", and they are lined up in a row on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in Figure 95 (G), the left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R begin to change again with the same patterns lined up on a horizontal line, and in the center of the display screen 7a, in front of the left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R, a large performance button image BG (simulating performance button 63) corresponding to performance button 63 to encourage pressing of performance button 63 is displayed, and a gauge image TB having a horizontally long rectangular shape indicating the remaining effective time for the pressing operation is arranged and displayed so as to cover a portion of the lower side of the performance button image BG.

The effect button image BG is engraved with the English word "PUSH". The effect button image BG is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting mode, and suggests to the player the expectation of the winning type being upgraded to 16 rounds (R) and a V-passing jackpot due to re-variation. For example, the "predetermined light-emitting mode" is set to a high expectation of upgrading to 16 rounds (R) and a V-passing jackpot in the order of white flashing → red flashing → yellow flashing (gold flashing). Here, since the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C is not displayed (because it has disappeared from the display screen 7a), the effect button image BG is in a light-emitting mode that flashes yellow (gold), which is the same color as the variable icon 9C (the effect button image BG is in a light-emitting mode of yellow flashing (gold flashing)). If the color of the variable icon 9C is red, the illumination mode of the effect button image BG may be a flashing red color, which is the same color as the hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) red, or instead of red, the flashing red may be changed to a flashing yellow color (gold flashing), to create an effect that suggests an increased likelihood of promotion to the 16th round (R) and V-passing jackpot.

The gauge image TB changes to an image in which the gauge length shortens, thereby informing the player of the remaining effective time for pressing the effect button 63. Here, the length of the gauge from the inner left end to the inner right end of the horizontally long rectangular gauge image TB is the maximum gauge length, and the maximum remaining effective time is set to 15 seconds. As time passes, the right end of the gauge moves toward the left end, thereby indicating the passage of time as an image in which the gauge length shortens, and when 15 seconds have passed, the gauge length becomes zero. Note that if 15 seconds have passed without the effect button 63 being operated before the gauge length reaches zero, the effect button image BG and gauge image TB are then hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a).

When the re-fluctuation starts and two seconds have passed since the effect button image BG and gauge image TB are displayed, the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 several times to increase the volume level to the desired volume level. When the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55, in response, as shown in FIG. 95(H), a volume down button image SDG and a volume up button image SUG (simulating the volume down button and the volume up button) corresponding to the volume down button and the volume up button are displayed to the right of the volume level image SL, respectively, and the display mode is such that only the volume up button image SUG flashes as a result of the player pressing the volume up button of the volume button 55 (the volume down button image SDG is displayed in a lit state). When the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55, the volume level change sound "pawn" is adjusted to a volume level corresponding to the pressing of the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 and is output from the speaker 67, and various performance sounds related to the performance such as variable performance music and sound effects are also adjusted to the changed volume level and output from the speaker 67. In addition, each time the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55, a volume level image SL having a rectangular shape is added to the right of the rightmost image and displayed in order.

Here, the player is increasing the volume level from the third volume level to the fifth volume level (maximum). When the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). Note that once the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 and the volume level increases to the fifth volume level (maximum), the volume level of the fifth volume level (maximum) is maintained no matter how many times the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55, and five rectangular volume level images SL are displayed.

In FIG. 95(H), even if the player presses the volume up button of the volume buttons 55 to increase the volume level, the effect button 63 is treated as having been pressed, and the effect button image BG and gauge image TB are not hidden (they do not disappear from the display screen 7a). Also, even if the player presses the volume down button of the volume buttons 55 to decrease the volume level, the effect button 63 is treated as having been pressed, and the effect button image BG and gauge image TB are not hidden (they do not disappear from the display screen 7a).

After that, during the re-changing, when 7 seconds have passed since the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB were displayed, the player then presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 several times to raise the brightness level to the desired brightness level. When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG (simulating the brightness down button and the brightness up button) corresponding to the brightness down button and the brightness up button are displayed to the right of the brightness level image LL, respectively, as shown in FIG. 95 (I), and the display mode is such that only the brightness up button image LUG blinks as a result of the player pressing the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 (the brightness down button image LDG is lit). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted to the brightness level corresponding to the player pressing the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the board lamp 5 and the various lamps arranged on the game board 2, and the brightness of the frame lamp 66 are also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Additionally, each time the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness buttons 56, a rectangular brightness level image LL is added to the right of the rightmost image in order and displayed.

Here, the player is increasing the brightness level from the third brightness level to the fifth brightness level (maximum). When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). Note that once the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 and the brightness level is increased to the fifth brightness level (maximum), the brightness level of the fifth brightness level (maximum) is maintained no matter how many times the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, and five rectangular brightness level images LL are displayed.

In FIG. 95(I), even if the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness buttons 56 to increase the brightness level, the effect button 63 is treated as having been pressed, and the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are not hidden (they do not disappear from the display screen 7a). Also, even if the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness buttons 56 to decrease the brightness level, the effect button 63 is treated as having been pressed, and the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are not hidden (they do not disappear from the display screen 7a).

After that, during the re-fluctuation, when 10 seconds have passed since the display of the effect button image BG and gauge image TB, the player then presses the upper button of the select button 68 to change the effect mode and set it to the desired effect mode. When the player presses the upper button of the select button 68, in response, as shown in FIG. 95 (J), of the upper, right, down and left button images of the select button image SBG, only the upper button image flashes (the right, down and left button images of the select button image SBG are displayed in a lit state).

Here, the player operates the select button 68 to change the presentation mode back to the summer mode that was set when the presentation symbol was stopped (when the gaming machine 1 was in a standby state), and changes (returns) it from the autumn mode back to the summer mode, and the summer mode that has rotated to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other presentation modes and is displayed inverted (the background color and text color are swapped) and arranged in this state. This change in presentation mode switches from the current summer mode to the autumn mode when the next presentation symbol variation presentation (variable display) begins, and the presentation corresponding to the autumn mode will proceed in the next presentation symbol variation presentation (variable display). When the player presses the up button of the select button 68 and a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has passed, the display mode in which the up button image flashes is released, and the display returns to the same display mode as the right button image, down button image, and left button image of the select button image SBG.

In addition, in FIG. 95 (J), even if the player presses any of the up, right, down or left buttons of the select button 68 to change the presentation mode or by mistake, the presentation button 63 is considered to have been pressed and the presentation button image BG and gauge image TB will not be hidden (they will not disappear from the display screen 7a).

After that, during the re-fluctuation, when 13 seconds have passed since the display of the effect button image BG and gauge image TB, the player presses the effect button 63, and as shown in Figure 95 (K), the second movable device 15, which has a rectangular decorative part with "OARO" written on it, moves downward from the retreat position (home position) to the advance position in the center of the display screen 7a and stops for a predetermined time (1.5 seconds in this embodiment).

When the second movable part 15 is stopped in the advanced position, the second movable part 15 does not cover the volume level image SL, which indicates the volume level and is displayed as the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, or the brightness level image LL, which indicates the brightness level and is displayed as the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and does not at all impede the visibility of the volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL.

Furthermore, when the second movable part 15 is stopped in the advanced position, the second movable part 15 does not cover the performance mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, nor the select button image SBG displayed to the left of the performance mode selection display area SEL, and does not at all impede the visibility of the performance mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR, and the select button image SBG.

When the second movable device 15 moves from the advanced position back to the retreated position (home position) and disappears from the display screen 7a, the re-change ends and the result of the re-change is displayed, with the left performance pattern 8L temporarily stopped at the number "7", the middle performance pattern 8C temporarily stopped at the number "7", and the right performance pattern 8R temporarily stopped at the number "7", all aligned in a row on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(L), the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and a win is confirmed. Here, since the type of win was a hit due to a battle revival, the 16 rounds (R) (actually 15 rounds (R)) V-passing jackpot was raised to 16 rounds (R) V-passing jackpot due to re-fluctuation. Even in this state, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is arranged and displayed in the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level is arranged and displayed in the lower row on the left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the performance mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are arranged and displayed in the lower right side of the display screen 7a, and the select button image SBG corresponding to the select button 68 (simulating the select button 68) is arranged and displayed to the left of the performance mode selection display area SEL.

When a win is confirmed, the jackpot opening starts, and then the jackpot game begins, in which the player is awarded a profit. Note that even if the jackpot opening starts, and even if the jackpot game starts, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level and the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level are still displayed in the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level are still displayed in the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the display mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are still displayed in the lower right side of the display screen 7a, and the select button image SBG corresponding to the select button 68 (simulating the select button 68) is still displayed to the left of the display mode selection display area SEL.

Thus, although the volume button 55, brightness button 56, select button 68, and effect button 63 are important buttons related to the effects that can be pressed by the player, if the player presses the volume up button or the volume down button of the volume button 55, if the player presses the brightness up button or the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, or if the player presses any of the up button, right button, down button, or left button of the select button 68, before 15 seconds have elapsed since the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB were displayed, the effect button 63 will be considered to have been pressed, and the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB will not be hidden (will not disappear from the display screen 7a), and the result of the re-change will not be displayed as a result of the win/loss judgment, whereas if the player presses the effect button 63, the result of the re-change will be displayed as a result of the win/loss judgment.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of button operation.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes operation means such as a volume button 55, a brightness button 56, a performance button 63, and a select button 68 that can be operated by a player, an image display device 7 (display means) that can display a plurality of types of images, and a performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) of a sub-control board 90 that can execute various performances using images on the image display device 7 (display means). The operation means includes a first operation means such as the volume button 55, the brightness button 56, and the select button 68, and a second operation means such as a performance button 63 that is different from the first operation means. One of the plurality of types of images is a first image such as a volume level image SL, a brightness level image LL, a performance mode selection display area SEL, a selection mode section TR, a volume down button image SDG, a volume up button image SUG, a brightness down button LDG, and a brightness up button image LUG, and one of the plurality of types of images is a second image such as a second image such as a third image such as a fourth image such as a fifth image such as a fifth image, and a fifth image such as a fifth image. The second image is a second image such as a performance button image BG or a gauge image TB, and the performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) displays the first image based on the operation of the first operation means (when the volume up button of the volume button 55 is pressed, the number of volume level images SL increases, when the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 is pressed, the number of brightness level images LL increases, when the select button 68 is pressed, the performance mode that has rotated to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other performance modes), and can hide the second image based on the operation of the second operation means (when the performance button 63 is pressed, the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB are hidden) (Figures 93 (G) to (J) for performance button operation performance A, Figures 94 (G) to (K) for performance button operation performance B, and Figures 95 (G) to (K) for performance button operation performance C). According to this configuration, the operation means operable by the player include the first operation means for displaying the first image and the second operation means for hiding the second image, so that the image can be displayed and the image can be hidden, thereby improving the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the effect button operation effect A of Figures 93 (G) to (J), the effect button operation effect B of Figures 94 (G) to (K), and the effect button operation effect C of Figures 95 (G) to (K), one of the multiple types of images is a set of effect patterns such as a left effect pattern 8L, a middle effect pattern 8C, and a right effect pattern 8R, which can notify the result of a hit or miss judgment, and the effect control microcomputer 91 (effect execution means) is capable of displaying first images such as a volume level image SL, a brightness level image LL, an effect mode selection display area SEL, and a selection mode section TR regardless of whether or not the variable display using the set of effect patterns has started, and is capable of displaying second images such as an effect button image BG and a gauge image TB at a predetermined timing after the variable display using the set of effect patterns has started (a predetermined time after the battle effect has started (in this embodiment, 8 seconds)). According to this configuration, the first image and the second image are not constantly displayed, but rather the first image is displayed regardless of whether or not the changing display using a set of performance patterns has started, whereas the second image is displayed at a predetermined timing after the changing display using a set of performance patterns has started, so that the period during which the first image and the second image are displayed together can be limited.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the button operation presentation A of Fig. 93 (G) to (J), the button operation presentation B of Fig. 94 (G) to (K), and the button operation presentation C of Fig. 95 (G) to (K), the presentation control microcomputer 91 (presentation execution means) is capable of displaying the result of the win/loss judgment based on the operation of the second operation means such as the presentation button 63, regardless of whether the first operation means such as the volume button 55, the brightness button 56, or the select button 68 has been operated while the second image such as the presentation button image BG or the gauge image TB is being displayed. With this configuration, even if the player operates the first operation means at the timing when he or she wants to obtain the result of the win/loss judgment, the result of the win/loss judgment cannot be obtained, and this experience can contribute to preventing the player from operating the first operation means erroneously.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the button operation performance A of Figs. 93(G) to (J), the button operation performance B of Figs. 94(G) to (K), and the button operation performance C of Figs. 95(G) to (K), the first image such as the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG is an image representing the first operation means such as the volume button 55, the first image such as the brightness down button LDG and the brightness up button image LUG is an image representing the first operation means such as the brightness button 56, the second image such as the button image BG is an image representing the second operation means such as the button 63, and the performance control microcomputer In a state where the first image and the second image are displayed, the display control unit 91 (performance execution means) is configured to, even if the first operation means such as the volume button 55 is operated, maintain the display of the first images such as the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG, without hiding them, and even if the first operation means such as the brightness button 56 is operated, maintain the display of the first images such as the brightness down button LDG and the brightness up button image LUG, without hiding them, while making the second images such as the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB invisible based on the operation of the second operation means such as the performance button 63. According to this configuration, in a state where the first images such as the volume down button image SDG, the volume up button image SUG, the brightness down button LDG, the brightness up button image LUG, and the second images such as the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB are displayed, the first images are not made invisible even if the first operation means such as the volume button 55 and the brightness button 56 are operated, whereas the second images are made invisible when the second operation means such as the performance button 63 is operated. In this way, the first image and the second image can be changed by operating the first operating means, such as the volume button 55 and the brightness button 56, and the second operating means, such as the effect button 63, to provide a variety of effects, such as maintaining the display of the first image and not displaying the second image.

Furthermore, in the button operation performance B of Figures 94 (G) to (K) and the button operation performance C of Figures 95 (G) to (K), the first image such as the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG is an image representing the first operating means such as the volume button 55, the first image such as the brightness down button LDG and the brightness up button image LUG is an image representing the first operating means such as the brightness button 56, the first image such as the select button image SBG is an image representing the first operating means such as the select button 68, the second image such as the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB is an image representing the second operating means such as the performance button 63, and the performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) When the second image is displayed, even if a first operating means such as the volume button 55 is operated, first images such as the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are not hidden but maintained on the display, and even if a first operating means such as the brightness button 56 is operated, first images such as the brightness down button LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are not hidden but maintained on the display, and even if a first operating means such as the select button 68 is operated, first images such as the select button image SBG are not hidden but maintained on the display, while second images such as the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB can be made invisible based on the operation of a second operating means such as the effect button 63. According to this configuration, when a first image such as a volume down button image SDG, a volume up button image SUG, a brightness down button LDG, a brightness up button image LUG, or a select button image SBG is displayed, and a second image such as a performance button image BG or a gauge image TB is displayed, the first image is not hidden even when a first operation means such as the volume button 55, the brightness button 56, or the select button 68 is operated, whereas the second image is hidden when a second operation means such as the performance button 63 is operated. In this way, as a change in the first image and the second image due to the operation of the first operation means such as the volume button 55, the brightness button 56, or the select button image SBG, or the second operation means such as the performance button 63, a variation in performance can be provided, such as maintaining the display of the first image and hiding the second image.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the button operation performance A of FIG. 93(G) to (J), the button operation performance B of FIG. 94(G) to (K), and the button operation performance C of FIG. 95(G) to (K), the first image such as the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG is an image representing the first operation means such as the volume button 55, the first image such as the brightness down button LDG and the brightness up button image LUG is an image representing the first operation means such as the brightness button 56, the second image such as the button image BG is an image representing the second operation means such as the button 63, and the performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) makes the first image non-display and displays the second image in the button operation performance A of FIG. 93(G), the button operation performance B of FIG. 94(G), and the button operation performance C of FIG. 95(G). In this state, in the button operation presentation A of Figures 93 (H) and (I), the button operation presentation B of Figures 94 (H) and (I), and the button operation presentation C of Figures 95 (H) and (I), a first image such as a volume down button image SDG or a volume up button image SUG is displayed based on the operation of a first operation means such as the volume button 55, and a first image such as a brightness down button LDG or a brightness up button image LUG is displayed based on the operation of a first operation means such as the brightness button 56, while in the button operation presentation A of Figure 93 (J), the button operation presentation B of Figure 94 (K), and the button operation presentation C of Figure 95 (K), a second image such as a button image BG can be made non-displayed based on the operation of a second operation means such as the button 63. According to this configuration, in a state in which the first images such as the volume down button image SDG, the volume up button image SUG, the brightness down button LDG, and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden and the second image such as the effect button image BG is displayed, when the first operation means such as the volume button 55 is operated, the first images such as the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are displayed, and when the first operation means such as the brightness button 56 is operated, the first images such as the brightness down button LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are displayed, whereas when the second operation means such as the effect button 63 is operated, the second images are hidden. In this way, as changes in the first image and the second image due to operations on the first operation means such as the volume button 55 and the brightness button 56 and the second operation means such as the effect button 63, a variation in effect such as displaying the first image and not displaying the second image can be provided.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the button operation presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the battle performance in the performance button operation performance B of FIG. 94, when 13 seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB were displayed, the player presses the performance button 63, as shown in FIG. 94 (K) to (L), after the second movable role 15 suddenly appears, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed as a temporary stop with the same pattern (here, the number "2"), and then it is a win. However, even if the performance button 63 is pressed, the second movable role 15 may not appear at all, and the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R may be displayed as a temporary stop with the same pattern (here, the number "2"), and then it is a win. In this way, it is possible to increase the variety of performances in the battle performance, and further, the player can enjoy the relationship and rules between the pressing of the performance button 63 in the battle performance and the appearance of the second movable role 15 in the battle performance according to his/her own free imagination.

[Modification 2]
During the re-variation in the performance button operation performance C in FIG. 95, when 13 seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB were displayed, the player presses the performance button 63, as shown in FIG. 95 (K) to (L), after the second movable role 15 suddenly appears, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed as a temporary stop with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and then it becomes a win. However, even if the performance button 63 is pressed, the second movable role 15 may not appear at all, and the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R may be displayed as a temporary stop with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and then it becomes a win. In this way, it is possible to increase the variety of performances in the re-variation, and further, the player can enjoy the relationship and rules between the pressing of the performance button 63 in the re-variation and the appearance of the second movable role 15 with his/her free imagination.

[Modification 3]
In the button operation performance A of FIG. 93, the button operation performance B of FIG. 94, and the button operation performance C of FIG. 95, the variable icon 9C was displayed (placed) at the variable display position (above the white rectangular image (pedestal image)) arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the variable display position, for example, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level displayed as the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level displayed as the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a may be moved in parallel to the right toward the position where the variable display position was displayed, that is, the volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL may be arranged vertically at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL may be used as an image indicating one variable display position. In this case, the variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) on the volume level image SL indicating the volume level displayed as the upper row. Of course, when the second movable part 15 is stopped at the advanced position, the second movable part 15 does not cover the volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL, and does not at all impede the visibility of the volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL.

[Modification 4]
In the performance button operation performance B of FIG. 94 and the performance button operation performance C of FIG. 95, the variable icon 9C was displayed (placed) at the variable display position (above the white rectangular image (pedestal image)) located at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the variable display position, for example, the performance mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a may be moved parallel to the left toward the position where the variable display position was displayed, that is, the performance mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR may be arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the performance mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR may be used as an image indicating one variable display position. In this case, the variable icon 9C is displayed (placed) on the performance mode selection display area SEL. Of course, when the second movable part 15 is stopped at the advanced position, the second movable part 15 does not cover the performance mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR, and does not at all impede the visibility of the performance mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR.

[Modification 5]
In the button operation effect B in Fig. 94 and the button operation effect C in Fig. 95, a select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) corresponding to the select button 68 is displayed. At this time, the up and down buttons of the select button 68 may be displayed as active, and the left and right buttons as inactive, indicating that the up and down buttons are buttons that can be pressed, and that the left and right buttons are buttons that cannot be pressed. In this way, it is possible to inform the player which of the up, right, down, and left buttons of the select button 68 is the button that the player uses to raise or lower the brightness level (making it easy to understand intuitively).

[Modification 6]
The button operation performance A of Fig. 93, the button operation performance B of Fig. 94, and the button operation performance C of Fig. 95 may not include some of the performances described above, or other performances may be added. Also, a combination performance may be executed using the button operation performance A of Fig. 93 and the button operation performance C of Fig. 95, or a combination performance may be executed using the button operation performance B of Fig. 94 and the button operation performance C of Fig. 95.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
An operation means operable by a player;
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A game machine including: a performance execution means capable of executing various performances using images on the display means;
The operation means includes a first operation means and a second operation means different from the first operation means,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image different from the first image;
The performance execution means includes:
displaying the first image based on the operation of the first operation means;
hiding the second image based on the operation of the second operation means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of effect patterns capable of informing the result of a hit or miss determination,
The performance execution means includes:
The first image can be displayed regardless of whether or not the variable display by the set of performance symbols has started,
The second image can be displayed at a predetermined timing after the start of the variable display by the set of performance patterns.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2,
The performance execution means includes:
In a state where the second image is being displayed, a result of the correct/incorrect determination is displayed based on whether the second operation means has been operated, regardless of whether the first operation means has been operated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect C1-3, wherein the first image is an image representing the first operating means,
the second image is an image representing the second operation means,
The performance execution means includes:
In a state where the first image and the second image are displayed, even if the first operation means is operated, the first image is not hidden but is kept displayed, while the second image is hidden based on the operation of the second operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-3,
the first image is an image representing the first operation means,
the second image is an image representing the second operation means,
The performance execution means includes:
in a state in which the first image is not displayed and the second image is displayed, the first image is displayed based on an operation of the first operating means, and the second image is not displayed based on an operation of the second operating means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, battle character selection effects A to C will be explained using Figures 96 to 98. The battle character selection effects are executed while the decorative patterns are changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the battle character selection effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Battle character selection production A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the battle character selection performance A. In the battle character selection performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which multiple rows of decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are changing at high speed. Four reserved icons 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), a left pattern stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, a "7" pattern is stopped as the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. The hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), a right pattern stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the right decorative pattern slows down and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, a "7" pattern is stopped as the right decorative pattern 8R. This forms a reach state together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparently or semi-transparently. The hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), a message image MG stating "Select an ally character for the battle reach" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 96 (E) to (I), an ally character selection display is executed. The ally character selection display is a display for selecting an ally character that will appear in the battle display.

In Figures 96 (E) to (G), a button image BG is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image that mimics the effect button 63 with a downward arrow image added, and is an image to encourage pressing the effect button 63 (the same applies below). A message image MG saying "Select" is displayed above the button image BG.

In Figures 96 (E) to (G), a thumbnail image S1 of a first ally character MCR1 is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. Below the thumbnail image S1, a thumbnail image S2 of a second ally character MCR2 is displayed. Below the thumbnail image S2, a thumbnail image S3 of a third ally character MCR3 is displayed.

In FIG. 96 (E), the thumbnail image S1 of the first ally character MCR1 is surrounded by a thick frame, and the first ally character MCR1 is currently selected. The image of the selected first ally character MCR1 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the first ally character MCR1 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S1.

In FIG. 96 (F), the thumbnail image S2 of the second ally character MCR2 is surrounded by a thick frame, and the second ally character MCR2 is currently selected. The image of the selected second ally character MCR2 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the second ally character MCR2 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S2.

In FIG. 96 (G), the thumbnail image S3 of the third ally character MCR3 is surrounded by a thick frame, and the third ally character MCR3 is currently selected. The image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the third ally character MCR3 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S3.

The selected ally character is switched each time the effect button 63 is pressed. In other words, each time the effect button 63 is pressed, the selection changes in the order (E) → (F) → (G) → (E) → ... in FIG. 96.

When the specified selection period ends, as shown in FIG. 96 (H), the button image BG is hidden. The "Select" message image MG is still displayed. Also, the thumbnail image S3 of the selected third ally character MCR3 is surrounded by a thick frame. Furthermore, the image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 96(I), an image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed over the entire area of the display screen 7a. This image is an enlarged version of the image of the third ally character MCR3 in FIG. 96(H).

Next, after a battle between an ally character and an enemy character, a final battle performance is executed across the entire display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 96 (J). The final battle performance is a performance that decides the outcome of the battle. Here, the third ally character MCR3 and the enemy character TCR clash. Note that a win is confirmed when the third ally character MCR3 wins against the enemy character TCR.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (K), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a winning has occurred definitively. Here, the third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Congratulations" is displayed to the left of the third ally character MCR3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (L), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether or not there is a win. Here, the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7" patterns, notifying the player that there is a win. If the above-mentioned win confirmation effect is executed, there will be no loss. If the above-mentioned win confirmation effect is not executed and there is a loss, for example, the left and right decorative patterns stop at the "7" pattern, and the center decorative pattern stops at the "8" pattern.

[Battle character selection performance B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the battle character selection presentation B. In the battle character selection presentation B, first, as shown in FIG. 97(A), a change start presentation is executed. The change start presentation is a presentation in which multiple rows of decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are changing at high speed. Four reserved icons 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), a left pattern stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, a "7" pattern is stopped as the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. The hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), a right pattern stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the right decorative pattern slows down and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, a "7" pattern is stopped as the right decorative pattern 8R. This forms a reach state together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparently or semi-transparently. The hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D), a message image MG stating "Select an ally character for the battle reach" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 97 (E) to (I), an ally character selection display is executed. The ally character selection display is a display for selecting an ally character that will appear in the battle display.

In Figures 97 (E) to (G), a button image BG is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image that mimics the effect button 63 with a downward arrow image added, and is an image to encourage pressing the effect button 63 (the same applies below). A message image MG saying "Select" is displayed above the button image BG.

In Figures 97 (E) to (G), a thumbnail image S1 of a first ally character MCR1 is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. Below the thumbnail image S1, a thumbnail image S2 of a second ally character MCR2 is displayed. Below the thumbnail image S2, a thumbnail image S3 of a third ally character MCR3 is displayed.

In Figure 97 (E), the thumbnail image S1 of the first ally character MCR1 is displayed brightly (high brightness), and the first ally character MCR1 is currently selected. The other thumbnail images S2, S3 are displayed darkly (low brightness). The image of the selected first ally character MCR1 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the first ally character MCR1 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S1.

In Figure 97 (F), the thumbnail image S2 of the second ally character MCR2 is displayed brightly (high brightness), and the second ally character MCR2 is currently selected. The other thumbnail images S1, S3 are displayed darkly (low brightness). The image of the selected second ally character MCR2 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the second ally character MCR2 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S2.

In Figure 97 (G), the thumbnail image S3 of the third ally character MCR3 is displayed brightly (high brightness), and the third ally character MCR3 is currently selected. The other thumbnail images S1, S2 are displayed darkly (low brightness). The image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the third ally character MCR3 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S3.

The selected ally character is switched each time the effect button 63 is pressed. In other words, each time the effect button 63 is pressed, the selection changes in the following order in FIG. 97: (E) → (F) → (G) → (E) → ....

When the specified selection period ends, as shown in FIG. 97 (H), the button image BG is hidden. The "Choose" message image MG is still displayed. Also, the thumbnail image S3 of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed brightly. The other thumbnail images S1 and S2 are hidden. Furthermore, the image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 97(I), an image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This image is an enlarged version of the image of the third ally character MCR3 in FIG. 97(H).

Next, after a battle between an ally character and an enemy character, a final battle performance is executed across the entire display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 97 (J). The final battle performance is a performance that decides the outcome of the battle. Here, the third ally character MCR3 and the enemy character TCR clash. Note that a win is confirmed when the third ally character MCR3 wins against the enemy character TCR.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (K), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a winning has occurred. Here, the third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Victory" is displayed to the left of the third ally character MCR3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (L), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether or not there is a win. Here, the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7" patterns, notifying the player that there is a win. If the above-mentioned win confirmation effect is executed, there will be no loss. If the above-mentioned win confirmation effect is not executed and there is a loss, for example, the left and right decorative patterns stop at the "7" pattern, and the center decorative pattern stops at the "8" pattern.

[Battle character selection scene C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the battle character selection presentation C. In the battle character selection presentation C, first, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a change start presentation is executed. The change start presentation is a presentation in which multiple rows of decorative patterns start changing. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, center, and right are changing at high speed. Four reserved icons 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), a left pattern stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, a "7" pattern is stopped as the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. The hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), a right pattern stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (variation speed) of the right decorative pattern slows down and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, a "7" pattern is stopped as the right decorative pattern 8R. This forms a reach state together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparently or semi-transparently. The hold icon 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), a message image MG stating "Select an ally character for the battle reach" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 98 (E) to (I), an ally character selection display is executed. The ally character selection display is a display for selecting an ally character that will appear in the battle display.

In Figures 98 (E) to (G), a button image BG is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image that mimics the effect button 63 with a downward arrow image added, and is an image to encourage pressing the effect button 63 (the same applies below). A message image MG saying "Select" is displayed above the button image BG.

In Figures 98 (E) to (G), a thumbnail image S1 of a first ally character MCR1 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a. To the right of the thumbnail image S1, a thumbnail image S2 of a second ally character MCR2 is displayed. To the right of the thumbnail image S2, a thumbnail image S3 of a third ally character MCR3 is displayed. In addition, an image OG with the word "Automatic" written on it and the same size as the thumbnail images S1 to S3 is displayed above the thumbnail image S1.

When the effect button 63 is pressed, the thick frame moves in the following order: image OG → thumbnail image S1 → thumbnail image S2 → thumbnail image S3 → image OG → .... When the "random" image OG is selected, thick frames of different display colors (shown hatched) automatically switch in the following order: thumbnail image S1 → thumbnail image S2 → thumbnail image S3 → thumbnail image S1 → .... In conjunction with this, the images of ally characters MCR1 to MCR3 displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a also switch.

In Figures 98(E) to (G), image OG is surrounded by a thick frame.
In Fig. 98(E), the thumbnail image S1 of the first ally character MCR1 is surrounded by a thick frame (shown hatched) of a different display color, and the first ally character MCR1 is currently selected. The image of the selected first ally character MCR1 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the first ally character MCR1 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S1.

In Figure 98 (F), the thumbnail image S2 of the second ally character MCR2 is surrounded by a thick frame of a different display color (shown hatched), and the second ally character MCR2 is currently selected. The image of the selected second ally character MCR2 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the second ally character MCR2 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S2.

In Figure 98 (G), the thumbnail image S3 of the third ally character MCR3 is surrounded by a thick frame of a different display color (shown hatched), and the third ally character MCR3 is currently selected. The image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the third ally character MCR3 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S3.

In this case, image OG is selected, so the selection is automatically switched from FIG. 98 (E) → (F) → (G) → (E) → ... without pressing the effect button 63.

When the specified selection period ends, as shown in FIG. 98 (H), the button image BG is hidden. The "Choose" message image MG is still displayed. Also, the thumbnail image S3 of the selected third ally character MCR3 is surrounded by a thick frame. The other thumbnail images S1 and S2 are hidden. Furthermore, the image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 98(I), the image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed over the entire area of the display screen 7a. The image here is an enlarged version of the image of the third ally character MCR3 in FIG. 98(H).

Next, after a battle between an ally character and an enemy character, a final battle performance is executed across the entire display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 98 (J). The final battle performance is a performance that decides the outcome of the battle. Here, the third ally character MCR3 and the enemy character TCR clash. Note that a win is confirmed when the third ally character MCR3 wins against the enemy character TCR.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (K), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a winning has occurred. Here, the third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Victory" is displayed to the left of the third ally character MCR3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (L), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether or not there is a win. Here, the left, center, and right decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7" patterns, notifying the player that there is a win. If the above-mentioned win confirmation effect is executed, there will be no loss. If the above-mentioned win confirmation effect is not executed and there is a loss, for example, the left and right decorative patterns stop at the "7" pattern, and the center decorative pattern stops at the "8" pattern.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the battle character selection presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when one of the first to third ally characters MCR1 to MCR3 is selected by pressing the effect button 63, an image (first image) showing the selected ally character is displayed in the central area (first area) of the display screen 7a, and a thumbnail image (second image) showing the same object as the object shown in the image showing the ally character is displayed in the left area (second area) of the display screen 7a which is smaller than the first area. With this configuration, an unprecedented and novel effect can be realized, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that the effect button 63 corresponds to the "operation means", the first to third ally characters MCR1 to MCR3 correspond to the "selection object", the ally character selection effect of Figures 96(E) to (I), 97(E) to (I), and 98(E) to (I) corresponds to the "selection effect", and the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "effect execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character selection presentation, after an ally character is selected by pressing the presentation button 63, the image of the ally character (third image) is displayed in the entire area (third area) of the display screen 7a in place of the image of the ally character (first image) and the thumbnail image (second image) (FIGS. 96(I), 97(I), and 98(I)). With this configuration, a novel presentation not seen before can be realized, and the interest of the game can be increased.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after an ally character is selected by pressing the effect button 63 in the character selection effect, a standby effect is executed in which the image (first image) of the ally character and the thumbnail image (second image) are continuously displayed until the image (third image) of the ally character is displayed in place of the image (first image) of the ally character and the thumbnail image (second image) of the ally character (FIGS. 96(H), 97(H), 98(H)). With this configuration, an unprecedented and novel effect can be realized, and the interest of the game can be increased.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character selection presentation, an image (fourth image) showing an ally character not being selected is displayed on the left or bottom (fourth region) of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 96(E)-(G), 97(E)-(G), 98(E)-(G)). With this configuration, a novel presentation not seen before can be realized, and the entertainment value of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the battle character selection presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the character selection effect during the change of the decorative pattern is taken as an example. However, the present invention may be applied to the character selection effect during a big win.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the thumbnail images are displayed brightly (higher brightness) or darkly (lower brightness). In contrast to this, a selected thumbnail image may be displayed in color, and thumbnail images other than the selected one may be displayed in monochrome.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the image of the ally character (first image) is an enlarged thumbnail image (second image). However, the first image may be different from the second image as long as they show the same object. Similarly, the third image may be different from the first image and the second image.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
an operation means operable by a player;
A game machine including: a performance execution means capable of executing a selection performance in which one of a plurality of selection objects is selected by operating the operation means;
The performance execution means displays a first image showing a selection target being selected in a first area, and displays a second image showing the same target as the target shown in the first image in a second area smaller than the first area, in the selection performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
The performance execution means displays a third image in a third area in place of the first image and the second image after a selection target is selected by the operation of the operation means in the selection performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2,
The performance execution means executes a standby performance in which the first image and the second image are continuously displayed during a period from when a selection target is selected by the operation of the operation means until the third image replacing the first image and the second image is displayed in the selection performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-3,
The performance execution means displays a fourth image indicating a selection target that is not being selected in a fourth area in the selection performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The planned number of balls to be acquired related information display presentation will be explained below with reference to Figures 99 to 101. This planned number of balls to be acquired related information display presentation is executed during the decorative pattern change presentation, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the planned number of balls to be acquired related information display presentation is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64.

[Display of information related to the number of pitches expected to be won]
Figure 99 is a first diagram for explaining the planned number of balls to be acquired related information display presentation. Figure 100 is a second diagram for explaining the planned number of balls to be acquired related information display presentation. An example of the planned number of balls to be acquired related information display presentation will be explained using Figures 99(A)-(L) and Figures 100(A)-(H). Figures 100(I)-(L) show another example of the planned number of balls to be acquired related information display presentation. Figure 101 shows yet another example of the planned number of balls to be acquired related information display presentation.

The expected number of balls to be acquired information display effect is an effect that displays information related to the expected number of balls to be acquired for a winning ball included in the reserved balls on the display screen 7a by looking ahead. Information related to the expected number of balls to be acquired for a winning ball included in the reserved balls means a quantitative or qualitative display of the number of balls to be acquired that would normally be acquired for a winning ball if the special reserved balls stored in the special reserved balls storage area 85 (Figure 5) include a winning ball. A quantitative display includes, for example, the number of balls acquired for each winning ball when the stored special reserved balls include multiple winning balls, as well as the total number of balls acquired for multiple winning balls. A quantitative display includes expressions such as "a lot" or "a little" or expressions such as "very lucky" or "fairly lucky".

In the expected number of balls to be acquired information display performance, first, as shown in FIG. 99(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a high-speed variable manner on the display screen 7a. In addition, four reserved icons 9A and a variable icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and the variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variable), and the stop display of the set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the game state is normal, and the special symbol 1 variable is being executed. During the variable, a pre-reading expected number of balls to be acquired suggestion performance is executed with a predetermined probability.

When the predictive number of balls to be acquired effect is executed, a text image of "predictive number of balls to be acquired effect start" is displayed as shown in FIG. 99 (B). In order to clarify the explanation of this effect, it is assumed that only two types of jackpots are set for special chart 1 in the jackpot determination table T5 of the gaming machine 1. It is also assumed that 100 balls can be acquired per round during a jackpot game. The jackpots for special chart 1 are "10R jackpot" and "5R jackpot", and it is assumed that 1000 balls can be acquired in a "10R jackpot" and 500 balls can be acquired in a "5R jackpot".

When the prediction of the number of balls to be acquired is performed, a prediction is performed as to whether the special reserved balls stored in the special reserved ball storage area 85 (FIG. 5) contain any winning balls. Here, the first reserved ball of special ball 1, that is, the reserved ball icon 9A on the far right side of the display screen 7a (to the left of the variable icon 9C) is a "10R jackpot", the second reserved ball of special ball 1 (the second reserved ball icon 9A from the right side of the display screen 7a) is a "5R jackpot", the third reserved ball of special ball 1 (the third reserved ball icon 9A from the right side of the display screen 7a) is a "10R jackpot", and the fourth reserved ball of special ball 1 (the leftmost reserved ball icon 9A on the display screen 7a) is a "miss". That is, the first reserved lottery on Special Chart 1 results in a "10R jackpot," a jackpot game is played and 1,000 balls are won, then the second reserved lottery on Special Chart 1 results in a "5R jackpot," a jackpot game is played and 500 balls are won, then the third reserved lottery on Special Chart 1 results in a "10R jackpot," a jackpot game is played and 1,000 balls are won, then the fourth reserved lottery on Special Chart 1 results in a "lose."

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(C), the text image "2500 balls to be won next" and the text images "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" are displayed as a prediction-based indication of the number of balls to be won. The text image "2500 balls to be won next" suggests that, based on prediction, a "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" will be executed in the first, second, and third draws on Special Chart 1, resulting in a total of 2500 balls (1000 + 500 + 1000). The text images "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" suggest that, based on prediction, a "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" will be executed in the first, second, and third draws on Special Chart 1, i.e., the type of win. However, players cannot clearly tell whether the "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" displays refer to jackpots in the first to third reserved draws on Special Chart 1, jackpots in the second to fourth draws, jackpots on the first, third and fourth draws, or jackpots on the first, second and fourth draws.

After that, as shown in Figure 99 (D), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a "326" miss pattern, the variable icon 9C is consumed, and the first reserved icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C through a shift movement. Then, as shown in Figure 99 (E), the next variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R begins.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot pattern of "777". At this time, a text image of "10R jackpot", indicating the type of jackpot that will be executed afterwards, is also displayed. The variable icon 9C is consumed, and then the jackpot game begins.

When the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 99(G), the display screen 7a displays the text image "Jackpot game starts!! 1000 balls are expected to be won this time" and the text image "1500 balls are expected to be won in the next jackpot game and onwards" during the opening performance. The text image "Jackpot game starts!! 1000 balls are expected to be won this time" suggests that the jackpot game that is about to start is a 10R jackpot game, and that 1000 balls can be won in this game. The text image "1500 balls are expected to be won in the next jackpot game and onwards" suggests that 1500 balls can be won in the new jackpot game (5R jackpot game + 10R jackpot game) that will start after the 10R jackpot game that is about to start. In other words, this is a performance that suggests the number of balls expected to be won in advance during the jackpot game, and suggests that a "5R jackpot" or "10R jackpot" will be executed in the reserved special chart lottery that was the second and third in FIG. 99(B) by the advance reading. However, the player cannot clearly tell whether the display "1,500 balls expected to be won in the next jackpot game or later" refers to a jackpot in the second and third reserved draws on Special Chart 1 in Figure 99 (B), a jackpot in the third and fourth draws, or a jackpot in the second and fourth draws.

When the 1R to 10R rounds are played, as shown in FIG. 99(H), the display screen 7a displays the text image "523 balls currently acquired!!" and the text image "1500 balls to be acquired in the next jackpot game or later." The text image "523 balls currently acquired!!" suggests the number of balls currently acquired in the 10R jackpot game currently being played. The text image "1500 balls to be acquired in the next jackpot game or later" continues to be displayed from FIG. 99(G), suggesting that 1500 balls can be acquired in the jackpot game (5R jackpot game + 10R jackpot game) that will be newly started after the currently played 10R jackpot game. In other words, it is a performance that suggests the number of balls to be acquired by looking ahead during the jackpot game, and suggests that a "5R jackpot" or "10R jackpot" will be executed in the reserved special chart lottery that was the second and third in FIG. 99(B) by looking ahead. However, the player cannot clearly tell whether the display "1,500 balls expected to be won in the next jackpot game or later" refers to a jackpot in the second and third reserved draws on Special Chart 1 in Figure 99 (B), a jackpot in the third and fourth draws, or a jackpot in the second and fourth draws.

When the 1R to 10R rounds are completed, as shown in FIG. 99(I), the display screen 7a displays the text image "Jackpot game finished, 1000 balls won this time!!" and the text image "1500 balls to be won in the next jackpot game and onwards" during the ending performance. The text image "Jackpot game finished, 1000 balls won this time!!" suggests the number of balls won in the 10R jackpot game that was executed. The text image "1500 balls to be won in the next jackpot game and onwards" continues to be displayed from FIG. 99(G), suggesting that 1500 balls can be won in the new jackpot game (5R jackpot game + 10R jackpot game) that will be started after the executed 10R jackpot game. In other words, it is a performance that suggests the number of balls to be won in advance during the jackpot game, and suggests that a "5R jackpot" or "10R jackpot" will be executed in the reserved special chart lottery that was the second and third in FIG. 99(B) by the advance reading. However, the player cannot clearly tell whether the display "1,500 balls expected to be won in the next jackpot game or later" refers to a jackpot in the second and third reserved draws on Special Chart 1 in Figure 99 (B), a jackpot in the third and fourth draws, or a jackpot in the second and fourth draws.

When the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 99(J), the reserved icon 9A, which was second in FIG. 99(B), becomes the variable icon 9C by shifting, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to vary.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(K), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot pattern of "666". At this time, a text image of "5R jackpot", indicating the type of jackpot that will be executed afterwards, is also displayed. The variable icon 9C is consumed, and then the jackpot game begins.

When the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 99(L), the display screen 7a displays the text image "Jackpot game starts!! 500 balls are expected to be won this time" and the text image "1000 balls are expected to be won in the next jackpot game onwards" during the opening performance. The text image "Jackpot game starts!! 500 balls are expected to be won this time" suggests that the jackpot game that is about to start is a 5R jackpot game, and that 500 balls can be won in this game. The text image "1000 balls are expected to be won in the next jackpot game onwards" suggests that 1000 balls can be won in the new jackpot game (10R jackpot game) that will start after the 5R jackpot game that is about to start. In other words, this is a performance that suggests the number of balls expected to be won in advance during the jackpot game, and suggests that a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the special drawing of the reserved game that was the third in FIG. 99(B) by looking ahead. However, the player cannot clearly tell whether the display "1,000 balls expected to be won in the next or subsequent jackpot games" refers to a jackpot in the third reserved lottery on Special Chart 1 in Figure 99 (B) or a jackpot in the fourth lottery.

When the 1R to 5R rounds are played, as shown in FIG. 100(A), the display screen 7a displays the text image "Currently 132 balls obtained!!" and the text image "1000 balls to be obtained in the next jackpot game or later". The text image "Currently 132 balls obtained!!" suggests the number of balls currently obtained in the currently executed 5R jackpot game. The text image "1000 balls to be obtained in the next jackpot game or later" continues to be displayed from FIG. 99(L), suggesting that 1000 balls can be obtained in the jackpot game (10R jackpot game) that will be newly started after the currently executed 5R jackpot game. In other words, it is a performance that suggests the number of balls to be obtained by looking ahead during the jackpot game, and suggests that a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the reserved special drawing that was the third in FIG. 99(B) by looking ahead. However, the player cannot clearly tell whether the display "1,000 balls expected to be won in the next or subsequent jackpot games" refers to a jackpot in the third reserved lottery on Special Chart 1 in Figure 99 (B) or a jackpot in the fourth lottery.

When the 1R to 5R rounds are completed, as shown in FIG. 100(B), the display screen 7a displays the text image "Jackpot game finished, 500 balls won this time!!" and the text image "1000 balls to be won in the next jackpot game onwards" during the ending performance. The text image "Jackpot game finished, 500 balls won this time!!" suggests the number of balls won in the 5R jackpot game that was executed. The text image "1000 balls to be won in the next jackpot game onwards" continues to be displayed from FIG. 99(L), suggesting that 1000 balls can be won in the new jackpot game (10R jackpot game) that will be started after the executed 5R jackpot game. In other words, it is a performance that suggests the number of balls to be won in advance during the jackpot game, and suggests that a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the special drawing of the reserved game that was the third in FIG. 99(B) by looking ahead. However, the player cannot clearly tell whether the display "1,000 balls expected to be won in the next or subsequent jackpot games" refers to a jackpot in the third reserved lottery on Special Chart 1 in Figure 99 (B) or a jackpot in the fourth lottery.

When the big win game ends, as shown in FIG. 100(C), the reserved icon 9A, which was the third icon in FIG. 99(B), shifts to become the variable icon 9C, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot pattern of "777". At this time, a text image of "10R jackpot", indicating the type of jackpot that will be executed afterwards, is also displayed. The variable icon 9C is consumed, and then the jackpot game begins.

When the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 100(E), a text image of "Jackpot game starts!! 1000 balls are expected to be won this time" is displayed on the display screen 7a during the opening performance. The text image of "Jackpot game starts!! 1000 balls are expected to be won this time" suggests that the jackpot game that is about to start is a 10R jackpot game, and that it is possible to win 1000 balls. This time, the text image of "XX balls are expected to be won in the next or subsequent jackpot games" is not displayed. This suggests that, by looking ahead, based on the reserve at the time of FIG. 99(B), no new jackpot game will start after the upcoming 10R jackpot game.

When the 1R to 10R rounds of play have begun, as shown in FIG. 100(F), a text image of "Currently 689 balls obtained!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. The text image of "Currently 689 balls obtained!!" suggests the number of balls currently obtained in the currently playing 10R jackpot game. The text image of "Expected to obtain xxx balls in the next or subsequent jackpot games" is not displayed. This suggests, by looking ahead, that based on the reserve at the time of FIG. 99(B), no new jackpot games will start after the upcoming 10R jackpot game.

When the 1R to 10R rounds of play are completed, as shown in FIG. 100(G), a text image stating "Jackpot play finished, 1000 balls won this time!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a during the ending performance. The text image "Jackpot play finished, 1000 balls won this time!!" indicates the number of balls won in the executed 10R jackpot play. The text image "Expected to win xxx balls in the next or subsequent jackpot play" is not displayed.

When the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 100(H), the reserved icon 9A, which was the fourth icon in FIG. 99(B), becomes the variable icon 9C by shifting, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate.

Figure 100 (I) is another example of a display of information related to the number of balls to be acquired. In the display of information related to the number of balls to be acquired, instead of the display of the predicted number of balls to be acquired suggested by looking ahead in Figure 99 (C), the display of the predicted number of balls to be acquired suggested by looking ahead in Figure 100 (I) may be executed. In Figure 100 (I), a text image of "10R jackpot...1000 balls", a text image of "5R jackpot...500 balls", and a text image of "10R jackpot...1000 balls" are displayed. These text images suggest that "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" will be executed in the first, second, and third lotteries of special chart 1 after this, and that 1000 balls will be acquired by the 10R jackpot and 500 balls will be acquired by the 5R jackpot. In other words, they suggest the number of balls to be acquired and the type of win. However, players cannot clearly tell whether the "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" displays refer to jackpots in the first to third reserved draws on Special Chart 1, jackpots in the second to fourth draws, jackpots on the first, third and fourth draws, or jackpots on the first, second and fourth draws.

Figure 100 (J) is another example of a display of information related to the number of balls expected to be acquired. In the display of information related to the number of balls expected to be acquired, instead of the look-ahead ... However, players cannot clearly tell whether the "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" displays refer to jackpots in the first to third reserved draws on Special Chart 1, jackpots in the second to fourth draws, jackpots on the first, third and fourth draws, or jackpots on the first, second and fourth draws.

Figure 100 (K) is another example of a display of information related to the number of balls expected to be acquired. In the display of information related to the number of balls expected to be acquired, the display of Figure 100 (K) may be executed instead of the display of Figure 99 (C) that suggests the number of balls expected to be acquired by looking ahead. In Figure 100 (K), an image of "1. ★★★★★", an image of "2. ★★★", and an image of "3. ★★★★★" are displayed. These images suggest that, by looking ahead, "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" will be executed in the first, second, and third draws of special chart 1, and that the 10R jackpot will result in 5 ★ balls (1000 balls) and the 5R jackpot will result in 3 ★ balls (500 balls). However, players cannot clearly tell whether the "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" displays refer to jackpots in the first to third reserved draws on Special Chart 1, jackpots in the second to fourth draws, jackpots on the first, third and fourth draws, or jackpots on the first, second and fourth draws.

Figure 100 (L) is another example of a display of information related to the number of balls to be acquired. In the display of information related to the number of balls to be acquired, instead of the display of the predicted number of balls to be acquired suggested by looking ahead in Figure 99 (C), the display of the predicted number of balls to be acquired suggested by looking ahead in Figure 100 (L) may be executed. In Figure 100 (L), an image of "★★★★★", an image of "★★★", and an image of "★★★★★" are displayed. These images suggest that, by looking ahead, "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" will be executed in the first, second, and third draws of Special Chart 1, and that the 10R jackpot will result in 5 ★ balls (1000 balls) and the 5R jackpot will result in 3 ★ balls (500 balls). Also, in Figure 100 (L), the colors of the first, second, and third reserved icons 9A in Special Chart 1 have changed. This suggests that the first, second, and third draws of Special Chart 1 will result in a win.

Figure 101 (A) is another example of a display of information related to the number of balls expected to be acquired. In the display of information related to the number of balls expected to be acquired, the display of Figure 101 (A) may be executed instead of the display of Figure 99 (G) which indicates the number of balls expected to be acquired by looking ahead during the jackpot game. In Figure 101 (A), when the jackpot game starts, a text image of "Jackpot game starts!! 10R won this time" and a text image of "15R expected to be won in total in the next and subsequent jackpot games" are displayed on the display screen 7a during the opening performance. The text image of "Jackpot game starts!! 10R won this time" suggests that the jackpot game that is about to start is a 10R jackpot game, and that 1000 balls can be won. The text image "15R total to be won in the next jackpot game onwards" suggests that a total of 15R (1,500 balls) can be won in the new jackpot game (5R jackpot game + 10R jackpot game) that will start after the upcoming 10R jackpot game. In other words, by reading ahead, it suggests that a "5R jackpot" and a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the reserved special chart lottery that was the second and third in Figure 99 (B). However, the player cannot clearly tell whether the display "15R total to be won in the next jackpot game onwards" refers to a jackpot in the second and third reserved lottery of special chart 1 in Figure 99 (B), a jackpot in the third and fourth lottery, or a jackpot in the second and fourth lottery.

Figure 101 (B) is another example of the planned number of balls to be acquired information display presentation. In the planned number of balls to be acquired information display presentation, the planned number of balls to be acquired by looking ahead presentation of Figure 101 (B) may be executed instead of the planned number of balls to be acquired by looking ahead presentation of Figure 99 (H) during the jackpot game. In Figure 101 (B), the text image "3Rs consumed, 7Rs remaining" and the text image "15Rs to be acquired in total in the next jackpot game and after" are displayed on the display screen 7a. The text image "3Rs consumed, 7Rs remaining" suggests the number of rounds consumed at the present time in the 10R jackpot game currently being executed. This suggests the number of balls currently acquired. The text image "15Rs to be acquired in total in the next jackpot game and after" is continuously displayed from Figure 101 (A), suggesting that a total of 15Rs (1500 balls) can be acquired by the jackpot game (5R jackpot game + 10R jackpot game) that will be newly started after the currently executed 10R jackpot game. In other words, the pre-reading suggests that a "5R jackpot" or "10R jackpot" will be executed in the second and third reserved special drawing in Fig. 99(B). However, the player cannot clearly tell whether the display "15R expected to be won in total in the next and subsequent jackpot games" refers to a jackpot in the second and third reserved drawing on special drawing 1 in Fig. 99(B), a jackpot in the third and fourth drawing, or a jackpot in the second and fourth drawing.

Figure 101 (C) is another example of the planned number of balls to be acquired information display presentation. In the planned number of balls to be acquired information display presentation, the planned number of balls to be acquired by looking ahead presentation of Figure 101 (C) may be executed instead of the planned number of balls to be acquired by looking ahead presentation of Figure 99 (L) during the jackpot game. In Figure 101 (C), when the jackpot game starts, the text image "Start of jackpot game!! 5R acquired this time" and the text image "15R to be acquired in total in the jackpot game from the next jackpot game onwards" are displayed on the display screen 7a during the opening presentation. The text image "Start of jackpot game!! 5R acquired this time" suggests that the jackpot game to be started now is a 5R jackpot game, and that it is a game in which 500 balls can be acquired. The text image "15R to be acquired in total in the next jackpot game onwards" suggests that a total of 10R (1000 balls) can be acquired by the jackpot game (10R jackpot game) to be newly started after the 5R jackpot game to be started. In other words, the pre-reading suggests that a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the lottery for the reserved special chart that was the third in Figure 99(B). However, the player cannot clearly tell whether the display "10R total expected to be won in the next jackpot game or later" refers to a jackpot in the lottery for the third reserved special chart 1 in Figure 99(B) or a jackpot in the lottery for the fourth.

Figure 101 (D) is another example of the planned number of balls to be acquired information display presentation. In the planned number of balls to be acquired information display presentation, the planned number of balls to be acquired by looking ahead presentation of Figure 101 (D) may be executed instead of the planned number of balls to be acquired by looking ahead presentation of Figure 100 (A) during the jackpot game. In Figure 101 (D), the text image "Currently 2Rs consumed, 3Rs remaining" and the text image "Total of 10Rs to be acquired in the next jackpot game and after" are displayed on the display screen 7a. The text image "Currently 2Rs consumed, 3Rs remaining" suggests the number of rounds currently consumed in the currently executed 5R jackpot game. This suggests the number of balls currently acquired. The text image "Total of 10Rs to be acquired in the next jackpot game and after" is displayed continuously from Figure 101 (C), suggesting that a total of 10Rs (1000 balls) can be acquired by the jackpot game (10R jackpot game) that will be newly started after the currently executed 5R jackpot game. In other words, the pre-reading suggests that a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the lottery for the reserved special chart that was the third in Figure 99(B). However, the player cannot clearly tell whether the display "10R total expected to be won in the next jackpot game or later" refers to a jackpot in the lottery for the third reserved special chart 1 in Figure 99(B) or a jackpot in the lottery for the fourth.

Figure 101 (E) is another example of a display of information related to the number of balls to be acquired. In the display of information related to the number of balls to be acquired, the display of Figure 101 (E) may be executed instead of the display of Figure 100 (E). In Figure 101 (E), when a jackpot game starts, a text image of "Jackpot game starts! 10R won this time" is displayed on the display screen 7a during the opening display. The text image of "Jackpot game starts! 10R won this time" suggests that the jackpot game that is about to start is a 10R jackpot game, and that it is a game in which 1000 balls can be won. This time, the text image of "XX balls to be won in the next or subsequent jackpot games" is not displayed. This suggests that, by looking ahead, based on the reservation at the time of Figure 99 (B), a new jackpot game will not start after the 10R jackpot game that is about to start.

Figure 101 (F) is another example of a display of information related to the number of balls expected to be acquired. In the display of information related to the number of balls expected to be acquired, the display of Figure 101 (F) may be executed instead of the display of Figure 100 (F). In Figure 101 (F), a text image of "Currently 7 rounds played, 3 rounds remaining" is displayed on the display screen 7a. The text image of "Currently 7 rounds played, 3 rounds remaining" suggests the number of rounds played to date in the currently executed 10R jackpot game. This suggests the number of balls currently acquired. The text image of "Expected to acquire xxx balls in the next or subsequent jackpot games" is not displayed. This suggests that, by looking ahead, based on the reservation at the time of Figure 99 (B), a new jackpot game will not start after the upcoming 10R jackpot game.

Figure 101 (G) is another example of a planned number of balls to be acquired related information display presentation. In the planned number of balls to be acquired related information display presentation, the planned number of balls to be acquired predicted by looking ahead presentation of Figure 101 (G) may be executed instead of the planned number of balls to be acquired predicted by looking ahead presentation of Figure 99 (G) during the jackpot game. In Figure 101 (G), when the jackpot game starts, an image of "This time ★★★★★★★★★★" and an image of "Next time ★★★★★★★★★★★★★★★" are displayed on the display screen 7a during the opening presentation. The "This time ★★★★★★★★★★" image (10 stars) suggests that the jackpot game to be started now is a 10R jackpot game, and that 1000 balls can be acquired. The "Next ★★★★★★★★★★★★★★★★" image (15 stars) suggests that a total of 15R (1,500 balls) can be won from the new jackpot game (5R jackpot game + 10R jackpot game) that will start after the upcoming 10R jackpot game. In other words, by reading ahead, it suggests that a "5R jackpot" and a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the reserved special chart lottery that was the second and third in Figure 99 (B).

Figure 101 (H) is another example of a display of information related to the number of balls expected to be acquired. In the display of information related to the number of balls expected to be acquired, instead of the look-ahead ... This suggests that the first, second, and third draws on Special Chart 1 will result in a "10R jackpot," a "5R jackpot," and a "10R jackpot," and that a 10R jackpot will earn 1,000 balls, and a 5R jackpot will earn 500 balls. In other words, it suggests the expected number of balls to be won and the type of win.

Figure 101 (I) is another example of the planned number of balls to be acquired related information display presentation. In the planned number of balls to be acquired related information display presentation, the planned number of balls to be acquired predicted by the prediction of the predicted ...

Figure 101 (J) is another example of a display of information related to the number of balls to be acquired. In the display of information related to the number of balls to be acquired, instead of the display of the predicted number of balls to be acquired suggested by looking ahead in Figure 99 (C), the predicted number of balls to be acquired suggested by looking ahead in Figure 101 (J) may be executed. In Figure 101 (J), the first reserved icon 9A is displayed with a speech bubble saying "1000 balls". This suggests that the first lottery of the special chart 1 will then execute a "10R jackpot" and that 1000 balls will be acquired by the 10R jackpot. On the other hand, the second and third reserved icons 9A do not have speech bubbles despite being jackpots (jackpots are not suggested). In this way, there may be cases where, by looking ahead, only a portion of the reserved special charts stored in the special chart reserved memory area 85 (Figure 5) that will be winning are suggested with information related to the number of balls to be acquired, and there are reserved special charts that will be winning but do not suggest information related to the number of balls to be acquired.

Figure 101 (K) is another example of a display of information related to the number of balls to be acquired. In the display of information related to the number of balls to be acquired, instead of the display of the predicted number of balls to be acquired suggested by looking ahead in Figure 99 (C), the display of the predicted number of balls to be acquired suggested by looking ahead in Figure 101 (K) may be executed. In Figure 101 (K), a text image of "10R jackpot" is displayed. The text image of "10R jackpot" suggests that a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the first lottery of the special chart 1 after this, and that 1000 balls can be acquired by the 10R jackpot. On the other hand, the second and third reserved icons 9A do not suggest a jackpot despite being a jackpot. In this way, there may be cases where, by looking ahead, only a portion of the reserved special charts stored in the special chart reserved memory area 85 (Figure 5) that will be a winning reserve suggests information about the number of balls to be acquired, and there may be reserved reserves that do not suggest information about the number of balls to be acquired despite being a winning reserve. However, players cannot clearly tell which of the reserved numbers 1 to 4 on Special Chart 1 the "10R jackpot" indicates is the jackpot.

Figure 101 (L) is another example of a display of information related to the number of balls to be acquired. In the display of information related to the number of balls to be acquired, instead of the display of the predicted number of balls to be acquired suggested by looking ahead in Figure 99 (C), the display of the predicted number of balls to be acquired suggested by looking ahead in Figure 101 (L) may be executed. In Figure 101 (L), a text image of "1000 balls" is displayed. The text image of "1000 balls" suggests that a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the first lottery of the special chart 1 after this, and that 1000 balls can be acquired by the 10R jackpot. On the other hand, the second and third reserved icons 9A do not suggest a jackpot despite being a jackpot. In this way, there may be cases where, by looking ahead, only a portion of the reserved special charts stored in the special chart reserved memory area 85 (Figure 5) that will be a winning reserve suggests information about the number of balls to be acquired, and there may be reserved reserves that do not suggest information about the number of balls to be acquired despite being a winning reserve. However, the player does not know for certain which of the reserved numbers 1 to 4 on Special Chart 1 represents the winning jackpot for the "1000 balls" display. Therefore, the player does not know whether the "1000 balls" are the result of a single "10R jackpot" or the total of two "5R jackpots."

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of displaying information related to the expected number of balls to be won.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 99(C), during the fluctuation, a first effect can be executed in which text images such as "2500 balls to be acquired later", which is information related to the number of balls to be acquired for the winning combination included in the reserve by the look-ahead, and text images such as "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" are displayed on the display screen 7a. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and can increase the interest. The same is true for Figs. 100(I)-(L) and 101(H)-(L).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 99(G) to (I), after the first effect, during a jackpot game, a second effect can be executed in which "1500 balls are expected to be acquired in the next jackpot game or later" is displayed on the display screen 7a, which is information related to the number of balls expected to be acquired in the jackpot game included in the reserve. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and can increase the interest. The same is true for Figures 99(L), 100(A) to (B), and 101(A) to (D) (G).
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 99(C), in the first performance, text images of "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot", which are information related to the winning types included in the reserve by pre-reading, are displayed on the display screen 7a. With this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player and increase the interest. The same is true for Fig. 100(I) and Fig. 101(H) to (K).

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the display of information related to the expected number of balls to be won is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, an example of the expected number of balls to be acquired related information display effect is described using Figs. 99(A)-(L) and Figs. 100(A)-(H), and other examples of effects are shown in Figs. 100(I)-(L), and further other examples of effects are shown in Fig. 101. These effects may be randomly combined and executed as appropriate. For example, the gaming machine 1 may randomly execute the effect of Fig. 99(C) or execute any one of the effects of Figs. 100(H)-(L) at the timing when the effect of Fig. 99(C) is executed. In addition, after Fig. 99(C) is executed, any one or more of the effects of Figs. 100(H)-(L) may be executed. In addition, for example, the gaming machine 1 may randomly execute the effect of Figs. 99(G)(H) or execute the effect of Figs. 101(A)(B) at the timing when the effect of Fig. 99(G)(H) is executed.

[Modification 2]
In the above-mentioned planned number of balls to be acquired related information display performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner or displayed opposite to each other. However, in the planned number of balls to be acquired related information display performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R do not have to be displayed. Also, in the above-mentioned planned number of balls to be acquired related information display performance, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C are displayed. However, in the planned number of balls to be acquired related information display performance, at least one of the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C does not have to be displayed.

[Modification 3]
In FIG. 101(G), an image of "This time ★★★★★★★★★★" and an image of "Next time ★★★★★★★★★★★★★★" are displayed on the display screen 7a during the opening performance. These images may continue to be displayed during round play. In this case, the number of stars in "This time ★★★★★★★★★★" may disappear one by one with each passing round during round play. This makes it possible to indicate the current number of lands and the number of remaining rounds.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Embodiment E1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A first effect can be executed to display information related to the number of balls expected to be won that are included in the reserve by pre-reading during the fluctuation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
After the first performance, during a big win game, a second performance can be executed to display information related to the number of balls to be won that are included in the reserved balls on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
In the first performance, information related to the winning type included in the reserve is displayed on the display means by pre-reading.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Expectation Level Up Item Effects 1 to 3 are explained below with reference to Figures 102 to 104. These expectation level up item effects 1 to 3 are executed in the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a variation effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Expectation-boosting item production 1]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the expectation level increasing item presentation 1. In the expectation level increasing item presentation 1, when there is a special chart lottery pending during a change on the display screen 7a, multiple bomb images representing bombs are displayed. Here, two bomb images are displayed. These bombs are the expectation level increasing items. One of the bombs is made to explode, and the color of the displayed pending item is changed to a color with high expectation. In addition, when a telop notice that appears in the subsequent change is displayed, the remaining bomb is made to explode, and the display content of the telop notice is changed to a display content with high expectation.

First, as shown in FIG. 102(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, which are currently changing. Also, four first special patterns have been reserved. In other words, reserved icon 9C (the changing icon corresponding to the change) and reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth first special pattern reservations are displayed. Reserve icon 9A4, which corresponds to the fourth first special pattern reservation, has changed to blue (hatching 1). Hatching will be discussed later.

Here, the colors that the reserves change to are "blue," "green," "red," and "gold," and represent the expected probability of winning the special drawing, with "gold" being the highest, "red" being the second highest, "green" being the third highest, and then "blue" being the fourth highest. In the figures, they are represented by hatching, as shown in Figure 102 (J). Unchanging white reserves are shown without hatching, blue reserves are represented by hatching 1, green reserves are represented by hatching 2, red reserves are represented by hatching 3, and gold reserves are represented by hatching 4. In Figures 102 to 104, colors are represented by hatching as shown in Figure 102 (J).

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), two bomb images, which are items that create an expectation-increasing effect, are displayed. The first bomb image IT1 and the second bomb image IT2 are displayed. These bomb images IT1 and IT2 are displayed in the bottom right of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the expectation-increasing effect will be performed twice. The first bomb image IT1 will be detonated first.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), one of the bombs, which is an item that creates an expectation-boosting effect, creates an explosion IT11. The explosion IT11 is created in the reserve display area, covering the reserve icon 9C and the first special chart reserve 9A. The bomb that is detonated here is the first bomb. After this bomb IT1 is detonated, the bomb image IT2 moves and is displayed in the position of the bomb image IT1, and the bomb image IT2 becomes the bomb image IT1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), the explosion ends and the reserved icon 9A4 changes from blue (hatching 1) with an expected degree of 5 to green (hatching 2) with an expected degree of 10. This makes the expected degree of winning the special drawing higher than when it was blue. In other words, the bomb represented by the bomb image IT1 is detonated, and the appearance of the reserved icon 9A4 changes to an appearance with a higher expected degree of winning the special drawing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102(E), the green (hatched 2) reserved icon repeatedly shifts and the reserved icon 9A1 (the reserved icon corresponding to the first of the first special chart reserved icons) becomes the reserved icon 9C (the corresponding change icon corresponding to the change). After the movement, only the green (hatched 2) reserved icon 9C is displayed in the reserved display area. Here, it is the start of the change, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, and after a predetermined time has passed, a caption is displayed. Here, the caption YK1, "Maybe it's a win?" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(G), the bomb represented by the bomb image IT1, which is an item that increases the expectation level, explodes IT11. The explosion IT11 occurs in front of the telop YK1, covering it. After the bomb represented by the bomb image IT1 is detonated, the bomb image IT1 disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(H), the explosion ends and the caption YK1 changes from "Maybe we're close?" with an expected probability of 3 to "It's super hot!" with an expected probability of 30. "It's super hot!" has a higher expected probability of winning the special drawing lottery than "Maybe we're close?". In other words, the bomb image IT1 is consumed, and the appearance of the caption YK1 changes to an appearance with a higher expected probability of winning the special drawing lottery.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (I), the caption YK1 in the caption preview is erased, and the caption preview ends.

[Expectation-boosting item production 2]
103 is a diagram for explaining the expectation level-up item presentation 2. The expectation level-up item presentation 2 is a presentation in which a bomb, which is an expectation level-up item, explodes and is detonated during a fluctuation on the display screen 7a, and an additional bomb is displayed in the subsequent fluctuation.

This expectation level increasing item presentation 2 is similar to the presentations in Figs. 102(A)-(E) of expectation level increasing item presentation 1. Here, the explanation of the presentations in Figs. 102(A)-(D) of expectation level increasing item presentation 1 will be omitted. The explanation will start with Fig. 103(A), which is the same presentation as Fig. 102(E) of expectation level increasing item presentation 1.

As shown in Fig. 103(A), the green (hatched 2) reserved icon repeatedly shifts and the reserved icon 9A1 (the reserved icon corresponding to the first reserved icon of the first special chart) becomes the reserved icon 9C (the corresponding change icon corresponding to the change). After the shift, only the reserved icon 9C in green (hatched 2) is displayed in the reserved display area.
Here, it is the beginning of the fluctuation, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change. After that, a bomb image IT2, which represents a second bomb, which is an item that increases the expectation level, is additionally displayed. This increases the number of bombs, which are items that increase the expectation level, from one to two. This indicates that the expectation level increase performance will be performed twice.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), a caption preview is displayed, and the caption YK1 displays "Are we in reach?".

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), the first expectation-increasing item, the bomb, is detonated, causing an explosion IT11 in front of the caption YK1, obscuring the caption YK1. After this bomb IT1 is detonated, the bomb image IT2 moves and is displayed in the position of the bomb image IT1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), the explosion ends and the caption YK1 changes from "Maybe we're close?" with an expected degree of 3 to "It's super hot!" with an expected degree of 30. "It's super hot!" has a higher expected degree of winning the special drawing lottery than "Maybe we're close?". In other words, the bomb represented by the bomb image IT1 is detonated, and the appearance of the caption YK1 changes to an appearance with a higher expected degree of winning the special drawing lottery.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (F), the caption preview ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(G), the bomb, which is an item that increases the expectation level, is detonated, causing an explosion IT11. After the bomb is detonated, the bomb image IT1 disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(H), when the explosion ends and the game progresses to a reach performance, a character CRA with an expectation level of 50 is displayed. When this character CRA is displayed and the game progresses to a reach performance, the game becomes favorable for the subsequent reach performance, and the expectation level of winning the special drawing increases.

[Expectation-boosting item production 3]
104 is a diagram for explaining the expectation level increasing item presentation 3. The expectation level increasing item presentation 3 is a presentation in which a plurality of bombs, which are expectation level increasing items, are displayed during a change on the display screen 7a, one of the bombs is displayed in a manner different from a normal bomb, and the bomb in the manner different from a normal bomb is detonated. The reserve that changes due to the explosion of a bomb is such that the degree of increase in the expectation of a win is greater due to the explosion of a bomb in a manner different from a normal bomb, compared to the degree of increase in the expectation of a win due to the change due to the explosion of a bomb in a manner different from a normal bomb.

First, as shown in FIG. 104(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, which are currently changing. Also, four first special patterns have been reserved. In other words, reserved icon 9C (the changing icon corresponding to the change) and reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth first special pattern reservations are displayed. Reserve icon 9A4 corresponding to the fourth first special pattern reservation is blue (hatching 1). Note that the expected probability of winning the special pattern lottery based on the reserved color here is the same as the expected probability of winning the special pattern lottery based on the reserved color in the "Expectation Increase Item Presentation 1" described above.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), two bombs are displayed, which are items that perform an expectation-increasing effect. A bomb image IT1 representing the first bomb and a bomb image IT2 representing the second bomb are displayed. These bomb images IT1 and IT2 are displayed in the bottom right of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the expectation-increasing effect will be performed twice. The first bomb image IT1 is detonated first. The bomb image IT1 has the character "Danger" displayed on it, and when this bomb is detonated, there is a high possibility that the degree to which the expectation of a win will increase will be greater than when a bomb without the character "Danger" displayed is detonated, due to the change in appearance caused by the bomb's explosion.

Next, as shown in Figure 104 (C), one hold is cleared and three holds for the first special chart are accumulated. In other words, hold icon 9C (the change icon corresponding to the change) and hold icons 9A corresponding to the first, second, and third holds for the first special chart are displayed. The hold in blue (hatching 1) is hold icon 9A3, which corresponds to the third hold for the first special chart.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), an effect is performed in which the bomb represented by the bomb image IT1 displaying the character "Danger" explodes IT11. Explosion IT11 occurs in the reserved display area, covering the reserved icons 9C and 9A. The bomb that is defused here is the first bomb, and after this bomb image IT1 is defused, bomb image IT2 moves and is displayed in the position of bomb image IT1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), the explosion ends and reserved icon 9A3 changes from blue (hatching 1) with an expected degree of 5 to red (hatching 3) with an expected degree of 50. This makes the expected degree of winning the special drawing higher than when it was blue. Also, as shown in FIG. 102(D), when a bomb without the character "Danger" displayed is defused, it changes to green (hatching 2), but in FIG. 104(D), a bomb with the character "Danger" displayed is defused and changes to red (hatching 3). In other words, the manner in which the bomb is defused and the reserved state that changes are different between a bomb with the character "Danger" displayed and a normal bomb, and the degree to which the expected degree of winning increases is different.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), the red (hatched 3) reserved icon repeatedly shifts and the reserved icon 9A1 (the reserved icon corresponding to the first of the first special reserved symbols) becomes the reserved icon 9C (the corresponding changing icon corresponding to the corresponding change). After the movement, only the red (hatched 3) reserved icon 9C is displayed in the reserved display area. Here, it is the start of the change, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped.

Next, as shown in Figure 104 (G), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(H), the bomb represented by the bomb image IT1 explodes IT11. IT11 explodes in the pending display area, covering the pending icon 9C. After this bomb IT1 is detonated, the bomb image IT1 disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(I), the explosion ends and the reserved icon 9C changes from red (hatching 3), which indicates an expectation level of 50, to gold (hatching 4), which indicates an expectation level of 100. This makes the expectation level of the special drawing higher than when it was red. Note that the special drawing for the change corresponding to the gold reserved icon 9C has an expectation level of 100, which indicates that a win has been confirmed.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of expectation-increasing item effects 1 to 3.

[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Expectation Level Increasing Item Presentation 1" and "Expectation Level Increasing Item Presentation 3", the display screen 7a is equipped with a display screen capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, one of which is a bomb image IT1, and one of which is a reserved icon 9A4 indicating the expectation level of a win in the special drawing or the normal drawing. A first presentation (FIG. 102(B)) in which the bomb images IT1, IT2 and the reserved icon 9A4 are displayed, and after the first presentation (FIG. 102(B)), a bomb image which is one of the bomb images IT1, IT2 is displayed. It is possible to execute a second effect (FIGS. 102(C), (D)) in which the image IT1 is consumed and the state of the displayed reserved icon 9A4 is changed to a state with a higher expectation of a win, and a third effect (FIGS. 104(H), (I)), (FIGS. 102(G), (H))) in which one of the remaining bomb images IT1 displayed after the second effect (FIGS. 102(C), (D)) is consumed and the state of the reserved icon 9C or the caption YK1 of the caption preview, the state of which was changed in the second effect (FIGS. 104(D), (E)), is changed to a state with a higher expectation of a win. With this configuration, it is possible to notify in advance that a performance that changes to a state with a higher expectation of a win will be performed, thereby improving interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Expectation Level Up Item Presentation 1" and "Expectation Level Up Item Presentation 2", after the first presentation (FIG. 102(B)), a fourth presentation (FIG. 103(B)) can be executed in which a new bomb image IT2 is additionally displayed in a state in which a bomb image IT1 is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify in advance that a presentation that changes the state to one in which the expectation level of a win is to be higher will be performed, thereby increasing interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Expectation Level Up Item Presentation 3," the second presentation (FIGS. 104(D) and (E)) is executed during a different change from the first presentation (FIG. 104(B)). With this configuration, it is possible to notify in advance that a presentation that changes the state to one with a higher expectation level of winning will be performed, thereby increasing interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Expectation Level Up Item Presentation 1," in the second presentation (FIGS. 102(C) and (D)), the change in the state of the reserved icon 9A4 means that the color of the reserved icon 9A4 changes. With this configuration, it is possible to notify in advance that a presentation that changes the state to one with a higher expectation level of winning will be performed, thereby increasing interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Expectation-Increasing Item Presentation 1" and "Expectation-Increasing Item Presentation 3", in the first presentation (Figure 104 (B)), the bomb image IT1 and the bomb image IT2 may be displayed in different ways, and in the second presentation (Figures 104 (D) and (E)), the degree to which the expectation of a win increases varies depending on the state of the bomb image IT1 being detonated, with the change in the state of the reserved icon 9A3 (from blue to red) and the change in the state of the reserved icon 9A4 in "Expectation-Increasing Item Presentation 1" (from blue to green).

[Modification]
Below, variations of expectation level increasing item effects 1 to 3 are shown.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, two bomb images representing bombs are displayed, and the effect of changing the image to one with a higher probability of winning is performed twice, but the number of bomb images does not have to be two. For example, one bomb image or three or more bomb images may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the expected probability of winning is the expected probability of winning the special drawing lottery, but it may be the expected probability of winning the regular drawing lottery.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the reservation is a reservation of the first special design, but it may be a reservation of the second special design.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the presentation that changes the display to one that increases the likelihood of a win after an additional bomb is displayed is different from the presentation when no additional bombs are displayed, but the presentation after an additional bomb is displayed and the presentation when no additional bombs are displayed may be the same.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, when a bomb is defused, the second bomb moves to the position of the first bomb, but the second bomb may not move to the position of the first bomb, but may wait at the second position to be defused.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the change in which the bomb image is additionally displayed and the change to be extinguished are separate changes, but they may be the same change.

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, the bomb is displayed without any trigger, but it may be displayed when a specific decorative pattern stops.

[Modification 8]
In the above embodiment, the bomb explodes when it is displayed, but it may also be possible for the bomb to disappear without exploding even if it is displayed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect F1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
One of the plurality of types of images is a suggestive image indicating the expected probability of winning in the special drawing or the regular drawing,
A first effect in which a plurality of the predetermined images and the suggestion image are displayed;
After the first performance, one of the plurality of predetermined images is consumed, and a second performance is performed in which the state of the displayed suggestive image is changed to a state having a higher expectation of winning;
After the second performance, one of the remaining displayed predetermined images is consumed, and a third performance is performed in which the suggestive image whose appearance has been changed in the second performance or the suggestive image different from the suggestive image whose appearance has been changed is changed to a performance having a higher expectation of winning.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect F1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-1,
After the first performance, a fourth performance can be executed in which a new predetermined image is additionally displayed while the predetermined image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect F1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-2,
The second performance is executed during a variation different from that of the first performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect F1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-3,
In the second performance, the change in the aspect of the suggestion image means that the color of the suggestion image changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect F1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-4,
In the first performance, the plurality of predetermined images may be displayed in different modes from each other,
In the second and third effects, depending on the state of the predetermined image to be consumed, the degree to which the expectation of a win increases due to the change in the state of the suggestive image differs.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following describes numerical sum effects 1 to 5 with reference to Figures 105 to 107. These numerical sum effects 1 to 5 are executed in the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a variation effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Numerical total performance 1]
105 is a diagram for explaining the numerical sum effect 1. The numerical sum effect 1 is an effect that suggests the number of game balls that can be won in the winning game that starts after the change during the change that has been decided to be a winning game on the display screen 7a. Each time the button is pressed, a numerical value is displayed, and with the last button press, a numerical value equal to or greater than the total of the displayed numerical values is displayed, suggesting the number of game balls that can be won in the winning game that starts after the change.

First, as shown in FIG. 105(A), during the change, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is "7". In other words, a win has occurred, and it has been determined that a winning game will take place after the change ends. Also, the hold icon 9A for the hold of the first special pattern and the hold icon 9C for the change (also called the change icon) are displayed. It is in the hold 4 state. It does not have to be in the hold 4 state. The hold icon 9B may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the caption TR1 "How many can you win?" is displayed, indicating that the performance displaying the number of game balls that can be won in the winning game that will be played after the fluctuation ends will begin. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are reduced in size and displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), an image BTN1 encouraging the player to repeatedly tap the effect button 63 and an image TM1 showing the time limit for which the button can be repeatedly tapped are displayed. The image BTN1 encouraging the player to repeatedly tap the effect button 63 has the word "repeated tap" added to it to encourage the player to repeatedly tap the button. Immediately after the image TM1 showing the time limit is displayed, a bar is displayed all the way to the right, but as time passes, the bar becomes fewer as the time limit decreases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), the number "5" ST1 is displayed. This number "5" ST1 is an image that is displayed when the effect button 63 is pressed. In the image TM1 that indicates the time limit for continuous tapping, the bar has not disappeared, indicating that there is still a time limit. Note that this period for continuous tapping may include a period during which pressing the effect button 63 is invalid even if the effect button 63 is pressed immediately after it is pressed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(E), the number "5" ST1, the number "8" ST2, the number "5" ST3, the number "12" ST4, and the number "10" ST5 are displayed. This is the state when the effect button 63 has been pressed five times, and the numbers ST1 to ST5 are images displayed each time the effect button 63 is pressed. Note that each of these numbers may be all different, or may all be the same. Furthermore, two or more number images may be displayed with a single press of the effect button 63. Also, the image TM1, which indicates the time limit for successive taps, has not run out of bars, indicating that there is still a time limit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(F), the effect button 63 continues to be pressed, and the number "8" ST6, the number "5" ST7, and the number "8" ST8 are displayed with each press. Also, in the image TM1, which indicates the time limit for successive presses, the bar disappears, indicating that the time limit has been removed and that no numbers will be displayed even if the effect button 63 is pressed thereafter.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(G), the period during which the effect button 63 can be repeatedly pressed has ended, so the image BTN1 encouraging the player to repeatedly press the effect button 63 disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (H), an image BTN2 urging the user to press the performance button 63 and an image TM2 showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed. The image BTN2 urging the user to press the performance button 63 has the words "Press!" written on it to encourage the user to press the button. Immediately after the image TM2 showing the time limit is displayed, a bar is displayed all the way to the right, but as time passes, the bar becomes fewer as the time limit decreases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(I), the numbers ST1 to ST8 displayed with each press are erased, and the number "800" ST100 is displayed. The numbers ST1 to ST8 may remain displayed. This number "800" ST100 is an image displayed by pressing the performance button 63. The number "800" in this image represents the number of game balls that can be won in a winning game that begins after the fluctuation ends. The number ST100 (800) displayed here is equal to or greater than the total value of the numbers ST1 to ST8 (5, 8, 5, 12, 10, 8, 5, 8) displayed during the continuous tapping. If the reserved balls also contain winning balls, the number displayed includes the number of game balls that can be won in a winning game due to a winning ball in the reserved balls. The number of game balls that can be won in a winning game due to a winning ball in the reserved balls does not have to be included.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(J), the change ends, and the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed at "7", the center decorative pattern 8C is fixed at "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed at "7". This indicates that the change has ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (K), the game transitions to a winning game, the caption "Jackpot!" TR2 is displayed, and the winning game begins.

[Numerical total effect 2]
106 is a diagram for explaining the numerical sum effects 2, 3, and 4. The effects in Fig. 106 (A) to (H) are numerical sum effect 2, which is an effect suggesting the number of game balls that can be won in the winning game that starts after the change during the change that has been decided to be a winning game on the display screen 7a. Numerical values are displayed in sequence, and after a predetermined time has passed, a numerical value equal to or greater than the total of the displayed numerical values is displayed, suggesting the number of game balls that can be won in the winning game that starts after the change.

As shown in FIG. 106(A), in the numerical sum performance 2, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is "7". In other words, it has won, and it has been decided that a winning game will be played after the fluctuation has ended. Also, the hold icon 9A of the hold for the first special pattern and the hold icon 9C of the corresponding fluctuation (also called the corresponding fluctuation icon) are displayed. It is in the hold 4 state. It does not have to be in the hold 4 state. The hold icon 9B may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the caption TR1 "How many can you win?" is displayed, indicating that the performance displaying the number of game balls that can be won in the winning game that will be played after the fluctuation ends will begin. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are reduced in size and displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), the caption TR1 "How many can you get?" is erased and the number "5" ST1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), the number "5" ST1, the number "8" ST2, the number "5" ST3, the number "12" ST4, and the number "10" ST5 are displayed. These number images are displayed in order. Note that two or more numbers may be displayed at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), the number "8" ST6, the number "5" ST7, and the number "8" ST8 are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(F), the displayed numbers ST1 to ST8 are erased with each press, and the number "800" ST100 is displayed. Note that the numbers ST1 to ST8 may remain displayed. The number "800" in this image represents the number of game balls that can be won in a winning game that begins after the fluctuation has ended. Note that the number ST100 (800) displayed here is equal to or greater than the total value of the displayed numbers ST1 to ST8 (5, 8, 5, 12, 10, 8, 5, 8). Also, if the reserved number also contains a winning number, the number displayed includes the number of game balls that can be won in a winning game due to a winning number in the reserved number. Note that it is not necessary to include the number of game balls that can be won in a winning game due to a winning number in the reserved number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(G), the change ends, and the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed at "7", the center decorative pattern 8C is fixed at "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed at "7". This indicates that the change has ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (H), the game transitions to the winning game, the caption "Jackpot!" TR2 is displayed, and the winning game begins.

[Numerical total effect 3]
The presentation in Figure 106 (I) is Numeric Sum Presentation 3, which is another example of the presentations in Figures 106 (A) to (H), in which two numbers are displayed one by one, and after a specified time has passed, a number greater than or equal to the sum of the displayed numbers is displayed.

Number Sum Presentation 3 is another example of the presentations in Figures 106 (A) to (H) described above. It is a presentation in which two numbers are displayed one by one, and after a certain time has passed, a number equal to or greater than the sum of the displayed numbers is displayed. It is explained in Figure 106 (I).

In this embodiment, Figures 106(A) to (C) are the same as the above-mentioned Numerical Sum Presentation 2, and Figure 106(I) follows Figure 106(C). Explanation of Figures 106(A) to (C) will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 106(I), the number "5" ST1 and the number "8" ST2 are displayed. Two numbers are displayed. These number images are displayed in sequence.

After that, the displayed number "5" ST1 and number "8" ST2 are erased and the number "800" ST100 is displayed. This is the same as in Figure 106(F) and subsequent figures in the performance of Figures 106(A) to (H) described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

[Numerical total performance 4]
The effects in Figures 106 (J) to (L) are Numeric Sum Effects 4, which are another example of the above-mentioned "Numerical Sum Effects 1," in which two numbers are displayed one by one each time a button is pressed, and when the final button is pressed, a number greater than or equal to the sum of the displayed numbers is displayed.

Numerical sum effect 4 is another example of the above-mentioned "Numerical sum effect 1," in which two numbers are displayed each time the button is pressed, and a number equal to or greater than the sum of the displayed numbers is displayed with each subsequent button press. This is explained in Figures 106 (J) to (L).

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned "Numerical Total Presentation 1" presentation is the same as Figures 105(A) and (B), and Figure 105(B) is followed by Figure 106(J). Explanation of Figures 105(A) and (B) will be omitted.

After FIG. 105(B), as shown in FIG. 106(J), an image BTN1 is displayed encouraging the player to repeatedly tap the effect button 63, and an image TM1 shows the time limit for which the button can be repeatedly tapped. The image BTN1 encouraging the player to repeatedly tap the effect button 63 has the word "repeated tap" written on it to encourage the player to repeatedly tap the button. Immediately after the image TM1 showing the time limit is displayed, a bar is displayed all the way to the right, but as time passes, the bar becomes fewer as the time limit decreases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (K), the number "5" ST1 is displayed. This number "5" ST1 is an image that is displayed when the effect button 63 is pressed. The image TM1, which indicates the time limit for successive taps, has not run out of bars, indicating that there is still a time limit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (L), the number "5" ST1 and the number "8" ST2 are displayed. This number "8" ST2 is an image that is displayed when the effect button 63 is pressed after the number "5" ST1 is displayed. In the image TM1, which shows the time limit for successive taps, the bar has disappeared, indicating that the time limit has run out.

After that, an image BTN2 urging the player to press the performance button 63 and an image TM2 showing the time limit during which the button can be pressed are displayed. The image BTN2 urging the player to press the performance button 63 has the words "Press!" written on it to encourage the player to press it. Immediately after the image TM2 showing the time limit is displayed, a bar is displayed all the way to the right, but as time passes, the bar becomes fewer as the time limit decreases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(I), the numbers ST1 and ST2 displayed with each press are erased, and the number "800" ST100 is displayed. The numbers ST1 and ST2 may remain displayed. This number "800" ST100 is an image displayed by pressing the performance button 63. The number "800" in this image represents the number of game balls that can be won in a winning game that begins after the fluctuation has ended. The number ST100 (800) displayed here is equal to or greater than the total value of the numbers ST1 and ST2 (5, 8) displayed during the continuous tapping. If the reserved balls also contain a winning ball, the number displayed includes the number of game balls that can be won in a winning game due to a winning ball in the reserved ball. The number of game balls that can be won in a winning game due to a winning ball in the reserved ball does not have to be included.

The rest of the process is the same as in Figures 105(J) and (H) of the "Numerical Total Presentation 1" presentation described above, so we will omit the explanation.

[Numerical total performance 5]
107 is a diagram for explaining the numerical sum effect 5. The numerical sum effect 5 is an effect that suggests the number of times the time-saving state will change before the end of a winning game. Each time the button is pressed, a numerical value is displayed, and when the button is pressed for the last time, the total of the displayed numerical values is displayed, suggesting the number of times the time-saving state will change after the winning game ends.

First, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the winning game is in the ending interval, and the caption "Big win ends" TR3 is displayed, indicating that the winning game is ending.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the caption TR4 "Get time-saving!" is displayed, indicating the start of a performance that displays the number of times the time-saving state will change after the winning game ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), an image BTN1 encouraging the player to repeatedly tap the effect button 63 and an image TM1 showing the time limit for which the button can be repeatedly tapped are displayed. The image BTN1 encouraging the player to repeatedly tap the effect button 63 has the word "repeated tap" added to it to encourage the player to repeatedly tap the button. Immediately after the image TM1 showing the time limit is displayed, a bar is displayed all the way to the right, but as time passes, the bar becomes fewer as the time limit decreases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (D), the number "1" ST1 is displayed. This number "1" ST1 is an image that is displayed when the effect button 63 is pressed. In the image TM1 that indicates the time limit for continuous tapping, the bar has not disappeared, indicating that there is still a time limit. Note that this period for continuous tapping may include a period during which pressing the effect button 63 is invalid even if the effect button 63 is pressed immediately after it is pressed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(E), the number "1" ST1, the number "1" ST2, the number "2" ST3, the number "1" ST4, and the number "3" ST5 are displayed. This is the state in which the effect button 63 has been pressed five times, and the numbers ST1 to ST5 are images displayed each time the effect button 63 is pressed. Note that each of these numbers may be all different, or may all be the same. Furthermore, two or more number images may be displayed with a single press of the effect button 63. Also, the image TM1, which indicates the time limit for successive taps, has not run out of bars, indicating that there is still a time limit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), pressing the effect button 63 continues, and the number "5" ST6, the number "1" ST7, and the number "2" ST8 are displayed with each press. Also, in the image TM1, which indicates the time limit for successive presses, the bar disappears, indicating that the time limit has been removed and that no numbers will be displayed even if the effect button 63 is pressed thereafter.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(G), the period during which the effect button 63 can be repeatedly pressed has ended, so the image BTN1 encouraging the player to repeatedly press the effect button 63 disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (H), an image BTN2 urging the user to press the performance button 63 and an image TM2 showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed. The image BTN2 urging the user to press the performance button 63 has the words "Press!" written on it to encourage the user to press it. Immediately after the image TM2 showing the time limit is displayed, a bar is displayed all the way to the right, but as time passes, the bar becomes fewer as the time limit decreases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(I), the numbers ST1 to ST8 displayed with each press are erased and the number "50" ST200 is displayed. Note that the numbers ST1 to ST8 may remain displayed. This number "50" ST200 is an image displayed by pressing the effect button 63. The number "50" in this image represents the number of times the time-saving state will change, which begins after a win ends. Note that the number ST200 (50) displayed here is equal to or greater than the total value of the numbers ST1 to ST8 (1, 1, 2, 1, 3, 5, 1, 2) displayed during successive presses.

Next, as shown in FIG.
The caption TR5 "Time-saving 50 times" is displayed, indicating that the number of times the time-saving state will change after the end of a winning game is 50 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (K), the game transitions from the winning game to a time-saving state, and fluctuations begin in the time-saving state. This time-saving state continues for 50 times. It may continue for more than 50 times.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of numerical total effects 1 to 5.

[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Numerical Total Presentation 1", a display screen 7a is provided that can display a plurality of types of images, one of which is a numerical value "5" ST1, one of which is a numerical value "8" ST2, and one of which is a numerical value "800" ST100. A first presentation (FIG. 105(D)) in which the numerical value "5" ST1 is displayed, a second presentation (FIG. 105(E)) in which the numerical value "8" ST2 is additionally displayed after the first presentation (FIG. 105(D)), and a third presentation (FIG. 105(I)) in which the numerical value "800" ST100 is displayed, the numerical value of which is equal to or greater than the sum of the numerical value of the numerical value "5" ST1 and the numerical value of the numerical value "8" ST2 can be executed. According to this configuration, the number of game balls that can be won through a winning game can be notified in advance, thereby increasing interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Numerical Total Effect 1", the game machine 1 further includes an effect button 63 that can be operated by the player, one of the multiple types of images is an image BTN1 that shows the appearance of the effect button 63 and encourages the player to press it repeatedly, and one of the multiple types of images is an image BTN2 that shows the appearance of the effect button 63 and encourages the player to press it. The first effect (FIG. 105(D)) and the second effect (FIG. 105(E)) are performed when the effect button 63 is operated while the image BTN1 that encourages the player to press the effect button 63 repeatedly is displayed, and the third effect (FIG. 105(I)) is performed when the effect button 63 is operated while the image BTN2 that encourages the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed. With this configuration, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a winning game can be notified in advance, and interest can be increased.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Numerical Total Presentation 1," the numerical value "8" ST2 is different from the numerical value "5" ST1. With this configuration, the number of game balls that can be won by a winning game can be notified in advance, which can increase the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Numerical Total Presentation 1", the numerical value "800" ST100 is a numerical value representing the total number of game balls that can be acquired in a winning game if the special drawing of the corresponding variable is a winning game, and the number of game balls that can be acquired in a winning game if the reserved special drawing is a winning game (FIG. 105 (I)). With this configuration, the number of game balls that can be acquired in a winning game can be notified in advance, and the interest can be increased.

[Modification]
Below are variations of numerical sum effects 1 to 5.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the image BTN1 encouraging the player to repeatedly tap the effect button 63 and the image BTN2 encouraging the player to press the effect button 63 are different images, but they may be the same image.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, when the effect button 63 is pressed while the image BTN1 encouraging the user to repeatedly press the effect button 63 is displayed, a numerical image is displayed each time the button is pressed, but there may be cases where the numerical image is not displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the number "800" of the image representing the number of game balls that can be won in the winning game that begins after the fluctuation ends may be displayed once, and then a numerical image representing a number equal to or greater than the number that was previously displayed may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the "numerical sum effects 1 to 4" are performed during fluctuations before a winning game, but they may be performed during a winning game.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the "Numerical Total Presentation 5" is performed during a winning game before the time-saving state, but it may be performed during fluctuations after the transition to the time-saving state after the winning game.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first numerical image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second numerical image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a third numerical image;
a first effect in which the first numerical image is displayed;
a second effect in which the second numerical image is additionally displayed while the first numerical image is displayed after the first effect;
and a third effect in which the third numerical image is displayed after the second effect.
The numerical value of the third numerical image is equal to or greater than the sum of the numerical value of the first numerical image and the numerical value of the second numerical image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 further comprises:
The game machine includes an operating means operable by a player,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first operation means image representing an appearance of the operation means;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second operation means image representing an appearance of the operation means;
the first effect and the second effect are performed when the operation means is operated while the first operation means image is displayed;
The third effect is performed when the operation means is operated while the second operation means image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 or E2-2,
the numerical value of the second numerical image is different from the numerical value of the first numerical image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
Aspect E2-4
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-3,
The numerical value of the third numerical image is a numerical value representing the total number of game balls that can be acquired in a winning game if the special drawing of the variable is a winning game, and the number of game balls that can be acquired in a winning game if the reserved special drawing is a winning game.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The reserved ball read-ahead effects 1 to 3 are explained below using Figures 108 to 110. The reserved ball read-ahead effects 1 to 3 are executed during a winning game. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a variable effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Hold ahead reading performance 1]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the reserved reading performance 1. In the reserved reading performance 1, when a performance during a big win game is being performed on the display screen 7a, an image representing the ball entering the big prize winning hole (either the first big prize winning hole 30 or the second big prize winning hole 35, or both, as in FIGS. 108 to 110) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the image indicates the expected probability of winning the special drawing lottery, and then the image disappears. In addition, an image other than the image representing the ball entering the big prize winning hole is displayed in the same color as the image representing the ball entering the big prize winning hole, and the image also indicates the expected probability of winning the special drawing lottery. In addition, when there are two big prize winning holes, both big prize winning holes or either big prize winning hole may be displayed (as in FIGS. 108 to 110).

During this jackpot game, characters CRA and CRB face off against each other, and depending on whether character CRA wins or loses, the reserved special drawing is announced during the jackpot. If character CRA wins, it is confirmed that there is a winning combination in the reserved special drawing, and if character CRA loses, it is not confirmed that there is a winning combination in the reserved special drawing. In this embodiment, in the first round, a presentation is presented in which characters CRA and CRB face off against each other, and in the second round, a presentation is presented in which the results of the battle between characters CRA and CRB are displayed. Note that the number of rounds over which these presentations are presented may be different.

First, as shown in FIG. 108(A), a "Jackpot!" caption TR1 is displayed during the jackpot start interval, announcing that the jackpot game is about to begin. Reserve icon 9A is displayed. Note that reserve icon 9B may also be displayed, or all reserve icons may not be displayed (similar to FIG. 108 to FIG. 110).

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(B), the round number display TRR of "1R", which indicates the number of rounds, is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and one round begins. In other words, the large prize opening is opened. With the opening of the large prize opening, it becomes possible for a game ball to enter the large prize opening. Also, in the center of the display screen 7a, characters CRA and CRB are displayed facing each other. An effect KSG, which indicates the strength of the sword, is attached to the tip of character CRA's sword. At this point, the effect KSG on the tip of character CRA's sword is white (not hatched). The color of this effect KSG indicates the likelihood of a big win. Details will be given later.

The effect KSG on the tip of character CRA's sword is strongest in red, second strongest in green, third strongest in blue, and fourth strongest (weakest) in white. As shown in Figure 108 (L), white is represented by no hatching, blue by hatching 1, green by hatching 2, and red by hatching 3. The expected probability of a jackpot (also called the reliability) is 10 for white, 20 for blue, 30 for green, and 50 for red. This is the same in Figures 108 to 110.

Next, in FIG. 108(C), the game ball has entered the big prize opening. When the ball enters, an image NGZ is displayed to indicate that the ball has entered. This image NGZ is displayed in a position close to the big prize opening on the display screen 7a. This image NGZ is displayed in blue (hatching 1). It does not have to be located close to the big prize opening. At this point, the effect KSG at the tip of the sword of the character CRA is white (no hatching). The color of the image NGZ indicating that the ball has entered indicates the likelihood of a big win. Details will be given later.

In the images NGZ that represent a ball going in, red is the strongest, green is the second strongest, blue is the third strongest, and white is the fourth strongest (weakest). As shown in Figure 108 (L), white is represented by no hatching, blue by hatching 1, green by hatching 2, and red by hatching 3. The expected probability of a jackpot (also called the reliability) is 10 for white, 20 for blue, 30 for green, and 50 for red. This is the same for Figures 108 to 110.

Next, in FIG. 108(D), an image NGZ indicating that a ball has been scored is displayed across the entire display screen 7a. In other words, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in blue (hatching 1). It may gradually expand and be displayed across the entire screen, or it may be displayed across the entire screen in an instant.

Next, in FIG. 108(E), the blue (hatching 1) image NGZ displayed across the entire display screen 7a fades out, and the blue (hatching 1) becomes lighter. The effect KSG at the tip of the character CRA's sword has already changed from white (no hatching) to blue (hatching 1). In this embodiment, when the image NGZ indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed across the entire display screen 7a, the effect KSG at the tip of the character CRA's sword is displayed as if it has changed to the same color as the image NGZ. However, when the image NGZ indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed following the score, the effect KSG at the tip of the character CRA's sword may be displayed as if it has changed to the same color as the image NGZ.

Next, in Figure 108 (F), the fade-out of the image NGZ, which indicates that the ball has been scored, is complete. The color of the effect KSG at the tip of the sword of the character CRA remains blue (hatching 1).

Next, in Figure 108 (G), a new game ball has entered the big prize opening. When the ball enters the big prize opening, a new image NGZ is displayed to indicate that the ball has entered the opening. This image NGZ is displayed in green (hatching 2). At this point, the effect KSG at the tip of the sword of the character CRA is blue (hatching 1).

Next, in FIG. 108(H), an image NGZ indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed across the entire display screen 7a. In other words, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in green (hatching 2).

Next, in Figure 108 (I), the green (hatched 2) image NGZ displayed across the entire display screen 7a fades out, and the green (hatched 2) becomes lighter. The effect KSG at the tip of the sword of the character CRA has already changed from blue (hatched 1) to green (hatched 2).

Next, in Figure 108 (J), the fade-out of the image NGZ, which indicates that the ball has been scored, is complete. The color of the effect KSG at the tip of the sword of the character CRA remains green (hatching 2).

After this, every time a new game ball enters the big prize opening, an image NGZ indicating that the ball has entered is displayed, and the image NGZ fades out and disappears. The image NGZ indicating that the ball has entered may be displayed in a different color (e.g., red). In addition, when the image NGZ indicating that the ball has entered is displayed in a different color, the effect KSG at the tip of the sword of the character CRA may be displayed in a different color.
After this is repeated, the round ends.

Next, in FIG. 108 (K), the game has moved to the second round. The round number display TRR of "2R", which indicates the number of rounds, is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the second round has begun. After a performance in which characters CRA and CRB face off against each other, a "Victory" caption TR2 is displayed, indicating that character CRA has won. This confirms that there has been a win in the reserved special drawing.

[Hold ahead reading performance 2]
109 is a diagram for explaining the reserved ball read-ahead performance 2. The reserved ball read-ahead performance 2 is a performance in which, when a performance during a big win game is being performed on the display screen 7a, an image representing a ball entering the big win opening is displayed on the display screen 7a every time a game ball enters the big win opening, and when the image representing a ball entering is being displayed, a new game ball enters the big win opening.

First, as shown in FIG. 109(A), the round number display TRR of "1R", which indicates the number of rounds, is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and one round begins. In other words, the large prize opening is opened. With the opening of the large prize opening, it becomes possible for a game ball to enter the large prize opening. Also, in the center of the display screen 7a, characters CRA and CRB are displayed facing each other. An effect KSG, which indicates the strength of the sword, is attached to the tip of character CRA's sword. At this point, the effect KSG on the tip of character CRA's sword is white (not hatched).

Next, in Figure 109 (B), the game ball has entered the large prize opening. When the ball enters the opening, an image NGZ is displayed to indicate that the ball has entered. This image NGZ is displayed in a position close to the large prize opening on the display screen 7a. This image NGZ is displayed in blue (hatching 1). At this point, the effect KSG at the tip of the sword of the character CRA is white (no hatching).

Next, in FIG. 109(C), an image NGZ indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed across the entire display screen 7a. In other words, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in blue (hatching 1). Note that the image may be displayed across the entire screen in an instant.

Next, in FIG. 109(D), an image NGZ indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed across the entire display screen 7a. In other words, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in blue (hatching 1).

Next, in Figure 109 (E), the blue (hatched 1) image NGZ displayed across the entire display screen 7a fades out, and the blue (hatched 1) becomes lighter. The effect KSG at the tip of the sword of character CRA has already changed from white (no hatching) to blue (hatched 1).

Next, in FIG. 109(F), a new game ball enters the big prize opening while the blue (hatched 1) image NGZ displayed across the entire display screen 7a is fading out. As the ball enters, a new image NGZA is displayed, indicating that the ball has entered. In other words, a new image NGZA is displayed, superimposed on the image NGZ that is fading out. This image NGZA is displayed in blue (hatched 1). In this embodiment, the images NGZ and NGZA are the same color, but they may be different colors.

Next, in FIG. 109(G), the image NGZ in blue (hatching 1) displayed across the entire display screen 7a is fading out, but the image NGZA, which indicates that a new ball has been scored, spreads across the entire display screen 7a. In other words, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in blue (hatching 1). Note that the entire screen may be displayed in an instant.

Next, in FIG. 109(H), the image NGZ has finished fading out, and an image NGZA, which indicates that a new ball has been scored, is displayed across the entire display screen 7a. In other words, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in blue (hatching 1).

Next, in FIG. 109(I), the blue (hatched 1) image NGZA displayed across the entire display screen 7a fades out, and the blue (hatched 1) becomes lighter.

Next, in Figure 109 (J), the fade-out of the image NGZA, which indicates that the ball has been scored, has been completed. Note that the color of the effect KSG at the tip of the sword of the character CRA is blue (hatching 1).

[Hold ahead reading performance 3]
110 is a diagram for explaining the reserved ball pre-reading performance 3. The reserved ball pre-reading performance 3 is a performance in which, when a performance during a big win game is being performed on the display screen 7a, an image showing that a game ball has entered the big win hole is displayed on the display screen 7a, the image suggests the expected probability of winning the special drawing, and then the image disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(A), the round number display TRR of "1R", which indicates the number of rounds, is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and one round begins. In other words, the big prize opening is opened. With the opening of the big prize opening, it becomes possible for a game ball to enter the big prize opening.

Next, in FIG. 110(B), the game ball has entered the big prize opening. When the ball enters the opening, an image NGZ is displayed to indicate that the ball has entered. This image NGZ is displayed in a position close to the big prize opening on the display screen 7a. This image NGZ is displayed in blue (hatching 1). Note that it does not have to be displayed in a position close to the big prize opening.

Next, in Figure 110 (C), the image NGZ, which indicates that the ball has been scored and is displayed in blue (hatching 1), fades out, and the blue (hatching 1) becomes lighter.

Next, in FIG. 110(D), the fade-out of the image NGZ, which indicates that the ball has been scored, is complete.

Next, in FIG. 110(E), a new game ball has entered the big prize opening. When the ball enters the big prize opening, a new image NGZ is displayed to indicate that the ball has entered the big prize opening. This image NGZ is displayed in green (hatching 2).

Next, in Figure 110 (F), the image NGZ, which indicates that the ball has been scored and is displayed in green (hatching 2), fades out, and the green color (hatching 2) becomes lighter.

Next, in FIG. 110(G), the fade-out of the image NGZ, which indicates that the ball has been scored, is complete.

Next, in FIG. 110(H), a new game ball has entered the big prize opening. When the ball enters the big prize opening, a new image NGZ is displayed to indicate that the ball has entered the big prize opening. This image NGZ is displayed in green (hatching 2).

Next, in Figure 110 (I), the image NGZ, which indicates that the ball has been scored and is displayed in green (hatching 2), fades out, and the green color (hatching 2) becomes lighter.

Next, in FIG. 110(J), the image NGZ, which indicates a ball has entered the big prize slot, is in the process of fading out, and a new game ball enters the big prize slot. As the ball enters the slot, a new image NGZA, which indicates a ball has entered the slot, is displayed. In other words, a new image NGZA is displayed, superimposed on the image NGZ, which is fading out. This image NGZA is displayed in red (hatching 3). In this embodiment, the images NGZ and NGZA are different colors, but they may be the same color.

Next, in Figure 110 (K), the green (hatched 2) image NGZ has finished fading out, and the red (hatched 3) image NGZA, which indicates that the ball has been scored, fades out, and the red (hatched 3) becomes lighter.

Next, in FIG. 110(L), the image NGZA, which indicates that the ball has been scored, has finished fading out.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of pending read-ahead performances 1 to 3.

[Effect 1]
As shown in "Reserved ball pre-reading performance 1," the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with a large prize winning hole into which a game ball can enter during a winning game, and a display screen 7a capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, one of which is an image NGZ representing a ball entering the large prize winning hole, and during a winning game, a first performance (FIGS. 108(C)-(E), (G)-(I)) can be executed in which the image NGZ is displayed each time a game ball enters the large prize winning hole, and then the displayed image NGZ disappears. With this configuration, a performance can be executed as if a lottery were being drawn each time a game ball enters the large prize winning hole during a winning game, and the reserved ball can be pre-read based on the result, thereby improving the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in the "reserved ball pre-reading performance 2", after the image NGZ representing the ball entering is displayed in the first performance (FIGS. 109(B)-(H)), the image NGZ representing the ball entering starts to fade out, and when a new game ball enters the large prize winning hole, the image NGZA representing the new ball entering is displayed superimposed on the faded out image NGZ representing the ball entering, and a second performance (FIGS. 109(F)-(H)) can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a performance as if a lottery was being drawn every time a game ball enters the large prize winning hole during a winning game, and the reserved ball can be pre-read based on the result, which can increase the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Reserved ball pre-reading performance 1", a specific game is a big win game, and the image NGZ indicating that a ball has entered suggests the expected probability of winning in the reserved special drawing by color (Fig. 108 (L)). With this configuration, it is possible to perform a performance as if a drawing is being performed every time a game ball enters the big winning hole during a winning game, and the reserved ball can be pre-read based on the result, which can increase the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Reserved Pre-Reading Presentation 1", one of the multiple types of images is the effect KSG of the sword tip of the character CRA, which indicates the expected probability of winning in the reserved special drawing by color, and the effect KSG of the sword tip of the character CRA is displayed during a jackpot game. When the image NGZ indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed in the first presentation (FIGS. 108(C)-(E), (G)-(I)), a third presentation (FIGS. 108(C)-(E), (G)-(I)) in which the effect KSG of the sword tip of the character CRA is displayed in the same color as the image NGZ indicating that the ball has been scored, and a fourth presentation (FIGS. 108(F), (J)) in which the effect KSG of the sword tip of the character CRA does not disappear and remains displayed when the image NGZ indicating that the ball has been scored disappears in the first presentation (FIGS. 108(C)-(E), (G)-(I)). According to this configuration, it is possible to present the game as if a lottery were being drawn every time a game ball enters the big prize opening during a winning game, and based on the result, it is possible to predict the reserved balls in advance, thereby increasing the interest.

[Modification]
Below are variations of the reserve read-ahead performances 1 to 3.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the reserve that indicates the expectation of winning in the special drawing by the color is for all reserves, but it may be for a specific reserve. For example, it may be for the reserve that is consumed first after the big win game.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the presentation to inform the player that the reserved special drawing has been won is performed during the round, but it may also be performed at the interval after the end of the big win.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect G2-1]
An entrance through which a game ball can enter during a specific game;
A gaming machine including a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
During the specific game, a first performance can be executed in which the predetermined image is displayed and then the displayed predetermined image disappears every time a game ball enters the ball entrance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect G2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-1,
A second performance can be executed in which, after the predetermined image is displayed in the first performance, the predetermined image starts to fade out, and when a new game ball enters the ball entrance, a new predetermined image is displayed superimposed on the faded out predetermined image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect G2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect G2-1 or G2-2,
The specific game is a winning game,
The predetermined image indicates the expected probability of winning in the reserved special drawing by color,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect G2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a suggestion image that suggests, by color, the expected probability of winning in the reserved special drawing,
The suggestive image is displayed during the winning game,
A third effect in which, when the predetermined image is displayed in the first effect, the suggestion image is displayed in the same color as the displayed predetermined image;
A fourth performance in which the suggestive image is not erased and is maintained displayed when the predetermined image disappears in the first performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The wiring visibility suppression effect of the gaming device will be explained below using Figures 111 to 113. Figure 111 is a schematic diagram of the decorative part 10a located at the lower right of the center decorative part 10, Figure 112 is a schematic diagram of the first movable role 14, and Figure 113 is a schematic diagram of the fixed winning device 19.

In addition, Figure 111 (A) is a front upper left oblique view of the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10, seen from the front upper left, Figure 111 (B) is a front upper right oblique view of the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10, seen from the front upper right, Figure 111 (C) is a rear upper left oblique view of the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10, seen from the rear upper left, Figure 111 (D) is a rear upper right oblique view of the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10, seen from the rear upper right, Figure 111 (E) is a front view of the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10, and Figure 111 (F) is a front view of the decorative substrate attached inside the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10, seen from the front.

In addition, Figure 112(A) is a front upper left oblique view of the first movable part 14 as viewed from the front upper left, Figure 112(B) is a rear upper left oblique view of the first movable part 14 as viewed from the rear upper left, Figure 112(C) is a partially enlarged view of a portion of the light-emitting section of the first movable part 14, and Figure 112(D) is an enlarged view of the wiring connection portion of a portion of the light-emitting section of the first movable part 14 with the cover removed.

In addition, Figure 113 (A) is a front upper left oblique view of the fixed winning device 19 as seen from the front upper left, Figure 113 (B) is a front upper right oblique view of the fixed winning device 19 as seen from the front upper right, Figure 113 (C) is a rear upper left oblique view of the fixed winning device 19 as seen from the rear upper left, Figure 113 (D) is a rear upper right oblique view of the fixed winning device 19 as seen from the rear upper right, Figure 113 (E) is a front view of the fixed winning device 19 as seen from the front, and Figure 113 (F) is a front view of the decorative board attached to the rear of the fixed winning device 19 as seen from the front.

Here, we will first explain the structure of the decorative part 10a located at the lower right of the center decorative part 10, then explain the structure of the first movable part 14 and the structure of the fixed winning device 19 in that order. Next, as a wiring visibility suppression effect of the gaming device, we will explain the wiring visibility suppression effect of the decorative part 10a located at the lower right of the center decorative part 10, then explain the wiring visibility suppression effect of the first movable part 14 and the wiring visibility suppression effect of the fixed winning device 19 in that order.

[Structure of the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10]
First, the structure of the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 111. The decorative part 10a is arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10. The decorative part 10a is capable of emitting light in multiple colors, making it a gaming device capable of emitting light in multiple colors.

As shown in Figures 111(A) and (B), the decorative part 10a is composed of a base body 10ab made of a plate-shaped colorless and transparent synthetic resin material to which the decorative substrate 10aa is attached on the front side (surface side), and a cover body 10ac made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material that covers the entire front side of the base body 10ab.

As shown in FIG. 111(F), the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa is equipped with a plurality of top-view type lamps 10aaa, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and a plurality of connectors 10aab to which electrical wiring is connected. On the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa, two lamps 10aaa are arranged approximately horizontally at a predetermined distance apart as the first tier, three lamps 10aaa are arranged approximately horizontally at a predetermined distance apart as the second tier arranged above the first tier, four lamps 10aaa are arranged approximately horizontally at a predetermined distance apart as the third tier arranged above the second tier, and two lamps 10aaa are arranged approximately horizontally at a predetermined distance apart as the fourth tier, which is the top tier, above the third tier. The top-view type lamp 10aaa, which is a full-color LED capable of emitting various colors, has a light-emitting surface that is parallel to the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa, and the light emitted by the lamp 10aaa is directed perpendicular to the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa (i.e., toward the player) and brightly illuminates the cover body 10ac. Hereinafter, the light-emitting mode that illuminates the cover body 10ac may be simply referred to as the "light-emitting mode of the decorative part 10a."

The two lamps 10aaa in the first row, which is the bottom row, are managed as the first lamp group, the three lamps 10aaa in the second row are managed as the second lamp group, the four lamps 10aaa in the third row are managed as the third lamp group, and the two lamps 10aaa in the fourth row, which is the top row, are managed as the fourth lamp group.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 10aa, a lower connector 10aab is arranged to the left of the first row, which is the lowest row, along the left edge of the decorative board 10aa, and an upper connector 10aab is arranged above the lower connector 10aab to the left of the second row, along the left edge of the decorative board 10aa.

In this way, a total of 11 lamps 10aaa, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, are arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa, and two connectors 10aab are also arranged.

As shown in Figures 111(C) and (D), an LED control IC 10aac is arranged on the rear side, which is the LED non-mounted surface opposite to the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa, capable of gradationally lighting a total of 11 lamps 10aaa arranged on the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa. The LED control IC 10aac is assigned an identification ID by multiple resistors (not shown), and when external serial data is input based on a clock signal and the input serial data includes an identification ID that identifies itself, it takes in the input serial data and adjusts the current output from multiple channels based on the taken-in serial data, thereby enabling gradation control of a total of 11 lamps 10aaa.

Specifically, the first channel of the LED control IC 10aac is electrically connected to two lamps 10aaa in the first row, which is the lowest row. The two lamps 10aaa in the first row, which is the lowest row, are gradation-controlled as a first lamp group by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and the light emission state is managed. The second channel of the LED control IC 10aac is electrically connected to three lamps 10aaa in the second row. The three lamps 10aaa in the second row are gradation-controlled as a second lamp group by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and the light emission state is managed. The third channel of the LED control IC 10aac is electrically connected to four lamps 10aaa in the third row. The four lamps 10aaa in the third row are gradation-controlled as a third lamp group by adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and the light emission state is managed. The fourth channel of the LED control IC 10aac is electrically connected to the two lamps 10aaa in the fourth row, which is the top row. The two lamps 10aaa in the fourth row are gradation-controlled as a fourth lamp group by adjusting the current output from the fourth channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and the light emission state is managed.

The upper connector 10aab is electrically connected to the upper electrical wiring 10aad, which receives control signals (serial data, clock signals) from the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 as well as a ground (GND) line and a power supply line via the lamp control board 107. The lower connector 10aab is electrically connected to the lower electrical wiring 10aad, which is electrically connected to a decorative board (not shown) that lights up the stage section 11 at the bottom of the center decorative section 10 in gradations.

The lower connector 10aab is a connector for transmitting control signals (serial data, clock signals), ground (GND) lines, and power lines from the upper connector 10aab, which are input via the upper electrical wiring 10aad, to a decorative board (not shown) that lights up the stage section 11 at the bottom of the center decorative section 10 in gradations via the lower electrical wiring 10aad.

The upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad are composed of four electrical wirings, the first electrical wiring being a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wiring being white. The first to fourth electrical wirings have their product numbers and names printed in a color different from the color of the electrical wiring itself (for example, black, since the first electrical wiring is a gray color close to white, and for example, black, since the second to fourth electrical wirings are white). Since the first electrical wiring is a gray color close to white, the gray color close to white of the first electrical wiring is the same color family as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings.

The first electrical wiring, which is a gray color close to white, is a ground (GND) line, the second electrical wiring, which is white, is a line that transmits serial data among the control signals, the third electrical wiring, which is white, is a line that transmits a clock signal among the control signals, and the fourth electrical wiring, which is white, is a power supply line.

The upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab are both white connectors, and have the same color as the white of the second to fourth electrical wiring. The upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab may be ivory. Ivory is a color close to white, so it is in the same color family as the white of the second to fourth electrical wiring.

In this embodiment, green solder resist is applied to the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative substrate 10aa. The solder resist is an insulating protective film that protects the circuit pattern from dust, moisture, heat, etc. The green solder resist applied to the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative substrate 10aa is inexpensive and is also applied to the front side (surface side) and rear side of various substrates such as the main control substrate 80, relay substrate 88, and dispensing control substrate 110 shown in FIG. 3, and the sub-control substrate 90, image control substrate 100, audio control substrate 106, lamp control substrate substrate 107, and relay substrate 108 shown in FIG. 4. However, instead of the green solder resist, solder resist having the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wiring may be applied to the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative substrate 10aa. In addition, the decorative substrate 10aa has through holes formed at positions corresponding to the protrusions and mounting bosses formed on the front side of the base body 10ab.

Here, the method of assembling the decorative part 10a will be briefly described. First, the protrusions and mounting bosses formed on the front side of the base body 10ab are passed through the through holes of the decorative board 10aa described above, and a screw (not shown) is screwed from the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 10aa into the screw hole formed in the mounting boss, thereby fixing the decorative board 10aa to the base body 10ab. The mounting boss has a diameter that is about twice as small as the diameter of the base of the mounting boss, and a stepped surface is formed at a position a predetermined distance forward from the front side of the base body 10ab. When the decorative board 10aa is fixed to the base body 10ab, the stepped surface is in surface contact with the rear side of the decorative board 10aa. This stepped surface forms a space between the rear surface (surface on which the manufacturer, product number, etc. are printed) of the LED control IC 10aac arranged on the rear side of the decorative board 10aa and the surface of the base body 10ab. In other words, the rear surface of the LED control IC 10aac (the surface on which the manufacturer, product number, etc. are printed) that is placed on the rear side of the decorative substrate 10aa does not come into contact with the surface of the base body 10ab, so that the shape of the base body 10ab is not deformed by the heat emitted from the LED control IC 10aac.

The upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad are electrically connected to the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab of the decorative board 10aa, and the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad are bent 180 degrees from the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 10aa toward the rear side of the decorative board 10aa, and the cover body 10ac is placed on the front side (surface side) of the base body 10ab so as to cover the front side (surface side) of the base body 10ab and pushed toward the front (surface) of the base body 10ab. As a result, multiple claws (multiple claws having a hook shape) (not shown) formed on the rear side of the cover body 10ac are hooked on the outer periphery rear side of the base body 10ab, thereby fixing the cover body 10ac to the base body 10ab. The base body 10ab has a cutout portion 10aba that serves as a wiring opening, through which the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad are pulled out. The heat generated by the LED control IC 10aac is dissipated into the internal space formed by the base body 10ab and the cover body 10ac, but the cutout portion 10aba allows the heat in the internal space to be released to the outside.

As shown in Figures 111(A), (B), and (E), when the decorative part 10a assembled in this manner is in a state where the lamps 10aaa are turned off, the upper electrical wiring 10aad (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) and the lower electrical wiring 10aad (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) can be easily seen from the front through the cover body 10ac made of a transparent synthetic resin material, the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab can be easily seen, the decorative substrate 10aa can be easily seen, and the total of eleven lamps 10aaa, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, can be easily seen.

The decorative part 10a is fitted into holes (not shown) formed on the rear side of the center decorative part 10 via two mounting bosses 10abb formed on the back side of the base body 10ab. Next, the decorative part 10a is fixed to the center decorative part 10 by screwing screws (not shown) from the rear side of the center decorative part 10 into the screw holes formed in the mounting bosses.

In this embodiment, the cover body 10ac is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, a portion of the front surface or a portion of the side surface of the cover body 10ac may be configured to have a plating layer with a metallic luster, or may be configured to have a three-dimensional design and be painted with a colored paint. Even with this configuration, the upper electrical wiring 10aad (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) and the lower electrical wiring 10aad (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) can be easily seen through the transparent area of the cover body 10ac when the lamp 10aaa is turned off.

In the present embodiment, the cover body 10ac is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, the cover body 10ac may be made of a colored and transparent synthetic resin material. Examples of colors include red, blue, and green. Even with this configuration, the upper electrical wiring 10aad (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) and the lower electrical wiring 10aad (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) can be seen through the colored and transparent area when the lamp 10aaa is turned off.

[Structure of the first movable part 14]
Next, the structure of the first movable role 14 will be described with reference to FIG. 112. First, like the second movable role 15, when the first movable role 14 is operated during the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern, it can suggest to the player that the expectation of a win is high that a win will occur after the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern ends (i.e., after the performance pattern is stopped and displayed) compared to when the first movable role 14 is not operated, and when multiple performance patterns are aligned to the same pattern and are operated during a temporary stop display, it can also suggest to the player that the expectation of a win that will give a player a profit among the multiple types of wins that exist is high compared to when the first movable role 14 is not operated. For this reason, players are highly interested in the operation (movement) of the first movable role 14.

The first movable device 14 has a retracted position on the left side of the image display device 7, and is stationary in the retracted position. It can move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and can come to rest at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable device 14 is formed to be approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and in the advanced position it can emit multi-colored light that covers part of the image display device 7 from top to bottom, making it a gaming device capable of emitting multi-color light.

As shown in Figures 112 (A) and (B), the movable prop 14 is composed of a base body 14a formed by appropriately bending a long metal flat plate in the left-right direction, a left-right movement stepping motor 14b, a left-right movement mechanism unit 14c, a cable housing gutter unit 14d, and a decorative light-emitting unit 14e. The left-right movement mechanism unit 14c and the cable housing gutter unit 14d are attached to the base body 14a, which is located above the image display device 7 and is positioned so as not to interfere with the various units of the second movable prop 15.

The left-right movement mechanism unit 14c is composed of a left support member 14ca made of a colored opaque synthetic resin material, a right support member 14cb made of a colored opaque synthetic resin material, a left-right moving body 14cc made of a colored opaque synthetic resin material, a driven moving body 14cd made of a colored opaque synthetic resin material, a toothed belt 14ce, and a metal tension spring 14cf. The left support member 14ca supports one end (left end) of the two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the back guide shaft 14cg, so that they are parallel to each other. The right support member 14cb supports the other end (right end) of the two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the back guide shaft 14cg, so that they are parallel to each other. The two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the back guide shaft 14cg, are supported at both ends by the left support member 14ca and the right support member 14cb so that they are parallel to each other, and the left support member 14ca and the right support member 14cb are fixed to the metal base body 14a. The left-right moving body 14cc and the driven moving body 14cd are inserted through the two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the back guide shaft 14cg.

The left support member 14ca is further fitted with a left-right movement stepping motor 14b, and a cantilever shaft 14caa is attached so as to be parallel to the output shaft of the left-right movement stepping motor 14b. A drive gear 14cab is attached to the output shaft of the left-right movement stepping motor 14b, and a transmission gear 14cad formed integrally with a toothed drive pulley 14cac is inserted into the cantilever shaft 14caa, and the transmission gear 14cad meshes with the drive gear 14cab attached to the output shaft of the left-right movement stepping motor 14b. The toothed drive pulley 14cac, around which the toothed belt 14ce is wound, is formed on the front side of the transmission gear 14cad.

When the output shaft of the left-right movement stepping motor 14b rotates, this rotation is transmitted to the transmission gear 14cad that meshes with the drive gear 14cab attached to the output shaft of the left-right movement stepping motor 14b. Since the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the transmission gear 14cad are formed as a single unit, the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the transmission gear 14cad rotate around the cantilever shaft 14caa. When the toothed drive pulley 14cac rotates, the toothed belt 14ce that is wound around the toothed drive pulley 14cac rotates.

The driven moving body 14cd is inserted through two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the back guide shaft 14cg, and is capable of smoothly moving (sliding) in the left-right direction along the two metal guide shafts, and is attached to a cantilever shaft 14cda. A toothed driven pulley 14cdb is inserted through the cantilever shaft 14cda, and a toothed belt 14ce is wound around the toothed drive pulley 14cac. The driven moving body 14cd is also attached to a shaft 14cdc with a locking hole through which one end of a tension spring 14cf is inserted and locked. The other end of the tension spring 14cf is inserted through a locking hole provided on the right end side and the front side of a base body 14a, which is formed by appropriately bending a long iron plate in the left-right direction.

As a result, the driven moving body 14cd inserted through the two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the back guide shaft 14cg, is connected to the right end side of the base body 14a and the tension spring 14cf, and is pulled (guided) in the left-right direction along the two metal guide shafts toward the right end side of the base body 14a by the restoring force of the tension spring 14cf. The restoring force of the tension spring 14cf pulls the toothed belt 14ce wound around the toothed driving pulley 14cac and the toothed driven pulley 14cdb with an appropriate force, thereby suppressing slack in the toothed belt 14ce, thereby preventing excessive load from being applied to the toothed belt 14ce and preventing the toothed belt 14ce from loosening and coming off the toothed driving pulley 14cac or the toothed driven pulley 14cdb.

The left-right moving body 14cc, which is inserted through two metallic guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the back guide shaft 14cg, can move (slide) smoothly (smoothly) in the left-right direction along (guided by) the two metallic guide shafts. A belt fixing member 14cca is attached to the underside of the left-right moving body 14cc with a toothed belt 14ce sandwiched between it, and the toothed belt 14ce is sandwiched and fixed between the underside of the left-right moving body 14cc and the belt fixing member 14cca. As a result, when the toothed belt 14ce rotates clockwise, the left-right moving body 14cc can move (slide) smoothly (smoothly) to the left along (guided by) the two metallic guide shafts, and when the toothed belt 14ce rotates counterclockwise, the left-right moving body 14cc can move (slide) smoothly (smoothly) to the right along (guided by) the two metallic guide shafts.

As shown in FIG. 112(C), a decorative substrate 14ccb is disposed on the upper front side of the left-right moving body 14cc, and a cover body 14ccc made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material is attached to cover the decorative substrate 14ccb. The cover body 14ccc has cutouts 14ccca formed therein, which serve as wiring openings for passing a flexible flat cable 14ccbe (described later) and a flexible flat cable 14ccbf (described later).

At the rear center of the left and right moving body 14cc, a plate-shaped protrusion 14ccd is formed protruding toward the rear. The protrusion 14ccd can block the optical axis of the optical left and right moving body position detection sensor 14az. The optical left and right moving body position detection sensor 14az is arranged at a predetermined distance from each other on the left, center, and right sides of the rear side of the base body 14a, which is formed by appropriately bending a metal flat plate that is long in the left and right direction. When the protrusion 14ccd of the left and right moving body 14cc blocks the optical axis of the left left and right moving body position detection sensor 14az, the current position of the decorative light emitting unit 14e attached to the front side of the left and right moving body 14cc is in the retracted position on the left side of the image display device 7. When the protrusion 14ccd of the left and right moving body 14cc blocks the optical axis of the left and right moving body position detection sensor 14az in the center, the current position of the decorative light emitting unit 14e attached to the front side of the left and right moving body 14cc is at the center position of the image display device 7 (a position on a straight line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the image display device 7). When the protrusion 14ccd of the left and right moving body 14cc blocks the optical axis of the right left and right moving body position detection sensor 14az in the center, the current position of the decorative light emitting unit 14e attached to the front side of the left and right moving body 14cc is at a retracted position on the right side of the image display device 7. The signals output from the three optical left and right moving body position detection sensors 14az are input to the sub-control board 90, and the performance control microcomputer 91 is able to determine the current position of the decorative light emitting unit 14e attached to the front side of the left and right moving body 14cc based on the signals input from the three optical left and right moving body position detection sensors 14az.

As shown in FIG. 112(D), the LED mounting surface on the top (front side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb is equipped with multiple lamps 14ccba, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and multiple connectors 14ccbb to which electrical wiring is connected. On the LED mounting surface on the top (front side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb, four side-view type lamps 14ccba are arranged approximately horizontally at a predetermined distance apart as the first row on the front side, and four top-view type lamps 14ccba are arranged approximately horizontally at a predetermined distance apart as the second row on the back side.

The four side-view type lamps 14ccba in the first row are managed as the first lamp group, and the four top-view type lamps 14ccba in the second row are managed as the second lamp group. As described below, a decorative light-emitting unit 14e is attached to the front side of the left-right moving body 14cc. Ten top-view type lamps 14eca, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, are mounted in the decorative light-emitting unit 14e as the third row. The ten top-view type lamps 14eca in the third row of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e are managed as the third lamp group.

In addition, an upper connector 14ccbb is arranged along the left side of the decorative board 14ccb's LED mounting surface, which is the upper surface (front side) of the decorative board 14ccb, and a lower connector 14ccbb is arranged in the center of the lower side of the decorative board 14ccb.

In this way, a total of eight lamps 14ccba, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, are arranged on the LED mounting surface on the upper surface (front side) of the decorative board 14ccb, as well as two connectors 14ccbb.

On the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb, an LED control IC 14ccbc is arranged that can light up the eight lamps 14ccba arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb, and the ten lamps 14eca of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e described below in gradations. The LED control IC 14ccbc is assigned an identification ID by multiple resistors (not shown), and when external serial data is input based on a clock signal and the input serial data includes an identification ID that identifies itself, it takes in the input serial data and adjusts the current output from multiple channels based on the taken-in serial data, thereby enabling gradation control of a total of 18 lamps.

Specifically, the first channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc is electrically connected to the four lamps 14ccba in the first row. The four lamps 14ccba in the first row are gradation-controlled as a first lamp group by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc, and the light emission state is managed. The second channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc is electrically connected to the four lamps 14ccba in the second row. The four lamps 14ccba in the second row are gradation-controlled as a second lamp group by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc, and the light emission state is managed. The third channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc is electrically connected to the ten lamps 14eca in the third row of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e described later. The ten lamps 14eca in the third row of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e (described later) are gradation-controlled as a third lamp group and their light-emitting state is managed by adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc.

The upper connector 14ccbb is electrically connected to a flexible, lightweight flat cable 14ccbe, which receives control signals (serial data, clock signals) from the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 as well as a ground (GND) line and a power supply line via the lamp control board 107. The lower connector 14ccbb is electrically connected to a flexible, lightweight flat cable 14ccbf, which is electrically connected to the decorative board 14ec (described later) of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e attached to the front side of the left-right moving body 14cc.

The lower connector 14ccbb is a connector for transmitting control signals for the ten lamps 14eca of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e, which is gradation-controlled by the LED control IC 14ccbc, via a flexible flat cable 14ccbf.

The flexible flat cable 14ccbe is placed on the gutter section 14da of the cable housing gutter unit 14d, which is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material and attached to the front side of the bent metal base body 14a. The cable housing gutter unit 14d has the gutter section 14da formed integrally with the front side of a housing having a truss structure. The gutter section 14da is formed in a U-shaped cross section with an open top.

The upper connector 14ccbb of the decorative substrate 14ccb, which is arranged on the front side of the upper surface of the left-right moving body 14cc, is arranged above (directly above) the gutter portion 14da of the cable housing gutter unit 14d. As a result, one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe placed on the gutter portion 14da of the cable housing gutter unit 14d is lifted upward and electrically connected to the upper connector 14ccbb of the decorative substrate 14ccb so as to draw an arc, and when the left-right moving body 14cc moves to the right, the arc portion of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe moves to the right accordingly. At this time, the arc does not fluctuate greatly in the vertical direction. Also, when the left-right moving body 14cc moves to the left, the arc portion of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe moves to the left accordingly. At this time, the arc does not fluctuate greatly in the vertical direction. In addition, the portion of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe that is raised upward in an arc shape protrudes from the gutter portion 14da of the cable housing gutter unit 14d (a portion of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is exposed).

The flexible flat cable 14ccbe is flexible and lightweight, and is configured as a single wide package consisting of four electrical wirings. Although the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is white overall, it has a gray color close to white along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe. Along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe that has a gray color close to white, the first electrical wiring is arranged, the second electrical wiring is arranged at a predetermined distance from the first electrical wiring, the third electrical wiring is arranged at a predetermined distance from the second electrical wiring, and the fourth electrical wiring is arranged at a predetermined distance from the third electrical wiring. The flexible flat cable 14ccbe has a product number and a name printed in a color different from its own color (for example, black, since the entire flexible flat cable 14ccbe is white). Since the color applied along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is a gray color close to white, the gray color close to white that is applied along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is the same color family as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe. In addition, the color applied along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is a gray color close to white, and since the first electrical wiring is arranged along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe, it can be said that the first electrical wiring is a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wirings are white.

The first electrical wiring is a ground (GND) line, the second electrical wiring is a line that transmits serial data among the control signals, the third electrical wiring is a line that transmits a clock signal among the control signals, and the fourth electrical wiring is a power supply line.

The flexible flat cable 14ccbf is flexible and lightweight, like the flexible flat cable 14ccbe, and is configured as a single wide package consisting of five electrical wirings. Although the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is white overall, it has a gray color close to white along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf. Along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf that is gray close to white, the first electrical wiring is arranged, the second electrical wiring is arranged at a predetermined distance from the first electrical wiring, the third electrical wiring is arranged at a predetermined distance from the second electrical wiring, the fourth electrical wiring is arranged at a predetermined distance from the third electrical wiring, and the fifth electrical wiring is arranged at a predetermined distance from the fourth electrical wiring. The flexible flat cable 14ccbf has a shorter overall width than the flexible flat cable 14ccbe, and the predetermined distance dimension, which is the distance dimension between each electrical wiring in the flexible flat cable 14ccbf, is shorter than the predetermined distance dimension, which is the distance dimension between each electrical wiring in the flexible flat cable 14ccbe.

The product number and name of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf are printed in a color different from the color of the cable itself (for example, black, since the entire flexible flat cable 14ccbf is white). Since the color along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is a gray color close to white, the gray color close to white that is the color along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is the same color family as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf. Also, since the color along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is a gray color close to white, and the first electrical wiring is arranged along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf, it can be said that the first electrical wiring is a gray color close to white, and the second to fifth electrical wirings are white.

The first electrical wiring is a ground (GND) line, the second electrical wiring is a line that transmits a first control signal (a control signal for the brightness of red), the third electrical wiring is a line that transmits a second control signal (a control signal for the brightness of green), the fourth electrical wiring is a line that transmits a third control signal (a control signal for the brightness of blue), and the fifth electrical wiring is a power supply line.

Although the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is configured as a single package, it may be configured as individual electrical wiring. In this case, the first electrical wiring is a gray color close to white, and the second to fifth electrical wirings are white. The product number and name of each electrical wiring are printed on the first to fifth electrical wirings in a color different from the color of the wiring itself (for example, black because the first electrical wiring is a gray color close to white, and for example, black because the second to fifth electrical wirings are white). Since the first electrical wiring is a gray color close to white, the gray color close to white of the first electrical wiring is the same color family as the white color of the second to fifth electrical wirings. In addition, the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white is a ground (GND) line, the second electrical wiring having a white color is a line that transmits a first control signal (a control signal for the brightness of red), the third electrical wiring having a white color is a line that transmits a second control signal (a control signal for the brightness of green), the fourth electrical wiring having a white color is a line that transmits a third control signal (a control signal for the brightness of blue), and the fifth electrical wiring having a white color is a power supply line.

The upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb are both white connectors, and have the same color as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (the same color as the second to fourth electrical wirings of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe) and the same color as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (the same color as the second to fifth electrical wirings of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf). The upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb may be ivory. Ivory is a color close to white, so it is in the same color family as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe) and is in the same color family as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (the white color of the second to fifth electrical wirings of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf).

In this embodiment, green solder resist is applied to the upper surface (front side) and rear surface of the decorative substrate 14ccb. The solder resist is an insulating protective film that protects the circuit pattern from dust, moisture, heat, etc. The green solder resist applied to the front surface (front side) and rear surface of the decorative substrate 10aa is inexpensive and is also applied to the front surface (front side) and rear surface of various substrates such as the main control substrate 80, relay substrate 88, and dispensing control substrate 110 shown in FIG. 3, and the sub-control substrate 90, image control substrate 100, audio control substrate 106, lamp control substrate 107, and relay substrate 108 shown in FIG. 4. However, instead of the green solder resist, solder resist having the same color as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf may be applied to the upper surface (front side) and rear surface of the decorative substrate 14ccb.

In addition, the top-view type lamp 14ccba, which is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, has a light-emitting surface that is parallel to the upper surface (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb.Here, the light emitted by the top-view type lamp 14ccba is directed vertically to the upper surface (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb, that is, toward the upward direction, and brightly illuminates the cover body 14ccc. In contrast, the side-view type lamp 14ccba, which is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, has a light-emitting surface that is not parallel to the top surface (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb, but is at a 90-degree angle (right angle) to the top surface (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb. Here, the light emitted by the side-view type lamp 14ccba is parallel to the top surface (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb and travels forward, and when reflected downward by the downward reflecting portion formed on the inside of the front side of the cover body 14ccc, it is incident on the upper part of the decorative light-emitting portion 14e attached to the front side of the left-right moving body 14cc.

The decorative light-emitting unit 14e is composed of a T-shaped base body 14ea made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material and shaped like a plate-shaped English letter T stretched vertically, and a cover body 14eb made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material that covers the entire front surface of the part of the T-shaped base body 14ea that stretches vertically.

A decorative substrate 14ec is attached to the front of the vertically elongated portion of the T-shaped base body 14ea. As shown in Figures 112(A), (C), and (D), a plurality of top-view type lamps 14eca, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, are mounted on the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ec, and a connector 14ecb to which the flexible flat cable 14ccbf described above is electrically connected is mounted. On the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ec, ten lamps 14eca are arranged vertically in a row as the third row, spaced a predetermined distance apart. The top-view type lamp 14eca, which is a full-color LED capable of emitting various colors, has a light-emitting surface that is parallel to the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ec. Here, the light emitted by the lamp 14eca is directed perpendicular to the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ec (i.e., toward the player) and brightly illuminates the cover body 14eb.

The ten lamps 14eca in the third row are managed as the third lamp group. In addition, a connector 14ecb is located on the upper side of the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ec.

A light guide 14eaa having a sawtooth shape in the vertical direction is formed on the front of the upper left-right long part of the T-shaped base body 14ea. The light emitted by the side-view type lamp 14ccba of the decorative board 14ccb attached to the front side of the upper surface of the left-right moving body 14cc is reflected downward by the downward reflecting part formed on the inside of the front side of the cover body 14ccc as described above, and is incident on the upper part of the decorative light emitting part 14e attached to the front side of the left-right moving body 14cc. This incident light brightly illuminates the entire light guide 14eaa, and is emitted forward, that is, toward the player. Hereinafter, the light emitting mode that illuminates the cover body 14ccc, the light emitting mode that illuminates the cover body 14eb, and the light emitting mode that illuminates the light guiding part 14eaa may be simply referred to as the "light emitting mode of the first movable role 14".

The flexible flat cable 14ccbf electrically connects the lower connector 14ccbb of the decorative board 14ccb attached to the front side of the top surface of the left-right moving body 14cc and the connector 14ecb of the decorative board 14ec attached to the front of the vertically elongated portion of the T-shaped base body 14ea in the decorative light-emitting part 14e. Since the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is positioned in front of the light-guiding part 14eaa, it straddles the light-guiding part 14eaa, and the light emitted forward from the light-guiding part 14eaa brightly illuminates the rear of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf from the light-guiding part 14eaa.

Here, the method of assembling the first movable part 14 will be briefly explained. A cantilever shaft 14caa is attached to the left support member 14ca, and a transmission gear 14cad formed integrally with a toothed drive pulley 14cac is inserted into the cantilever shaft 14caa. Next, a left-right movement stepping motor 14b is attached to the left support member 14ca, and a drive gear 14cab is attached to the output shaft of the left-right movement stepping motor 14b so as to mesh with the transmission gear 14cad. Next, the left support member 14ca is attached to the base body 14a. Next, a cantilever shaft 14cda is attached to the driven moving body 14cd, and a toothed driven pulley 14cdb is inserted into the cantilever shaft 14cda. Next, a shaft with a locking hole 14cdc is attached to the driven moving body 14cd.

Next, one end of the two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the back guide shaft 14cg, is pushed into and fitted into the left support member 14ca attached to the base body 14a, the left-right moving body 14cc is first inserted into the two metal guide shafts, and then the driven moving body 14cd is inserted, and the right support member 14cb is pushed into and fitted into the other ends of the two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the back guide shaft 14cg, and the right support member 14cb is attached to the base body 14a.

Then, the toothed belt 14ce is wound around the toothed drive pulley 14cac of the left support member 14ca, and then the toothed belt 14ce is wound around the toothed driven pulley 14cdb of the right support member 14cb. Next, one end of the tension spring 14cf is inserted and locked into the shaft 14cdc with a locking hole of the right support member 14cb, and the other end of the tension spring 14cf is inserted and locked into a locking hole provided on the right end side of the base body 14a, near side. This allows the toothed belt 14ce wound around the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the toothed driven pulley 14cdb to be given appropriate tension.

Next, the belt fixing member 14cca is attached to the left-right moving body 14cc with the toothed belt 14ce sandwiched between the lower side of the left-right moving body 14cc, so that the toothed belt 14ce is sandwiched and fixed between the lower side of the left-right moving body 14cc and the belt fixing member 14cca.

Next, a cable housing gutter unit 14d is attached to the front side of the bent metal base body 14a. Next, three optical left/right moving body position detection sensors 14az are attached to the left, center, and right sides of the rear side of the base body 14a.

Next, the decorative board 14ccb is attached to the front side of the upper surface of the left-right moving body 14cc, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is placed in the gutter section 14da of the cable housing gutter unit 14d, and one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is lifted upward and electrically connected to the upper connector 14ccbb of the decorative board 14ccb in an arc.

Next, the decorative substrate 14ec is attached to the front of the vertically elongated portion of the T-shaped base body 14ea of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e, and the cover body 14eb is attached to the front side of the vertically elongated portion of the T-shaped base body 14ea so as to cover the decorative substrate 14ec, that is, to cover the entire front of the vertically elongated portion of the T-shaped base body 14ea. Next, the upper back surface of the T-shaped base body 14ea is attached to the front side of the horizontally elongated portion 14cc so that the upper surface of the T-shaped base body 14ea is flush with (in the same plane as) the upper surface of the horizontally elongated portion 14cc to which the decorative substrate 14ccb is attached.

Next, one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is electrically connected to the connector 14ccbb on the underside of the decorative substrate 14ccb, and the other end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is electrically connected to the connector 14ecb on the decorative substrate 14ec. Next, the cover body 14ccc is attached to the front side of the upper surface of the left-right moving body 14cc so as to cover the decorative substrate 14ccb.

When the output shaft of the stepping motor 14b for left-right movement rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the first movable part 14 assembled in this manner transmits the clockwise rotation to the transmission gear 14cad that meshes with the drive gear 14cab attached to the output shaft of the stepping motor 14b for left-right movement. Since the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the transmission gear 14cad are integrally formed, the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the transmission gear 14cad rotate counterclockwise around the cantilever shaft 14caa as the center of rotation. When the toothed drive pulley 14cac rotates counterclockwise, the toothed belt 14ce wound around the toothed drive pulley 14cac also rotates counterclockwise. As a result, because the toothed belt 14ce is fixed to the underside of the left-right moving body 14cc by the belt fixing member 14cca, when the toothed belt 14ce rotates counterclockwise, the left-right moving body 14cc, which is inserted through the two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the back guide shaft 14cg, moves (slides) smoothly (smoothly) horizontally to the right along (is guided by) the two metal guide shafts, and the decorative light-emitting unit 14e attached to the front side of the left-right moving body 14cc moves (slides) to the right.

When the output shaft of the left-right movement stepping motor 14b rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, this counterclockwise rotation is transmitted to the transmission gear 14cad that meshes with the drive gear 14cab attached to the output shaft of the left-right movement stepping motor 14b, and since the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the transmission gear 14cad are formed as a single unit, the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the transmission gear 14cad rotate clockwise around the cantilever shaft 14caa as the center of rotation. When the toothed drive pulley 14cac rotates clockwise, the toothed belt 14ce wound around the toothed drive pulley 14cac also rotates clockwise. As a result, because the toothed belt 14ce is fixed to the underside of the left-right moving body 14cc by the belt fixing member 14cca, when the toothed belt 14ce rotates clockwise, the left-right moving body 14cc, which is inserted through the two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the back guide shaft 14cg, moves (slides) smoothly (smoothly) horizontally to the left along (guided by) the two metal guide shafts, and the decorative light-emitting unit 14e attached to the front side of the left-right moving body 14cc moves (slides) to the left.

As shown in Figures 112 (A), (C) and (D), from the front, through the cable accommodating gutter unit 14d formed from a transparent synthetic resin material and the cover body 14ccc of the left and right moving body 14cc formed from a transparent synthetic resin material, when the lamps 14ccba are turned off, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (which is white overall, but is a gray color close to white along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe) can be easily seen, the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb can be easily seen, the decorative board 14ccb of the left and right moving body 14cc can be easily seen, and the total of eight lamps 14ccba, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors on the decorative board 14ccb, can be easily seen. In addition, when the lamps 14eca are turned off, the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (which is white overall, but is grayish white along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf) can be easily seen through the cover 14ccc of the left-right moving body 14cc, which is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the cover 14eb of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e, which is made of a transparent synthetic resin material. In addition, when the lamps 14eca are turned off, the decorative substrate 14ec of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e can be easily seen through the cover 14eb of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e, which is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the total of 10 lamps 14eca, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, of the decorative substrate 14ec can be easily seen.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe can be seen because the portion that is raised upward in an arc shape protrudes from the gutter portion 14da of the cable housing gutter unit 14d (a portion of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is exposed). As described above, the flexible flat cable 14ccbf can be seen because it straddles the light guide portion 14eaa formed on the front surface of the portion of the T-shaped base body 14ea in the decorative light-emitting portion 14e that is elongated in the vertical direction.

The movable part 14 is placed on a specified member provided on the rear side of the game board 2 above the image display device 7 so as not to interfere with the various units of the second movable part 15. Next, a screw (not shown) is inserted into the mounting hole of the base body 14a and screwed into a screw hole formed in a specified member provided on the rear side of the game board 2, thereby fixing the movable part 14 to the rear side of the game board 2. After the movable part 14 is fixed to the specified member provided on the rear side of the game board 2, the image display device 7 is attached to this specified member.

In this embodiment, the cover body 14ccc of the left-right moving body 14cc and the cover body 14eb of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e are made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, a portion of the front surface or a portion of the side surface of the cover body 14ccc of the left-right moving body 14cc and the cover body 14eb of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e may be configured to have a plating layer with a metallic luster, or may be configured to have a three-dimensional design and be painted with a colored paint. Even with this configuration, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf can be easily seen through the transparent areas of the cover body 14ccc of the left-right moving body 14cc and the cover body 14eb of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e when the lamps 14ccba and 14eca are turned off.

In addition, in this embodiment, the cover body 14ccc of the left-right moving body 14cc and the cover body 14eb of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e are formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, the cover body 14ccc of the left-right moving body 14cc and the cover body 14eb of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e may be formed from a colored and transparent synthetic resin material. Examples of colors include red, blue, and green. Even with this configuration, the flexible flat cables 14ccbe and 14ccbf can be seen through the colored and transparent areas when the lamps 14ccba and 14eca are turned off.

[Structure of fixed winning device 19]
Next, the structure of the fixed winning device 19 will be described with reference to FIG. 113. The fixed winning device 19 is disposed below the image display device 7, and is provided with a first starting hole 20 in which the ease of entry of the game ball is always constant. The entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for the drawing of the first special pattern (jackpot drawing), and the game device is an opportunity for obtaining the jackpot random number and determining the jackpot. In addition, the fixed winning device 19 is capable of emitting light in multiple colors, and is therefore a game device capable of emitting light in multiple colors.

As shown in Figures 113 (A) to (D), the fixed winning device 19 is composed of a plate-shaped base body 19a made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material attached to the front (surface) of the game board 2, a bulge 19b made of a colorless and transparent synthetic material attached to the front (surface) of the base body 19a, bulging forward and opening at the top where the first starting hole 20 is located, a decorative board 19c attached to the rear (rear) of the base body 19a, and a ball trough 19d made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material attached to the rear (rear) of the base body 19a, which guides backward the game ball that enters the first starting hole 20 located at the top of the bulge 19b and falls into the inside of the bulge 19b.

A rectangular through hole (not shown) is formed in the upper part of the rear side (back surface) of the base body 19a at a position corresponding to the first starting hole 20 located at the top of the bulge 19b, and a pair of guide pieces 19aa made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material are provided to the left and right of this through hole. The inside of the upper part of the rear side (back surface) of the base body 19a and the pair of guide pieces 19aa each have a guide groove (not shown) formed therein for inserting and guiding the first starting hole sensor 20a, which detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20, from the rear of the base body 19a toward the bulge 19b.

When the first starting hole sensor 20a is pushed along this guide groove into the guide groove on the inner surface of the bulge 19b, the hook piece 19ab, which has a hook shape formed on the upper part of the rear surface (back surface) of the base body 19a, automatically engages with the rear surface of the first starting hole sensor 20a, thereby fixing the first starting hole sensor 20a. As a result, the game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 passes through the first starting hole sensor 20a, and the first starting hole sensor 20a can detect the game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20. The first starting hole sensor 20a is formed from a colored, opaque material.

In addition, at a position corresponding to the ball channel section 19d attached to the rear surface (back surface) of the base body 19a, a rectangular opening 19ac is formed to allow the ball to enter the first starting hole 20 located at the top of the bulge section 19b and connect the internal space of the bulge section 19b to the internal space of the ball channel section 19d.

The bulge 19b has a box shape with openings on the top and rear, and an inclined portion 19ba is formed on the lower inside of the bulge 19b to guide a game ball that enters and falls into the first starting hole 20 located at the top of the bulge 19b backwards. The bulge 19b is closed by attaching the front surface (surface) of the base body 19a to the rear surface of the bulge 19b, but the internal space of the bulge 19b is connected to the opening 19ac.

A wiring processing piece 19da is formed on each of the outer walls of the bulb section 19d to process the electrical wiring to the decorative board 19c. The left wiring processing piece 19da and the right wiring processing piece 19da are also made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material.

As shown in Fig. 113(F), a plurality of top-view type lamps 19ca, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, are mounted on the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c. On the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c, two lamps 19ca are arranged approximately horizontally at a first predetermined distance as the first tier, four lamps 19ca are arranged approximately horizontally at a second predetermined distance (the second predetermined distance is shorter than the first predetermined distance) as the second tier arranged above the first tier, and four lamps 19ca are arranged approximately horizontally at a third predetermined distance (the third predetermined distance is shorter than the second predetermined distance) as the third tier, which is the top tier above the second tier. The top-view type lamp 19ca, which is a full-color LED capable of emitting various colors, has a light-emitting surface that is parallel to the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c, and the light emitted by the lamp 19ca faces perpendicularly to the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c (i.e., toward the player), brightly illuminating the base body 19a and the bulge 19b. Hereinafter, the light-emitting mode that illuminates the base body 19a and the bulge 19b may be simply referred to as the "light-emitting mode of the fixed winning device 19."

The two lamps 19ca in the first row, which is the bottom row, are managed as the first lamp group, the four lamps 19ca in the second row are managed as the second lamp group, and the four lamps 19ca in the third row, which is the top row, are managed as the third lamp group.

In this way, a total of 10 lamps 19ca, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, are arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c.

As shown in Figures 113 (C) and (D), multiple connectors 19cb to which electrical wiring is connected are mounted on the rear side, which is the non-LED mounting surface opposite the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c, and an LED control IC 19cc is arranged that can light up tones of a total of 10 lamps 19ca arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c.

On the rear side, the side opposite the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 19c where the LEDs are not mounted, the left connector 19cb is located on the lower left side, and the right connector 19cb is located on the lower right side.

The LED control IC 19cc is assigned an identification ID by multiple resistors (not shown), and when external serial data is input based on a clock signal and the input serial data includes an identification ID that identifies the LED control IC 19cc, the input serial data is imported and, based on the imported serial data, the current output from multiple channels is adjusted, thereby enabling gradation control of a total of 10 lamps 19ca.

Specifically, the first channel of the LED control IC 19cc is electrically connected to two lamps 19ca in the first tier, which is the lowest tier. The two lamps 19ca in the first tier, which is the lowest tier, are gradation-controlled as a first lamp group by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 19cc, and their light emission modes are managed. The second channel of the LED control IC 19cc is electrically connected to four lamps 19ca in the second tier. The four lamps 19ca in the second tier are gradation-controlled as a second lamp group by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 19cc, and their light emission modes are managed. The third channel of the LED control IC 19cc is electrically connected to four lamps 19ca in the third tier, which is the highest tier. The four lamps 19ca in the third tier are gradation-controlled as a third lamp group by adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 19cc, and their light emission modes are managed.

The right connector 19cb is electrically connected to the right electrical wiring 19cd, which receives control signals (serial data, clock signals) from the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 as well as a ground (GND) line and a power supply line via the lamp control board 107. The left connector 19cb is electrically connected to the left electrical wiring 19cd, which is electrically connected to a decorative board (not shown) that lights up the normal variable winning device 22 in gradations, which is located below the fixed winning device 19 (first starting hole 20).

The normal variable winning device 22 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material, like the fixed winning device 19. The normal variable winning device 22 has a second starting hole 21. The normal variable winning device 22 has a movable member 23 in front of the second starting hole 21, and the second starting hole 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 triggers the drawing of a second special pattern (jackpot drawing), and is a gaming device that triggers the acquisition of jackpot random numbers and the like and the determination of a jackpot. In addition, like the fixed winning device 19, the normal variable winning device 22 is capable of emitting light in multiple colors, and is therefore a gaming device capable of emitting light in multiple colors.

The left connector 19cb is a connector for transmitting the control signal (serial data, clock signal), ground (GND) line, and power line from the right connector 19cb input via the right electrical wiring 19cd to a decorative board (not shown) that lights up the normal variable winning device 22 in gradations via the left electrical wiring 19cd.

The right-side electrical wiring 19cd and the left-side electrical wiring 19cd are each made up of four electrical wirings, with the first electrical wiring being a gray color close to white and the second to fourth electrical wirings being white. The first to fourth electrical wirings have their product numbers and names printed in a color different from the color of the electrical wiring itself (e.g., black since the first electrical wiring is a gray color close to white, and black since the second to fourth electrical wirings are white). Note that since the first electrical wiring is a gray color close to white, the gray color close to white of the first electrical wiring is the same color family as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings.

The first electrical wiring, which is a gray color close to white, is a ground (GND) line, the second electrical wiring, which is white, is a line that transmits serial data among the control signals, the third electrical wiring, which is white, is a line that transmits a clock signal among the control signals, and the fourth electrical wiring, which is white, is a power supply line.

The right connector 19cb and the left connector 19cb are both white connectors, and have the same color as the white of the second to fourth electrical wiring. The right connector 19cb and the left connector 19cb may be ivory. Ivory is a color close to white, so it is in the same color family as the white of the second to fourth electrical wiring.

An electrical wiring 20ab is electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear side of the first starting port sensor 20a. The electrical wiring 20ab is composed of two electrical wirings, the first electrical wiring being pink and the second electrical wiring being yellow. The product number and name of each electrical wiring is printed on the first and second electrical wirings in a color different from the color of the electrical wiring itself (for example, white since the first electrical wiring is pink, and white since the second electrical wiring is yellow). The pink color is close to red and is in the same color family as red.

The signal output from the first start hole sensor 20a is input to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88, and the game control microcomputer 81 controls the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 according to the program based on the input signal from the first start hole sensor 20a.

The right wiring processing piece 19da holds the electrical wiring 20ab electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear of the first starting port sensor 20a and the right electrical wiring 19cd electrically connected to the right connector 19cb, while the left wiring processing piece 19da holds the left electrical wiring 19cd electrically connected to the left connector 19cb.

In this embodiment, green solder resist is applied to the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative board 19c. The solder resist is an insulating protective film that protects the circuit pattern from dust, moisture, heat, etc. The green solder resist applied to the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative board 19c is inexpensive and is also applied to the front side (surface side) and rear side of various boards such as the main control board 80, relay board 88, and dispensing control board 110 shown in FIG. 3, and the sub-control board 90, image control board 100, audio control board 106, lamp control board board 107, and relay board 108 shown in FIG. 4. However, instead of the green solder resist, solder resist having the same color as the white of the second to fourth electrical wiring in the right-side electrical wiring 19cd and the left-side electrical wiring 19cd may be applied to the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative board 19c. In addition, a through hole 19ce is formed in the decorative substrate 19c at a position corresponding to an attachment boss (not shown) formed on the rear surface of the base body 19a.

Here, the assembly method of the fixed winning device 19 will be briefly explained. First, the rear surface of the bulge 19b is placed on the front side of the base body 19a, and the bulge 19b is attached to the front side of the base body 19a by screwing a screw (not shown) from the back side of the base body 19a. Next, the first starting hole sensor 20a is inserted from the rear of the base body 19a toward the bulge 19b and pushed along the guide groove (not shown) to the guide groove on the inner side of the bulge 19b, so that the hook piece 19ab having a hook shape formed on the upper part of the rear surface (back surface) of the base body 19a is automatically engaged with the rear surface of the first starting hole sensor 20a. Next, the ball groove portion 19d is attached to the rear side of the base body 19a by screwing a screw (not shown) through the mounting boss hole (not shown) provided on both front walls of the ball groove portion 19d.

Then, the right electrical wiring 19cd is electrically connected to the right connector 19cb of the decorative board 19c, and the left electrical wiring 19cd is electrically connected to the left connector 19cb of the decorative board 19c. Next, the decorative board 19c is positioned so that the LED mounting surface, which is the front surface (surface), faces the rear surface (rear surface) of the base body 19a, and the through hole 19ce of the decorative board 19c is inserted into the mounting boss (not shown) formed on the rear surface side of the base body 19a, and the decorative board 19c is fixed to the base body 19a by screwing in a screw (not shown) from the rear surface of the decorative board 19c.

Next, the electrical wiring 20ab is electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting port sensor 20a, and the electrical wiring 20ab is bent and secured with the right wiring processing piece 19da. Next, the right electrical wiring 19cd electrically connected to the right connector 19cb of the decorative board 19c is secured with the right wiring processing piece 19da, and the left electrical wiring 19cd electrically connected to the left connector 19cb of the decorative board 19c is secured with the left wiring processing piece 19da.

As shown in Figures 113(A), (B), and (E), when the fixed winning device 19 is assembled in this manner, from the front, through the bulge 19b formed of a transparent synthetic resin material and the base body 19a, the right-side electrical wiring 19cd (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color), the electrical wiring 20ab (the first electrical wiring having a pink color, the second electrical wiring having a yellow color), the left-side electrical wiring 19cd (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color), the decorative board 19c, and the total of 10 lamps 19ca, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, can be easily seen.

The fixed winning device 19 is inserted from the front side (surface side) of the game board 2 toward the rear of the game board 2 into a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2, and the fixed winning device 19 is fixed to the game board 2 by screwing in screws (not shown) into two mounting pieces 19ad formed on both the left and right ends of the base body 19a.

In this embodiment, the base body 19a and the bulge 19b are made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, a portion of the front surface or a portion of the side surface of the base body 19a and the bulge 19b may be configured to have a plating layer with a metallic luster, or may be configured to be painted with a colored paint with a three-dimensional design. Also, a sticker with the Chinese character "start" printed with a colored paint may be attached to a portion of the front surface of the bulge 19b. Even with this configuration, the right electrical wiring 19cd (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having white), the electrical wiring 20ab (the first electrical wiring having a pink color, the second electrical wiring having a yellow color), and the left electrical wiring 19cd (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having white) can be easily seen through the transparent areas of the base body 19a and the bulge 19b when the lamp 19ca is turned off.

In the present embodiment, the base body 19a and the bulge 19b are made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, the base body 19a and the bulge 19b may be made of a colored and transparent synthetic resin material. Examples of colors include red, blue, and green. Even with this configuration, when the lamp 19ca is turned off, the right electrical wiring 19cd (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color), the electrical wiring 20ab (the first electrical wiring having a pink color, the second electrical wiring having a yellow color), and the left electrical wiring 19cd (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) can be seen through the colored and transparent region.

[Suppression of Wiring Visibility by the Decorative Part 10a Arranged in the Lower Right Part of the Center Decorative Part 10]
Next, the wire visibility suppression effect of the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 will be described. As shown in Figs. 111(A), (B), and (E), the decorative part 10a allows the upper electric wiring 10aad (the first electric wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electric wiring having a white color) and the lower electric wiring 10aad (the first electric wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electric wiring having a white color) to be visible from the front through the cover body 10ac formed of a transparent synthetic resin material. For this reason, the upper electric wiring 10aad and the lower electric wiring 10aad, which are completely unrelated to the effect, may be felt by the player to be an eyesore.

The upper electrical wiring 10aad is wiring for inputting control signals (serial data, clock signal) from the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, as well as a ground (GND) line and a power supply line via the lamp control board 107, and the lower electrical wiring 10aad is wiring that is electrically connected to a decorative board (not shown) that lights up the stage section 11 at the bottom of the center decorative section 10 in gradations.

In this embodiment, the decorative part 10a is configured as a gaming device capable of emitting light in multiple colors, and on the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa, as described above, two lamps 10aaa are arranged approximately horizontally at a predetermined distance apart as the first tier, which is the lowest tier, three lamps 10aaa are arranged approximately horizontally at a predetermined distance apart as the second tier located above the first tier, four lamps 10aaa are arranged approximately horizontally at a predetermined distance apart as the third tier located above the second tier, and two lamps 10aaa are arranged approximately horizontally at a predetermined distance apart as the fourth tier, which is the top tier above the third tier.

Also, on the rear side, which is the non-LED mounting surface opposite the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa, an LED control IC 10aac is arranged that can provide gradational lighting for a total of 11 lamps 10aaa that are arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa. The LED control IC 10aac is capable of gradational control of the total of 11 lamps 10aaa by adjusting the current output from multiple channels.

The two lamps 10aaa in the first tier, which is the bottom tier, are gradation-controlled as a first lamp group by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and their light emission modes are managed; the three lamps 10aaa in the second tier are gradation-controlled as a second lamp group by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and their light emission modes are managed; the four lamps 10aaa in the third tier are gradation-controlled as a third lamp group by adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and their light emission modes are managed; and the two lamps 10aaa in the fourth tier, which is the top tier, are gradation-controlled as a fourth lamp group by adjusting the current output from the fourth channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and their light emission modes are managed.

The performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 controls the light emission mode of the decorative part 10a based on a control signal (serial data, clock signal), so that, of the first to fourth lamp groups, the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group that are closest to the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab are set to a light emission mode in which they emit white light (including on, flashing, and gradated lighting), and the third lamp group and the fourth lamp group are set to a light emission mode in which they emit light in a color different from the light emission mode in which they emit white light (including on, flashing, and gradated lighting) (for example, blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.). As a result, the upper electrical wiring 10aad is composed of the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wiring having white colors, and the lower electrical wiring 10aad is composed of the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wiring having white colors, so that by reducing the visibility of the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad, the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad can be made less noticeable. Of course, as the light emission mode of the decorative part 10a, the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group among the first lamp group to the fourth lamp group are not always in a white light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), but are appropriately in a light emission mode that includes a white light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) (for example, in addition to a light emission mode that alternates between a white light emission mode and a light emission mode that emits a color different from white, for example, when the light emission mode that emits a color different from white is changed only multiple times, a light emission mode that changes so that a white light emission mode is incorporated (sandwiched) among them can be mentioned.), and the visibility of the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad can be suppressed to make the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad less noticeable.

In addition, as described above, the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab are both white connectors and have the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings in the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad. Therefore, the light-emitting mode of the decorative part 10a is a light-emitting mode that emits white light (including on, flashing, and gradational lighting), or includes a light-emitting mode that emits white light (including on, flashing, and gradational lighting), thereby reducing the visibility of the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab and making the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab less noticeable. Even if the color of the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab is ivory, as described above, ivory is a color close to white, so it is the same color family as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings in the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad, and the light emission mode of the decorative part 10a is a light emission mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), or includes a light emission mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), thereby suppressing the visibility of the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab and making them less noticeable.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses a control signal (serial data, clock signal) to set the light emission mode of the decorative part 10a to a light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) in which all lamp groups from the first lamp group to the fourth lamp group emit white light as a single color (monochrome emission), thereby reducing the visibility of the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad and making the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad less noticeable.

The white color emitted by the lamp 10aaa arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa is the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wiring in the upper electrical wiring 10aad, and is also the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wiring in the lower electrical wiring 10aad. In addition, the white color emitted by the lamp 10aaa arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 10aa is a white-based color that is a gray color close to the white color of the first electrical wiring in the upper electrical wiring 10aad, and is also a white-based color that is a gray color close to the white color of the first electrical wiring in the lower electrical wiring 10aad.

For example, if the upper electrical wiring 10aad is composed of a first electrical wiring having a white color and second to fourth electrical wiring having a yellow color, and the lower electrical wiring 10aad is composed of a first electrical wiring having a white color and second to fourth electrical wiring having a yellow color, then, of the first to fourth lamp groups, the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group that is close to the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab is set to an illumination mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), and the third lamp group and the fourth lamp group are set to emit white light. Alternatively, the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group may be configured to emit light in a color (e.g., blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.) different from the light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) in which the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group emit light in yellow (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), and the third lamp group and the fourth lamp group may be configured to emit light in a color (e.g., blue, green, red, purple, white, rainbow, etc.) different from the light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) in which the third lamp group and the fourth lamp group emit light in yellow. Even with this configuration, the visibility of the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad can be suppressed, making the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad less noticeable. Of course, as the light emission mode of the decorative part 10a, the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group among the first lamp group to the fourth lamp group are not always in a light emission mode that emits white or yellow light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), but are appropriately in a light emission mode that includes a light emission mode that emits white or yellow light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) (for example, in addition to a light emission mode that alternates between a light emission mode that emits white or yellow light and a light emission mode that emits a color other than white or yellow, for example, when a light emission mode that emits a color other than white or yellow is changed only multiple times, a light emission mode that changes to incorporate (sandwich) a light emission mode that emits white or yellow light can be mentioned.), and the visibility of the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad can be suppressed, making the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad less noticeable.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses a control signal (serial data, clock signal) to set the light emission mode of the decorative part 10a to a light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) in which all lamp groups from the first lamp group to the fourth lamp group emit light in a single color (monochrome light emission) of either white or yellow, thereby reducing the visibility of the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad and making them less noticeable.

In this embodiment, as described above, green solder resist is applied to the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative substrate 10aa. However, instead of green solder resist, solder resist having the same color as the white of the second to fourth electrical wirings in the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad may be applied to the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative substrate 10aa. In this way, the light emission mode of the decorative portion 10a includes a light emission mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), thereby suppressing the visibility of the decorative substrate 10aa and making the decorative substrate 10aa less noticeable.

[Suppression of Wiring Visibility of First Movable Feature 14]
Next, the wiring visibility suppression performance of the first movable role 14 will be described. As shown in Fig. 112 (A), (C), and (D), the first movable role 14 can be seen from the front through the cable housing gutter unit 14d made of a transparent synthetic resin material and the cover body 14ccc of the left and right moving body 14cc made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (which has a white color overall, but is grayish white along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe) can be seen, and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (which has a white color overall, but is grayish white along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf) can be seen through the cover body 14ccc of the left and right moving body 14cc made of a transparent synthetic resin material and the cover body 14eb of the decorative light emitting part 14e made of a transparent synthetic resin material. For this reason, the player may feel that the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf, which are completely unrelated to the performance, are an eyesore.

The flexible flat cable 14ccbe is a wiring that inputs control signals (serial data, clock signal) from the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 as well as a ground (GND) line and a power supply line via the lamp control board 107, and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is a wiring that electrically connects the decorative board 14ccb arranged on the front side of the top surface of the left-right moving body 14cc and the decorative board 14ec of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e attached to the front side of the left-right moving body 14cc.

In this embodiment, the decorative board 14ccb arranged on the front side of the top surface of the left and right moving body 14cc of the first movable role 14, and the decorative board 14ec arranged on the decorative light-emitting unit 14e attached to the front side of the left and right moving body 14cc are configured as a gaming device that can emit multi-colored light. On the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ccb arranged on the left and right moving body 14cc, as described above, four side-view type lamps 14ccba are arranged approximately horizontally at a predetermined distance as the first row on the front side, and four top-view type lamps 14ccba are arranged approximately horizontally at a predetermined distance as the second row on the back side. On the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ec arranged on the decorative light-emitting unit 14e, as described above, ten lamps 14eca are arranged vertically in a row at a predetermined distance as the third row.

Also, on the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ccb arranged on the left-right moving body 14cc, an LED control IC 14ccbc is arranged that can provide gradational illumination for eight lamps 14ccba arranged on the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ccb, and ten lamps 14eca arranged on the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ec on the decorative light-emitting part 14e side. The LED control IC 14ccbc is capable of gradational control of a total of 18 lamps by adjusting the current output from multiple channels.

The four lamps 14ccba in the first row of the left-right moving body 14cc are gradation-controlled as a first lamp group and their light emission modes are managed by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc, the four lamps 14ccba in the second row of the left-right moving body 14cc are gradation-controlled as a second lamp group and their light emission modes are managed by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc, and the ten lamps 14eca in the third row of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e are gradation-controlled as a third lamp group and their light emission modes are managed by adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc.

The performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 controls the first movable role 14 to emit light in a white light mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) for the four side-view type lamps 14ccba of the first lamp group, which are close to the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb, among the first lamp group to the third lamp group, and emit light in a color (for example, blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.) different from the white light mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) for the second lamp group and the third lamp group, by the control signal (serial data, clock signal). As a result, since the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf are entirely white, the visibility of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf can be suppressed to make the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf less noticeable. Furthermore, since the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is disposed in front of the above-mentioned light guide section 14eaa, it straddles the light guide section 14eaa, and the light from the four side-view type lamps 14ccba in the first row of the first lamp group emits white light in front of the light guide section 14eaa (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), thereby reducing the visibility of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf and making the flexible flat cable 14ccbf less noticeable.

Of course, as the light emission mode of the first movable part 14, the first lamp group among the first lamp group to the third lamp group is not always set to a light emission mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), but rather, it is set to a light emission mode that appropriately includes a light emission mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) (for example, in addition to a light emission mode that alternates between a light emission mode that emits white light and a light emission mode that emits a color other than white, for example, when a light emission mode that emits a color other than white is changed only multiple times, a light emission mode that changes so that a light emission mode that emits white light is incorporated (sandwiched) among them can be mentioned.), and thereby the visibility of the flexible flat cables 14ccbe and 14ccbf can be suppressed, thereby making the flexible flat cables 14ccbe and 14ccbf less noticeable.

In addition, as described above, the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb of the decorative board 14ccb arranged on the left-right moving body 14cc are both white connectors, and have the same color as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (the same color as the white of the second to fourth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe) and the same color as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (the same color as the white of the second to fifth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf). Therefore, the light-emitting mode of the first movable part 14 is a light-emitting mode that emits white light (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting), or includes a light-emitting mode that emits white light (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting), thereby suppressing the visibility of the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb and making the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb less noticeable. Even if the color of the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb is ivory, as described above, ivory is a color close to white, so it is the same color family as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (the white color of the second to fourth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe) and the same color family as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (the white color of the second to fifth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf). The light-emitting mode of the first movable part 14 is a light-emitting mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), or includes a light-emitting mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), thereby suppressing the visibility of the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb and making the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb less noticeable.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses a control signal (serial data, clock signal) to set the light emission mode of the first movable prop 14 to a light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) in which all lamp groups from the first lamp group to the third lamp group emit white light as a single color (monochrome emission), thereby reducing the visibility of the flexible flat cables 14ccbe and 14ccbf and making the flexible flat cables 14ccbe and 14ccbf less noticeable.

The white light emitted by the eight lamps 14ccba arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ccb on the left-right moving body 14cc side, and the ten lamps 14eca arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ec on the decorative light-emitting section 14e side, is the same color as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe) and is also the same color as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (the same color as the white color of the second to fifth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf). In addition, the white light emitted by the eight lamps 14ccba arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ccb on the left-right moving body 14cc side, and the ten lamps 14eca arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative light-emitting unit 14e on the decorative light-emitting unit 14e side, is a white-based color in which the color applied along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is a gray color close to white (a gray color close to the white color of the first electrical wiring), and is also a white-based color in which the color applied along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is a gray color close to white (a gray color close to the white color of the first electrical wiring).

For example, the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is configured as a single package, but each may be configured as individual electrical wiring. In this case, the first electrical wiring is a gray color close to white, and the second to fifth electrical wirings are white. The product number and name of each electrical wiring are printed on the first to fifth electrical wirings in a color different from the color of the wiring itself (for example, black because the first electrical wiring is a gray color close to white, and for example, black because the second to fifth electrical wirings are white). Even when configured in this manner, as described above, the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is entirely white, with one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf being colored a gray color close to white. Therefore, even if the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is replaced by individual electrical wiring, the first movable part 14 can be configured to have a white light emission mode (including on, blinking, and gradational lighting) as the light emission mode, or can include a white light emission mode (including on, blinking, and gradational lighting) just like the flexible flat cable 14ccbf, thereby reducing the visibility of each individual electrical wiring and making each individual electrical wiring less noticeable.

In addition, when each of the electric wirings is configured as individual electric wirings instead of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf, for example, the first electric wiring is configured with white and the second to fifth electric wirings are configured with yellow. In this case, the first lamp group may be configured with an emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits white light, and the second lamp group and the third lamp group may be configured with an emission mode that emits light in a color (for example, blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.) different from the emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits white light, or the first lamp group may be configured with an emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits yellow light, and the second lamp group and the third lamp group may be configured with an emission mode that emits light in a color (for example, blue, green, red, purple, white, rainbow, etc.) different from the emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits yellow light. Even with this configuration, the visibility of each individual electric wiring can be suppressed to make each individual electric wiring less noticeable. Of course, as the light emission mode of the first movable part 14, the first lamp group among the first lamp group to the third lamp group is not always in a light emission mode that emits white or yellow light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), but is appropriately in a light emission mode that includes a light emission mode that emits white or yellow light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) (for example, in addition to a light emission mode that alternates between a light emission mode that emits white or yellow light and a light emission mode that emits a color other than white or yellow, for example, when a light emission mode that emits a color other than white or yellow is changed only multiple times, a light emission mode that changes so as to incorporate (sandwich) a light emission mode that emits white or yellow light can be mentioned.), and the visibility of each individual electrical wiring can be suppressed to make each individual electrical wiring less noticeable.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses a control signal (serial data, clock signal) to set the light emission mode of the first movable part 14 to a light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) in which all lamp groups from the first lamp group to the third lamp group emit light in a single color (monochromatic emission) of either white or yellow, thereby reducing the visibility of each individual electrical wiring and making each individual electrical wiring less noticeable.

In this embodiment, as described above, the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative board 14ccb arranged on the left-right moving body 14cc and the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative board 14ec arranged on the decorative light-emitting unit 14e are coated with green solder resist. However, instead of green solder resist, the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative board 14ccb arranged on the left-right moving body 14cc and the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative board 14ec arranged on the decorative light-emitting unit 14e may be coated with solder resist having the same color as the overall color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (the white color of the second to fourth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe) and the overall color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (the white color of the second to fifth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf). In this way, the light emission modes of the first movable part 14 include white light emission modes (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting), which reduces the visibility of the decorative board 14ccb arranged on the left-right moving body 14cc and the decorative board 14ec arranged on the decorative light-emitting section 14e, making it possible to make the decorative board 14ccb arranged on the left-right moving body 14cc and the decorative board 14ec arranged on the decorative light-emitting section 14e less noticeable.

[Suppression of visibility of wiring of fixed winning device 19]
Next, the wire visibility suppression performance of the fixed winning device 19 will be described. As shown in Fig. 113 (A), (B), (E), the fixed winning device 19 can be seen from the front through the bulge 19b and base body 19a formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the right electric wiring 19cd (the first electric wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electric wiring having a white color), the electric wiring 20ab (the first electric wiring having a pink color, the second electric wiring having a yellow color), and the left electric wiring 19cd (the first electric wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electric wiring having a white color). For this reason, the player may feel that the right electric wiring 19cd, the electric wiring 20ab, and the left electric wiring 19cd, which are completely unrelated to the performance, are an eyesore.

The electrical wiring 19cd on the right side is a wiring that inputs the ground (GND) line and power line via the lamp control board 107 in addition to the control signals (serial data, clock signal) from the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, the electrical wiring 20ab is a wiring that is electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear of the first starting hole sensor 20a, and the electrical wiring 19cd on the left side is a wiring that is electrically connected to a decorative board (not shown) that lights up in gradations the normal variable winning device 22 located below the fixed winning device 19 (first starting hole 20).

In this embodiment, the fixed winning device 19 is configured as a gaming device capable of emitting multiple colors of light, and on the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c, as described above, two lamps 19ca are arranged approximately horizontally at a first predetermined distance apart as the first tier, four lamps 19ca are arranged approximately horizontally at a second predetermined distance apart as the second tier located above the first tier, and four lamps 19ca are arranged approximately horizontally at a third predetermined distance apart as the third tier, which is the topmost tier, above the second tier.

Also, on the rear side, which is the side opposite the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c and on which the LEDs are not mounted, an LED control IC 19cc is arranged that can provide gradational lighting for a total of ten lamps 19ca that are arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c. The LED control IC 19cc is capable of gradational control of the total of ten lamps 19ca by adjusting the current output from multiple channels.

The two lamps 19ca in the first tier, which is the bottom tier, are gradation-controlled as a first lamp group and their light emission modes are managed by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 19cc, the four lamps 19ca in the second tier are gradation-controlled as a second lamp group and their light emission modes are managed by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 19cc, and the four lamps 19ca in the third tier are gradation-controlled as a third lamp group and their light emission modes are managed by adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 19cc.

The performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 controls the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19 based on a control signal (serial data, clock signal), so that of the first lamp group to the third lamp group, the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group that are closest to the right connector 19cb and the left connector 19cb are set to a light emission mode in which they emit white light (including on, flashing, and gradation lighting), and the third lamp group is set to a light emission mode in which it emits light in a color different from the light emission mode in which it emits white light (including on, flashing, and gradation lighting) (for example, blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.). As a result, the right-side electrical wiring 19cd is composed of the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wiring having white colors, and the left-side electrical wiring 19cd is composed of the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wiring having white colors, so that by reducing the visibility of the right-side electrical wiring 19cd and the left-side electrical wiring 19cd, the right-side electrical wiring 19cd and the left-side electrical wiring 19cd can be made less noticeable. Of course, as the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19, among the first lamp group to the third lamp group, the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group are not always in a white light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), but are appropriately in a light emission mode that includes a white light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) (for example, in addition to a light emission mode that alternates between a white light emission mode and a light emission mode that emits a color other than white, for example, when the light emission mode that emits a color other than white changes only multiple times, a light emission mode that changes so that a white light emission mode is incorporated (sandwiched) among them can be mentioned.), and the visibility of the right side electrical wiring 19cd and the left side electrical wiring 19cd can be suppressed to make the right side electrical wiring 19cd and the left side electrical wiring 19cd less noticeable.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 controls the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19 by the control signal (serial data, clock signal), so that the electrical wiring 20ab electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear of the first starting hole sensor 20a is bent and engaged with the right-side wiring processing piece 19da, and therefore the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group that are close to the right-side connector 19cb and the left-side connector 19cb among the first lamp group to the third lamp group are set to a light emission mode (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting) in which they emit red light, and the third lamp group is set to a light emission mode (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting) in which they emit red light. The first lamp group may be configured to emit light in a color (e.g., blue, green, white, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.) different from the light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) in which the lamp group emits red light, or the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group may be configured to emit light in a color (e.g., blue, green, red, purple, white, rainbow, etc.) different from the light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) in which the lamp group emits yellow light. Note that the pink color of the first electrical wiring of the electrical wiring 20ab is the same color family (red-based color) as the red light emitted by the lamp 19ca of the decorative board 19c. As a result, since the electrical wiring 20ab is composed of a first electrical wiring having a pink color and a second electrical wiring having a yellow color, the visibility of the electrical wiring 20ab that is electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear side of the first starting port sensor 20a is reduced, thereby making the electrical wiring 20ab less noticeable. Of course, as the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19, the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group among the first lamp group to the third lamp group are not always in a light emission mode that emits red or yellow (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), but are appropriately in a light emission mode that includes a light emission mode that emits red or yellow (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) (for example, in addition to a light emission mode that alternates between a light emission mode that emits red or yellow and a light emission mode that emits a color other than red or yellow, for example, a light emission mode that changes to incorporate (sandwich) a light emission mode that emits red or yellow in a color other than red or yellow when the light emission mode that emits a color other than red or yellow changes only multiple times can be mentioned.) Even if it is made to be a light emission mode that includes a light emission mode that emits red or yellow in a color other than red or yellow, the visibility of the electrical wiring 20ab electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting hole sensor 20a is suppressed, so that the electrical wiring 20ab is not noticeable. The color of the light emitted by the lamp 19ca of the decorative board 19c may be pink, which is the color of the first electrical wiring of the electrical wiring 20ab, instead of red.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses a control signal (serial data, clock signal) to set the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19 to a light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) in which all lamp groups from the first lamp group to the third lamp group emit white light as a single color (monochromatic emission), thereby reducing the visibility of the right-side electrical wiring 19cd and the left-side electrical wiring 19cd and making them less noticeable.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses a control signal (serial data, clock signal) to set the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19 to a light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) in which the light emission modes of all lamp groups from the first lamp group to the third lamp group are a single color (monochromatic light emission) that emits red light, thereby suppressing the visibility of the electrical wiring 20ab electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear side of the first starting port sensor 20a, thereby making the electrical wiring 20ab less noticeable. The pink color of the first electrical wiring of the electrical wiring 20ab is the same color (red-based color) as the red light emitted by the lamp 19ca of the decorative board 19c. Of course, the pink color of the first electrical wiring of the electrical wiring 20ab may be used instead of red as the single color (monochromatic light emission) emitted by the lamp 19ca of the decorative board 19c.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses a control signal (serial data, clock signal) to set the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19 to a single color (monochromatic emission) for all lamp groups from the first lamp group to the third lamp group (including on, blinking, and gradational lighting), thereby reducing the visibility of the electrical wiring 20ab electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear of the first starting port sensor 20a, making the electrical wiring 20ab less noticeable.

The white color emitted by the lamp 19ca arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 19c is the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wiring in the right-side electrical wiring 19cd, and is also the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wiring in the left-side electrical wiring 19cd. In addition, the white color emitted by the lamp 19ca arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 19c is a white-based color that is a gray color close to the white color of the first electrical wiring in the right-side electrical wiring 19cd, and is also a white-based color that is a gray color close to the white color of the first electrical wiring in the left-side electrical wiring 19cd.

The red color emitted by the lamp 19ca arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c is a red-like color, i.e., pink, that the first electrical wiring of the electrical wiring 20ab has, and the yellow color emitted by the lamp 19ca arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 19c has is the same color as the yellow that the second electrical wiring of the electrical wiring 20ab has.

The light emission modes of all the lamps 19ca arranged on the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 19c, that is, the light emission modes of the first lamp group to the third lamp group, can be controlled to a single color (monochromatic emission) such as white, red, and yellow, so that the fixed winning device 19 can be made to have a white light emission mode, a red light emission mode, and a yellow light emission mode. This allows the player to be suggested the expected degree of winning for the variation by the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19, and the expected degree of winning can be suggested to the player as a pre-reading performance by the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19. In the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B in the performance button operation performances A to C in Figures 93 to 95 described above, the expected degree of winning can be suggested by color, and the expected degree of winning increases in the order of white → red → yellow (gold). For this reason, players are highly interested in the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B.

Therefore, when the expected degree of winning for the variation is suggested to the player by the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19, or when the expected degree of winning is suggested to the player by the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19 as a pre-reading performance, the expected degree of winning is suggested to increase in the order of white light emission mode → red light emission mode → yellow light emission mode as the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19, similar to the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B. The light emission modes include lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting, and the expected degree of winning may be high even if the same color is used in the order of lighting → flashing → gradation lighting. Specifically, when the expected degree of winning is suggested to the player by the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19, the expected degree of winning is suggested to increase in the order of white light emission mode → white flashing mode → white gradation lighting mode → red light emission mode → red flashing mode → red gradation lighting mode → yellow light emission mode → yellow flashing mode → yellow gradation lighting mode.

In this way, the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19 can suggest to the player the degree of expectation of a win for the fluctuation or the degree of expectation of a win as a pre-reading performance, so that the player can become more interested in the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19. Even if the player focuses on the fixed winning device 19 due to the increased interest in the fixed winning device 19, various electrical wirings such as the right electrical wiring 19cd (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wirings having a white color), the electrical wiring 20ab (the first electrical wiring having a pink color, the second electrical wiring having a yellow color), and the left electrical wiring 19cd (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wirings having a white color) can be seen through the bulge 19b and base body 19a formed of the transparent synthetic resin material that constitutes the fixed winning device 19, but as described above, the visibility of the various electrical wirings can be suppressed by the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19 itself, so that the various electrical wirings can be made inconspicuous.

In this embodiment, as described above, green solder resist is applied to the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative substrate 19c. However, instead of green solder resist, solder resist having the same color as the white of the second to fourth electrical wirings in the right-side electrical wiring 19cd and the left-side electrical wiring 19cd may be applied to the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative substrate 19c. In this way, the light emission modes of the fixed winning device 19 include light emission modes that emit white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), thereby reducing the visibility of the decorative substrate 19c and making the decorative substrate 19c less noticeable.

[Example of effect]
Below, examples of the effects of reducing the visibility of wiring in an amusement device are shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative part 10a (device capable of emitting light) arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 in FIG. 111, the first movable part 14 (device capable of emitting light) in FIG. 112, the fixed winning device 19 (device capable of emitting light) in FIG. 113, the upper electrical wiring 10aad electrically connected to the decorative part 10a (device) in FIG. 111, the lower electrical wiring 10aad, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) electrically connected to the first movable part 14 (device) in FIG. 112, the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring), the right electrical wiring 19cd electrically connected to the fixed winning device 19 (device) in FIG. 113, the left electrical wiring 19cd, the electrical wiring The game board 2 is equipped with wiring 20ab and a performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) of a sub-control board 90 capable of executing multiple types of performances, and the performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) is capable of executing performances that cause the decorative part 10a (device) located in the lower right corner of the center decorative part 10, which can emit light in the same color as the electrical wiring or a color including the same family of colors, the first movable role piece 14 (device) that can emit light, and the fixed winning device 19 (device) that can emit light to emit multiple colors (a wiring visibility suppression performance of the decorative part 10a located in the lower right corner of the center decorative part 10, a wiring visibility suppression performance of the first movable role piece 14, and a wiring visibility suppression performance of the fixed winning device 19).

Specifically, in the decorative part 10a (light-emitting device) arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 in FIG. 111, the white color is the same as the white color of the second to fourth electric wirings in the upper electric wiring 10aad, and is also the same as the white color of the second to fourth electric wirings in the lower electric wiring 10aad. Also, the white color is a gray color close to the white color of the first electric wiring in the upper electric wiring 10aad, and is also a white color close to the white color of the first electric wiring in the lower electric wiring 10aad. Therefore, in the wiring visibility suppression performance of the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10, the white color emitted by the lamp 10aaa arranged on the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 10aa can be emitted in the same color as the upper electric wiring 10aad and the lower electric wiring 10aad, or in a color including the same color family.

In addition, the first movable part 14 (light-emitting device) in Fig. 112 is the same color as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (the same color as the white of the second to fourth electrical wirings of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe) and is also the same color as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (the same color as the white of the second to fifth electrical wirings of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf). In addition, the color applied along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is a white-based color that is close to white gray (a gray that is close to the white of the first electrical wiring), and the color applied along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is a white-based color that is close to white gray (a gray that is close to the white of the first electrical wiring). Therefore, in the wiring visibility suppression performance of the first movable prop 14, the white light emitted by the eight lamps 14ccba arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ccb on the left/right moving body 14cc side, and the ten lamps 14eca arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ec on the decorative light-emitting unit 14e side, can be the same color as the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf, or a color that includes the same family of colors.

In addition, in the fixed winning device 19 (light-emitting device) of FIG. 113, the white color is the same as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wiring in the right-side electrical wiring 19cd, and is also the same as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wiring in the left-side electrical wiring 19cd. Also, the white color is a gray color close to the white color of the first electrical wiring in the right-side electrical wiring 19cd, and is also a white color close to the white color of the first electrical wiring in the left-side electrical wiring 19cd. Therefore, in the wiring visibility suppression performance of the fixed winning device 19, the white color emitted by the lamp 19ca arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 19c can be emitted in the same color as the right-side electrical wiring 19cd and the left-side electrical wiring 19cd, or a color that includes the same color family.

With this configuration, the device can emit multiple colors, either the same as the color of the electrical wiring electrically connected to the device or colors that include the same color family, so the visibility of the electrical wiring can be reduced, making the electrical wiring less noticeable. This makes it less likely that players will find the electrical wiring, which has nothing to do with the presentation, to be an eyesore. This can therefore increase interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) is capable of executing a performance in which the decorative part 10a (device) located at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 in Fig. 111 and the fixed winning device 19 (device) in Fig. 113 emit monochromatic light in the same color or the same color family as the color of the electrical wiring. According to this configuration, the decorative part 10a (device) located at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 in Fig. 111 and the fixed winning device 19 (device) in Fig. 113 emit monochromatic light in the same color or the same color family as the color of the electrical wiring electrically connected to the device, so that the visibility of the electrical wiring can be further suppressed to make the electrical wiring less noticeable.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative part 10a (device) located at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 in Figure 111 and the fixed winning device 19 (device) in Figure 113 have transparent parts in which transparent areas are formed (cover body 10ac formed from colorless and transparent synthetic resin material of the decorative part 10a in Figure 111, and plate-shaped base body 19a and bulge part 19b formed from colorless and transparent synthetic resin material of the fixed winning device 19 in Figure 113), the transparent parts are arranged on the front side of the gaming board 2, and the upper electrical wiring 10aad and part of the lower electrical wiring 10aad electrically connected to the decorative part 10a (device) in Figure 111 are visible through the transparent parts, and the right electrical wiring 19cd, left electrical wiring 19cd, and part of the electrical wiring 20ab electrically connected to the fixed winning device 19 (device) in Figure 113 are visible through the transparent parts. With this configuration, some of the electrical wiring that is completely unrelated to the performance is visible to the player through the transparent part, but by having the device emit light in the same color or in the same family of colors as the electrical wiring, the visibility of the electrical wiring can be reduced, making the electrical wiring less noticeable.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable part 14 (device) in Figure 112 has a left-right moving body 14cc (movable body) and a decorative light-emitting unit 14e (movable body) that move left and right (predetermined operation) by operation of a left-right movement stepping motor 14b, which is an electrical drive source, and the left-right moving body 14cc (movable body) and the decorative light-emitting unit 14e (movable body) are arranged on the front side of the gaming board 2, and a portion of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) and flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring) electrically connected to the first movable part 14 (device) in Figure 112 are arranged on the front side of the gaming board 2 and are visible. With this configuration, parts of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) and flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring) that are completely unrelated to the presentation are positioned on the front side of the game board 2, making them visible to the player; however, by having the device emit light in the same color or in the same color family as the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) and flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring), the visibility of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) and flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring) can be reduced, making the electrical wiring less noticeable.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the wiring visibility suppression effect of the gaming device are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming device (device of the present invention) such as the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 in FIG. 111 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable role 14 in FIG. 112, and the fixed winning device 19 in FIG. 113, various lamps that are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are provided. Since the full-color LED can emit multiple colors, it can of course emit white light. However, as a lamp that emits white light, instead of the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, a single-color LED that emits white light may be used, or a plurality of single-color LEDs that emit white light may be mixed and arranged on the LED mounting surface of various decorative boards in addition to the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the various electrical wirings in the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 in FIG. 111, the first movable role 14 in FIG. 112, and the fixed winning device 19 in FIG. 113 were not tied together with a cable tie. However, the various electrical wirings may be tied together with a cable tie. In this case, when the cable tie is arranged to be visible through the transparent area of the gaming device (the device of the present invention) such as the decorative part 10a, the first movable role 14, and the fixed winning device 19 in the same manner as the various electrical wirings, the color of the cable tie is the same color as the color of the various electrical wirings (one of white, gray close to white, pink, and yellow). In this way, even if the gaming device (the device of the present invention) emits light, the visibility of the cable tie together with the various electrical wirings can be suppressed, making the cable tie less noticeable together with the various electrical wirings.

[Modification 3]
The electrical wiring 20ab was electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear side of the first starting hole sensor 20a in the fixed winning device 19 of FIG. 113 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment. The electrical wiring 20ab was composed of two electrical wirings, the first electrical wiring being an electrical wiring having a pink color, and the second electrical wiring being an electrical wiring having a yellow color. However, the first electrical wiring may be an electrical wiring having a yellow color, and the second electrical wiring may be an electrical wiring having a pink color. In addition, the pink color may be a pink fluorescent color, and the yellow color may be a yellow fluorescent color.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment of the gaming machine 1, in the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 in Fig. 111, the first movable role 14 in Fig. 112, the fixed winning device 19 in Fig. 113, and other wiring visibility suppression performances in the gaming device (the device of the present invention), multiple lamps in the gaming device (the device of the present invention) emit light in either white, red, or yellow, thereby suppressing the visibility of the wiring in the gaming device (the device of the present invention) and making the wiring in the gaming device (the device of the present invention) less noticeable. However, the light emission mode of the gaming device (the device of the present invention) may be changed to a multi-color light emission mode so as to include a light emission mode that emits light in either white, red, or yellow. For example, an example of a light emission mode is one in which multiple lamps in a gaming device (the device of the present invention) first emit light in white, then change to a light emission mode of rainbow colors, and then return to the white light emission mode again; an example of a light emission mode is one in which multiple lamps in a gaming device (the device of the present invention) first emit light in white, then change to a light emission mode of blue → green → red → purple → yellow, and then return to the white light emission mode again.

[Modification 5]
A configuration capable of suppressing the visibility of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring) in the first movable role 14 (the device of the present invention) in FIG. 112 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment may be applied to the second movable role 15. The second movable role 15 is configured so that a rectangular member (decorative part) marked "OARO" can move in the vertical direction. The second movable role 15 is configured so that it can move in the vertical direction by an arm member. Normally, it is stationary at a retreat position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and can move (advance) downward from the retreat position toward the center of the display screen 7a and stop at an advance position in front of the display screen 7a, and when it stops at the advance position, it covers a part of the image display device 7. The arm member is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. A decorative board on which a plurality of lamps, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, are arranged is provided inside the rectangular member (decorative part) marked "OARO". The LED control IC capable of lighting multiple lamps in gradations is disposed on the decorative board, and a connector is also disposed on the decorative board. The connector is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line, the power supply line, the lamp control board 107, and the electric wiring routed along the arm member, in addition to the control signal (serial data, clock signal) from the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90.

The electrical wiring is made up of four wires, with the first electrical wiring being a gray close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wirings being white. The first to fourth electrical wirings have their product numbers and names printed in a color different from the color of the electrical wiring itself (for example, black, since the first electrical wiring is a gray close to white, and for example, black, since the second to fourth electrical wirings are white). Since the first electrical wiring is a gray close to white, the gray close to white color of the first electrical wiring is in the same color family as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings.

The first electrical wiring, which is a gray color close to white, is a ground (GND) line, the second electrical wiring, which is white, is a line that transmits serial data among the control signals, the third electrical wiring, which is white, is a line that transmits a clock signal among the control signals, and the fourth electrical wiring, which is white, is a power supply line.

The performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, by using a control signal (serial data, clock signal), sets the light-emitting mode of the rectangular member (decorative part) marked "OARO" to, for example, a light-emitting mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) for the lamps arranged around the rectangular member (decorative part) and in the peripheral area connected to the arm member to emit white light, and a light-emitting mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) for the lamps arranged in the position corresponding to the area marked "OARO" to emit light in a color (for example, blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.) different from the light-emitting mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits white light. As a result, since the electrical wiring is composed of the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white and the second to fourth electrical wiring having white colors, the visibility of the electrical wiring routed along the arm member can be suppressed, making the electrical wiring routed along the arm member less noticeable. Of course, the lamps arranged around the rectangular member (decorative part) and in the peripheral area connected to the arm member do not always emit white light (including on, blinking, and gradation lighting), but may be appropriately designed to emit white light (including on, blinking, and gradation lighting) (for example, in addition to a light emission mode that alternates between a light emission mode that emits white light and a light emission mode that emits a color other than white, for example, a light emission mode that changes so that a light emission mode that emits a color other than white is incorporated (sandwiched) between the light emission modes that emit a color other than white when the light emission mode changes only multiple times), and this reduces the visibility of the electrical wiring routed along the arm member, making the electrical wiring routed along the arm member less noticeable.

The performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses a control signal (serial data, clock signal) to set the light emission mode of the rectangular member (decorative part) marked "OARO" to a single color (monochromatic emission) of all the lamps arranged on the decorative board within the rectangular member (decorative part) to a light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits white light, thereby suppressing the visibility of the electrical wiring routed along the arm member and making the electrical wiring routed along the arm member less noticeable. The white light emitted by the lamps arranged on the decorative board is the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings in the electrical wiring routed along the arm member. The white light emitted by the lamps arranged on the decorative board is also a white-based color that is a gray color close to the white color of the first electrical wiring in the electrical wiring routed along the arm member.

The arm member may be configured to have a plating layer with metallic luster on a part of the front surface or a part of the side surface, or to have a three-dimensional design and be painted with colored paint. The electric wiring may be housed and routed inside the arm member. Even with this configuration, the electric wiring (the first electric wiring having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electric wiring having white color) can be easily seen through the transparent area of the arm member when the lamp is turned off. The arm member was also made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, the arm member may be made of a colored and transparent synthetic resin material. Examples of colors include red, blue, and green. When the electric wiring is housed and routed inside the arm member, the electric wiring (the first electric wiring having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electric wiring having white color) can be easily seen when the lamp is turned off.

[Modification 6]
The decorative part 10a (the device of the present invention) arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 in FIG. 111 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment emits multi-color light. The light emission mode of the decorative part 10a may be controlled to a single color (single color light emission) such as white, red, and yellow, so that the decorative part 10a emits white, red, and yellow. In the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B in the button operation performances A to C in the above-mentioned FIGS. 93 to 95, the color can suggest the expectation of a win, and the expectation of a win increases in the order of white → red → yellow (gold). For this reason, the player is highly interested in the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B. As a result, the expectation of a win for the change can be suggested to the player by the light emission mode of the decorative part 10a. Even in this way, the light emission mode of the decorative part 10a changes from white to red or yellow depending on the expected probability of winning, but since the light emission mode is basically white, the visibility of the electrical wiring in the decorative part 10a can be reduced, making the electrical wiring less noticeable.

[Modification 7]
113 in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment above, the configuration capable of suppressing the visibility of the various wirings in the fixed winning device 19 (the device of the present invention) may be applied to the normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22, the gate (through chucker) 28, the first large winning device (first attacker) 31, and the second large winning device (second attacker) 36. In this way, the visibility of the various electrical wirings in the normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22, the gate (through chucker) 28, the first large winning device (first attacker) 31, and the second large winning device (second attacker) 36 can be suppressed, making the various electrical wirings less noticeable.

[Modification 8]
The wiring visibility suppression performance of the decorative part 10a located in the lower right corner of the center decorative part 10 in Figure 111, the wiring visibility suppression performance of the first movable part 14 in Figure 112, and the wiring visibility suppression performance of the fixed winning device 19 in Figure 113 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect G1-1]
A gaming machine having a gaming board on which a light-emitting device, an electric wiring electrically connected to the device, and a performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of performances are arranged,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to perform a performance in which the device emits multi-color light in a color that is the same as the color of the electrical wiring or a color that includes the same color family.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect G1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-1,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to perform a performance in which the device emits a single color light in the same color or in the same color family as the color of the electrical wiring.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect G1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect G1-1 or G1-2,
The device has a transparent portion in which a transparent area is formed, the transparent portion being disposed on the front side of the game board;
A part of the electrical wiring is visible through the transparent portion.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect G1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect G1-1 or G1-2,
The device has a movable body that performs a predetermined operation by the operation of an electric drive source, the movable body is disposed on the front side of the game board,
A part of the electrical wiring is arranged on the front side of the game board so as to be visible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following explains the scoring suggestion effects 1 to 7 using Figures 114 to 116. These scoring suggestion effects 1 to 7 are executed in the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a variation effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Point-suggesting performance 1]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the ball-entering suggestion performance 1. In the ball-entering suggestion performance 1, when the game ball enters the starting hole (either the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, or both, as in FIG. 114 to FIG. 116) during the change of the decorative pattern on the display screen 7a, an image representing the ball entering and a reserved icon are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the reserved icon moves as the reserved icon is consumed, but the image representing the ball entering does not move. Also, when the reserved icon reserved when the image representing the ball entering is displayed becomes the reserved icon 9A1 (the reserved icon that is consumed first), the image representing the ball entering disappears. The timing at which the image representing the ball entering disappears is when the reserved icon reserved when the image representing the ball entering is displayed becomes the reserved icon 9A1, and the change ends.

In Fig. 114 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating. There are three reserved items, and three reserved icons 9A and the corresponding changing icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. It is possible for four reserved icons 9A to be displayed, and the four reserved icons 9A are also called reserved icon 9A1, reserved icon 9A2, reserved icon 9A3, and reserved icon 9A4 in the order in which they are consumed. The corresponding changing icon 9C does not have to be displayed. The reserved icon 9B may also be displayed (similar to Figs. 114 to 116).

Next, FIG. 114(B) shows the state where the game ball has entered the starting hole. As the game ball has entered the starting hole, a reserved icon 9A4 (the fourth reserved icon, shown in black) is displayed. This is the reserved state 4. As the game ball has entered the starting hole, an image NSE indicating that the ball has entered is displayed. The image NSE indicating that the ball has entered is displayed in a position close to the starting hole on the display screen 7a. Note that it does not have to be in a position close to the starting hole. The image NSE indicating that the ball has entered overlaps with the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A1, and the reserved icon 9A2. The image NSE indicating that the ball has entered does not overlap with the reserved icon 9A3 and the reserved icon 9A4. The reserved icon (shown in black) that was reserved when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered was displayed is the reserved icon 9A4.

Next, in FIG. 114(C), the state is at the start of the change. To start the change, the hold is consumed. The state becomes hold 3. When the previous change ends, the corresponding change icon 9C disappears. When the change starts, the hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the corresponding change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A1, the hold icon 9A3 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A2, and the hold icon 9A4 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A3. In the new state after the movement, the corresponding change icon 9C and the hold icons 9A1, 9A2, and 9A3 are displayed. The image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored overlaps with the new corresponding change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A1, and the hold icon 9A2. The image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored does not overlap with the new hold icon 9A3. The hold icon (displayed in black) that was reserved when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed becomes the hold icon 9A3.

Next, in FIG. 114 (D), the state is at the start of the change. To start the change, the hold is consumed. The state becomes hold 2. When the previous change ends, the corresponding change icon 9C disappears. When the change starts, hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the corresponding change icon 9C, hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of hold icon 9A1, and hold icon 9A3 moves to the position of hold icon 9A2. In the new state after the movement, the corresponding change icon 9C and hold icons 9A1 and 9A2 are displayed. The image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored overlaps with the new corresponding change icon 9C, hold icon 9A1, and hold icon 9A2. The hold icon (displayed in black) that was on hold when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed becomes hold icon 9A2.

Next, in FIG. 114 (E), the state is at the start of the change. To start the change, the hold is consumed. The state becomes hold 1. When the previous change ends, the corresponding hold icon 9C disappears. When the change starts, hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the corresponding hold icon 9C, and hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of hold icon 9A1. In the new state after the movement, the corresponding hold icon 9C and hold icon 9A1 are displayed. The image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored overlaps with the new corresponding hold icon 9C and hold icon 9A1. The hold icon (displayed in black) that was on hold when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed becomes hold icon 9A1.

Next, FIG. 114 (F) shows the state just before the end of the fluctuation (before the image control microcomputer 101 receives the confirmation stop command) when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed and the reserved icon (displayed in black) is the reserved icon 9A1. The floating icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A1 are displayed. At this time, the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed.

Next, FIG. 114 (G) shows the end of the change when the reserved icon (displayed in black) that is on hold when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed is the reserved icon 9A1. When the change ends (when the image control microcontroller 101 receives the confirmation stop command), the corresponding variable icon 9C disappears. At this time, the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored disappears. Note that the timing at which the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored disappears may be a certain amount of time after the image control microcontroller 101 receives the confirmation stop command.

Next, FIG. 114 (H) shows the state where the reserved special drawing lottery starts to change when the image NSE indicating that the ball has gone in is displayed. Here, the image NSE indicating that the ball has gone in is not displayed. To start the change, the reservation is consumed. The state becomes one where there are no reservations. When the change starts, the reservation icon 9A1 moves to the position of the corresponding reservation icon 9C. In the new state after the move, the corresponding reservation icon 9C is displayed. The reservation icon (displayed in black) that was reserved when the image NSE indicating that the ball has gone in is displayed becomes the corresponding reservation icon 9C.

Next, in FIG. 114(I), the reserved special drawing lottery is changed when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed. The reserved icon (displayed in black) that was reserved when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is the corresponding changed icon 9C. The image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is not displayed.

[Goal-scoring effect 2]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the ball-scoring suggestion effects 2, 3, and 4. FIG. 115 (A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining the ball-scoring suggestion effect 2. The ball-scoring suggestion effect 2 is an effect in which, when the game ball enters the starting hole during the change of the decorative pattern on the display screen 7a, an image representing the ball entering and a reserved icon are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the reserved icon moves as the reserved icon is consumed, but the image representing the ball entering does not move. Also, when the reserved icon that was reserved when the image representing the ball entering is displayed becomes the variable icon 9C, the image representing the ball entering disappears.

Figure 115 (A) shows the end of the fluctuation when the reserved icon (displayed in black) that was reserved when the image NSE indicating that a ball has been scored is displayed is the reserved icon 9A1. In the scoring suggestion effect 2, the effect in which the image NSE indicating that a ball has been scored and the subsequent effect of the reserved icon being consumed are similar to those in the scoring suggestion effect 1 (Figures 114 (A) to (F)), so they will not be discussed here. In Figure 115 (A), the fluctuating icon 9C disappears when the fluctuation ends (when the image control microcontroller 101 receives the confirmation stop command). At this time, the image NSE indicating that a ball has been scored does not disappear.

Next, FIG. 115(B) shows the state at which the reserved special drawing lottery begins to change when the image NSE indicating that the ball has gone in is displayed. Here too, the image NSE indicating that the ball has gone in is displayed. The reservation is consumed in order to start the change. The state becomes one where there are no reservations. When the change begins, the reservation icon 9A1 moves to the position of the corresponding reservation icon 9C. In the new state after the move, the corresponding reservation icon 9C is displayed. The reservation icon (displayed in black) that was reserved when the image NSE indicating that the ball has gone in is displayed becomes the corresponding reservation icon 9C.

Next, in FIG. 115(C), when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed, the pending special drawing lottery change begins, and the pending icon (displayed in black) that was pending when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is about to become the changing icon 9C. Here again, the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 115 (D), when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed, the pending special drawing lottery begins to change, and the pending icon (displayed in black) that was pending when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed becomes the corresponding variable icon 9C. At this point, the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored disappears. Note that the timing at which the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored disappears may be when the pending icon that was pending when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed and is in the process of moving to become the corresponding variable icon 9C.

[Goal-scoring effect 3]
115(E) is a diagram for explaining the scoring suggestion effect 3. The scoring suggestion effect 3 is an effect in which the image representing the scoring does not disappear even if the reserved icon that was reserved when the image representing the scoring is displayed becomes the variable icon.

In FIG. 115(E), the change of the reserved special drawing starts when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed, and the reserved icon (displayed in black) that was reserved when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored becomes the change icon 9C. In the scoring suggestion performance 3, the performance in which the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed, and the subsequent performance of the reserved icon being consumed are the same as those in the scoring suggestion performance 1 (FIG. 114(A)-(F)) and the scoring suggestion performance 2 (FIG. 115(A)-(C)), so they will not be described here. In FIG. 115(E), the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored does not disappear and is displayed. It remains displayed until the change ends. The image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored may be displayed until a certain time has passed since the start of the change, until the decorative pattern is in a reach, or until it develops into a super reach.

[Goal-scoring effect 4]
115(F) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the ball-entering suggestion effect 4. The ball-entering suggestion effect 4 is an effect in which, when the game ball enters the starting hole during the change of the decorative pattern on the display screen 7a, an image showing the ball entering and a reserved icon are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the image showing the ball entering suggests the expected probability of winning the special drawing lottery, and the reserved icon also suggests the expected probability of winning the special drawing lottery.

In Figure 115 (F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. There are three reserved items, and three reserved icons 9A and the corresponding changing icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, FIG. 115(G) shows the state where the game ball has entered the starting hole. As a result of the game ball entering the starting hole, reserved icon 9A4 (the fourth reserved) is displayed. This is the reserved state 4. The reserved icon 9A4 displayed here is blue (hatching 1). The color of this reserved icon indicates the likelihood of a big win. Details will be described later. Also, as the game ball has entered the starting hole, an image NSE indicating that the ball has entered is displayed. The image NSE indicating that the ball has entered is displayed in the same manner as the above-mentioned "ball entry suggestion effect 1", "ball entry suggestion effect 2", and "ball entry suggestion effect 3". An explanation will be omitted here. The reserved icon that was reserved when the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered was displayed is reserved icon 9A4.

Red is the strongest reserved icon, green is the second strongest, blue is the third strongest, and white is the fourth strongest (weakest). As shown in Figure 115 (L), white is represented by no hatching, blue by hatching 1, green by hatching 2, and red by hatching 3. The expected probability of a jackpot (also called the reliability) is 10 for white, 20 for blue, 30 for green, and 50 for red. This is the same for Figures 114 to 116.

Next, in FIG. 115 (H), the state is at the start of the change. To start the change, the reserved is consumed. It becomes the state of reserved 3. When the change of the previous change ends, the corresponding change icon 9C disappears. When the change starts, the reserved icon 9A1 moves to the position of the corresponding change icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A2 moves to the position of the reserved icon 9A1, the reserved icon 9A3 moves to the position of the reserved icon 9A2, and the reserved icon 9A4 moves to the position of the reserved icon 9A3. In the new state after the movement, the corresponding change icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A1, 9A2, and 9A3 are displayed. When the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed, the reserved icon that has been scored is blue (hatched 1) and becomes the reserved icon 9A3. The expectation of a jackpot is 20. Also, the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored changes to blue (hatched) at the start of the change. The color of the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored indicates the expectation of a jackpot. Before the change, it is white (hope of winning the jackpot is 10), and by changing to blue (hope of winning the jackpot is 20), the chance of winning the jackpot increases. More details will be given later.

The colors of the image NSE that indicate a ball has gone in are red, which is the strongest, green, which is the second strongest, blue, which is the third strongest, and white, which is the fourth strongest (weakest). White is not hatched, while blue, green, and red are hatched. The expected probability of a jackpot (also called the reliability) is 10 for white, 20 for blue, 30 for green, and 50 for red. This is the same for Figures 114 to 116.

Next, in FIG. 115(I), the state is at the start of the change. To start the change, the reserved is consumed. It becomes the reserved 2 state. When the change of the previous change ends, the corresponding change icon 9C disappears. When the change starts, the reserved icon 9A1 moves to the position of the corresponding change icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A2 moves to the position of the reserved icon 9A1, and the reserved icon 9A3 moves to the position of the reserved icon 9A2. In the new state after the movement, the corresponding change icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A1 and 9A2 are displayed. The reserved icon reserved when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed is green (hatched 2) and becomes the reserved icon 9A2. At the start of this change, the reserved icon reserved when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed has changed from blue to green. The expectation of a big win has increased from 20 to 30. Also, the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored has changed to green (hatched) at the start of the change. Before the change, it was blue (the chance of a jackpot is 20), and by changing to green (the chance of a jackpot is 30), the chance of a jackpot has increased.

Next, in FIG. 115(J), the state is at the start of the change. To start the change, the reserved is consumed. It becomes the reserved 1 state. When the change of the previous change ends, the corresponding change icon 9C disappears. When the change starts, the reserved icon 9A1 moves to the position of the corresponding change icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A2 moves to the position of the reserved icon 9A1. In the new state after the movement, the corresponding change icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A1 are displayed. The reserved icon reserved when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed is red (hatched 3) and becomes the reserved icon 9A1. At the start of this change, the reserved icon reserved when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed has changed from green to red. The expectation of the jackpot has increased from 30 to 50. Also, the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored has changed to red (hatched) at the start of the change. Before the change, it was green (expectation of the jackpot is 30), and by changing to red (expectation of the jackpot is 50), the expectation of the jackpot has increased.

Next, in FIG. 115 (K), the reserved special drawing lottery is changed when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed. The reserved red icon (hatched 3) that was reserved when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is now the corresponding changed icon 9C. Also, the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored has disappeared.

[Scoring hint 5]
Fig. 116 is a diagram for explaining the ball-entering suggestion effects 5, 6, and 7. Fig. 116 (A) to (E) are diagrams for explaining the ball-entering suggestion effect 5. The ball-entering suggestion effect 5 is an effect in which, when the game ball enters the starting hole during the fluctuation of the decorative pattern on the display screen 7a, an image showing that the ball has entered and a reserved icon are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the image showing that the ball has entered suggests the expectation of a win in the special drawing.

In Figure 116 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. There are three reserved items, and three reserved icons 9A and the corresponding changing icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, FIG. 116(B) shows the state where the game ball has entered the starting hole. As a result of the game ball entering the starting hole, a hold icon 9A4 (the fourth hold, shown in black) is displayed. This is hold 4. As the game ball has entered the starting hole, an image NSE indicating that the ball has entered is displayed. The image NSE indicating that the ball has entered is displayed in a position close to the starting hole on the display screen 7a. The image NSE indicating that the ball has entered at this time is a relatively small image, that is, an image of size "small". The expectation level is 10. The size of the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered indicates the expectation level of a jackpot. Details will be given later.

The image NSE representing a ball entering the jackpot is strongest for the "extra large" size, second strongest for the "large" size, third strongest for the "medium" size, and fourth strongest (weakest) for the "small" size. The expected probability of a jackpot (also called the reliability) is 10 for the "small" size, 20 for the "medium" size, 30 for the "large" size, and 50 for the "extra large" size. This is the same for Figures 114 to 116.

Next, in FIG. 116(C), the state is the start of the change. To start the change, the reserved is consumed. At this time, the image NSE representing the ball being scored is a relatively medium-sized image, that is, an image of size "medium". The size of the image NSE representing the ball being scored changes, from "small" to "medium". The expectation level becomes 20. Also, the state becomes reserved 3. When the change of the previous change ends, the corresponding change icon 9C disappears. When the change starts, the reserved icon 9A1 moves to the position of the corresponding change icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A2 moves to the position of the reserved icon 9A1, the reserved icon 9A3 moves to the position of the reserved icon 9A2, and the reserved icon 9A4 moves to the position of the reserved icon 9A3. In the new state after the movement, the corresponding change icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A1, 9A2, and 9A3 are displayed. The reserved icon (displayed in black) that was reserved when the image NSE representing the ball being scored was displayed becomes the reserved icon 9A3. Note that the size of the image NSE representing the ball being scored changes when the change starts.

Next, in FIG. 116(D), the state is the start of the change. To start the change, the reserved is consumed. At this time, the image NSE representing the ball being scored is a relatively large image, that is, an image of size "large". The size of the image NSE representing the ball being scored changes, from size "medium" to size "large". The expectation level becomes 30. Also, the state becomes reserved 2. When the change of the previous change ends, the corresponding change icon 9C disappears. When the change starts, the reserved icon 9A1 moves to the position of the corresponding change icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A2 moves to the position of the reserved icon 9A1, and the reserved icon 9A3 moves to the position of the reserved icon 9A2. In the new state after the movement, the corresponding change icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A1 and 9A2 are displayed. The reserved icon (displayed in black) that was reserved when the image NSE representing the ball being scored is displayed becomes the reserved icon 9A2. Note that the size of the image NSE representing the ball being scored changes when the change starts.

Next, in FIG. 116(E), the state is the start of the change. To start the change, the reserved is consumed. At this time, the image NSE representing the ball being scored is a relatively extra-large image, that is, an image of size "extra-large". The size of the image NSE representing the ball being scored changes, from size "large" to size "extra-large". The expectation level becomes 50. In addition, the state becomes reserved 1. When the change of the previous change ends, the corresponding change icon 9C disappears. When the change starts, the reserved icon 9A1 moves to the position of the corresponding change icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A2 moves to the position of the reserved icon 9A1. In the new state after the movement, the corresponding change icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A1 are displayed. The reserved icon (displayed in black) that was reserved when the image NSE representing the ball being scored is displayed becomes the reserved icon 9A1. Note that the size of the image NSE representing the ball being scored changes when the change starts.

[Goal-scoring effect 6]
116(F)-(H) are diagrams for explaining the ball-entering suggestion effect 6. The ball-entering suggestion effect 6 is an effect in which, when the game ball enters the starting hole during the change of the decorative pattern on the display screen 7a, an image showing the ball entering and a reserved icon are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the image showing the ball entering suggests the expected probability of winning the special drawing. However, the image showing the ball entering disappears before the reserved icon that was reserved when the image showing the ball entering was displayed becomes the reserved icon 9A1.

Figure 116 (F) shows the state during the change, with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R changing. When there are three reserved balls, this is the state in which the game ball has entered the starting hole. As the game ball has entered the starting hole, reserved icon 9A4 (the fourth reserved ball, shown in black) is displayed. This is the state of reserved 4. Also, as the game ball has entered the starting hole, an image NSE is displayed, indicating that the ball has entered.

Next, in Figure 116 (G), the state is changing. One hold has been cleared, and the state is hold 3. The hold icon (displayed in black) that was on hold when the image NSE indicating that a ball has been scored is hold icon 9A3. The image NSE indicating that a ball has been scored is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 116 (H), the state is changing. One more reserved icon has been consumed, and the state is now reserved 2. When the image NSE indicating that a ball has been scored is displayed, the reserved icon (displayed in black) that was reserved is reserved icon 9A2. The image NSE indicating that a ball has been scored has disappeared. In other words, before the reserved icon that was reserved when the image NSE indicating that a ball has been scored is displayed becomes reserved icon 9A1, the image NSE indicating that a ball has been scored has disappeared. The timing at which the image NSE indicating that a ball has been scored disappears may be at the start of the change, during the change, or at the end of the change. For example, it may be during the high-speed change of the decorative pattern or at the end of the change.

[Point-suggesting performance 7]
116(I) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the ball-entering suggestion effect 7. The ball-entering suggestion effect 7 is an effect in which, when the game ball enters the starting hole during the change of the decorative pattern on the display screen 7a, an image showing the ball entering and a reserved icon are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the image showing the ball entering suggests the expectation of a winning probability of the special drawing of the change.

In Figure 116 (I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. There are three reserved items, and three reserved icons 9A and the corresponding changing icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, FIG. 116 (J) shows the state where the game ball has entered the starting hole. As a result of the game ball entering the starting hole, hold icon 9A4 (the fourth hold, displayed in black) is displayed. This is hold 4. As the game ball has entered the starting hole, an image NSE indicating that the ball has entered is displayed. The image NSE indicating that the ball has entered at this time is a relatively large image, in other words, an image of size "extra large". The expectation level is 50. Note that the size of the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered indicates the expectation level of a jackpot for the corresponding variation at the time that the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered is displayed.

Next, FIG. 116 (K) shows a state where the variation in which the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered has been displayed has been missed as a result of the game ball entering the game. The left decorative pattern 8L is fixed at "6", the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed at "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed at "6". This indicates that the variation has been missed. The reserved icon (displayed in black) that was reserved when the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered is displayed is the reserved icon 9A4. When the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop, the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered disappears. Note that the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered may disappear after a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variation, at a specific timing when a reach is reached or a fixed stop is reached, or after a certain period of time has passed since it was displayed.

Next, in FIG. 116 (L), the state is at the start of the change. To start the change, the reserved is consumed. The state becomes reserved 3. The image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is not displayed. When the change of the previous change ends, the corresponding change icon 9C disappears. When the change starts, the reserved icon 9A1 moves to the position of the corresponding change icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A2 moves to the position of the reserved icon 9A1, the reserved icon 9A3 moves to the position of the reserved icon 9A2, and the reserved icon 9A4 moves to the position of the reserved icon 9A3. In the new state after the movement, the corresponding change icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A1, 9A2, and 9A3 are displayed. The reserved icon (displayed in black) that was reserved when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed becomes the reserved icon 9A3. From then on, the reserved icon (displayed in black) that was reserved when the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored is displayed also moves as the reserved icon shifts each time the change starts.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of goal suggestion effects 1 to 7.

[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "ball-scoring suggestion performance 1", a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, one of the plurality of types of images being an image NSE representing a ball-scoring, and one of the plurality of types of images being a reserved icon 9A. When the game ball enters the starting hole, the image NSE representing the ball-scoring and the reserved icon 9A are displayed in a first performance (FIG. 114(B)), after the first performance (FIG. 114(B)), the reserved icon 9A moves every time a change starts, and the image NSE representing the ball-scoring does not move regardless of the start of the change in a second performance (FIG. 114(C)-(F)), and after the second performance (FIG. 114(C)-(F)), when the reserved icon 9A moves to the position of the reserved icon 9A1, the image NSE representing the ball-scoring disappears in a third performance (FIG. 114(G)). With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player while raising the player's sense of expectation, thereby improving the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "goal scoring suggestion effect 1," in the second effect (FIGS. 114(C)-(F)), the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored and the reserved icon 9A do not overlap (FIGS. 114(B) and (C)), and the reserved icon 9A moves to a state in which the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored and the reserved icon 9A overlap (FIGS. 114(D) and (E)). This configuration makes it possible to visually entertain the player while raising the player's expectations, thereby increasing the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Going in suggestion performance 4" and "Going in suggestion performance 5", in the second performance, the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored and the reserved icon 9A may indicate the expected probability of winning in the special drawing by their size and color (FIGS. 116(B)-(E), 115(G)-(K)). With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained while the player's expectations are aroused, and the interest can be increased.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in the "ball-entering suggestion effect 7", a display means is provided that can display a plurality of types of images, one of which is an image NSE indicating that a ball has entered the game, and one of which is a reserved icon 9A. When the game ball enters the starting hole, a first effect (Fig. 116 (J)) is executed in which the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered and the reserved icon 9A are displayed, a second effect (Fig. 116 (K)) is executed in which the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered disappears without moving after the first effect (Fig. 116 (J)), and a third effect (Fig. 116 (L)) is executed in which the reserved icon 9A moves each time a change starts after the second effect (Fig. 116 (K)). The size of the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered suggests the expected probability of a win in the special drawing for the change at the time of its new display (Fig. 116 (J)). This configuration makes it possible to visually entertain the player while also stimulating the player's sense of anticipation, thereby increasing the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below are variations of the goal suggestion effects 1 to 7.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the display form of the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered and the reserved icon 9A changes when the variation starts, but this does not have to be when the variation starts. For example, it may be when a reach is reached, after a certain time has passed since the variation starts, or when the variation ends.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the image NSE indicating that the ball has gone in, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A each indicate the expected probability of a win in the special drawing, but they may also each indicate the expected probability of a win in the regular drawing.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the image NSE representing the ball being scored and the variable icon 9C, the reserved icons 9A1, and 9A2 are overlapped, but the number of overlapping reserved icons 9A does not have to be two. For example, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A1 may overlap, or the variable icon 9C, the reserved icons 9A1, 9A2, and 9A3 may overlap. In addition, the image NSE representing the ball being scored and the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A may not overlap. Furthermore, the image NSE representing the ball being scored and the variable icon 9C and all the reserved icons 9A may overlap. In addition, one reserved icon 9A may change from an overlapping state during the change to a non-overlapping state.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, in "Goal Score Suggestion Performance 1" and "Goal Score Suggestion Performance 2", when the reserved icon becomes reserved icon 9A1 when the image indicating a ball has been scored is displayed, or when it becomes the floating icon 9C, the image indicating a ball has been scored disappears. However, it is also possible to make the image indicating a ball score disappear when the reserved icon becomes reserved icon 9A1 when the image indicating a ball has been scored and reaches a certain position between the position where the reserved icon 9A1 is displayed and the position where the floating icon 9C is displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, in the "goal scoring suggestion performance 4", the color of the image NSE indicating the scoring is changed when the variation starts, but it may be changed when the variation ends. It may also be changed after a certain time has passed since the variation started. For example, it may be changed when the left pattern stops.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, in "goal scoring suggestion performance 5", the size of the image NSE indicating that the ball has been scored changes when the fluctuation starts, but it may change by animation from the start of the fluctuation. It may also change after a certain time has passed from the start of the fluctuation. For example, it may change one second after the start of the fluctuation.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect G3-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image;
a first effect in which the first image and the second image are displayed when the game ball enters a starting hole;
A second performance in which the second image moves every time the change starts after the first performance, and the first image does not move regardless of the start of the change;
and a third effect in which, after the second effect, when the second image reaches a specific position by movement, the first image disappears.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect G3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G3-1,
In the second performance, the first image and the second image are moved from a state in which they are not overlapped to a state in which the first image and the second image are overlapped.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect G3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect G3-1 or G3-2,
In the second performance, the first image and the second image may each suggest the expected probability of winning in the special drawing lottery or the normal drawing lottery depending on the display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect G3-4]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image;
a first effect in which the first image and the second image are displayed when the game ball enters a starting hole;
A second effect in which the first image disappears without moving after the first effect;
After the second effect, a third effect in which the second image moves every time the variation starts is executed.
The first image indicates the expected probability of winning the special drawing or the regular drawing in the variation at the time of the new display depending on the display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a mahjong ball gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium can be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation units operated by the player are provided with the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68, but are not limited to these, and the operation units operated by the player may also be levers, triggers, etc. Also, in the display performance of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display performance may be executed using a button image representing the effect button 63, but instead, the display performance may be executed using an image representing the sword member 65, or the display performance may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to execute various effects using the display devices (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-mentioned multiple effect examples and/or modified examples may be combined.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), and the display effects performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub-display screen 64, and the display effects performed on the sub-display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiment and modified examples, the above-mentioned embodiment of the aspect is intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect and does not limit the present aspect. The present aspect may be modified or improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are included in the present aspect.

1: gaming machine 3: playing area 5: board lamp 7: image display device 9A, 9B: reserved image (reserved icon)
9C…Relevant hold image (hold icon)
14 ... First movable part 15 ... Second movable part 17 ... Big prize opening start hole 20 ... First start hole (first ball entry hole)
21…Second starting hole (second ball entry hole)
64: Sub-display screen 69: Movable frame accessory 66: Frame lamp 81: Game control microcomputer 91: Performance control microcomputer 101: Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having a display control means capable of displaying a reserved icon image indicating a reserved number on a display screen,
The display control means
A specific display is made within a specific area having a contour similar to that of the hold icon image,
The specific area can cover a fluctuation icon showing a current fluctuation , and the display color of the specific display can suggest the expectation of a win, and further, the specific area can be moved without changing the size of the specific area in accordance with the specific display.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images